RSS

Blog

LCN 1260 Parts Guide: Regular Arm, Hold Open Arm, Drop Plate, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 40 replacement components for the LCN 1260 and 1261 Series closer. The 1260 ships with the 1260-3077 regular arm and 1260-146 shaft cover as standard. Available parts include the 1261-3071 cylinder assembly, six regular arm variants, six hold-open arm variants, a CUSH arm family, EDA and HEDA arms, head and tube assemblies, rod and shoe components, standard cover, three mounting plate variants, and a full range of installation accessories. All 40 parts are stocked individually and available at Security Parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support.

 

What Is the LCN 1260 Series Door Closer?

LCN 1261 Series closer body for light-to-medium duty commercial door applications

The LCN 1260 Series is a light-to-medium duty, cast iron, surface-mounted door closer designed to fit the most common commercial door footprint at 3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch hole spacing. It is universal and non-handed, meaning the same closer body installs on either a right-hand or left-hand door without specifying handing at order time. It mounts in three positions: hinge pull side, top jamb push side, and parallel arm push side.

The 1260 uses a non-sized cylinder adjustable from spring sizes 1 to 5. It handles interior doors to 4 feet 6 inches wide and exterior doors to 3 feet 6 inches wide. The closer body is cast iron with a full-complement bearing, a 1-3/8-inch diameter piston, and a 5/8-inch diameter heat-treated pinion journal. The all-weather hydraulic fluid performs across a wide temperature range without seasonal adjustment. The 1260 Series carries a 20-year limited warranty and is UL and cUL listed for self-closing doors without hold-open. It meets ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 and ADA reduced opening force requirements.

The closer ships with peel-n-stick installation templates for accurate hole placement. An optional Quick Fix bracket kit (1260-18QF) is available for retrofit situations where existing mounting holes are damaged or when installing the 1260 on an opening that previously used the obsolete 1370 mounting pattern.

For a comparison of the 1260 against the 1460 and other LCN surface closer families, see the LCN 4110 Parts Guide and the LCN 4210 Parts Guide for related LCN surface closer series.

 

Why Does the LCN 1260 Series Page Show Model Number 1261?

This is the most common point of confusion when ordering LCN 1260 Series parts. The 1260 is the series number that identifies the closer body and all of its arm and accessory components. The 1261 is the cylinder model number that LCN uses to designate the cylinder assembly that ships inside the 1260 closer body.

LCN follows this convention across the entire surface-mounted line: the cylinder model number is one digit higher than the series number. The 1460 Series uses the 1461-3071 cylinder. The 4040 Series uses the 4041 cylinder. The 1260 Series uses the 1261-3071 cylinder. This is not an error on the product pages. Both numbers refer to the same closer family.

When ordering parts, use these prefixes:

  • Use 1261- as the prefix for the cylinder assembly only.
  • Use 1260- as the prefix for all arms, covers, mounting plates, accessories, and screw packs.

Numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on the cylinder body are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers or model identifiers. They cannot be used to order replacement parts. The correct model number is on the sticker located on the cylinder body under the cover.

 

What Parts Are Available for the LCN 1260 Series?

LCN 1000 Series surface mounted door closer parts and accessories

All 40 LCN 1260 and 1261 Series replacement parts stocked at Security Parts are organized below by component category. Every part has been verified live at the time of publication.

 

LCN 1261 Cylinder Assembly

The 1261-3071 standard cylinder assembly is the complete closer body for the LCN 1260 Series. It is non-handed and non-sized, adjustable for spring sizes 1 to 5. This is the replacement when the closer cylinder body is damaged or leaking beyond adjustment. The hydraulic fluid in an LCN closer cannot be refilled in the field. A leaking 1261 cylinder requires replacement of the cylinder assembly or the full closer body, not a fluid refill.

 

LCN 1260 Arm Selection: Which Arm Do I Need?

The 1260 Series offers a wider arm selection than most facilities managers realize. All regular arms and most hold-open arms are non-handed, meaning one part number fits both right-hand and left-hand doors. The HEDA (Hold Open Extra Duty Arm) is the notable exception and is handed.

Part NumberArm NameHold OpenHandedNotes
1260-3077Regular ArmNoNon-handedStandard arm shipped with the 1260 closer. Mounts hinge side or top jamb.
1260-3077LLong ArmNoNon-handedFor deeper reveals where the standard arm does not reach.
1260-3077/PARegular Arm with PA ShoeNoNon-handedIncludes the 1260-62PA parallel arm shoe. For parallel arm (push side) mounting.
1260-3077/62ARegular Arm with 62A ShoeNoNon-handedIncludes the 1260-62A auxiliary shoe. Used when the closer must be mounted lower on the door to clear overhead hardware.
1260-3077EDA/GExtra Duty Arm with 62G ShoeNoNon-handedHeavy duty arm with thick hub shoe. For high-traffic and high-abuse applications.
1260-3077CUSHCush-N-Stop ArmNoNon-handedBuilt-in door stop in the soffit shoe. No separate overhead stop needed.
1260-3049Hold Open ArmYesNon-handedStandard hold-open arm. NOT interchangeable with 1460-3049. Order by series.
1260-3049LHold Open Long ArmYesNon-handedLong arm version for deeper reveals.
1260-3049/PAHold Open Arm with PA ShoeYesNon-handedHold-open for parallel arm push side mounting.
1260-3049EDAHold Open Extra Duty Arm (HEDA)YesHandedHeavy duty hold-open arm. Must specify right-hand or left-hand at order.
1260-3049EDA/GHold Open Extra Duty Arm with 62GYesHandedHeavy duty hold-open arm with thick hub shoe for blade stop clearance. Handed.
1260-3049CUSHHold Open Cush-N-Stop Arm (HCUSH)YesNon-handedHold-open with built-in door stop. Combines hold-open and stop in one arm.

 

What Is the Difference Between the Regular, EDA, and CUSH Arms on the LCN 1260?

The 1260-3077 regular arm is the standard non-held-open arm that ships with the 1260 closer. It mounts hinge side or top jamb and provides basic door control with no hold-open function and no built-in door stop.

The EDA (Extra Duty Arm) series uses a heavier forged steel construction for high-traffic doors. The 1260-3077EDA/G adds a thick hub shoe (62G) that provides additional clearance past a blade stop in the door frame. Use the EDA family on openings with heavy use or where the standard arm has bent or cracked under repeated impact.

The CUSH arm (Cush-N-Stop) provides a built-in door stop in the soffit shoe. When the door reaches the end of its travel, the shoe contacts the frame and stops the door without a separate overhead or wall stop. Installing a CUSH arm with a separate overhead stop is redundant and not recommended because both mechanisms compete on the same opening. When a CUSH or EDA arm is used, the 1260-30 CUSH Shoe Support is required if the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches, and the 1260-419 panel adapter is required when the head frame is flush or rabbeted.

 

Head and Tube Assemblies, Rod and Shoe, and Arm Components

Part NumberComponentFunction
1260-3048Head and Tube AssemblyStandard length head tube. Connects the main arm to the closer spindle.
1260-3048LHead and Long Tube AssemblyLong tube version for deeper reveals.
1260-77Main Arm and ForearmThe two-piece arm assembly: main arm and forearm together.
1260-79Rod and ShoeStandard length rod and shoe assembly. Rod length 8-3/8 inches.
1260-79LRLong Rod and ShoeLong rod version. Rod length 12-3/8 inches for deep reveals. Call 845-935-0301 to confirm current availability.
1260-49Hold Open Main ArmThe main arm component for hold-open arm assemblies.

 

LCN 1260 Covers: Standard Cover vs Shaft Cover

The LCN 1260 ships from the factory with a shaft cover (1260-146), not a standard plastic cover. This is an important difference from the 1460 Series, which ships with the 1460-72 slim line cover as standard.

Part NumberCover TypeNotes
1260-72Standard Plastic CoverOptional slim line cover. NOT shipped as standard with the 1260. Order separately when a full cover is needed. Finish code must match the installed hardware.
1260-146Shaft CoverShips standard with the 1260 Series. Covers the spindle and spring mechanism. The 1260-146 and 1460-146 shaft cover are the same part.

The LCN cover part number convention applies to the 1260: the series number followed by -72. The 1260 cover is 1260-72. This convention holds across all standard LCN surface-mounted series, but the physical shape is series-specific. A 1260-72 cover cannot be substituted for a 1460-72 or any other series cover even though the numbering pattern is the same.

 

When Is an LCN 1260 Drop Plate Required?

This is one of the most frequently asked questions in the professional locksmith and door hardware community about the 1260 Series. Three distinct trigger conditions apply across the three mounting plate variants.

 

1260-18: Hinge Side and Top Jamb Drop Plate

The 1260-18 mounting plate is required in two situations:

  • Hinge side (pull side) mount where the top rail is less than 2-1/2 inches measured from the stop.
  • Top jamb push side mount where the head frame is less than 1-3/4 inches or a flush ceiling condition exists.

The plate requires a minimum top rail of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or a minimum head frame of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

 

1260-18PA: Parallel Arm Push Side Drop Plate

The 1260-18PA mounting plate is required for parallel arm push side mounting where the top rail is less than 4-3/8 inches (111 mm) measured from the stop. The plate requires a minimum top rail of 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). This plate is also required for all EDA and CUSH arm installations in the parallel arm push side configuration.

 

1260-18QF: The Quick Fix Bracket Kit

The 1260-18QF mounting plate is not a drop plate in the traditional sense. It is a retrofit kit that serves two specific situations:

  • Adapting the LCN 1260 closer to the obsolete 1370 mounting hole pattern when replacing an old 1370-series closer in an existing opening.
  • Covering damaged or stripped mounting holes in a door or frame where the original fastener positions can no longer hold the closer securely.

The 1260-18QF includes retrofit mounting plates for both the closer cylinder and the shoe. It is not a standard installation accessory and is not triggered by top rail depth.

 

LCN 1260 Shoes and Installation Accessories

Several accessories are required or optional depending on frame conditions and the arm type selected. These are the most common items missed at the time of initial order, and their absence delays installation.

Part NumberComponentWhen Required
1260-62PAParallel Arm ShoeRequired for all parallel arm push side mounting. The 1260-62PA has a different hole pattern than the 62PA shoe used on 4000 Series closers. Order specifically by series.
1260-62AAuxiliary ShoeUsed when the door closer must be mounted lower on the door to clear overhead hardware such as stops, coordinators, or other accessories above the standard arm mounting height.
1260-30CUSH Shoe SupportRequired with EDA or CUSH arms when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. Provides anchorage for the fifth shoe screw.
1260-201Fifth Hole SpacerProvides the mounting point for the fifth shoe screw in CUSH and EDA arm installations.
1260-419CUSH Flush Panel AdapterRequired with CUSH and EDA arms when the head frame is flush or rabbeted. Provides a horizontal mounting surface for the shoe.
1260-384StopDoor stop accessory for the 1260 Series.
1260-61Blade Stop SpacerRequired when a 1/2-inch blade stop is present in the door frame. Lowers the parallel arm shoe to clear the blade stop during door travel.

 

LCN 1260 Arm Screws and Screw Packs

The correct arm screw depends on the arm type and mounting configuration. Using the wrong arm screw can result in the arm slipping or failing to hold the door position correctly.

Part NumberComponentNotes
1260-159Arm Screw (1/4-20)Holds the arm on the spindle. Same screw dimensions as 1460-159.
1260-83Arm ScrewStandard arm screw for regular arm configurations.
1260-83HH Arm ScrewFor hold-open arm configurations.
1260-SRTSelf-Reaming and Tapping Screw PackStandard screw pack shipped with the 1260 closer. For wood and light steel applications.
1260-TBSRTThrough Bolt with SRT Screw PackFor enhanced security or when standard mounting screws cannot hold.
1260-TORXTORX Screw PackSecurity TORX fasteners for tamper-resistant installations.
1260-TBTRXThrough Bolt TORX Screw PackThrough bolt combined with TORX fasteners for maximum tamper resistance.
1260-TBWMSThrough Bolt Wood and Machine Screw PackFor wood door and metal frame installations with through bolt security.

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 1260 Replacement Part?

Confirm the following before placing any order to avoid receiving a part that does not fit the installed closer.

Confirm Before OrderingWhy It Matters
Series is 1260 (not 1460, 4040XP, or another series)Arms and hold-open arms are NOT interchangeable between the 1260 and 1460. The 62PA shoe has a different hole pattern on the 1260 than on 4000 Series closers. Confirm the model sticker under the cover.
Arm type needed (regular, hold-open, CUSH, EDA, HEDA)Different arm types require different installation accessories (PA shoe, CUSH shoe support, panel adapter). Selecting the wrong arm type means missing required accessories.
Handing (for HEDA arm only)All 1260 arms are non-handed except the HEDA (1260-3049EDA and 1260-3049EDA/G). Specify right-hand or left-hand when ordering the HEDA.
Drop plate trigger: top rail depth for hinge or top jamb mountIf top rail is less than 2-1/2 inches on hinge side, the 1260-18 is required. If top rail is less than 4-3/8 inches on parallel arm push side, the 1260-18PA is required.
Frame reveal for CUSH or EDA armFrame reveal less than 3-1/16 inches requires the 1260-30 CUSH Shoe Support. Flush or rabbeted head frame requires the 1260-419 panel adapter.
Finish codeThe 1260-72 standard cover is finish-specific. Order the correct finish code to match the installed hardware.
Cover type (shaft cover vs standard cover)The 1260 ships with the shaft cover (1260-146), not the standard plastic cover. If a full cover is needed, order the 1260-72 separately.

View all 40 LCN 1260 parts and diagrams at Security Parts commercial door closer parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support or to confirm specifications before ordering.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 1260 Field Issues

SymptomCheck FirstPart to Inspect or Replace
Door does not close or latchIncrease spring power adjustment on the cylinder body. Check that spring size is appropriate for the door width and weight.1261-3071 cylinder if spring adjustment does not resolve
Arm bent or brokenConfirm the arm type matches the door's use level. High-traffic doors may need the EDA arm family instead of the standard regular arm.1260-3077 (regular), 1260-3077EDA/G (EDA), or appropriate variant
Cover cracked or missingNote the finish code on the existing hardware before ordering.1260-72 standard cover or 1260-146 shaft cover
Arm shoe pulling away from frameConfirm the fifth screw is installed and the CUSH shoe support is in place if the reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches.1260-30 CUSH Shoe Support; 1260-201 Fifth Hole Spacer
Closer mounting screws pulling outExisting holes may be stripped. Check whether the mounting footprint is the obsolete 1370 pattern.1260-18QF Quick Fix bracket kit
Door closing too fast or too slowAdjust the closing speed and latch speed regulation valves. Do not open valves more than three turns from shutoff. The hydraulic fluid cannot be refilled in the field.1261-3071 cylinder if fluid has leaked and speed adjustment no longer has effect

For installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer. For further adjustment help, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301.

 

LCN 1260 vs LCN 1460: What Is the Difference?

The 1260 and 1460 are both universal, non-handed LCN surface-mounted closers and are often specified on the same building. They look similar in the field, which creates ordering confusion. The differences matter for parts ordering because arms, hold-open arms, and the 62PA shoe are NOT interchangeable between the two series.

FeatureLCN 1260LCN 1460
Duty ratingLight to medium dutyMedium duty
Spring sizes1 to 51 to 6
Interior door widthTo 4 ft 6 inTo 5 ft 0 in
Exterior door widthTo 3 ft 6 inTo 4 ft 0 in
Warranty20 years30 years
Spring adjustmentStandard adjustmentPatented Green Dial visual indicator
Standard cover shippedShaft cover (1260-146) onlySlim line cover (1460-72)
Standard PA shoe shippedNot included standard1460-62PA included standard
Cylinder designation1261-30711461-3071
Hold-open arm cross-compatibleNoNo
62PA shoe cross-compatibleNo (different hole pattern)No (different hole pattern from 1260)

 

Where Is the LCN 1260 Specified and Where Does It Appear in the Field?

The LCN 1260 is one of the most widely installed light-to-medium duty commercial door closers in North America. Its ability to fit the most common commercial mounting footprint (3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch hole spacing) means it installs in a large percentage of existing commercial openings without requiring new holes. This footprint compatibility is the reason it appears across so many building types.

Common 1260 installation locations include:

  • Office building interior doors where ADA-compliant opening force is required and the door sees moderate daily traffic
  • Retail storefront interior doors where the closer must mount on a narrow top rail or on top jamb because the door is aluminum-framed glass
  • School interior corridor doors where a non-handed, quick-to-install closer simplifies building-wide replacement projects
  • Healthcare facility interior doors where the door width is within the 4 foot 6 inch interior door limit
  • Hotel room and corridor doors where the 20-year warranty and light-to-medium duty rating match the expected traffic level
  • Replacement projects where the installer is replacing an obsolete 1070-series or 1370-series closer and wants to use the existing mounting holes

The 1260 is not appropriate for high-traffic institutional applications where the door sees several hundred cycles per day and where the heavier duty rating of the 1460 or the 4000 Series is the correct specification. For guidance on selecting the right closer for a specific application, see the LCN 4110 Parts Guide or call Security Parts at 845-935-0301.

 

LCN 1260 Body Specifications and Construction Details

Understanding the internal construction of the 1260 helps maintenance staff identify when a part can be adjusted or repaired versus when the full cylinder assembly needs replacement.

  • Cylinder body: Cast iron
  • Bearing: Full-complement bearing
  • Piston diameter: 1-3/8 inches
  • Pinion journal diameter: 5/8 inch, heat-treated steel
  • Fluid: All-weather hydraulic fluid
  • Arm material: Forged steel
  • Spring sizes: Non-sized, adjustable from size 1 to 5
  • Mounting footprint: 3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch center-to-center hole spacing (matches most common commercial pattern)
  • Certifications: ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1, UL and cUL listed, ADA compliant, BAA (Buy American Act) compliant
  • Warranty: 20-year limited

The all-weather hydraulic fluid performs across a wide temperature range without seasonal closing speed adjustment. Regulation valves control general closing speed, latch speed, and backcheck. Do not open any regulation valve more than three turns from the fully closed position. The hydraulic fluid cannot be refilled in the field. A closer that has lost hydraulic fluid requires replacement of the 1261-3071 cylinder assembly.

 

How to Identify the LCN 1260 Model Number in the Field

The most common mistake technicians make when ordering 1260 Series parts is reading the casting or forging number stamped on the cylinder body surface and trying to order parts using that number. Numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on the 1261 cylinder body are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers or model designations. They cannot be used to identify or order replacement parts.

The correct method for identifying the LCN 1260 Series in the field:

  1. Remove or open the cover on the closer body.
  2. Look for the model identification sticker on the cylinder body. The sticker shows the model number (for example, 1261) and typically includes a date code.
  3. The date code is a four-digit number. The first two digits indicate the week of manufacture. The last two digits indicate the year. For example, "2322" means the 23rd week of 2022.
  4. Confirm the series (1260) and use 1260 as the prefix for all arm, cover, and accessory part numbers. Use 1261 as the prefix when ordering the cylinder assembly.

If the sticker is worn or missing, the model can often be confirmed by the mounting footprint. The 1260 uses the standard 3/4 inch by 9-1/16 inch hole pattern. If the existing holes match this pattern and the closer body is a cast iron surface-mounted closer sized for a door up to 4 feet 6 inches wide, the 1260 is the correct series.

 

LCN 1260 Arm Cross-Compatibility: What Works on Other Series

One of the most useful facts for maintenance teams managing buildings with multiple LCN closer models is that the 1260-3077 regular arm is compatible with several other LCN series. However, the hold-open arm, the 62PA parallel arm shoe, and the CUSH and EDA arms are series-specific and cannot be shared.

PartCompatible with 1260 and These Other SeriesNOT Compatible With
1260-3077 regular arm1460, 4010, 4020, 4040 series use the same 3077 regular arm design (order by series prefix)4040XP (hex spindle), 4110 (oval spindle), concealed series
1260-146 shaft coverThe 1260-146 and 1460-146 shaft cover are the same physical partAll other series
1260-62PA parallel arm shoe1260 Series only1460, 4000 Series, and all others -- the hole pattern is different on the 1260
1260-3049 hold-open arm1260 Series only1460-3049 is a different part. Not interchangeable.
1260-159 arm screwSame dimensions as 1460-159Verify before substituting on other series
1260-61 blade stop spacer1260 Series. May share dimensions with blade stop spacers from other commercial closer manufacturers. Confirm before substituting.Confirm before substituting on other LCN series

The spindle on the 1260 and 1460 is different from the spindle on the 4040XP. This means that arms from the 4040XP cannot be used on the 1260 or 1460. Confirm the installed closer series from the model sticker before ordering any arm replacement.

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware replacement components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 40 LCN 1260 and 1261 Series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and available for individual order. The 1260 and 1460 arms, hold-open arms, and 62PA shoes are not interchangeable despite the series numbers being sequential. Confirm the installed series from the model sticker under the cover before placing any order. For pre-order identification support, call 845-935-0301. Security Parts has stocked and shipped genuine OEM commercial door hardware replacement components since 2001. Every part page includes a diagram view and a parts lookup tool organized by series and model number, so technicians can confirm the correct part number before placing an order. The 1260 series is a common replacement project for anyone managing older buildings with obsolete 1070-series or 1370-series closers, and the 1260-18QF Quick Fix bracket kit was specifically designed for that retrofit scenario. Confirm the installed model and the frame conditions before ordering to avoid returns and delays on any 1260 Series parts project.

 

LCN 1260 Peel-N-Stick Templates and Installation Notes

The LCN 1260 Series ships with peel-n-stick installation templates that eliminate the need to mark and measure mounting hole positions manually. Each template sticks directly to the door or frame, shows the exact drill points for the selected mounting configuration, and peels off cleanly after installation. Template numbers vary by mounting type: template 29804 covers pull side and top jamb mounts, template 29805 covers the parallel arm push side mount, template 29808 covers the EDA mount, template 29809 covers CUSH and Spring CUSH mounts, template 29810 covers drop plate installations, template 29811 covers the Quick Fix bracket, and template 29901 covers the 62A shoe installation. These template numbers are reference information only. The templates are included in the closer package or in the relevant arm and accessory kits when ordering from Security Parts.

For fire-rated door applications, confirm the fire rating of the door assembly and the specific hold-open requirements with the authority having jurisdiction before specifying any hold-open closer or arm. See the commercial door fire rating guide for guidance on fire rating requirements for commercial door hardware.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

LCN 4110 Parts Guide: EDA Arm, Spring Cush Arm, Fusible Link, Cover, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 75 replacement components for the LCN 4110 and 4110T Smoothee series. The 4110 is a parallel arm push side closer and the EDA arm is shipped as standard. Optional arms include the CNS Cush-N-Stop, the SCNS Spring Cush-N-Stop (unique to the 4110 family), and hold-open variants for each. The 4110 also carries a full range of fusible link arm components for fire-rated door applications. Arms, covers, and drop plates are specific to the 4110 or 4110T and cannot be interchanged between the two. Confirm the model number, hand, and arm type before ordering. Call 845-935-0301 for identification support.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Smoothee Series?

LCN 4110 Smoothee Series heavy duty parallel arm door closer for institutional and commercial applications

The LCN 4110 Smoothee Series is a heavy duty, cast iron surface-mounted door closer designed exclusively for parallel arm push side installations. It is purpose-built for institutional and high-traffic commercial applications including classroom doors, auditorium doors, healthcare corridor doors, and any opening where the closer body must mount on the push side and the arm must run parallel to the door to keep the hardware as concealed as possible.

The 4110 is application-specific, which means it is engineered for one mounting position only. It cannot be converted to regular arm or top jamb mount in the field. When a 4110 is ordered, the hand of the door (right or left) must be specified at the time of order. The 4110 ships with the Extra Duty Arm (EDA) as standard, a standard plastic cover, the 4110-201 fifth hole spacer, and self-reaming and tapping screws.

 

What Is the LCN Green Dial on the 4110?

The LCN Green Dial is a patented spring power indicator built into the 4110 (and all 4000 Series) closer body. It provides a direct visual reading of the current spring power setting without requiring the cover to be removed or the cylinder to be replaced. A technician can verify and adjust the spring power setting in the field by reading the Green Dial position. When a 4110 begins closing too slowly or fails to latch, checking and increasing the Green Dial spring setting is always the correct first step. Most unnecessary cylinder replacements on 4110 installations happen because the technician did not know the spring power was adjustable on the existing cylinder.

The 4110 series uses a flat-sided oval spindle, the same spindle geometry as the 4010 and 4020 series. This matters for parts ordering: arms from the 4040XP (hex spindle) and 1460 (star spindle) do not fit the 4110. All arm replacement orders must specify the correct series designation (4110) to ensure spindle compatibility.

The LCN 4110 carries a 30-year warranty and holds the following certifications: ANSI A156.4 Grade 1, UL 10C, ADA, 100-hour salt spray (more than four times the ANSI standard for corrosion resistance), and the BAA Buy American Act requirement. The fusible link arm assemblies carry UL Listing number R1943. The 4111 cylinder meets ADA opening force requirements. The closer and its components are made in the USA.

Inside the 4110 body: a cast iron cylinder with a full complement bearing, a 1-1/2-inch diameter piston, and an 11/16-inch diameter double heat-treated pinion journal. Full rack and pinion hydraulic action drives the closing speed. The all-weather Liquid X hydraulic fluid performs without variation from -30 degrees F to +120 degrees F, so the 4110 never needs seasonal closing speed adjustment. The Peel-N-Stick installation templates simplify field installation: template 28479 covers regular arm mounts, 28481 covers CUSH and Spring CUSH mounts, 28501 covers the drop plate, and 26367 covers the fusible link arm.

 

What Are the LCN 4110 Cylinder Options?

The LCN 4110 series uses model numbers 4111 through 4116. The cylinder model number is stamped on the closer body near the packing nut. Numbers such as "71" or "320G" found elsewhere on the body are manufacturing reference numbers, not model numbers, and cannot be used to order parts.

ModelSpring SizeADARestrictions
4111Adjustable, size 1 to 5 (Green Dial)YesNone. All arm options available.
4112 to 4115Sized (fixed)Varies by sizeSized cylinders for specific door widths. Interior doors to 5 ft 0 in., exterior doors to 4 ft 0 in.
4116Size 6NoDEL (Delayed Action), SHCUSH, and HCUSH arms are NOT available with the 4116 cylinder.

Optional cylinder upgrades available on the 4110 series:

  • AVB (Advanced Variable Backcheck): Backcheck begins at approximately 45 degrees instead of the standard 75 degrees, providing earlier resistance against the door being pushed or blown open aggressively. Especially useful with the SCNS arm on high-abuse openings.
  • DEL (Delayed Action): The door holds at the maximum opening position for an adjustable delay of up to approximately one minute before the closer begins its closing sweep. Not available with the 4116 cylinder.
  • TEL (Time-Controlled Electro-Hydraulic): An electrified delayed action option. Confirm availability for specific applications.

For a full comparison of the 4110 against other 4000 Series closers, see the LCN 4000 Series parts guide. For installation and adjustment guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer and how to adjust a commercial door closer.

 

What Is the Difference Between the LCN 4110 and 4110T?

The 4110 and 4110T share the same cast iron cylinder body but use entirely different arm systems. Knowing which variant is installed determines which arm, cover, and drop plate to order.

FeatureLCN 4110LCN 4110T
Arm systemParallel arm with rod and shoeTrack arm with slide track and roller
Standard arm shipped4110-3077EDA (Extra Duty Arm)4110T-3077T (Standard Track Arm)
Arm handingEDA non-handed; CNS and SCNS handedHanded
SCNS Spring Cush armYes (4110-3077SCNS)No
Fusible link armsYes (4110-28, 4110-49FL, 4110-3049FL)No
Track rollerNot applicable4110T-3034
Standard trackNot applicable4110T-3038 (plus bumper and hold-open variants)
Metal cover4110-72MC4110T-72MC
Drop plate4110-184110T-18

Always verify the variant stamped on the closer body before ordering. The model number is located near the packing nut at the base of the pinion. Numbers such as "71" or "320G" found stamped elsewhere on the cylinder are manufacturing reference numbers and cannot be used to order parts.

 

What Is the Difference Between the LCN 4110 and 4210?

Both the 4110 and the 4210 are Smoothee series parallel arm push side closers. They share a similar application profile and look similar in the field, which causes ordering confusion. The key differences are in the security specification and fastener system.

The 4210 is the high security variant. It ships with TORX machine screws as standard rather than SRT screws, and uses a four-point metal security cover mounting rather than two-point. The 4210 is specified for correctional, vandal-prone, and institutionally secure applications where tampering resistance is a priority. The 4110 is specified for standard institutional and high-traffic commercial applications that do not require the elevated tamper resistance of the 4210.

Parts are not cross-compatible between the 4110 and 4210 series. Covers, arm screws, and drop plates are series-specific. The 4110 SCNS Spring Cush-N-Stop arm family is not available on the 4210. For a detailed comparison, see the LCN 4210 parts guide.

 

What LCN 4110 Parts Are Available?

All 75 LCN 4110 and 4110T Smoothee series replacement parts stocked at Security Parts are organized below by component category.

 

Arm Selection: Which LCN 4110 Arm Do I Need?

Arm selection is the most common parts decision on the LCN 4110 series. The 4110 offers more arm variants than most other LCN closer families, including the Spring Cush-N-Stop (SCNS) family that is unique to this series.

Part NumberArm NameHold OpenHandedKey Feature
4110-3077EDAExtra Duty Arm (standard)NoNon-handedDefault arm shipped. Templatable at 100, 140, 180 degrees.
4110-3049EDAHold Open Extra Duty Arm (HEDA)YesHandedHold open point set at installation. HEDA arms are handed.
4110-3077CNSCush-N-Stop Arm (CNS)NoHandedBuilt-in door stop in soffit shoe. No separate overhead stop needed.
4110-3049CNSHold Open Cush-N-Stop Arm (HCNS)YesHandedBuilt-in stop and hold-open function in one arm assembly.
4110-3077SCNSSpring Cush-N-Stop Arm (SCNS)NoNon-handedSpring cushion absorbs stop impact. Recommended for high-traffic and AVB applications.
4110-3049SCNSHold Open Spring Cush-N-Stop Arm (SHCNS)YesNon-handedSpring cushion plus hold-open function. Part number: 4110-3049SCNS.
4110-3077EDAGExtra Duty Arm with 62G Thick Hub ShoeNoNon-handedThick hub shoe for installations where standard shoe does not provide sufficient engagement.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Extra Duty Arm (EDA)?

The 4110-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm is the standard arm shipped with the LCN 4110 closer. It is a non-handed, heavy duty parallel arm that mounts push side only. The degree of door opening is set at installation by the template used, with options at 100 degrees, 140 degrees, and 180 degrees.

Because the EDA arm is non-handed, a single part number fits both right-hand and left-hand doors. If a door stop is also required, it must come from a separate overhead stop device rather than the arm itself. The hold-open version is the 4110-3049EDA Hold Open Extra Duty Arm, which is handed and must be specified right-hand or left-hand at order.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Cush-N-Stop (CNS) Arm?

The 4110-3077CNS Cush-N-Stop Arm is an optional handed arm with a built-in stop in the soffit shoe. When the door reaches its templated maximum opening angle, the arm contacts the stop and arrests the door without needing a separate overhead or wall stop device. This simplifies the hardware specification on openings where both a closer and a stop are needed.

The CNS arm is handed and must be specified as right-hand or left-hand. The drop plate (4110-18) is required for CNS arm installations. The CUSH shoe support (4110-30) is required when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. The fifth hole spacer (4110-201) provides the mounting point for the fifth shoe screw. Installing a CNS arm with a separate overhead stop device is redundant and not recommended since both mechanisms would compete on the same door.

 

What Is the LCN 4110 Spring Cush-N-Stop (SCNS) Arm?

The Spring Cush-N-Stop (SCNS) arm is a feature of the 4110 series that competitors and parts distributors rarely explain in depth. The 4110-3077SCNS Spring Cush-N-Stop Arm provides a built-in door stop like the CNS arm, but adds a spring-loaded cushion mechanism that absorbs the impact shock when the door hits the stop.

On high-cycle doors, the repeated impact of the door reaching maximum opening transfers significant force through the arm and into the closer body and pinion. The spring cushion in the SCNS arm dissipates this force rather than transmitting it directly, reducing long-term wear on the closer, the arm pivot, and the surrounding door hardware. The SCNS arm is specifically recommended for applications using Advanced Variable Backcheck (AVB), where the closer is adjusted to resist door opening force earlier in the swing, creating conditions where the door hits the stop with greater impact.

The SCNS arm is non-handed, which is an operational advantage over the CNS arm on large institutional hardware orders. The hold-open version is the 4110-3049SCNS Hold Open Spring Cush-N-Stop Arm. The 4110-3080 Spring Cush Block assembly (which includes the spring screw 4110-58 and block 4110-80G) is the replaceable spring mechanism used in the SCNS arm system when the cushion component itself requires servicing.

 

What Are the LCN 4110 Fusible Link Arm Components?

The LCN 4110 is one of three LCN surface closer series (alongside the 4010 and 4020) that offers a complete fusible link arm system for fire-rated door applications. The fusible link arm components allow the 4110 to be installed as a hold-open closer on a fire-rated door while still meeting the requirement that the door must close automatically when exposed to elevated temperatures from a fire event.

The fusible link melts at 165 degrees F, releasing the hold-open function and allowing the closer spring to return the door to the closed and latched position. This is a code-required feature on fire-rated doors where a hold-open closer is otherwise installed.

Part NumberComponentFunction
4110-28Fusible LinkThe replaceable fusible element that melts at 165 degrees F to release the hold-open function.
4110-49FLFusible Link Main Arm and RodThe complete main arm and rod assembly incorporating the fusible link mechanism.
4110-62FLParallel Arm Fusible Link ShoeThe soffit shoe that incorporates the fusible link release mechanism for the parallel arm installation.
4110-3049FLFusible Link Arm AssemblyComplete hold-open fusible link arm. Releases hold-open when exposed to temperatures above 165 degrees F. Handed arm, specify hand at order. The fusible link (4110-28) is separately replaceable after activation.

For guidance on fire-rated door hardware requirements and compliance, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

LCN 4110T Track Arm Components

The 4110T uses a track arm system in place of the parallel rod and shoe. The track arm is handed and must be specified at order.

Part NumberComponentNotes
4110T-3077TStandard Track ArmHanded. Specify right-hand or left-hand at order.
4110T-3034Track RollerRides inside the standard track as the door opens and closes.
4110T-3034HHold Open Track RollerHolds the door open at the roller position within the track.
4110T-3038Standard TrackThe slide track mounted to the door or frame.
4110T-3038BStandard Track with BumperTrack with end bumper for controlled door stop at end of travel.
4110T-3038HStandard Track with Hold OpenTrack with hold-open feature. Used with the hold-open track roller.
4110T-3038HBStandard Track with Bumper and Hold OpenCombined bumper and hold-open track for maximum control.

 

LCN 4110 Covers: Standard vs Metal Security

The LCN 4110 series offers two cover types: a standard plastic cover and a metal security cover. The cover is finish-specific and must be specified with the correct finish code to match the installed hardware.

Part NumberCover TypeApplies ToNotes
4110-72Standard Plastic Cover4110Ships standard with the 4110 closer. Specify finish code at order.
4110-72MCMetal Security Cover4110Optional heavy gauge metal cover. Plated finish also available on arm and fasteners when ordered with metal cover.
4110T-72Standard Cover4110TSpecific to the 4110T track arm variant. Not interchangeable with 4110-72.
4110T-72MCMetal Security Cover4110TSpecific to the 4110T variant. Not interchangeable with 4110-72MC.

The cover screw for the 4110 is the 4110-31. The 4110T uses the 4110T-31 cover screw. These are not interchangeable.

 

When Is the LCN 4110-18 Drop Plate Required?

The 4110-18 Drop Plate has two trigger conditions that require it to be included in an installation.

  • The top rail is less than 5-1/8 inches measured from the stop on a push side parallel arm mount.
  • Any CNS (Cush-N-Stop) or SCNS arm installation, regardless of top rail depth.

The plate requires a minimum top rail of 2 inches measured from the stop. If the top rail is less than 2 inches, the drop plate cannot be used on that opening.

A frequently asked question from the LCN community is whether the 4110-18 and the 4110-18 CUSH drop plates are different parts. They are physically identical. The designation "CUSH" refers only to the installation template used on the door, not to any difference in the plate itself.

The 4110T uses the separate 4110T-18 drop plate, which is specific to the track arm variant and cannot be substituted for the 4110-18.

 

LCN 4110 Accessories: Cush Shoe Support, Blade Stop Spacer, and Panel Adapter

Several accessories are required or optional depending on the frame conditions at the specific installation. These are frequently missed at order time and are the most common cause of delayed installations on CNS and SCNS arm applications.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-30 Cush Shoe Support?

The 4110-30 Cush Shoe Support provides anchorage for the fifth screw used with CNS and SCNS arms when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. On a standard CNS or SCNS arm installation, the CUSH shoe is mounted to the frame with five screws. The fifth screw provides critical anchorage because the built-in stop generates significant force at the shoe connection point each time the door reaches its maximum opening angle. When the frame reveal is too narrow for a standard five-screw installation, the CUSH shoe support provides the mounting surface for that fifth screw. Without it, repeated door stops can pull the shoe away from the frame over time.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-61 Blade Stop Spacer?

The 4110-61 Blade Stop Spacer is used when a 1/2-inch blade stop is installed in the door frame. The spacer lowers the parallel arm shoe to clear the blade stop during door travel. Without the spacer, the shoe contacts the blade stop before the door reaches its full intended opening angle, limiting door travel and potentially damaging the arm.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-419 Panel Adapter?

The 4110-419 Panel Adapter is needed when the CUSH shoe must mount to a single rabbeted or flush frame that does not present a horizontal mounting surface for the shoe. The adapter provides the horizontal surface the CUSH shoe requires for a correct CNS or SCNS arm installation.

 

What Is the LCN 4110-201 Fifth Hole Spacer?

The 4110-201 Fifth Hole Spacer provides the positioning point for the fifth mounting screw at the CUSH shoe. The standard 4110 closer ships with the 4110-201 included. Order this spacer whenever specifying any CNS or SCNS arm installation where the fifth screw position must be established.

 

LCN 4110 Screw Packs: SRT, TORX, and Thru-Bolt Options

The standard LCN 4110 ships with SRT (self-reaming and tapping) screws, unlike the 4210 which ships with TORX screws as standard. The 4110 series offers the full range of screw pack options for both the 4110 and 4110T variants.

Part NumberScrew Pack TypeApplies To
4110-SRTSelf-Reaming and Tapping (standard)4110
4110-TORXTORX Machine Screw Pack4110
4110-TBSRTThru-Bolt with SRT Screw Pack4110
4110-TBTRXThru-Bolt with TORX Screw Pack4110
4110-WMSWood and Machine Screw Pack4110
4110T-SRTSelf-Reaming and Tapping4110T
4110T-TORXTORX Machine Screw Pack4110T

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 4110 Replacement Part?

Confirm each of the following before placing an order to avoid receiving a part that does not fit the installation.

Confirm Before OrderingWhy It MattersApplies To
Model variant (4110 or 4110T)Arms, covers, drop plates, and arm screws are specific to each variant and cannot be interchanged.All parts
Hand of the door (right or left)The CNS, HCNS, HEDA, fusible link arm, and 4110T track arm are all handed.Handed arms and covers
Arm type needed (EDA, CNS, SCNS)Different arm types use different templates and have different accessory requirements.All arm orders
Hold-open function requiredHold-open arm variants (HEDA, HCNS, SHCNS) are separate part numbers from non-hold-open versions.Hold-open arms
Fire-rated door (fusible link required)Hold-open arms on fire-rated doors must use fusible link components to maintain the fire rating.All hold-open arms on fire-rated doors
Finish codeCovers and arms must match the existing finish of the installed hardware.Covers and handed arms
Top rail depth (less than 5-1/8 in. triggers drop plate)Drop plate required when top rail is narrow or on all CNS/SCNS arm installations.4110-18 or 4110T-18
Frame reveal depth (less than 3-1/16 in. triggers shoe support)CUSH shoe support required when reveal is too narrow for standard five-screw shoe installation.4110-30
Blade stop in frame (1/2 in.)Blade stop spacer required when a 1/2-inch blade stop is present in the frame.4110-61

View all LCN 4110 and 4110T parts and diagrams at Security Parts commercial door closer parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support or to confirm specifications before ordering.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 4110 Field Issues

SymptomCheck FirstParts to Inspect or Replace
Door does not close or latchCheck spring power setting using the Fast Power Adjust indicator. Increase spring power before considering cylinder replacement.Cylinder; arm screw (4110-159)
Arm touches door when closedCloser body or arm is not templated correctly. Check installation template alignment.Confirm correct template was used; arm replacement if damaged
CUSH shoe pulling away from frameConfirm the fifth screw is installed and CUSH shoe support is in place where reveal is less than 3-1/16 in.4110-30 Cush Shoe Support; 4110-201 Fifth Hole Spacer
Hold-open not releasing on fire-rated doorConfirm fusible link has not been activated and damaged. If activated by heat, replace the fusible link (4110-28).4110-28 Fusible Link (replacement after activation)
Track arm binding or noisy (4110T)Inspect track roller for wear and track for debris or deformation.4110T-3034 Track Roller; 4110T-3038 Standard Track
Door slamming or closing too fastDo not open regulation valves more than 3 turns from shutoff. Check for hydraulic fluid leak.Regulation valve adjustment; closer replacement if fluid has leaked
Door opening too hard or resisting pushBackcheck valve may be over-closed. Consider AVB cylinder with SCNS arm to manage opening force.Backcheck valve adjustment; 4110-3077SCNS SCNS arm for future reinstallation

 

LCN 4110 vs LCN 4040XP: Which Parallel Arm Closer Do I Have?

Facilities managers and locksmiths sometimes encounter both the 4110 and the 4040XP mounted in parallel arm configuration on the same building, which leads to ordering confusion. The two closers look similar from across a hallway but use completely different spindle geometry and arm families.

The 4110 uses a flat-sided oval spindle and mounts push side only in parallel arm configuration. It ships with the EDA arm as standard. The 4040XP uses a six-sided hex spindle and can be mounted in regular arm, parallel arm, and top jamb configurations. An arm from the 4040XP family will not fit on a 4110 and vice versa. Confirm which model is installed by reading the model number stamped near the packing nut on the closer body before ordering any arm replacement. For a detailed guide to the 4040XP arm family, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

LCN 4110 Applications: Where Is This Closer Specified?

The LCN 4110 Smoothee is specified in applications where the door control must mount on the push side with a parallel arm configuration. This is the standard specification for many institutional building types because it keeps the closer body and arm concealed from the pull side of the door, reducing tampering risk and maintaining the appearance of the opening.

Common 4110 application types include:

  • Classroom doors in K-12 schools and university buildings, where the closer body must face the corridor and not the classroom interior
  • Auditorium and assembly room doors where the push side faces a public area
  • Healthcare corridor doors where infection control and cleanability favor hardware mounted on the corridor side
  • Government building interior doors where the push side faces a public or controlled area
  • Office suite entrance doors where the arm and closer body should not be visible from the reception area
  • Fire-rated corridor doors where the 4110-3049FL fusible link arm is required for code-compliant hold-open operation

The 4110 is not appropriate for regular arm or top jamb installations. Those applications require the 4010, 4020, 4030, or 4040XP series. For guidance on selecting the correct LCN closer series for an application, see the LCN door closer selection guide and the commercial door closer sizing guide.

Can the LCN 4110 Be Used With a Door Coordinator?

Yes, but a specific mounting solution is required. When the 4111 is used with a bar-style door coordinator, IVES MB mounting brackets are required. These brackets wrap around the coordinator to provide a surface for mounting the parallel arm shoe. Without the IVES MB brackets, the parallel arm shoe cannot mount correctly when a bar-style coordinator is present across the top of the door frame. Contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 to confirm the correct bracket configuration before ordering.

Can the LCN 4110 EDA Be Used With a Glynn Johnson Overhead Stop?

This is one of the most frequently asked questions from the professional locksmith and door hardware community about the 4110. Two different scenarios apply depending on which Glynn Johnson overhead stop is installed.

For the GJ901 through GJ904 series: Special Template ST-2730 is required to mount the 4110 EDA closer with these overhead stops. If a drop plate is also required on the same opening, use the 4010-18 drop plate, not the 4110-18 drop plate. The two plates are not interchangeable in this specific combination.

For the Glynn Johnson GJ100 concealed overhead stop series: No special template is required. The 4110 EDA closer drops far enough on the door that it does not conflict with the GJ100 series concealed overhead stop, and the two can be mounted together using standard 4110 installation templates.

 

LCN 4110 Maintenance: What Does This Closer Require?

Closers mounted according to LCN installation instructions require no periodic maintenance or seasonal adjustments. The all-weather hydraulic fluid in the 4110 performs consistently across the full operating temperature range without the need for spring or speed adjustments between seasons.

The one service item that is regularly needed on high-cycle 4110 installations is spring power adjustment using the Fast Power Adjust indicator on the closer body. If a 4110 begins closing too slowly or fails to latch reliably, increasing the spring power setting is the correct first step before any cylinder replacement is considered. Most unnecessary cylinder replacements on 4110 installations happen because the technician is not aware that the spring power is adjustable without removing the cover or replacing the cylinder.

If a 4110 develops a hydraulic fluid leak, the fluid cannot be refilled in the field. Attempting to refill the hydraulic fluid voids the warranty. A leaking closer requires replacement of the cylinder assembly or the full closer body depending on where the leak originates. Call 845-935-0301 for guidance before ordering any replacement part on a leaking 4110.

The CUSH shoe and arm connections on CNS and SCNS arm installations should be inspected annually on high-cycle doors. The fifth screw connection at the shoe is the most common failure point on heavy-traffic CUSH arm applications. If the shoe is showing movement or the fifth screw connection is loose, inspect the CUSH shoe support (4110-30) and fifth hole spacer (4110-201) for correct installation before replacing the arm assembly.

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 75 LCN 4110 and 4110T Smoothee series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and available for individual order. The LCN 4110 series has more arm variants than most other LCN closer families, and ordering errors on handing, arm type, and accessory requirements are common. Confirm the installed model number, hand, and arm configuration before placing any order. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support. Security Parts stocks genuine OEM LCN components, ensuring that replacement parts match the original specifications for fit, material, and code compliance. The 4110 series has one of the widest arm option ranges of any LCN surface closer, and confirming the correct arm type, handing, and accessory requirements before ordering prevents the most common return and delay scenarios.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

LCN 4210 Parts Guide: Cush Arm, EDA Arm, Drop Plate, Metal Cover, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 29 replacement components for the LCN 4210 and 4210T Smoothee high security door closer series. The most frequently replaced parts are the three arm assemblies for the 4210 (EDA Arm, Cush Arm, Hold Open Cush Arm) and the track components for the 4210T. The cylinder assembly and metal security cover are handed and must be specified at order. Before ordering any part, confirm the model variant (4210 or 4210T), the hand, the cylinder size, and the finish. Closer adjustments are not accessible with the security cover installed -- the cover must be removed first. Call 845-935-0301 to confirm specifications before placing an order.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Smoothee Series?

The LCN 4210 Smoothee Series is a heavy duty, high security surface-mounted parallel arm door closer built for correctional, institutional, vandal-prone, and high-traffic applications. It has passed 10 million cycles in independent testing and is tested and certified under ANSI Standard A156.4, Grade 1. The 4210 carries a ten-year warranty. The series includes a high-strength cast iron cylinder, a one-piece forged steel piston, a double-heat-treated pinion, all-weather hydraulic fluid, tamper-resistant regulating screws, and a high-efficiency full-complement low-friction bearing.

The LCN 4210 is a parallel arm push-side mount closer. The related 4510 is the hinge pull-side version. The 4210T is the track arm variant of the 4210, with a high security threaded track roller that cannot be removed without disconnecting the arm from the closer. All three share the same fundamental cylinder body but use different arm assemblies, covers, and accessories that are not interchangeable.

For a broader overview of LCN closer families stocked at Security Parts, see the door closers parts guide and the LCN 4000 series parts guide.

 

What Is the Difference Between the LCN 4210 and 4210T?

The 4210 and 4210T share the same cast iron cylinder body but use entirely different arm systems. Knowing which variant is installed determines which arm, cover, drop plate, and arm screw to order.

FeatureLCN 4210LCN 4210T
Arm typeParallel arm with rod and shoeSlide track with track roller
Default arm shipped4210-3077EDA (Extra Duty Arm)4210T-3077T (Standard Track Arm)
Arm handingEDA non-handed; CNS arms handedHanded
Cush Arm availableYes (4210-3077CNS)No
Hold Open Cush ArmYes (4210-3049CNS, not with 4216 cylinder)No
Track rollerNot applicable4210T-3034 (high security threaded, not removable without disconnecting arm)
Metal cover4210-72MC (handed, 4-point mount)4210T-72MC (handed, 4-point mount)
Drop plate4210-184210T-18
Track end caps sold separatelyNot applicableNo (factory-installed, not sold separately)
Tested cycles10 million10 million
WarrantyTen yearsTen years

The model number is stamped on the closer body near the packing nut at the base of the pinion. Numbers such as "71" or "320G" found elsewhere on the body are manufacturing reference numbers and cannot be used to order parts.

 

Can I Access the LCN 4210 Adjustment Valves With the Cover On?

No. This is one of the most important service facts about the 4210 series and the detail most frequently overlooked. The LCN 4210 metal security cover uses four-point mounting precisely to resist tampering, and as a result, closer adjustments are not accessible with the cover installed. The cover must be removed before any regulation valve adjustment, spring power adjustment, or closer service can be performed.

On standard LCN series closers, the snap-on cover allows quicker access. The 4210 metal security cover is a different design and must be fully removed. Confirm the cover screw is the correct replacement (4210-31 for the 4210, 4210T-31 for the 4210T) when reinstalling after service.

 

What Torx Bit Size Does the LCN 4210 Use?

The LCN 4210 uses Torx fasteners as standard, which is one of its tamper-resistant features. The bit sizes required depend on the screw being driven.

Screw TypeTorx Bit Size
#10 machine screws (standard installation)T-25
#8 machine screws or undercut #10T-20
#6 machine screwsT-10
Standard installation (T-27 noted in LCN templates)T-27

LCN does not supply Torx wrenches with the closer. These are standard sizes that any professional installer will have available. If the installation uses the thru-bolt screw pack (4210-TBTRX), confirm the correct bit size for the specific fasteners in that pack before starting.

 

What LCN 4210 Parts Are Available?

All 29 LCN 4210 and 4210T Smoothee series replacement parts stocked at Security Parts are listed below. Parts for the 4210 and 4210T are noted separately. Several parts are shared between both variants.

#Part NumberComponent NameModelHanded?
14210-3077EDAExtra Duty Arm4210Non-handed
24210-3077CNSCush Arm (CUSH-N-Stop)4210Handed
34210-3049CNSHold Open Cush Arm (HCUSH) -- not available with 4216 cylinder4210Handed
44210T-3077TStandard Track Arm4210THanded
54210T-3034Track Roller (high security threaded attachment)4210TNo
64210T-3038Standard Track4210TNo (finish required)
74210-72MCMetal Security Cover (4-point mount)4210Handed
84210T-72MCMetal Security Cover (4-point mount)4210THanded
94210-18Drop Plate -- narrow top rail or flush ceiling (TORX screws included)4210No
104210T-18Drop Plate -- narrow top rail (required when top rail less than 5-1/4 in. from stop)4210TNo
114210-30CUSH Shoe Support (anchorage for 5th screw when reveal less than 3-1/16 in.)4210No
124210-61Blade Stop Spacer (clears 1/2-in. blade stop)4210No
134210-419Flush Panel Adaptor (horizontal surface for CUSH shoe on flush/single rabbeted frame)4210No
144210-201Fifth Hole Spacer4210No
154210-159Arm Screw4210No
164210T-159Arm Screw4210TNo
174210-31Cover Screw4210No
184210T-31Cover Screw4210TNo
194210-TORXTORX Machine Screw Pack4210No
204210-TBTRXThru-Bolt Wood-Machine Screw Pack4210No
214210T-TORXThru Bolts with TORX Machine Screw Pack4210TNo
224210T-TBTRXThru Bolts with TORX Machine Screw Pack4210TNo
23-29Rebox/DocumentationRebox Kit, Flat Box, Instruction Sheet (4210 and 4210T variants)BothNo

 

Arm Selection: Which LCN 4210 Arm Do I Need?

Arm selection is the most common decision when ordering LCN 4210 parts. The 4210 offers three arm types for the standard parallel arm configuration. The 4210T uses a single track arm. The correct arm depends on whether a built-in stop, hold-open, or track configuration is required for the application.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Extra Duty Arm (EDA)?

The 4210-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm is the default arm shipped with the 4210 closer. It is non-handed, solid forged steel, with a double slab arm-to-pinion attachment for maximum strength. The EDA arm does not include a built-in stop and is designed for potentially abusive installations. Because it is non-handed, the same part fits both left-hand and right-hand doors. It is UL listed for self-closing door applications.

LCN 4210-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm, non-handed forged steel parallel arm for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

If a door stop is needed on an EDA arm installation, it must be a separate overhead stop or wall stop device, not a CUSH arm accessory. Using a separate stop device alongside a CUSH arm installation is redundant and not recommended.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Cush Arm (CUSH-N-Stop)?

The 4210-3077CNS Cush Arm is an optional handed parallel arm with a built-in stop in the soffit shoe. CUSH stands for Cush-N-Stop. When the door reaches its templated maximum opening angle, the arm contacts the stop in the shoe and arrests the door without any separate stop device.

LCN 4210-3077CNS Cush Arm, handed forged steel parallel arm with built-in stop, for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

The Cush Arm is forged solid steel with a double slab arm-to-pinion attachment. It is handed and must be specified left-hand or right-hand at order. Templated maximum openings are available at 85 degrees (A = 8-5/16 in., B = 9-5/8 in.) and 90 degrees (A = 7-11/16 in., B = 9 in.).

The drop plate (4210-18) is required for all Cush Arm installations. The CUSH shoe support (4210-30) is required when the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. The fifth hole spacer (4210-201) works alongside the CUSH shoe support. Order all three at the same time to avoid installation delays.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Hold Open Cush Arm?

The 4210-3049CNS Hold Open Cush Arm provides both a built-in stop and a hold-open function in a single arm. A handle on the arm controls when the hold-open is engaged. Two important restrictions apply: the Hold Open Cush Arm is not available with the 4216 cylinder, and the Delayed Action cylinder option is also not available with the 4216. Confirm the cylinder variant before ordering this arm.

LCN 4210-3049CNS Hold Open Cush Arm, handed arm with built-in stop and hold-open, for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

 

What Is the LCN 4210T Standard Track Arm?

The 4210T-3077T Standard Track Arm is the arm used on the 4210T track variant. It is handed with a large cross-section forged steel arm. The high security feature is the threaded attachment between the arm and the track roller (4210T-3034). The roller threads into the arm for extra strength and cannot be removed without disconnecting the arm from the closer body. The roller is included when the 4210T-3077T arm is ordered separately.

 

Metal Security Cover: LCN 4210-72MC and 4210T-72MC

The metal security cover is a standard component of both the 4210 and 4210T and is one of the distinguishing features of the Smoothee series. It uses four-point mounting for extra tamper resistance compared to two-point mounting on standard LCN series covers. The cover is handed and must match the finish of the installed hardware.

LCN 4210-72MC Metal Security Cover, four-point mount, handed, for the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security door closer

The 4210 uses the 4210-72MC and the 4210T uses the 4210T-72MC. These covers are different and cannot be substituted between the 4210 and 4210T. The cover is secured by the cover screw (4210-31 for the 4210, 4210T-31 for the 4210T).

An important service reminder: closer adjustments are not accessible with the cover installed. The cover must be fully removed before any regulation valve or spring adjustment. After service, reinstall the cover and confirm all four mounting points are secured with the correct cover screw.

 

Drop Plate, CUSH Shoe Support, Blade Stop Spacer, and Flush Panel Adaptor

Four accessories are required or optional depending on the frame conditions of the specific installation. These are frequently missed at order time and are among the most common causes of delayed installations.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-18 Drop Plate Required?

LCN 4210-18 Drop Plate for narrow top rail or flush ceiling installation on the LCN 4210 Smoothee high security closer

The 4210-18 Drop Plate has two trigger conditions.

  • The top rail is less than 5-1/8 inches measured from the stop on a push-side mount.
  • Any Cush Arm or Hold Open Cush Arm installation, regardless of top rail depth.

One dimension that every competitor misses: the plate requires a minimum top rail of 2 inches measured from the stop. If the top rail is less than 2 inches, the drop plate cannot be used. The plate ships with TORX screws. The 4210-18 is physically the same plate as the 4110-18, but the 4210-18 ships with TORX screws for high security mounting, while the 4110-18 does not. Do not substitute a 4110-18 on a 4210 installation.

The 4210T uses the 4210T-18 Drop Plate, triggered when the top rail is less than 5-1/4 inches, with a 2-1/4-inch minimum top rail required.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support Required?

The 4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support is needed when a Cush or Hold Open Cush Arm is installed and the frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 inches. The five-screw connection at the CUSH shoe is critical because the built-in stop generates significant force during the door arresting action. The CUSH shoe support provides anchorage for the fifth screw when the jamb depth is too shallow for a standard installation. Without it on shallow frames, the shoe will pull away from the frame under repeated use.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-419 Flush Panel Adaptor Needed?

The 4210-419 Flush Panel Adaptor is needed when the CUSH shoe must mount to a single rabbeted or flush frame that does not provide a horizontal mounting surface for the shoe. The adaptor creates the required horizontal surface.

 

When Is the LCN 4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer Needed?

The 4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer is needed when a 1/2-inch blade stop is installed in the frame. The spacer lowers the parallel arm shoe to clear the blade stop. Without it, the shoe contacts the blade stop before the door reaches its full intended opening angle.

 

What Does AVB Mean on the LCN 4210 Cylinder?

AVB stands for Advanced Variable Backcheck. It is an optional cylinder feature ordered with the suffix CYLAVB. On a standard LCN closer, backcheck begins at approximately 75 degrees of door opening, providing resistance against the door being forced or blown open. With AVB, backcheck starts at approximately 45 degrees, providing earlier and more pronounced resistance.

AVB is available on the 4210 series cylinder. It is useful in high-wind locations, on heavy-traffic openings where doors are routinely pushed open aggressively, or in any application where resistance at a lower opening angle reduces the risk of the door striking an adjacent wall or object. Specify CYLAVB when ordering the cylinder if AVB is required.

 

Can the LCN 4210 Hydraulic Fluid Be Refilled in the Field?

No. The hydraulic fluid in an LCN closer must not be refilled in the field. If a 4210 is showing signs of hydraulic fluid leakage, the appropriate response is closer replacement, not a fluid top-off. Attempting to refill the fluid voids the warranty and is explicitly stated as not permitted in LCN service guidance.

The all-weather hydraulic fluid in the 4210 performs without variation between -30 degrees F and +120 degrees F. This eliminates the need for seasonal closing speed adjustments that affect standard hydraulic closers. If a 4210 installation requires frequent speed adjustments as seasons change, the more likely cause is a seal or valve issue, not the fluid composition.

 

What Is the LCN 4210 Regulation Valve Adjustment Limit?

All LCN door closers have three regulating valves: General Speed (main closing speed), Latch Speed, and Backcheck. The 4210 follows this same three-valve design. LCN recommends not opening or adjusting the regulation valves more than 3 full turns from the shutoff position. Opening the valves beyond this limit can damage the seals and cause hydraulic fluid leaks. The regulation valve assemblies are staked to provide a physical warning when the screws approach maximum adjustment, but they do not mechanically prevent over-adjustment.

If the door does not latch after adjusting the latch speed valve, the solution is to increase spring power, not to open the latch speed valve further. Increasing the latch speed valve opening changes the closing rate but does not increase the closing force available for latching. Increasing closing force requires spring power adjustment on the Green Dial.

For step-by-step guidance on adjusting LCN door closer speed and spring settings, see the guide to adjusting a commercial door closer.

 

Does the LCN 4210 Require Periodic Maintenance?

Closers mounted according to LCN installation instructions require no periodic maintenance or seasonal adjustments. The all-weather hydraulic fluid handles the full operating temperature range without change to closing time. Monthly, quarterly, and annual visual inspections are recommended for Fire and Life Safety rated installations only. For those applications, inspection intervals should align with the applicable fire code schedule.

The practical implication for facilities maintenance staff is that a correctly installed 4210 in a standard application should not need routine service. If a 4210 on a routine installation is requiring frequent readjustment, that indicates an installation issue (incorrect spring size for the door weight, incorrect valve settings, damaged seal) rather than a normal maintenance need.

 

How Do I Read the LCN 4210 Date Code?

The LCN date code is a four-digit code found on the closer body. The first two digits indicate the week of manufacture and the last two digits indicate the year. A date code reading "2519" means the closer was manufactured in week 25 of 2019. This is useful when assessing whether a closer is within warranty, identifying when parts were last installed, or planning replacement schedules on a building's door hardware inventory.

Do not confuse the date code with manufacturing reference numbers such as "71" or "320G" that may appear stamped elsewhere on the cylinder assembly. Those numbers are internal references and cannot be used to order replacement parts.

 

Can a 4510T Track Be Converted to a 4210T Track?

Yes. The 4210T-3038 standard track and the 4510T-3038 track are physically the same track, with one difference: the 4510T includes a spacer bar that the 4210T does not use. To convert a 4510T installation to a 4210T, remove the spacer bar from the 4510T track and replace the metal cover with the handed 4210T-72MC cover in the correct finish. The 4210T and 4510T use different handed metal covers, so the cover cannot be reused from the 4510T. The 4210T-3034 track roller and the threaded arm attachment remain the same across both models.

This conversion is useful when an existing 4510T installation needs to change its mounting orientation from hinge pull-side to push-side parallel arm. The core cylinder and track can be retained; only the cover needs to change. Confirm the handing matches the new door swing before ordering the replacement cover.

 

LCN 4210 Screw Packs: TORX vs Thru-Bolt

The 4210 uses Torx machine screws as standard, not the SRT (Self Reaming and Tapping) screws used on most standard LCN closer families. Two screw pack options are available.

Part NumberNameWhen to Use
4210-TORXTORX Machine Screw PackStandard mounting without thru-bolting
4210-TBTRXThru-Bolt Wood-Machine Screw PackThru-bolt installations where additional fastening security is required

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 4210 Replacement Part?

Confirm each of the following before placing an order to avoid receiving a part that does not fit the installation.

Confirm Before OrderingApplies To
Model variant (4210 or 4210T)Arms, covers, drop plates, arm screws
Hand of the doorCylinder, metal cover, Cush Arm, HCUSH Arm, 4210T arm
Cylinder size and type (not 4216 for HCUSH or Delayed Action)Cylinder assembly; HCUSH arm compatibility
Finish codeMetal cover, cylinder
Top rail depth (trigger: less than 5-1/8 in.; minimum: 2 in. for 4210-18)Drop plate (4210-18 or 4210T-18)
Frame reveal depth (less than 3-1/16 in. triggers CUSH shoe support)4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support
Blade stop present in frame (1/2 in.)4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer
Frame type (rabbeted or flush, for CUSH shoe mounting)4210-419 Flush Panel Adaptor
AVB required (backcheck at 45 degrees instead of 75)Cylinder with CYLAVB suffix

View the full parts listing and diagrams at the LCN 4210 and 4510 Smoothee series parts page. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support or to confirm specifications before ordering.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 4210 Field Issues

SymptomCheck FirstParts to Inspect or Replace
Door does not latch on closingRemove cover, check spring power on Green Dial; do not open latch speed valve beyond 3 turns from shutoffCylinder assembly; arm screw (4210-159)
Hydraulic fluid leaking from closerDo not refill fluid in the field; assess whether closer requires replacement; check regulation valve was not over-adjustedCloser replacement if fluid is leaking
CUSH shoe pulling away from frameConfirm fifth screw was installed; check if frame reveal is less than 3-1/16 in. and CUSH shoe support is present4210-30 CUSH Shoe Support; 4210-201 Fifth Hole Spacer
Door opening angle less than expected with CUSH armConfirm template used (85 or 90 degrees); check for blade stop contact with shoe4210-61 Blade Stop Spacer
Track arm binding or noisy (4210T)Inspect track roller; confirm track is clean4210T-3034 Track Roller; 4210T-3038 Standard Track
Door slamming (closing too fast)Remove cover, adjust general speed valve no more than 3 turns from shutoff; confirm fluid is not leakingRegulation valve adjustment only; replace closer if fluid has leaked out
Cover difficult to reinstallConfirm correct handed cover for model; 4210-72MC and 4210T-72MC are different covers4210-72MC or 4210T-72MC Metal Cover

 

Where Is the LCN 4210 Typically Installed?

Understanding the typical application environments for the LCN 4210 helps clarify why specific parts and accessories matter on a service call. The 4210 and 4210T are not general-purpose commercial closers. They are specified for environments where standard commercial closer components would not hold up to the demands of the installation.

 

Correctional and Detention Facilities

The 4210 is designed specifically for correctional applications. The TORX fasteners prevent unauthorized removal of the arm and cover. The four-point metal cover mounting resists prying. The forged steel arm provides strength against deliberate abuse. In these environments, every part matters: a cover screw (4210-31) that is stripped or a CUSH shoe that has pulled away from the frame is a security gap, not just a maintenance issue.

 

Institutional and High-Traffic Openings

Schools, university buildings, hospitals, and government facilities specify the 4210 on openings with very high cycle counts and some vandalism risk. The 10-million-cycle test rating reflects this use case. In these environments, the track roller (4210T-3034) on 4210T installations is the component most likely to show wear first, followed by the arm screw (4210-159 or 4210T-159).

 

What Is the Maximum Door Weight for the LCN 4210?

The maximum recommended door weight for LCN manual closers is 225 pounds. For the 4210, cylinder sizes 1 through 6 cover interior doors up to 5 feet wide and exterior doors up to 4 feet wide (for sized cylinders). Non-sized cylinders adjust for interior doors up to 4.5 feet and exterior doors up to 3.5 feet. The size 1 (4211) cylinder meets ADA opening force requirements when set at 5 pounds. For the LCN door closer sizing guide, including which cylinder size to specify for a given door weight and width, see the LCN door closer sizing guide.

 

LCN 4210 vs LCN 4110: Key Differences

The 4210 and 4110 share a similar naming structure and several accessories use the same part body. But they serve different security levels and must not be treated as interchangeable.

  • The 4210 uses TORX fasteners as standard. The 4110 uses standard screws.
  • The 4210 metal cover uses four-point mounting. The 4110 uses two-point mounting.
  • The 4210-18 drop plate ships with TORX screws. The 4110-18 plate ships without them.
  • The 4210 cylinder is a heavier cast iron unit rated for correctional applications. The 4110 cylinder is a standard cast iron unit.
  • Arms are not interchangeable between the 4210 and 4110 series.

If an installation is marked 4110 but shows TORX fasteners and a four-point cover, verify the model number stamped near the pinion. A 4210 may have been substituted at install. Use the stamped model designation near the pinion as the authoritative source for part identification, not the original specification sheet or the cover appearance. This is especially common on retrofitted correctional openings where the original specification called for a 4110 but the installing contractor upgraded to the 4210 for the security cover. In those cases, ordering 4110 arms or a 4110 cylinder on a subsequent service call will result in parts that do not fit. Always verify at the pinion. The model number stamped on the body is the only reliable identification method for LCN high security closers. For the complete parts listing with diagram references showing which part attaches where on the closer body, use the series parts page to cross-reference visual diagrams against the stamped model number before placing any order. Diagram 1 shows the arm and cover components. Diagram 2 shows the cylinder and accessory positions. Having both open when ordering reduces the chance of ordering the wrong handed component or missing a required accessory.

 

How to Read the LCN 4210 Model Number

The model number stamped near the pinion follows a consistent pattern. The series designation (4210 or 4210T) is followed by a size digit (1 through 6) indicating the cylinder size. Common model number designations found on installed 4210 closers include:

  • 4211 or 4211T: Size 1 cylinder, adjustable from Size 1 to 5 (ADA opening force capable)
  • 4212 or 4212T: Size 2 cylinder
  • 4213 or 4213T: Size 3 cylinder
  • 4214 or 4214T: Size 4 cylinder
  • 4216 or 4216T: Size 6 cylinder (note: Hold Open Cush Arm and Delayed Action not available)

Cylinder suffixes such as DEL (Delayed Action), CYLAVB (Advanced Variable Backcheck), and handing codes (LH, RH) follow the size digit in the full model string. Always read the full model string from the closer body before ordering cylinder assemblies or confirming arm compatibility.

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 29 LCN 4210 and 4210T Smoothee series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and available for individual order. Security Parts carries genuine OEM LCN components, ensuring that replacement parts match the original specifications for fit, finish, material, and security rating.

The LCN 4210 is a high security product where correct part identification matters considerably more than on standard commercial closer series. An incorrectly handed arm or cover on a correctional or institutional opening can compromise the security intent of the installation. A CUSH arm ordered without the required accessories (drop plate, CUSH shoe support, fifth hole spacer) will arrive on site incomplete, causing delays. Confirm the model number, hand, cylinder size, cylinder type, and finish from the installed hardware before placing any order. If the model label is unreadable, the handing is unclear, or the cylinder suffix is not visible, call 845-935-0301 for identification support before ordering any LCN 4210 part.

All LCN 4210 parts verified in this guide are linked directly to their live product pages at Security Parts. For the complete parts listing with diagram references, see the LCN 4210 and 4510 Smoothee series parts and diagrams page.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Parts Guide: Solenoid, Latch, Microswitch, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 27 replacement components for the Adams Rite 7100 Series electric strike. The most frequently replaced parts are the 29-0250 solenoid (five voltage variants), the 27-0085 latch, the 27-0086 blocking arm, and the 31-0092 microswitch. Before ordering the solenoid, confirm both the voltage and the duty mode (continuous or intermittent), because AC intermittent solenoids cannot be used in fail-safe applications. The 7100 Series is field reversible between fail-safe and fail-secure. Do not lubricate the strike mechanism. All 27 parts are genuine OEM components available to order individually. Call 845-935-0301 to confirm specifications before placing an order.

 

What Is the Adams Rite 7100 Series Electric Strike?

The Adams Rite 7100 Series is a family of electric strikes designed for use with Adams Rite deadlatches and cylindrical locksets on aluminum, hollow metal, and wood door applications. The strike provides remote electrical control of the door by releasing the latch bolt without requiring anyone to operate the lockset itself. When the solenoid is energized, it moves a shuttle which releases the blocking arm, allowing the jaw to tilt out of position so the door can open.

The 7100 is UL 1034 burglary-resistant listed and UL 294 listed. It is designed for latchbolts with a projection of 1/2 inch to 5/8 inch. The bolt retaining jaw is stainless steel. The mechanism fits into aluminum jamb or door sections as shallow as 1-5/8 inches deep, which makes it suited for narrow profile aluminum storefront frames where space is limited.

The 7100 Series also fits the existing frame preparation for the discontinued Adams Rite 7000, 7500, and 7800 electric strike series. If an older installation is being serviced and the existing strike has failed, the 7100 uses the same prep and is the current replacement option.

For a broader overview of electric strike families at Security Parts, see the electric strikes parts and diagrams page. For Adams Rite exit device parts, see the Adams Rite 41 series parts guide and the Adams Rite parts guide.

 

What Is the Difference Between the Adams Rite 7100 and 7101?

The 7100 and 7101 share the same internal mechanism and the same replacement parts for the solenoid, latch, blocking arm, shuttle, springs, and monitoring components. The difference is the faceplate profile and the application.

ModelFaceplateApplicationLip Extension AvailableMonitoring Available
7100FlatAluminum jambs, hollow metal, woodYesYes
7101RadiusAluminum stiles -- inactive leaf in glass door pairsNoNo

The 7101 radius faceplate is designed to match the curved nose on the inactive leaf in a pair of narrow stile glass doors. If monitoring or a lip extension is required, the 7101 is not the correct model. Confirm the installed model number before ordering any subcover or faceplate replacement.

 

Is the Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Field Reversible?

Yes. The Adams Rite 7100 Series is field selectable between fail-safe and fail-secure operation at the time of installation. The conversion is performed by repositioning the shuttle return spring and reversing the direction of the solenoid inside the case. No additional components or specialized tools are required for the conversion itself.

 

What Is the Difference Between Fail-Safe and Fail-Secure on the Adams Rite 7100?

These two modes define what happens to the door when power is lost or the access control signal drops.

ModePower StateStrike StateDoor StateSolenoid Duty Requirement
Fail-SecurePower offLockedCannot be opened from outsideIntermittent or continuous
Fail-SafePower offUnlockedCan be pushed openContinuous duty only

 

Can an AC Intermittent Solenoid Be Used for Fail-Safe Operation?

No. This is one of the most important ordering rules for the 7100 Series and one that causes significant field problems when ignored. In a fail-safe configuration, the solenoid must remain energized continuously to keep the door locked. An AC intermittent solenoid is not rated for continuous duty and will overheat if used in this way. Fail-safe applications require a continuous duty solenoid, either DC continuous or AC continuous (with a rectifier). If the existing installation has an intermittent duty solenoid, it can only be used in fail-secure mode. To convert to fail-safe operation, the solenoid must be replaced with a continuous duty variant alongside the mechanical conversion.

 

Why Does My Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Make a Buzzing Sound?

The buzzing sound is normal and expected behavior for AC intermittent solenoid variants. Alternating current regularly reverses direction, which causes audible vibration in the solenoid coil during operation. DC continuous solenoids operate silently.

If the installed solenoid is a DC unit and the strike is producing a buzzing or clicking sound, that is not expected behavior. In that case, inspect the wiring connections and the power supply output before assuming solenoid failure. A buzzing DC solenoid may be receiving AC power from an incorrectly specified power supply.

If the installation requires silent operation, specify a DC continuous solenoid variant. The appropriate options are the 29-0250-24DCC, 29-0250-16DCC, or 29-0250-12DCC depending on the system voltage.

 

Should I Lubricate the Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike?

No. Adams Rite installation documentation for the 7100 Series explicitly states: DO NOT LUBRICATE STRIKE. This is a common maintenance mistake, particularly on installations where technicians follow the same procedure they use for mechanical locksets. The 7100 internal mechanism is designed to operate dry. Applying any lubricant to the internal shuttle, blocking arm, latch arm, or spring components will attract dust and debris over time, causing the mechanism to bind, slow down, or fail to release consistently. If a 7100 is releasing sluggishly or inconsistently, the cause is typically a worn part rather than inadequate lubrication.

 

Does the Adams Rite 7100 Replace the 7000, 7500, or 7800 Series?

Yes. The Adams Rite 7100 Series fits the existing frame preparation for the discontinued 7000, 7500, and 7800 electric strike series. If a facility is servicing an older installation where one of those discontinued series has failed and is no longer available for replacement, the 7100 uses the same frame prep and is the current successor. This is a significant practical detail for maintenance professionals managing older commercial buildings with legacy Adams Rite hardware.

When replacing a discontinued series strike with a 7100, confirm the voltage and mode required by the access control system before ordering the solenoid variant.

 

What Latch Bolt Projection Does the Adams Rite 7100 Require?

The Adams Rite 7100 is designed for use with latchbolts that have a projection between 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch. It accepts the bolt from any Adams Rite 4500 Series or 4900 Series deadlatch, and from cylindrical locksets with a latchbolt within this projection range. Latchbolts with a projection outside this range will not seat and release correctly in the strike pocket. Confirm the latchbolt projection of the installed lockset before specifying the 7100 for a new installation or before troubleshooting repeated failure-to-latch issues on an existing one.

The strike opening is 5/8 inch x 1-7/16 inch x 1/2 inch deep. The bolt retaining jaw is stainless steel.

 

Is Form C Monitoring Available on All Adams Rite 7100 Series Models?

No. The two Form C monitoring switches are available on most 7100 Series models but are not available on the 7130, 7131, or 7140. If an application requires monitoring and a 7130, 7131, or 7140 is currently installed, monitoring cannot be added to that strike body. A different model will need to be specified for the monitoring function.

The two Form C switches on a monitored 7100 Series strike serve two different functions: one switch is activated by latchbolt penetration of the strike, and the other indicates whether the strike jaw is locked or unlocked by the solenoid. Both switches provide dry contacts. All unused monitoring leads must be insulated before the strike is placed in service.

 

What Are the Monitoring Wire Colors on the Adams Rite 7100?

On the monitored version of the Adams Rite 7100, the wire color coding as specified in Adams Rite installation documentation is as follows.

Wire ColorFunction
BlackCommon
WhiteNormally Open (NO)
RedNormally Closed (NC)

The solenoid wires are not polarized. All unused monitoring leads must be insulated. This wiring information is needed when replacing the microswitch assembly or reconnecting a monitored 7100 strike after service.

 

What Adams Rite 7100 Replacement Parts Are Available?

All 27 Adams Rite 7100 Series replacement components stocked at Security Parts are listed below. Each is a genuine OEM Adams Rite component available to order individually.

#Part NumberComponent NameNotes
129-0250-24DCCSolenoid, 24 VDC ContinuousSilent; fail-safe or fail-secure
229-0250-16DCCSolenoid, 16 VDC ContinuousSilent; fail-safe or fail-secure
329-0250-16ACISolenoid, 16 VAC IntermittentBuzzes; fail-secure only
429-0250-12DCCSolenoid, 12VDC/24VACSilent; fail-safe or fail-secure
529-0250-12ACISolenoid, 12 VAC IntermittentBuzzes; fail-secure only
627-0085LatchNo specification required
727-0086Blocking ArmNo specification required
823-0356ShuttleNo specification required
928-0150-MPShuttle Return SpringNo specification required
1028-0151-MPBlock Arm Return SpringNo specification required
1123-0349Bolt Switch ActuatorNo specification required
1231-0092MicroswitchNo specification required
1322-0713Switch PlateNo specification required
1422-0657Solenoid Retainer PlateNo specification required
1526-0170PlungerNo specification required
1622-0698-MPNut PlateNo specification required
1726-0214-MPShoulder ScrewNo specification required
1829-0341-MPPhillips Hex Head Screw #2 x 5/8No specification required
1929-0342-MPPhillips Hex Head Screw #2 x 3/8No specification required
2023-03501/2-Inch Back CoverConfirm installed size before ordering
2123-03513/4-Inch Back CoverConfirm installed size before ordering
2223-04431/2-Inch Flat SubcoverFor 7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140
2323-04441/2-Inch Radius SubcoverFor 7101, 7131
2423-04453/4-Inch SubcoverFor 7160, 7170
2591-0171-01Subcover Lip Extension KitFor 7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140; 1-1/2 in. centerline to jamb edge; not available for 7101
2691-0099Cylinder KitCylinder dogging C; includes anti-rotation ring, locking nut, locking nut tool
2731-0265-01-IPDogging AssemblyNo specification required

 

Solenoid Variants: Which 29-0250 Do I Order?

The solenoid is the electrical actuator at the core of the 7100 strike. It moves the shuttle, which in turn releases the blocking arm and allows the jaw to tilt so the door can open. The Adams Rite 7100 uses the 29-0250 solenoid family. Five variants are available. The correct choice depends on three things: the system voltage, whether the current is AC or DC, and the operating mode required by the application.

 

Which Solenoid Variant Buzzes and Which Is Silent?

DC continuous solenoids operate silently. AC intermittent solenoids produce an audible buzz during operation because alternating current reverses direction repeatedly. This is normal behavior for an AC solenoid and is not a fault. If silent operation is required, specify a DC continuous variant.

Part NumberVoltageDuty ModeSoundFail ModeOrder
29-0250-24DCC24 VDCContinuousSilentFail-safe or fail-secureView Part
29-0250-16DCC16 VDCContinuousSilentFail-safe or fail-secureView Part
29-0250-16ACI16 VACIntermittentBuzzesFail-secure onlyView Part
29-0250-12DCC12 VDC / 24 VACContinuousSilentFail-safe or fail-secureView Part
29-0250-12ACI12 VACIntermittentBuzzesFail-secure onlyView Part

 

Mechanical Components: Latch, Blocking Arm, Shuttle, and Springs

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Latch Do?

The 27-0085 latch is the pivoting jaw component that seats the door lockset latchbolt when the door closes. It holds the latchbolt in the strike pocket until the solenoid releases the blocking arm. A worn or damaged latch may cause the door to fail to latch on closing or may bind during release. Inspect the latch for wear at the contact surfaces and pivot point when the door is slow to latch or the strike releases inconsistently.

 

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Blocking Arm Do?

The 27-0086 blocking arm is the component that holds the latch jaw in the locked position. When the solenoid energizes and moves the shuttle, the blocking arm tip releases from the latch arm notch and the jaw is free to tilt. The 28-0151-MP block arm return spring drives the blocking arm back to the locked position after each release cycle. A bent or worn blocking arm tip will cause the strike to release even when the solenoid is not energized.

 

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Shuttle Do?

The 23-0356 shuttle transfers solenoid motion to the blocking arm. When the solenoid energizes, the plunger moves the shuttle, which in turn releases the blocking arm tip from the latch arm notch. The 28-0150-MP shuttle return spring resets the shuttle to its original position after each activation. During a fail-secure to fail-safe field conversion, the shuttle return spring position is one of the two components that must be repositioned. Replacing the shuttle without also checking the return spring position after a mode conversion will result in incorrect operation.

 

When Should the Return Springs Be Replaced?

Inspect both the shuttle return spring (28-0150-MP) and the block arm return spring (28-0151-MP) whenever the solenoid or shuttle is replaced. A fatigued return spring may not provide enough force to reset the mechanism fully, which causes the blocking arm to partially re-engage or the shuttle to sit in an intermediate position. This creates intermittent locking failures that are difficult to diagnose without inspecting the spring condition directly. On high-cycle installations, replacing both springs at the same time as the solenoid is a standard preventive step.

 

Electrical Monitoring: Microswitch, Switch Plate, and Bolt Switch Actuator

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Microswitch Do?

The 31-0092 microswitch is triggered by the bolt switch actuator to send a status signal to the access control or alarm panel. On monitored 7100 strikes, two switches are present: one activated by latchbolt penetration of the strike, and one indicating whether the jaw is locked or unlocked. When the microswitch fails, the access control panel receives incorrect or absent status signals. Replace the microswitch when wiring and power supply have been confirmed correct but status signals are still unreliable.

 

What Does the Adams Rite 7100 Bolt Switch Actuator Do?

The 23-0349 bolt switch actuator is the mechanical link that physically triggers the microswitch when the latch bolt position changes. A worn or misaligned actuator will cause intermittent or absent status signaling even when the microswitch itself is functional. Inspect the actuator alongside the microswitch whenever monitoring function is unreliable.

 

Solenoid Support: Retainer Plate, Plunger, and Nut Plate

Three components support the solenoid assembly within the strike body. Each is ordered individually and requires no specification.

  • 22-0657 Solenoid Retainer Plate: Secures the solenoid in its correct position inside the strike body. A displaced solenoid does not transfer force to the shuttle correctly, resulting in weak or absent release. Replace the retainer plate alongside the solenoid if the plate shows wear or deformation.
  • 26-0170 Plunger: The solenoid output component that directly contacts and moves the shuttle when the solenoid energizes. A worn plunger reduces force transfer to the shuttle. When a solenoid replacement does not resolve a weak release symptom, inspect the plunger before ordering additional parts.
  • 22-0698-MP Nut Plate: Provides a threaded fastening point within the strike body. A stripped nut plate will prevent correct reassembly after service.

 

Subcover Selection: Which Subcover Does the Adams Rite 7100 Use?

Subcover selection depends on the specific 7100 Series model number installed. Confirm the model number on the strike body before ordering.

Part NumberDescriptionCompatible Models
23-04431/2-Inch Flat Subcover7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140
23-04441/2-Inch Radius Subcover7101, 7131
23-04453/4-Inch Subcover7160, 7170
91-0171-01Subcover Lip Extension Kit (1-1/2 in. centerline to jamb edge)7100, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7140 only (not 7101)

 

When Is the Lip Extension Kit Needed?

The standard lip on the 7100 is sized for a 1-3/4-inch thick door that closes flush with the jamb edge. Where the door thickness or jamb shape differs from this standard relationship, a lip extension is needed. Typical applications include center-hung doors and thick doors where the door centerline to jamb edge dimension exceeds the standard. The 91-0171-01 subcover lip extension kit provides a 1-1/2-inch dimension from the door centerline to the jamb edge. Lip extensions are not available for the 7101 or 7131 models.

 

Back Cover Selection: 1/2-Inch vs 3/4-Inch

Part NumberDescription
23-03501/2-Inch Back Cover
23-03513/4-Inch Back Cover

The back cover size corresponds to the frame pocket depth of the installed strike. Measure the existing back cover or confirm the installed model number before ordering to avoid the wrong size.

 

How to Identify the Correct Adams Rite 7100 Part Before Ordering

What to ConfirmApplies To
System voltage (12V, 16V, or 24V)29-0250 solenoid family (all 5 variants)
Current type (AC or DC) and duty mode (continuous or intermittent)29-0250 solenoid family; intermittent = fail-secure only
Operating mode (fail-safe or fail-secure)Solenoid selection; fail-safe requires continuous duty
7100 Series model number (7100, 7101, 7110, 7111, 7130, 7131, 7140, 7160, 7170)Subcover selection (23-0443, 23-0444, 23-0445)
Back cover size (1/2-inch or 3/4-inch)23-0350 and 23-0351 back covers
Whether lip extension is needed (door thickness or jamb shape)91-0171-01 subcover lip extension kit
Whether monitoring is present (7130/7131/7140 do not support monitoring)31-0092 microswitch, 23-0349 bolt switch actuator, 22-0713 switch plate

 

Troubleshooting Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike Problems

SymptomCheck FirstParts to Inspect or Replace
Strike does not release when energizedConfirm voltage at solenoid terminals matches solenoid rating29-0250 solenoid, 26-0170 plunger, 23-0356 shuttle
Strike buzzes during operationConfirm solenoid is AC intermittent (expected) or DC (problem)Replace with DC continuous variant if silent operation required
Door does not re-latch after releaseInspect shuttle and blocking arm return travel28-0150-MP shuttle return spring, 28-0151-MP block arm return spring, 27-0086 blocking arm
Status monitoring signal absent or incorrectInspect wiring connections; confirm wire color coding (Black=Common, White=NO, Red=NC)31-0092 microswitch, 23-0349 bolt switch actuator, 22-0713 switch plate
Weak or sluggish releaseConfirm correct voltage; do not lubricate mechanism29-0250 solenoid, 26-0170 plunger, 22-0657 solenoid retainer plate
Strike releases without power applied (fail-secure)Inspect blocking arm tip against latch arm notch; confirm shuttle spring is in correct position27-0086 blocking arm, 28-0151-MP block arm return spring, 23-0356 shuttle
Fail-safe solenoid overheatingConfirm solenoid is continuous duty -- AC intermittent cannot run continuouslyReplace with correct continuous duty 29-0250 variant

 

How Deep Must the Frame Pocket Be for the Adams Rite 7100?

The Adams Rite 7100 mechanism fits into aluminum jamb or door sections as shallow as 1-5/8 inches deep. This compact depth is what makes the 7100 practical for narrow profile aluminum storefront frames where hollow metal or wood frame alternatives would not fit. When retrofitting an older opening or installing on an unusual frame profile, measure the available pocket depth before ordering to confirm the 7100 fits without requiring frame modification.

The full case dimensions are approximately 1 inch wide by 3-3/8 inches long by 1-5/8 inches deep. The standard package includes mounting screws, mounting clips, and adhesive shims to accommodate jamb or stile extrusion thickness greater or less than the nominal 1/8-inch. These shims allow the strike to sit flush against the frame regardless of minor extrusion thickness variation without requiring recutting the frame pocket.

 

Adams Rite 7100 Dogging Components: Cylinder Kit and Dogging Assembly

What Is the Adams Rite 91-0099 Cylinder Kit Used For?

The 91-0099 cylinder kit is used for cylinder dogging C applications. It is a service kit, not a complete cylinder. The kit includes the anti-rotation ring, locking nut, and locking nut tool. It is ordered when the cylinder dogging mounting hardware needs replacement rather than when the cylinder itself needs replacement. Confirm the dogging configuration of the installation before ordering this kit.

 

What Is the Adams Rite 31-0265-01-IP Dogging Assembly?

The 31-0265-01-IP dogging assembly is a genuine OEM replacement component for applicable dogging configurations. No specification is required at the time of order. Replace the complete dogging assembly when the dogging function is not holding correctly or when the assembly is physically damaged during service.

 

Adams Rite OEM Warranty on 7100 Series Parts

All Adams Rite 7100 Series parts stocked at Security Parts are genuine OEM components covered by Adams Rite manufacturer warranties. The warranty periods from the date of manufacture are as follows.

  • 10 years on all mechanical products.
  • 5 years on electromechanical categories including electric strikes, exit devices, deadlocks, deadlatches, trims, and power supply accessories. This covers the 29-0250 solenoid family, the 31-0092 microswitch, the 23-0349 bolt switch actuator, and all other electromechanical 7100 Series components.
  • 3 years on specific access control products including the DL100 Aperio Wireless Deadlatch and 3090-150.

Warranty coverage applies to genuine OEM parts only. Ordering genuine OEM parts from Security Parts ensures that warranty coverage is not voided by aftermarket substitution. If documentation of a specific component's warranty period is needed for a facility compliance record, confirm the part number and manufacturing date at the time of purchase.

 

Why Order Adams Rite 7100 Parts from Security Parts?

Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Every Adams Rite 7100 Series part stocked at Security Parts is a genuine OEM component. All 27 components listed in this guide are verified in stock for immediate ordering.

Ordering genuine OEM components matters more for electric strike parts than it does for many other hardware categories. An aftermarket solenoid may appear identical to the OEM part physically but differ in coil resistance, pull force, or duty cycle rating in ways that are not visible during installation. These differences only become apparent over time, typically showing up as intermittent release failures, overheating in fail-safe applications, or premature solenoid wear on high-cycle doors.

Pre-order part identification support is available at 845-935-0301. If the model number label on the installed strike body is unreadable, Security Parts can help identify the correct subcover, back cover, and solenoid variant from the installation details before an order is placed. If an older installation needs to be converted from the discontinued 7000, 7500, or 7800 series to the 7100, Security Parts can confirm compatibility before the order is placed.

For related Adams Rite hardware, see the Adams Rite 41 series parts guide and the Adams Rite parts guide. For electric strike installation guidance, see the how to install an electric strike guide.

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts has supplied genuine OEM commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. All 27 Adams Rite 7100 Series replacement parts listed in this guide are stocked and verified for immediate ordering. Security Parts carries OEM Adams Rite components and will flag any compatible aftermarket alternative before an order is placed.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order part identification, voltage confirmation, model matching, or guidance on converting an existing installation from fail-secure to fail-safe before ordering parts.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

 

Adams Rite 7100 Electric Strike: Key Ordering Rules Summary

Before placing any order for Adams Rite 7100 Series parts, review these rules. Each one reflects a common ordering mistake that causes the wrong part to arrive.

  • AC intermittent solenoids are rated for fail-secure mode only. Never specify an AC intermittent solenoid for a fail-safe installation.
  • Fail-safe applications require a continuous duty solenoid: 29-0250-24DCC, 29-0250-16DCC, or 29-0250-12DCC.
  • Subcover selection depends on the model number, not just the series name. A 7101 uses a different subcover (23-0444) than a 7100 (23-0443).
  • Lip extensions are not available for the 7101 or 7131 models.
  • Monitoring components (microswitch, bolt switch actuator, switch plate) are not available for 7130, 7131, or 7140 models.
  • Do not lubricate any internal component of the 7100 mechanism.
  • All unused monitoring leads must be insulated before the strike is placed in service.
  • When replacing a discontinued 7000, 7500, or 7800 series strike, the 7100 fits the existing frame preparation.

Call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support on any of the above. All 27 Adams Rite 7100 Series replacement components are stocked and available to order individually.

LCN 2310ME Parts Guide: Track Roller, Arm, Switch Assembly, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 2310ME Sentronic door closer has 18 replacement parts available at Security Parts. The most frequently replaced components are the 2310ME-3034 track roller, the 2310ME-3038 standard track, the 2310ME-3077T standard arm, and the 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly. The standard arm requires hand and finish specification at order. The track is non-handed but still requires finish specification. The ME switch assembly requires voltage specification and accepts both AC and DC input. All 18 parts are stocked individually and available to order now.

 

What Is the LCN 2310ME?

The LCN 2310ME is a Sentronic series door closer designed for fire and smoke barrier doors. It is UL and cUL listed for smoke barrier or labeled fire doors and meets ANSI/BHMA A156.15 and NFPA 101 Life Safety Code standards. The closer mounts concealed in the frame with a single lever track arm that runs concealed inside the door. This keeps all mechanical and electrical components out of sight while delivering full fire life safety function.

The 2310ME holds the door open at an adjustable position using an electrical signal. When that current is interrupted, whether by a fire alarm activation, a power failure, or a manual switch, the holding mechanism releases immediately and the door closes fully under spring power. When the hold-open function is not engaged or when current is cut, the 2310ME functions as a standard full rack-and-pinion door closer. This behavior is built in by design. Fire-rated openings must close and latch automatically on any power interruption, and the 2310ME is built to meet that requirement.

 

How Does the LCN 2310ME Hold-Open System Work?

The hold-open function is controlled by an electrical signal fed to the ME switch assembly (2310ME-3351). When the signal is active, the assembly engages the holding mechanism and the door stays open at the set position. When the signal drops, the hold-open releases instantly and the spring closes the door.

The ME switch assembly circuitry accepts either AC or DC input. Voltage must still be specified at order. The 2310ME is available with a 24V holding solenoid or a 120V holding solenoid. A transformer (2310ME-3210) can be used to reduce 120V line voltage down to 24V AC. The wiring input range for the closer covers 12V, 24V, and 120V AC/DC, which allows the 2310ME to integrate with a wide variety of fire alarm panels and detection systems.

The hold-open position is not mechanical. It is set electrically and the door closes under spring force once the signal drops. This is what makes the 2310ME suitable for fire and smoke barrier doors where consistent, code-compliant closing is required.

 

What Are the Size and Spring Options on the LCN 2310ME?

The 2310ME is available in size 3 or size 4. Cylinder assemblies are size-specific and are not adjustable between sizes. Confirm the size of the existing installation before ordering any cylinder-related parts. Closing power of the 2310ME Series may be increased up to 15%. The closer ships with minimum closing power pre-set. Closing power can be increased by turning the spring adjusting screw clockwise, with a maximum adjustment of 18 turns. The holding force is set at maximum from the factory and can be decreased and increased again, but cannot be increased beyond the original factory setting.

A normal closing time from a 90-degree open position is 5 to 7 seconds. If the door closes outside this range and the spring has not been adjusted beyond the maximum, inspect the track roller and track for wear before making further adjustments.

 

Where Is the LCN 2310ME Typically Installed?

The 2310ME is used in commercial buildings, healthcare facilities, schools, institutional settings, and any opening that requires a door to stay open during normal operations but close and latch automatically on a fire alarm activation or power failure. Its concealed-in-frame mounting makes it well suited for openings where exposed arms or hardware would create an obstruction or accessibility issue.

The 2310ME mounts concealed in the frame. The related 4310ME mounts on the hinge pull side with a single lever track arm. The 4410ME mounts on the top jamb push side with a double lever regular arm. All three are part of the Sentronic ME series but use different mounting configurations and have their own specific part numbers. Do not substitute parts between the 2310ME, 4310ME, and 4410ME without confirming compatibility with Security Parts.

For a full overview of LCN door operator and closer categories stocked at Security Parts, see the door operators parts guide and the door closers parts guide.

 

What LCN 2310ME Parts Are Available?

All 18 LCN 2310ME replacement parts are stocked individually at Security Parts. The table below lists every part by number, name, and the specification required at the time of order.

#Part NumberPart NameSpecification Required
12310ME-3077TStandard ArmFinish (F), Hand (H)
22310ME-11Finish PlateFinish (F)
32310ME-12Short Finish PlateFinish (F)
42310ME-425Roller Lock ScrewNone
52310ME-3038Standard TrackFinish (F)
62310ME-3034Track RollerNone
72310ME-3351ME Switch AssemblyVoltage (V) -- 24V or 120V
82310ME-WMSWood-Machine Screw PackFinish (F)
92310ME-TORXTorx Machine Screw PackFinish (F)
102310ME-3210TransformerNone
112310ME-3431Input JumperNone
122310ME-420Fire ShieldNone
132310ME-31Cover ScrewNone
142310ME-172Wiring CoverNone
152310ME-159Arm ScrewNone
162310ME-Rebox KitRebox Kit, Box and Instruction SheetNone
172310ME-Flat BoxFlat Box with LabelNone
182310ME-Instruction SheetInstruction SheetNone

 

Track and Arm Components

The track-arm system on the 2310ME consists of three separate parts: the track roller, the standard track, and the standard arm. Each is ordered individually and each serves a distinct mechanical function. The track and roller are non-handed. The arm is handed. Understanding these distinctions before ordering prevents receiving the wrong part.

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Track Roller Do?

The 2310ME-3034 track roller rides inside the door track as the door travels through its opening and closing cycle. It is a quiet, low-friction roller assembly. The track roller is non-handed and does not require a finish specification. It inserts directly into the standard track and is secured by the roller lock screw (2310ME-425).

The track roller shoulder dimension is 1/16 inch (2mm). This is useful for confirming a replacement roller matches the original when inspecting a worn component. When the track roller wears, the door may begin to drag, produce noise, or close inconsistently. The roller lock screw (2310ME-425) secures the roller in position. If the roller is being replaced, inspect the roller lock screw at the same time.

LCN 2310ME-3034 track roller replacement part for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

 

What Is the Standard Track on the LCN 2310ME?

The 2310ME-3038 standard track runs concealed inside the door and guides the track roller through the full door travel cycle. The standard track is non-handed. The same part number fits both left-hand and right-hand doors. Finish specification (F) is required at order.

LCN 2310ME-3038 standard track for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

The track and track roller are separate parts and each is ordered individually. If only the roller shows wear, order the 2310ME-3034 roller alone. If the track channel is damaged or bent, order the 2310ME-3038 track separately. Neither part requires replacing the full arm assembly.

Important for older installations: LCN redesigned track-style closer components in February 2016. This redesign affected the roller, track, hold-open clip, and bumper. Closers installed before February 2016 may require different or additional parts. If you are servicing an older 2310ME installation and a part does not appear to match the current catalog, contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering.

 

Is the LCN 2310ME Standard Arm Handed?

Yes. The 2310ME-3077T standard arm is handed and requires both a finish specification (F) and a hand specification (H) at order. Confirm the hand of the door before ordering. Installing the wrong hand will prevent the arm from seating correctly on the closer shaft.

LCN 2310ME-3077T standard arm, handed, for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

To identify the hand of the door, stand on the outside (the side the door swings away from when opened). If the hinges are on the right, the door is right-hand. If the hinges are on the left, the door is left-hand. The arm attaches to the closer shaft and is secured with the arm screw (2310ME-159). Both the arm and arm screw are ordered separately.

 

Electrical and Control Components

The 2310ME includes several electrical components unique to the Sentronic series. These parts control the hold-open function, the wiring interface, and the power supply. Each is ordered individually. Several require voltage to be confirmed before ordering.

 

What Is the LCN 2310ME ME Switch Assembly?

The 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly is the on/off switch that controls the hold-open function. When the switch receives an electrical signal, the holding mechanism engages and the door stays open. When the signal is removed or the current is interrupted, the holding mechanism releases and the door closes under spring power.

LCN 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly, on/off switch for the 2310ME Sentronic hold-open function

Voltage specification (V) is required at order. The 2310ME-3351 is available in 24V or 120V. The ME switch assembly circuitry accepts either AC or DC input, which allows it to integrate with most commercial fire alarm panels and detection systems. Confirm the voltage of the existing electrical system before ordering. A 24V switch assembly installed on a 120V circuit, or vice versa, will not function correctly and may damage the component.

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Transformer Do?

The 2310ME-3210 transformer reduces line voltage from 120V to 24V AC. It mounts on a plate designed for a 4-inch x 4-inch x 2-1/8-inch electrical box. No voltage or finish specification is required when ordering the transformer.

LCN 2310ME-3210 transformer, reduces 120V to 24V AC, for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

If an installation runs 120V line voltage but uses a 24V ME switch assembly, the transformer provides the voltage conversion in between. If the hold-open function fails and the ME switch assembly tests correctly, inspect the transformer before ordering additional parts. A failed transformer will prevent the switch assembly from receiving proper voltage even if the assembly itself is functional.

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Input Jumper Do?

The 2310ME-3431 input jumper manages the wiring configuration for the activation input on the closer. No specification is required at order. When rewiring an existing 2310ME installation or replacing control components, confirm whether the input jumper needs replacement alongside the ME switch assembly.

LCN 2310ME-3431 input jumper for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer wiring configuration

 

What Does the LCN 2310ME Wiring Cover Do?

The 2310ME-172 wiring cover protects the electrical wiring and connections on the closer body. No specification is required at order. If the wiring cover is cracked, missing, or damaged, replace it before returning the closer to service. Exposed wiring connections on a fire life safety device create both a reliability risk and a compliance concern.

LCN 2310ME-172 wiring cover for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

 

Does the LCN 2310ME Electrical System Accept AC and DC Input?

Yes. The ME switch assembly circuitry accepts either AC or DC input. This gives the 2310ME broad compatibility with different fire alarm panel types. Most commercial fire alarm systems output 24V DC. Some older systems and transformer-fed circuits output 24V AC or 120V AC. The 2310ME handles all of these when the correct voltage variant of the switch assembly is specified at order.

The wiring input range covers 12V, 24V, and 120V AC/DC. When in doubt about the voltage in an existing installation, measure the output at the wiring terminals before ordering any replacement electrical component. Contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 if confirmation is needed before placing the order.

 

Finish and Cover Components

Which Finish Plate Does the LCN 2310ME Use?

The 2310ME has two finish plate options ordered separately. Both require a finish specification (F) at order.

Part NumberNameWhen to Order
2310ME-11Finish PlateStandard frame depth
2310ME-12Short Finish PlateShallow frame depth where the standard plate does not fit

LCN 2310ME-11 finish plate for the 2310ME Sentronic door closer

Measure the frame depth before ordering. The cover screw (2310ME-31) secures the finish plate and is ordered separately. Note that the 2310ME-72 in the LCN catalog refers to both the finish plate 11 and short finish plate 12 together as a combined set. When ordering at Security Parts, order each plate individually by its specific part number.

 

What Is the LCN 2310ME Fire Shield?

The 2310ME-420 fire shield is used in fire-rated installations of the 2310ME closer. No specification is required at order. If the fire shield is damaged or missing from a fire-rated installation, replace it before returning the door to service. On fire-rated openings, missing or damaged components that are part of the rated assembly may affect code compliance.

LCN 2310ME-420 fire shield for fire-rated installations of the 2310ME Sentronic closer

 

Screw Packs and Hardware

Which Screw Pack Do I Need for the LCN 2310ME?

The 2310ME uses two different screw packs depending on the door substrate and mounting method. Both require a finish specification (F) at order.

Part NumberNameUse For
2310ME-WMSWood-Machine Screw PackWood or hollow metal doors using wood-thread fasteners alongside machine screws
2310ME-TORXTorx Machine Screw PackMetal frame installations using Torx-head machine screws

Confirm the door substrate and mounting method before ordering. Ordering the wrong screw pack will require a separate order before installation can proceed.

 

What Happens When Power Is Cut to the LCN 2310ME?

When electrical current to the 2310ME is interrupted, the hold-open mechanism releases immediately and the door closes under its own spring force. The closer then functions as a standard full rack-and-pinion door closer until power is restored and the hold-open signal is re-engaged. This fail-safe behavior is required for fire and smoke barrier door applications and is built into the 2310ME by design.

 

What Should I Do If the Door Slams Shut After Power Interruption?

If the door closes faster than the normal 5 to 7 second range, the closing speed adjustment valve may be set too fast. Use a 3/32-inch hex wrench and adjust the closing speed valve slowly. Test the door after each adjustment. Do not allow the door to slam into the frame under any spring setting. Slamming causes damage to the frame, latch hardware, and arm assembly over time.

If adjusting the closing speed valve does not correct the problem, inspect the track roller (2310ME-3034) for wear. A worn roller provides less resistance during the closing cycle and can make the door appear to close faster than expected. Replace the track roller if it shows visible wear or flat spots.

 

Can the LCN 2310ME Be Released Manually Without Cutting Power?

Yes. Pulling the door firmly when it is in the held-open position releases the hold-open mechanism and allows the door to close under spring power. This is the manual release method described in the LCN installation instructions for the 2310ME. The door should close completely after a manual release. If it does not close and latch, inspect the spring power setting and confirm the closing speed valve is not over-restricted.

The LCN ME Series does not provide a solid 180-degree hold-open position. The hold-open position is adjustable within the closer's range. If a 180-degree hold-open is required, a different product type is needed.

For guidance on door closer sizing and adjustment, see the LCN door closer sizing guide and the guide to adjusting a commercial door closer.

 

How Do I Order the Correct LCN 2310ME Replacement Part?

Several 2310ME parts require specification at the time of order. Using the wrong variant will result in a part that does not fit or does not function correctly. The table below summarizes what to confirm before placing each type of order.

What to ConfirmApplies To These Parts
Hand of the door (left or right)2310ME-3077T standard arm
Finish of existing hardwareStandard arm, finish plates, standard track, screw packs
Voltage of the electrical system (24V or 120V)2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly
AC or DC input type2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly (circuitry accepts both)
Closer size (3 or 4)Cylinder assemblies (size-specific, not adjustable)
Frame depth (standard or shallow)2310ME-11 vs 2310ME-12 finish plate
Door substrate (wood vs metal frame)2310ME-WMS vs 2310ME-TORX screw pack
Installation date (before or after February 2016)Track roller and standard track (redesigned Feb 2016)

 

How to Identify the Hand of a 2310ME Installation

Stand on the outside of the door (the side the door swings away from when opened). If the hinges are on the right, the door is right-hand. If the hinges are on the left, the door is left-hand. The 2310ME standard arm is handed and confirming this before ordering prevents receiving the wrong variant.

 

How to Identify the Finish of an Existing 2310ME Component

LCN closer hardware is available in standard finish codes. Common codes include 689 for aluminum, 693 for dark bronze, and 626 for satin chrome. If the finish designation is not legible on the existing hardware, match it visually and confirm with Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering.

 

What Is Included in the LCN 2310ME Rebox Kit?

The 2310ME Rebox Kit includes the box and instruction sheet for the closer. The rebox kit, flat box, and instruction sheet are each available individually and do not require any specification at order. These are ordered when original packaging and documentation need to be replaced for a reinstallation or compliance inspection.

 

LCN 2310ME Troubleshooting: Hold-Open and Closing Issues

The troubleshooting guidance below is based on verified LCN documentation. It covers the most common issues reported on Sentronic ME Series closers. For complex electrical faults, contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering parts.

 

What Causes the LCN 2310ME to Creep Shut?

If the 2310ME creeps shut or will not hold open, first verify that proper voltage is being supplied to the closer. Measure at the wiring terminals and confirm the voltage matches the specification of the installed ME switch assembly. If the voltage is correct, check the on/off switch (ME switch assembly). A faulty or worn switch assembly that is not maintaining the holding signal will cause the door to creep shut even when voltage is present.

Replace the 2310ME-3351 ME switch assembly if voltage is confirmed correct and the on/off switch is not maintaining the hold-open signal. Also inspect the input jumper (2310ME-3431) and transformer (2310ME-3210) if the switch assembly tests correctly.

 

What Causes the LCN 2310ME to Pop Back Into Hold Open While Closing?

If the door pops back into the hold-open position while it is in the process of closing, the closing speed adjustment is set too fast. A fast closing speed can cause the door to rebound and re-engage the hold-open before it travels through the full closing cycle. Slow down the closing speed valve using a 3/32-inch hex wrench and retest. If the issue continues after adjusting the closing speed, contact Security Parts for further guidance.

 

What Causes the LCN 2310ME to Close Too Slowly or Fail to Latch?

If the door closes slowly or fails to latch, check the spring power adjustment first. The maximum spring increase is 18 turns clockwise from the factory setting. Closing power of the 2310ME Series may be increased up to 15%. If the spring is already at maximum and the door still fails to latch, inspect the track roller (2310ME-3034) for wear or binding inside the track. A worn roller creates resistance during the closing cycle and can prevent consistent latching on high-traffic or heavy doors.

For guidance on installing a commercial door closer and adjusting it correctly, see the how to install a commercial door closer guide.

 

Routine Maintenance and Inspection Checklist for the LCN 2310ME

Scheduled maintenance on the 2310ME reduces unplanned part replacements and keeps fire-rated openings code-compliant. The following checks should be part of every maintenance visit on an installation that uses the 2310ME.

What to Inspect During Routine 2310ME Maintenance

  • Track roller (2310ME-3034): Look for flat spots, cracking, or wear on the roller surface. A worn roller is the most common source of noise and inconsistent closing speed on this series. Check the shoulder dimension is intact and the roller moves freely inside the track.
  • Standard track (2310ME-3038): Inspect for bending, cracking, or debris inside the channel. Clean the track channel and confirm the roller moves through the full travel range without binding.
  • Arm screw and roller lock screw: Check the 2310ME-159 arm screw and 2310ME-425 roller lock screw for tightness. Loose fasteners cause play in the arm-to-shaft connection and accelerate wear on both the arm and closer shaft.
  • Wiring connections: Inspect connections at the ME switch assembly (2310ME-3351) and transformer (2310ME-3210) for loose terminals, corrosion, or damaged insulation. Loose or corroded connections are a common cause of intermittent hold-open failure.
  • Closing test: Open the door to approximately 90 degrees, release it, and confirm it closes and latches within 5 to 7 seconds. If it does not, check the spring setting and the track roller.
  • Hold-open test: Verify the door holds open when the electrical signal is active. Then interrupt the power supply or activate a fire alarm test signal and confirm the door closes fully and latches. If the door does not close and latch during this test, troubleshoot the ME switch assembly and spring power before ordering parts.
  • Wiring cover and fire shield: Confirm the 2310ME-172 wiring cover and the 2310ME-420 fire shield (on fire-rated installations) are present, intact, and properly secured.

 

LCN 2310ME vs Other LCN Sentronic Models: Which Parts Guide to Use

The 2310ME, 4310ME, and 4410ME are all part of the Sentronic ME series but have different mounting configurations and different part numbers. The 2310ME mounts concealed in the frame. The 4310ME mounts on the hinge pull side. The 4410ME mounts on the top jamb push side. Do not substitute parts between these models without confirming compatibility with Security Parts.

ModelMountingResource
LCN 2310MEConcealed in frameThis guide
LCN 9150 BenchmarkOverhead concealed operatorLCN 9150 Parts Guide
LCN Senior Swing IQSurface mounted operatorLCN Senior Swing IQ Parts Guide
LCN 9530IQ SlideProOverhead slide operatorLCN 9530IQ Parts Guide
Any LCN surface mechanical closerSurface mountedDoor Closers Parts Guide
Any LCN door operatorVariousDoor Operators Parts Guide

 

About Security Parts

Security Parts stocks replacement parts for commercial door closers, door operators, exit devices, and access hardware. All 18 LCN 2310ME parts listed in this guide are stocked and verified for immediate ordering. Security Parts serves facility managers, locksmiths, door hardware distributors, and maintenance professionals who need the correct part quickly without sourcing delays.

Call 845-935-0301 to confirm part specifications, check availability, or get guidance on a specific 2310ME installation. All 18 LCN 2310ME parts are available to order at Security Parts now.

 

Related Resources at Security Parts

LCN 9150 Parts Guide: Motor, Arms, Control Box, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 21 replacement parts for the LCN 9150 Benchmark electromechanical swing door operator. The key components are the 9150-3454S motor gearbox assembly with switch, the 9150-3462SC standard control box, the 9150-77 main arm, the 9150-3077 regular arm and 9150-3077L long arm, the 9150-79 rod and shoe, the 9150-72MC metal cover, the 9150-3018 mounting bracket, the 9150-360 24v SO kit, three switch bracket sizes, three screw pack variants, and cover components. All 21 parts are confirmed in stock.

 

What Is the LCN 9150?

The LCN 9150 is a low-energy electromechanical swing door operator in the LCN Benchmark series. It is designed for top-jamb push-side mounting on paired interior commercial doors and is widely installed in healthcare facilities, government buildings, universities, and commercial offices where ADA-compliant automatic access is required.

The 9150 operates by using a motor gearbox to physically swing the door open on activation, hold it open for an adjustable period, then close it. It includes Push N Go activation, which allows non-switch activation when a pedestrian manually pushes the door to approximately 5 degrees. The operator detects the movement and takes over, carrying the door to the full open position automatically. Power Boost provides additional closing force near the latch to overcome wind load and seal resistance.

The 9150 meets ANSI/BHMA A156.19, ANSI A117.1, UL 325, and ADA requirements, and is UL listed for fire-rated applications.

 

How Does the LCN 9150 Differ from the 9130 and 9140?

All three models belong to the Benchmark series and share the same part families. The mounting configuration is what separates them:

ModelMounting SideDoor Configuration
9130Pull sideSingle door
9140Push sideSingle door
9150Push side, top jambPaired doors (independent or simultaneous pair)

The 9150 ships with two motor gearboxes and two control boxes, one for each door leaf. If you have a pair of doors with an operator across the full header, you have a 9150 installation. For the full Benchmark series parts catalog, see the LCN 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark series page.

 

What Parts Does the LCN 9150 Come With from the Factory?

The LCN 9150 ships from the factory with the following components included as standard:

  • Motor gearboxes (two, one per door leaf)
  • Control boxes (two, one per door leaf)
  • Mounting plate (operator mounting bracket)
  • Regular arms (two, one per leaf)
  • 72-inch metal cover (non-handed, extruded aluminum)
  • Wood and machine screw packs

Actuators, wall switches, motion sensors, and other activation devices are not included in the standard shipment and must be ordered separately.

 

LCN 9150 Parts by Component Category

Motor Gearbox Assembly

LCN 9150-3454S motor gearbox assembly with switch for LCN 9150 Benchmark electromechanical door operator

LCN 9150-3454S Motor Gearbox Assembly with Switch. The primary drive unit for the LCN 9150 operator. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
9150-3454SMotor Gearbox Assembly with SwitchThe drive unit that physically opens the door. Converts electrical power into arm rotation through a gear reduction system. Switch included for on/off control.

 

How Do I Know If the Motor Gearbox Has Failed?

The motor gearbox is the most costly replacement component on the 9150. Before ordering, confirm the failure is in the motor gearbox and not the control box or wiring. The control box has two LED indicator lights: one showing power to the control box itself and one showing power to the motor gearbox. If the motor gearbox LED is off while the control box LED is on, the fault is in the motor gearbox or the cable connection between the two units. If both LEDs are off, the fault is upstream in the power supply or wiring.

Motor gearbox failure symptoms include the door not moving at all when an activation signal is received, the arm moving weakly without enough force to open the door against normal resistance, or the door opening but not completing the full travel arc.

 

Control Box

LCN 9150-3462SC standard control box for LCN 9150 Benchmark door operator

LCN 9150-3462SC Standard Control Box. The microprocessor controller that manages all operator functions including Push N Go, opening time, hold-open delay, and Power Boost. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
9150-3462SCStandard Control BoxMicroprocessor controller managing opening speed, closing speed, hold-open time delay (adjustable up to approximately 30 seconds), Power Boost, and Push N Go. All potentiometers are clearly labeled. LED lights indicate power status to control box and motor gearbox.

 

What Does Push N Go Do and Why Does It Matter for Parts?

Push N Go is the feature that allows the 9150 to operate without a wall switch or sensor activation. When someone manually pushes the door open to approximately 5 degrees, the control box detects the movement through the motor gearbox's built-in sensor and takes over, carrying the door to the full open position. After the hold-open delay expires, the control box signals the motor gearbox to close the door.

When Push N Go stops working -- the door opens manually but the operator does not take over -- the fault is almost always in the control box or the connection between the control box and motor gearbox, not in the motor gearbox itself. Replacing the control box (9150-3462SC) is the correct diagnostic step before replacing the motor gearbox (9150-3454S).

 

How Do I Identify a Failed Control Box Versus a Failed Motor Gearbox?

  • Control box fault: Door does not respond to activation signals. Push N Go not working. Door opens but does not hold for the set delay. Opening or closing speed cannot be adjusted. Both LEDs off when power is confirmed at the wall outlet.
  • Motor gearbox fault: Control box LED is on but motor gearbox LED is off. Door does not move despite a valid activation signal. Arm moves but without enough force to open the door. Unusual noise from the operator housing during activation.

 

Mounting Bracket

LCN 9150-3018 mounting bracket for LCN 9150 Benchmark operator installation

LCN 9150-3018 Mounting Bracket. The standard bracket that mounts the motor gearbox to the header frame. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescription
9150-3018Mounting Bracket. Standard bracket that attaches the motor gearbox assembly to the header frame or door frame. Requires a minimum head frame of 2 inches (51mm) and minimum top rail of 2 inches (51mm). Flush ceiling installation requires a minimum of 5-1/4 inches clearance.

 

Arms

LCN 9150-77 main arm for LCN 9150 Benchmark door operator

LCN 9150-77 Main Arm. The primary connection arm between the operator spindle and the door. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse When
9150-77Main ArmPrimary arm connecting operator spindle to door. Non-handed. Use for standard push-side mounting configurations.
9150-3077Regular ArmNon-handed regular arm. Push installations where reveal does not exceed 6 inches (152mm). Ships as standard with the 9150.
9150-3077LLong ArmNon-handed long arm. Push installations where reveal is between 6 inches and 9-3/4 inches (248mm). Required when standard arm does not have enough reach for the door geometry.

 

How Do I Choose Between the Regular Arm and the Long Arm?

Measure the reveal of the installation. The reveal is the distance from the face of the door to the face of the frame on the push side. If the reveal is 6 inches or less, the 9150-3077 regular arm is correct. If the reveal is between 6 inches and 9-3/4 inches, the 9150-3077L long arm is required. Using the regular arm on a reveal that requires a long arm will result in incorrect arm geometry and poor door control. The operator will not be able to swing the door to the full open angle.

 

Rod and Shoe

LCN 9150-79 rod and shoe for LCN 9150 Benchmark door operator standard arm

LCN 9150-79 Rod and Shoe. Connects the arm to the door surface on push-side installations. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionPaired With
9150-79Rod and ShoePaired with 9150-3077 regular arm. For standard-reveal push installations.
9150-79LRLong Rod and ShoePaired with 9150-3077L long arm. For deep-reveal push installations where a longer rod is required.

 

Cover and Trim Components

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
9150-72MCMetal Cover, 72 inchNon-handed extruded aluminum cover enclosing the operator assembly. Standard length is 72 inches. Ships as standard with the 9150 operator.
9150-163Cover InsertInsert that covers the operator shaft opening in the cover. Prevents debris entry and completes the finished appearance.
9150-163-1Cover Endcap InsertsInserts that fit inside the cover endcaps at each end of the cover. Complete the sealed appearance at the cover ends.
9150-334Cover EndcapsBlack plastic endcaps that close each end of the cover assembly. Replace when cracked, missing, or damaged.

 

AC Power Cable

Part NumberDescription
9150-3498-2AAC Power Cable, 29 inch. Connects the control box to the motor gearbox. Replace when the cable is damaged, shows visible insulation wear, or when the motor gearbox LED is off and the cable and connectors have been confirmed as the fault point.

 

Secondary Output (SO) Kit

Part NumberDescription
9150-36024v SO Kit. Enables the secondary output circuit on the 9150 operator. The secondary output activates when the operator receives an open command, allowing it to trigger an accessory device such as a door hold-open relay, an electric strike, or an access control output. This is an optional accessory not included in the standard operator shipment. Order this when adding secondary output functionality to an existing 9150 installation.

 

Switch Brackets

Part NumberDescriptionLength
9150-3351-1Switch Bracket29 inch
9150-3351-2Switch Bracket41 inch
9150-3351-3Switch Bracket51 inch

The switch bracket positions the on/off switch at the end of the operator cover. The correct size depends on the door width and the length of the cover assembly. Measure the installed cover length to determine which bracket size applies.

 

Screw Packs

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
9150-MS-PUSHScrew Pack, Push ArmPush-side arm mounting configurations
9150-MS-PULLScrew Pack, Pull ArmPull-side arm mounting configurations
9150-MS-HDRScrew Pack, HeaderHeader mounting

 

Documentation and Packaging

Part NumberDescription
9150-Rebox KitRebox Kit including box and instruction sheet. Used when repackaging or documenting a field unit.

 

Troubleshooting Common LCN 9150 Problems

Why Is the LCN 9150 Not Opening the Door?

Check in this order before ordering parts:

  1. Confirm the on/off switch on the operator cover is set to On. This is the most common service call for an operator that appears dead.
  2. Confirm power is reaching the control box. Check the LED on the control box. If it is off, the fault is in the power supply, circuit breaker, or wiring to the unit, not in the operator itself.
  3. If the control box LED is on but the motor gearbox LED is off, check the AC power cable (9150-3498-2A) connection between the two units. If the cable is secure and the motor gearbox LED is still off, the motor gearbox (9150-3454S) needs replacement.
  4. If both LEDs are on and the door still does not open on activation, try a manual Push N Go activation. If Push N Go works but switch activation does not, the fault is in the activation device (wall switch, sensor, or actuator), not in the operator components.

 

Why Is the LCN 9150 Not Holding the Door Open?

The hold-open delay is set by the potentiometer on the control box (9150-3462SC). If the door is not holding open for the expected duration, the potentiometer setting may have drifted or the control box may have lost its settings. Adjust the hold-open time potentiometer on the control box. If adjustments have no effect, the control box needs replacement.

 

Why Is the LCN 9150 Door Closing Too Hard or Too Fast?

Opening speed and closing speed are both adjustable via potentiometers on the control box. If the door is closing too fast or with too much force, the closing speed setting may have been changed or the Power Boost setting may be too high. Adjust the closing speed and Power Boost potentiometers on the 9150-3462SC control box. If the behavior cannot be corrected through adjustment, the control box needs replacement.

 

Why Is the Arm Not Reaching the Door on the Push Side?

If the arm is not reaching the door or the geometry appears incorrect, the arm may be the wrong type for the reveal depth. Measure the reveal from the door face to the frame face on the push side. A reveal over 6 inches requires the 9150-3077L long arm and the 9150-79LR long rod and shoe. Using the standard 9150-3077 arm on a deep-reveal installation is the most common arm-related service error.

 

LCN 9150 Installation Requirements That Affect Part Selection

Before ordering any replacement arm, rod, bracket, or cover for the LCN 9150, confirm the installation dimensions. The 9150 is a paired-door operator and its parts selection depends on several measurable site conditions.

 

What Are the Head Frame and Top Rail Requirements for the LCN 9150?

The LCN 9150 requires a minimum head frame depth of 2 inches (51mm) and a minimum top rail depth of 2 inches (51mm). These minimums are required for the mounting bracket (9150-3018) to seat properly. If the head frame is narrower than 2 inches, the standard mounting configuration is not possible and an alternate bracket solution is needed. For flush ceiling installations, 5-1/4 inches of clearance above the door is required.

 

What Are the Reveal Limits for the LCN 9150 Push Arm?

Push installations must not exceed 6 inches (152mm) of reveal when using the regular arm (9150-3077). For reveals between 6 inches and 9-3/4 inches (248mm), the long arm (9150-3077L) with the long rod and shoe (9150-79LR) is required. These are not guidelines -- exceeding the reveal limit with the wrong arm results in mechanical binding, incorrect door travel, and potential damage to the operator spindle.

 

What Compliance Standards Does the LCN 9150 Meet?

The LCN 9150 meets the following standards, which are important for facilities managers ordering replacement parts on code-compliant openings:

  • ANSI/BHMA A156.19 -- Low-energy power-operated doors
  • ANSI A117.1 -- Accessibility requirements
  • Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliant
  • UL 325 listed
  • UL listed for fire-rated applications

When replacing components on a fire-rated opening, confirm that all replacement parts are the same specification as the originals. Do not substitute non-OEM components on fire-rated applications without confirming compliance with the authority having jurisdiction.

 

How to Identify Your LCN 9150 Before Ordering Parts

The date of manufacture label on the LCN 9150 is on the operator body, typically inside the cover near the control box. It shows the model number (9150 for a paired-door push-side installation), the manufacturing date, and the serial number. Confirm the model number before ordering any replacement component.

If the label is unreadable, identify the operator by the configuration:

  • A paired header with an operator on both door leaves, mounted on the push side, is a 9150 installation.
  • A single-door installation on the pull side is a 9130.
  • A single-door installation on the push side is a 9140.

Parts from the 9130 and 9140 share many part numbers with the 9150 because all three are Benchmark series operators. The motor gearbox, control box, arms, rods, and cover components are common across the three series. Always verify the part number prefix matches your specific model before ordering.

For a broader overview of LCN door operator component categories and what failure looks like in each one, see the door operators parts guide.

 

What Does Each Potentiometer Do on the LCN 9150 Control Box?

The LCN 9150-3462SC control box has five labeled potentiometers. Each one controls a separate phase of the door cycle. When the door is behaving incorrectly, knowing which potentiometer to adjust avoids unnecessary part replacement.

 

PotentiometerWhat It ControlsAdjust When
Opening SpeedSpeed at which the motor drives the door from closed to backcheck positionDoor opens too fast (impact risk) or too slowly for the intended traffic flow
Backcheck SpeedSpeed at which the door decelerates from the backcheck position to the full open positionDoor slams against the stop at full open, or decelerates too early
Hold Open Time DelayHow many seconds the door holds at the full open position before beginning to close. Adjustable up to approximately 30 seconds.Door closes before occupants can pass, or holds open too long
Closing SpeedSpeed at which the spring closes the door from full open to latch positionDoor closes too fast (slamming) or too slowly (fails to latch consistently)
Latch PositionThe point at which additional closing assistance is applied near the latch to overcome seal resistance. This is the Power Boost zone.Door consistently fails to latch in the final inch of travel

 

All five potentiometers are clearly labeled on the 9150-3462SC control box. Adjustment is made with a small flathead screwdriver through the access point on the control box face. Always make small adjustments and test the door cycle before adjusting further. If potentiometer adjustment has no effect on the symptom, the control box needs replacement.

 

What Does Each LED Mean on the LCN 9150 Control Box?

The 9150-3462SC control box has two LED indicator lights. Understanding exactly what each LED indicates prevents misdiagnosis before ordering replacement parts.

 

LEDWhen It Is OnWhen It Is Off
Power LEDPower is applied to the control board. Stays on as long as power is connected, including during hold-open and closing.Power is not reaching the control board. Fault is in power supply, circuit breaker, or wiring upstream of the control box.
Motor LEDMotor drive circuit is energized. This only happens during the opening stroke of the door cycle.Motor is not running. This is NORMAL during hold-open and closing -- the motor LED being off during closing does not indicate a fault.

 

Key diagnostic rule: If the Power LED is on but the Motor LED stays off when an open signal is sent and the door does not move, the fault is in the motor gearbox (9150-3454S) or the AC power cable (9150-3498-2A) connecting it to the control box. If the Power LED is also off, the fault is upstream of the control box in the power supply or circuit.

 

How Do I Run a Sizing Cycle After Replacing the LCN 9150 Motor Gearbox?

After replacing the motor gearbox (9150-3454S), a sizing cycle must be completed before the operator returns to normal automatic service. The sizing cycle allows the control box to learn the full travel of the door and set the open counter correctly.

During the sizing cycle, the door drives automatically to the full open position. The speed during sizing is controlled automatically by the control box and cannot be adjusted from the potentiometers. Once the door reaches the full open position, the system sets the open counter and the operator is ready for normal use.

If the sizing cycle is skipped after a motor gearbox replacement, the operator will not function correctly and may reverse or stop short of the full open position. The sizing cycle is also required any time the mounting bracket position is changed or the door travel geometry is altered.

 

What Happens to the LCN 9150 During a Power Failure?

The LCN 9150 Benchmark is designed to function as a manual door closer during a power failure. When power is lost, the motor drive circuit deactivates and the door falls back to spring-powered operation at Size 3 spring force. This allows the door to continue closing under spring power even without electricity, which is critical for fire-rated openings where the door must close and latch on a power interruption.

This behavior means a fire-rated 9150 installation will still protect the opening during a power outage. It also means that during a power outage, if the door is not closing correctly, the fault may be in the spring mechanism rather than the motor or control box. Inspect the spring and arm geometry before ordering electronic components when the symptom occurs during a power outage.

 

What Is the Minimum Door Width for the LCN 9150?

Confirm the door width before ordering parts to ensure the 9150 is the correct model for the installation.

 

ConfigurationMinimum Door Width
27-inch push operator (standard 9150)26 inches minimum per leaf
27-inch pull operator30 inches minimum per leaf
Head frame minimum2 inches (51mm)
Top rail minimum2 inches (51mm)
Flush ceiling clearance5-1/4 inches above door

 

Does the LCN 9150 Require a Certified Technician to Service?

LCN states that technicians must be AAADM (American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers) certified to work on or service automatic door operators. AAADM certification is a training and safety standard for professionals who install and service power-operated pedestrian doors.

Facilities managers and building engineers can identify failing components, read the LED indicators, and make basic potentiometer adjustments. However, full disassembly, motor gearbox replacement, and sizing cycle completion should be performed by an AAADM-certified technician to ensure proper operation on fire-rated and ADA-compliant openings. Call 845-935-0301 to discuss part identification before placing an order.

 

Complete LCN 9150 Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
9150-3454SMotor Gearbox Assembly with SwitchMotor
9150-3462SCStandard Control BoxController
9150-3018Mounting BracketMounting
9150-77Main ArmArm
9150-3077Regular Arm (non-handed)Arm
9150-3077LLong Arm (non-handed)Arm
9150-79Rod and Shoe (regular arm)Arm / Rod
9150-79LRLong Rod and Shoe (long arm)Arm / Rod
9150-72MCMetal Cover, 72 inchCover
9150-163Cover InsertCover
9150-163-1Cover Endcap InsertsCover
9150-334Cover EndcapsCover
9150-3498-2AAC Power Cable, 29 inchElectrical
9150-36024v SO KitAccessory
9150-3351-1Switch Bracket, 29 inchSwitch Bracket
9150-3351-2Switch Bracket, 41 inchSwitch Bracket
9150-3351-3Switch Bracket, 51 inchSwitch Bracket
9150-MS-PUSHScrew Pack, Push ArmScrew Pack
9150-MS-PULLScrew Pack, Pull ArmScrew Pack
9150-MS-HDRScrew Pack, HeaderScrew Pack
9150-Rebox KitRebox Kit, Box and Instruction SheetDocumentation

 

Where to Order LCN 9150 Parts

Security Parts stocks all 21 LCN 9150 replacement components. Parts ship same day when ordered before the daily cut-off. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support or to confirm a part number before placing an order.

For the broader LCN door operator parts catalog organized by operator series, see the door operators parts guide. For LCN power-assist sliding door operator parts, see the LCN 9530IQ parts guide. For the full Benchmark series parts catalog covering the 9130, 9140, and 9150, see the LCN 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark series page. For all door operator parts and accessories, see the door operators category.

 

About This Guide

Written by the Security Parts team. Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware components to facilities managers, building engineers, contractors, and service technicians since 2001. All 21 LCN 9150 parts listed in this guide are verified in stock with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification or compatibility support. For related operator parts guides, see the door operators parts guide and the LCN 9530IQ parts guide.

Adams Rite 41 Series Parts Guide: SVR, CVR, Escutcheons, and Replacement Assemblies

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 39 replacement parts in the Adams Rite 41 series. These components service Adams Rite SVR (surface vertical rod) and CVR (concealed vertical rod) exit devices used on narrow stile glass and aluminum storefront doors. The 41 series covers SVR and CVR final assemblies, rod assemblies, end cap assemblies, escutcheon operators (IP and IB types), paddle assemblies, latch assemblies, bolt guide kits, micro switch assemblies, and rivnut tool kits. All 39 parts are confirmed in stock at Security Parts.

 

What Is the Adams Rite 41 Series?

The Adams Rite 41 series is the replacement parts numbering family for Adams Rite vertical rod exit devices. Any part number beginning with "41-" belongs to this family and covers the internal mechanical assemblies, trim components, and service tools that keep SVR and CVR exit devices operating correctly.

These parts are most commonly found on narrow stile aluminum storefront doors in commercial retail, office, and educational facilities. The exit device pushes the rods to retract the top and bottom bolts simultaneously when someone presses the push bar or paddle, allowing the door to open. When the mechanism wears or a component fails, the 41 series is where the replacement parts come from.

The 41 series is distinct from the Adams Rite 91 series, which covers trim hardware (lever kits, faceplates, and strikes). If you are looking for trim or handle components, see the Adams Rite parts guide. If you need the full exit device assembly rather than individual replacement parts, see the exit devices category.

 

What Is the Difference Between SVR and CVR Parts?

Understanding this distinction before ordering is critical. Ordering a CVR part for an SVR device or vice versa results in a part that will not fit the mechanism.

 

SVR (Surface Vertical Rod)

SVR exit devices mount the vertical rods on the surface of the door, running along the outside face of the stile. The rods are visible when the door is closed and are accessible for inspection and service without disassembly of the door itself. Because SVR rods are exposed, they are more likely to need service over time. Bottom rod drag is one of the most common SVR service issues: the lower rod extends too far and scrapes the floor, scribing an arc in the threshold area. This requires rod adjustment.

 

CVR (Concealed Vertical Rod)

CVR exit devices run the rods entirely inside the door stile, concealed from view. CVR devices are almost always used on aluminum storefront narrow-stile doors where exposed rods would be impractical or unattractive. Because the rods are hidden inside the door, inspection is more difficult and service requires partial disassembly to access the rod assembly. When diagnosing a CVR problem, inspect the full opening carefully before beginning disassembly, since loose fasteners or debris in the threshold strike can cause symptoms that mimic internal rod failure.

For a full explanation of how SVR and CVR exit devices are installed, see the how to install an exit device guide.

 

Which Adams Rite Exit Device Series Uses 41-Series Parts?

The 41 series serves multiple Adams Rite exit device families. The correct final assembly part number depends on which exit device series is installed. The table below maps the primary device series to the corresponding 41-series SVR or CVR final assembly:

Exit Device SeriesType41-Series Final Assembly Part Number
3100 SeriesSVR41-0235-01 (standard) / 41-0333-01 (3100T variant)
8100 SeriesSVR41-0282-01 (standard) / 41-0333-11 (8100T variant)
8500 SeriesCVR41-0675 (complete with bolts) / 41-0224 / 41-0339 (top rod devices)
8600 SeriesCVR41-0935 (complete with bolts) / 41-0675 / 41-0339 (top rod devices)
4781 Deadlatch/PaddleCVR41-0935

Always confirm the series number from the label on the installed exit device before ordering a final assembly. The label is typically on the push bar housing or end cap.

 

Adams Rite 41 Series Parts by Component Category

SVR Final Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0282-01 SVR final assembly with rods for 8100 series surface vertical rod exit device

Adams Rite 41-0282-01 SVR Final Assembly with Rods. The primary replacement assembly for 8100 series SVR exit devices. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
41-0282-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (complete)8100 series SVR exit devices; replaces the full internal rod and bolt mechanism
41-0333-11SVR Final Assembly -- Top Rod Only8100T series SVR exit devices; replaces only the upper portion of the SVR mechanism when the lower section is intact
41-0235-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (complete)3100 series SVR exit devices
41-0333-01SVR Final Assembly -- Top Rod Only3100T series SVR exit devices

 

When Do I Need the Full SVR Final Assembly Versus the Top Rod Assembly Only?

Order the complete final assembly (41-0282-01 or 41-0235-01) when the full internal mechanism needs replacement -- when the device fails to retract both the top and bottom bolts, or when the overall mechanism is worn or damaged beyond a single component repair.

Order the top rod assembly variant (41-0333-11 or 41-0333-01) when inspection confirms the problem is isolated to the upper rod portion and the lower mechanism is operating correctly. Inspect the device fully before ordering to avoid an unnecessary full-assembly replacement.

 

CVR Final Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0675 CVR final assembly complete with bolts for 8500 and 8600 series concealed vertical rod exit devices

Adams Rite 41-0675 CVR Final Assembly Complete with Bolts. Used on 8500 and 8600 series CVR exit devices. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
41-0675CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts8500 and 8600 series CVR exit devices; complete rod and bolt replacement
41-0224CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts8500 and 8600 series CVR exit devices; alternate variant
41-0935CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts8500/8600 series CVR exit devices and 4781 two-point deadlatch paddle system
41-0339CVR Final Assembly for Top Rod DevicesCVR exit devices where only the top rod CVR mechanism requires replacement

 

Rod Assembly

Part NumberDescription
41-0337Rod Assembly. A standalone rod replacement for use when the rod itself is damaged but the rest of the mechanism is serviceable.

 

End Cap Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0902-03-IP metal end cap assembly for Adams Rite SVR exit device

Adams Rite 41-0902-03-IP Metal End Cap Assembly. The IP designation indicates an integrated pull on this end cap. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescription
41-0902-03-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (Integrated Pull)
41-0902-04-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (Integrated Pull) -- alternate variant
41-0902-05-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (Integrated Pull) -- alternate variant
41-0903-119Metal End Cap Assembly, Clear Anodized (finish 119)

 

What Does IP Mean on an Adams Rite 41 Series Part Number?

IP stands for Integrated Pull. On end cap and escutcheon assemblies, the IP designation means the pull handle is built directly into the assembly. This is the standard configuration for narrow stile glass and aluminum storefront doors where a separate pull handle is not installed. When replacing an end cap or escutcheon on a storefront door, check whether the existing hardware has an integrated pull before ordering -- an assembly without the IP designation will not include the pull.

 

Latch Assemblies

Adams Rite 41-0296-02 latch assembly RHR for 3300 series Adams Rite exit device

Adams Rite 41-0296-02 Latch Assembly (RHR), for 3300 series exit devices. Latch assemblies are handed -- confirm the door hand before ordering. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionHand
41-0296-01Latch Assembly for 3300 SeriesLHR (left hand reverse)
41-0296-02Latch Assembly for 3300 SeriesRHR (right hand reverse)

Latch assemblies are handed. LHR (left hand reverse) and RHR (right hand reverse) are not interchangeable. Determine the door hand before ordering: standing on the outside of the door, facing the door, a right-hand reverse door has the hinges on the right. If uncertain, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for pre-order hand verification support.

 

Escutcheon Assemblies

What Does IB Mean on an Adams Rite 41 Series Part Number?

IB stands for Integrated Bolt. IB escutcheon assemblies are designed for doors where a deadbolt function is integrated into the exit device trim. The IB series includes separate interior and exterior components. Interior escutcheon operators mount on the inside of the door; exterior escutcheons mount on the outside. These are not interchangeable -- ordering the wrong designation results in a part that installs on the wrong side.

Adams Rite 41-0942-01-119 IB interior escutcheon operator clear anodized for Adams Rite exit device

Adams Rite 41-0942-01-119 IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Clear Anodized (finish 119). View product page.

 

IB Interior Escutcheon Operators (41-0397 and 41-0942 series):

Part NumberFinish
41-0397-01IB Interior Escutcheon Operator
41-0397-02IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 02
41-0397-06IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 06
41-0942-01-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Clear Anodized
41-0942-01-121IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, finish 121
41-0942-01-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Dark Bronze Anodized
41-0942-02-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 02, Clear Anodized
41-0942-09-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 09, Clear Anodized
41-0942-09-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 09, Dark Bronze Anodized
41-0942-10-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 10, Clear Anodized
41-0942-11-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 11, Clear Anodized
41-0942-11-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator -- variant 11, Dark Bronze Anodized

 

IB Exterior Escutcheons (41-0405 and 41-0943 series):

Part NumberDescription
41-0405-00-01-IBExterior Escutcheon for 4431 series -- IB
41-0943-1-119-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Clear Anodized
41-0943-1-130-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Dark Bronze Anodized

 

Paddle Assemblies

Part NumberDescriptionFinish
41-0119-628Paddle Assembly628 -- Satin Aluminum
41-0119-313Paddle Assembly313 -- Dark Bronze
41-0119-335Paddle Assembly335 -- Black

 

What Finish Codes Are Available for Adams Rite 41 Series Paddles and Escutcheons?

Finish codes appear as a three-digit number at the end of the part number. Common codes in the 41 series:

Finish CodeDescription
119Clear Anodized
121Duranodic Bronze (medium bronze anodized)
130Dark Bronze Anodized
313Dark Bronze (non-anodized)
335Black
628Satin Aluminum

Match the existing hardware finish before ordering. If the existing part number label on the door is unreadable, match visually: satin aluminum is a brushed silver, dark bronze anodized has a warm brown tone, and black is a flat matte finish.

 

IP Escutcheon Assemblies (Integrated Pull, Non-IB)

Part NumberDescription
41-0123-02-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP -- Push to Left configuration
41-0123-04-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP -- Push to Right configuration

The push direction (left or right) refers to the direction the door pushes open from the outside. Confirm the door swing direction before ordering.

 

Bolt Guide Assembly Kit

Part NumberDescription
41-0827-02-IPBolt Guide Assembly Kit, IP. Used on 4015 series applications. Guides the bolt along the correct path inside the door stile during actuation.

 

Micro Switch Assembly

Part NumberDescription
41-0193-01Micro Switch Assembly with Wires. Used in electrified exit device applications where a signal is sent when the push bar or paddle is depressed. The assembly includes pre-attached wires for connection to the access control or alarm circuit. Replace when the switch no longer signals correctly on activation.

 

Rivnut Tool Kits

What Is the Adams Rite Rivnut Tool Kit Used For?

The Adams Rite 41-0975 rivnut tool kit is a specialized service tool for exit device installations where a rivnut anchor point in the door frame or stile has been stripped or damaged. A rivnut is a threaded insert that is pressed into the door to provide a secure mounting point for exit device screws. When an original rivnut spins or strips, the exit device cannot be securely fastened without re-establishing that anchor. The rivnut tool kit allows the technician to install a new rivnut in place of the damaged one.

Two variants are stocked: 41-0975-02 and 41-0975-04. These are specialized tool kits, not hardware parts -- they are reusable installation tools kept in the service kit rather than left in the door.

 

How to Identify Which Adams Rite 41 Series Part You Need

Follow this order before placing any 41 series parts order:

  1. Confirm the exit device series. Locate the label on the push bar housing or end cap. It will show the series number (3100, 8100, 8500, 8600). This determines which final assembly applies.
  2. Confirm SVR or CVR. Look at the door. Visible rods on the door surface indicate SVR. No visible rods (rods inside the door stile) indicate CVR.
  3. Confirm IP or IB requirement. If replacing an escutcheon or end cap, check whether the existing hardware has an integrated pull (IP) or integrated bolt (IB). These are not interchangeable.
  4. Confirm interior or exterior escutcheon. For IB escutcheons, confirm which side of the door the part mounts on before ordering.
  5. Confirm door hand for latch assemblies. LHR and RHR latch assemblies are separate parts. Determine hand before ordering.
  6. Confirm finish code. For paddles and escutcheons, match the three-digit finish code to the existing hardware.

If you cannot read the model label or finish code, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support.

 

Troubleshooting Common Adams Rite Vertical Rod Exit Device Problems

Why Is My Adams Rite SVR Bottom Rod Dragging on the Floor?

Bottom rod drag is one of the most common SVR service issues. When the lower rod extends too far, it contacts the threshold or floor and scribes an arc as the door swings. This is not a parts failure in most cases -- it is an adjustment issue. The lower rod needs to be trimmed or repositioned to the correct length for the door height. This adjustment may need to be repeated periodically as the door or frame settles. If the rod is physically bent or damaged, replace the rod assembly (41-0337) or the relevant final assembly.

 

Why Will the Device Not Dog?

Dogging holds the exit device in the unlatched position so the door can be opened without pressing the push bar. If the device will not dog, check that the hex key is being turned the correct direction (clockwise to dog, counterclockwise to release on most models). Also confirm the push bar is fully depressed and held before turning the key. A worn dogging assembly may also prevent engagement -- this is a 31-series part, not a 41-series part, and is covered separately in the exit devices parts guide.

 

Why Are the Top or Bottom Bolts Not Retracting?

When only one bolt fails to retract, the problem is usually localized to the rod or latch on that end of the door. For SVR devices, inspect the visible rod and strike for bends, corrosion, or physical damage. For CVR devices, inspect the threshold strike for debris or misalignment before assuming internal rod failure. If the full mechanism fails to retract both bolts, the final assembly may need replacement.

 

Complete Adams Rite 41 Series Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
41-0282-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (8100 series)SVR Final Assembly
41-0333-11SVR Final Assembly, Top Rod (8100T)SVR Final Assembly
41-0235-01SVR Final Assembly with Rods (3100 series)SVR Final Assembly
41-0333-01SVR Final Assembly, Top Rod (3100T)SVR Final Assembly
41-0675CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts (8500/8600)CVR Final Assembly
41-0224CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts (8500/8600)CVR Final Assembly
41-0935CVR Final Assembly, Complete with Bolts (8500/8600/4781)CVR Final Assembly
41-0339CVR Final Assembly for Top Rod DevicesCVR Final Assembly
41-0337Rod AssemblyRod Assembly
41-0902-03-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IPEnd Cap
41-0902-04-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (variant 04)End Cap
41-0902-05-IPMetal End Cap Assembly, IP (variant 05)End Cap
41-0903-119Metal End Cap Assembly, Clear AnodizedEnd Cap
41-0296-01Latch Assembly, LHR (3300 series)Latch Assembly
41-0296-02Latch Assembly, RHR (3300 series)Latch Assembly
41-0119-628Paddle Assembly, Satin AluminumPaddle
41-0119-313Paddle Assembly, Dark BronzePaddle
41-0119-335Paddle Assembly, BlackPaddle
41-0123-02-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP, Push to LeftEscutcheon (IP)
41-0123-04-IPEscutcheon Assembly, IP, Push to RightEscutcheon (IP)
41-0397-01IB Interior Escutcheon OperatorEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0397-02IB Interior Escutcheon Operator (variant 02)Escutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0397-06IB Interior Escutcheon Operator (variant 06)Escutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-01-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-01-121IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, finish 121Escutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-01-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, Dark Bronze AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-02-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 02, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-09-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 09, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-09-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 09, Dark Bronze AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-10-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 10, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-11-119IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 11, Clear AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0942-11-130IB Interior Escutcheon Operator, variant 11, Dark Bronze AnodizedEscutcheon (IB Interior)
41-0405-00-01-IBExterior Escutcheon for 4431 Series, IBEscutcheon (IB Exterior)
41-0943-1-119-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Clear Anodized, IBEscutcheon (IB Exterior)
41-0943-1-130-01-IBExterior Escutcheon, Dark Bronze Anodized, IBEscutcheon (IB Exterior)
41-0827-02-IPBolt Guide Assembly Kit, IPBolt Guide
41-0193-01Micro Switch Assembly with WiresElectrified Component
41-0975-02Rivnut Tool Kit AssemblyInstallation Tool
41-0975-04Rivnut Tool Kit Assembly (variant 04)Installation Tool

 

Where to Order Adams Rite 41 Series Parts

Security Parts stocks all 39 Adams Rite 41 series replacement components. Parts ship same day when ordered before the daily cut-off. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order part identification, hand determination, or finish matching support before placing an order.

For Adams Rite trim hardware (lever kits, faceplates, and strikes), see the Adams Rite parts guide. For the broader exit device parts catalog, see the exit devices parts guide. For related vertical rod exit device guidance, see the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide and the Von Duprin 22 series exit device parts guide.

 

About This Guide

Written by the Security Parts team. Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware components to locksmiths, glaziers, contractors, and facilities managers since 2001. All 39 Adams Rite 41 series parts listed in this guide are verified in stock with same day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order identification support. For related exit device parts guides, see the exit devices parts guide and the delayed egress guide.

LCN 4020T Parts Guide: Tracks, Arms, Rollers, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

Security Parts stocks 33 replacement parts for the LCN 4020T track-arm surface door closer. The key components are the 3077T standard track arm (180-degree swing), four 3038-family tracks (standard, hold-open, bumper, and hold-open plus bumper), the 3034 and 3034H track rollers, the 18 drop plate for narrow head frames, and 10 screw pack variants covering all substrates and thru-bolt configurations. The 4020T cylinder is available in spring sizes 1, 3, and 4 based on door width. All 33 parts are confirmed in stock.

 

What Is the LCN 4020T?

The LCN 4020T is the track-arm (parallel arm) configuration of the LCN 4020 surface-mounted commercial door closer. Instead of connecting from the closer body to a shoe on the door frame, the 4020T uses a horizontal track mounted on the door surface. The arm extends from the closer spindle and slides inside that track to control the door arc on every cycle.

The track-arm configuration suits doors that swing toward the closer (the same side the closer body is mounted on), and it is preferred when a parallel-arm layout is needed for clearance, aesthetics, or ADA compliance. The 4020T can be ordered with an opening force of less than 5.0 lbs on a 36-inch door, making it suitable for ADA-compliant installations.

 

How Do I Know If I Have a 4020T or a Standard 4020?

Look at the door surface when the door is open. If you see a horizontal track channel mounted across the door with an arm sliding inside it, you have the 4020T. If there is only a straight arm going from the closer body to a shoe on the frame or soffit, you have the standard 4020 and need different parts.

The closer body label also identifies the model. The label is on the underside or end of the closer body and will show 4020T as the series. For a full family comparison, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide.

 

What Spring Size Does the LCN 4020T Come In?

The LCN 4020T cylinder is available in three spring sizes: 1, 3, and 4. Spring size is selected based on door width. The LCN size selection table maps door widths to recommended sizes:

Spring SizeTypical ApplicationNotes
Size 1Narrower, lighter-use doorsADA low-force option; can deliver less than 5.0 lbs opening force on 36-inch door
Size 3Medium-width commercial doorsMost common size for standard office and corridor doors
Size 4Wider or heavier doorsHigher spring tension; appropriate for wider openings or windy exterior applications

The spring size is stamped or labeled on the closer body. Confirm the size before ordering a replacement cylinder or screw pack, since some fastener packs are size-specific.

 

What Clearance Does the LCN 4020T Need Behind the Door?

The LCN 4020T requires a minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38mm) of clearance between the back of the door and the wall or any obstruction for 90-degree or 180-degree swing. If the door cannot open to that clearance, the track arm will bind or the arm will not reach its maximum rotation. Measure this before installing a new track or replacing an arm to confirm the door geometry supports the intended swing angle.

LCN also recommends ANSI/SDI-100 reinforcing for hollow metal doors at the closer and track mounting locations. This is a practical note for contractors: without proper reinforcing, hollow metal doors can pull or deform at the fastener locations under repeated closer cycling, causing misalignment over time.

 

LCN 4020T Parts by Component Category

Track Arm

LCN 4020T-3077T standard track arm 180 degree swing replacement part for LCN 4020T surface door closer

LCN 4020T-3077T Standard Track Arm, 180-Degree Swing. The primary arm component for the 4020T. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
4020T-3077TStandard Track Arm, 180-Degree SwingHanded (H) -- specify left hand (LH) or right hand (RH) when ordering. Roller not included with arm.

The arm is handed, meaning left-hand and right-hand versions are different parts. Before ordering, confirm the hand of your door: standing in the opening looking toward the outside, a right-hand door has the hinges on the right. The arm screw (4020T-159) that fastens the arm to the closer spindle should be replaced whenever the arm is replaced, since stripped arm screws are a common cause of arm looseness.

 

Tracks

LCN 4020T-3038HB standard track with bumper and hold-open for LCN 4020T parallel arm closer

LCN 4020T-3038HB Standard Track with Bumper and Hold-Open. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionUse When
4020T-3038Standard Track, Non-Hold-OpenDoor returns to closed automatically; no open-position stop required. Will accept hold-open clip or bumper assembly as optional additions.
4020T-3038HStandard Track with Hold-OpenHold-open clip installed; door holds at a set open position. Will accept bumper assembly.
4020T-3038BStandard Track with BumperBumper assembly installed to limit swing; no hold-open. Will accept hold-open clip.
4020T-3038HBStandard Track with Bumper and Hold-OpenBoth hold-open and bumper assembly installed.

All four track variants are non-handed, meaning the same track fits left-hand and right-hand doors. Finish must be specified when ordering (indicated by (F) in the LCN parts list).

Important: The track bumper assembly (4020T-169) is designed to assist backcheck and limit the maximum door opening swing. It does not replace an auxiliary stop. If the door is swinging hard against a wall or surface, an auxiliary wall or floor stop should also be installed.

 

Track Rollers

LCN 4020T-3034H hold-open track roller for LCN 4020T track arm closer with hold-open track

LCN 4020T-3034H Hold-Open Track Roller. Required when the installed track is a hold-open variant. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionPaired With
4020T-3034Track Roller (standard)3038 or 3038B (non-hold-open tracks)
4020T-3034HHold-Open Track Roller3038H or 3038HB (hold-open tracks); different roller profile that engages the hold-open clip
4020T-3064HHO Roller and Clip (complete hold-open assembly)When replacing both roller and hold-open clip at the same time
4020T-425Roller Locking ScrewSecures roller to arm end; replace whenever roller is replaced

The LCN 4020T roller is a quiet, low-friction assembly with a shoulder dimension of 1/16 inch (2mm). The standard (3034) and hold-open (3034H) rollers have different profiles and are not interchangeable. Using a standard roller in a hold-open track will prevent the door from latching open at the hold-open point.

 

Hold-Open Components

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
4020T-3054Hold-Open ClipMounts in track to provide hold-open function. Hold-open point is controlled by clip location within the track channel.
4020T-3064HHO Roller and ClipCombined replacement of roller and clip when both components need replacing

 

Drop Plate

Part NumberDescriptionRequired When
4020T-18Drop Plate, Narrow Top Rail or Flush CeilingHead frame is less than 3-7/8 inches (98mm) wide. The drop plate itself requires a minimum frame face of 1-3/4 inches (44mm).

 

Covers, Caps, and Hardware

LCN 4020T-72 standard cover replacement part for LCN 4020T door closer body

LCN 4020T-72 Standard Cover. Handed part -- specify finish and hand when ordering. View product page.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
4020T-72Standard CoverHanded (H), finish required (F). Standard plastic cover.
4020T-72MCMetal CoverHanded (H), finish required (F). Required for plated finishes and custom colors; more durable than plastic.
4020T-73End CapFinish required (F). Two required per closer; sold individually.
4020T-141-2PlugFinish required (F). Four required per closer; sold individually. Seals unused adjustment ports.
4020T-169Bumper AssemblyMounts in track to assist backcheck and limit maximum opening. Consists of bumper, bumper post, and mounting screw. Does not replace an auxiliary stop.
4020T-31Cover ScrewFastens cover to closer body.
4020T-159Arm ScrewFastens arm to closer spindle at pre-load position. Replace when stripped.

 

Screw Packs

The LCN 4020T ships standard with a Self-Reaming and Tapping (SRT) screw pack containing Phillips head screws. Ten screw pack variants cover all mounting substrates, thru-bolt requirements, and hold-open track configurations.

Part NumberDescriptionUse For
4020T-WMSWood-Machine ScrewsStandard track, wood or light metal substrate
4020T-SRTSelf-Reaming Tapping ScrewsStandard track, hollow metal or steel substrate
4020T-TORXTorx Machine ScrewsStandard track, Torx head for tamper resistance
4020T-TBWMSThru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsStandard track, thru-bolt mounting, wood
4020T-TBSRTThru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsStandard track, thru-bolt mounting, steel
4020T-TBTRXThru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsStandard track, thru-bolt mounting, Torx head
4020T-HWMSHO Wood-Machine ScrewsHold-open track, wood substrate
4020T-HSRTHO Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsHold-open track, steel substrate
4020T-HTBWMSHO Thru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsHold-open track, thru-bolt, wood substrate
4020T-HTBSRTHO Thru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsHold-open track, thru-bolt, steel substrate
4020T-HTORXHO Torx Machine ScrewsHold-open track, Torx head
4020T-HTBTRXHO Thru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsHold-open track, thru-bolt, Torx head

Standard LCN thru-bolts install on 1-3/4 inch (44mm) thick doors with 1/4-20 machine screws. Optional thru-bolt sizes for 1-5/8 inch (41mm) or 1-3/8 inch (35mm) door thickness must be specified when ordering.

 

Troubleshooting: Why Is My LCN 4020T Not Working Properly?

Why Is My LCN 4020T Door Not Closing?

If the door is not closing fully, check the following in order:

  • Check the closing speed valve. Turn all regulating valves clockwise until they stop, then open each valve 1-1/2 turns as a starting point. Closing speed is typically the main valve.
  • Inspect the roller and track. A worn roller that skips in the track can prevent the closer from pulling the door shut.
  • Check the spring size. If the spring is underrated for the door weight or width, the door will not close against wind pressure or door seal resistance.
  • Verify the arm is not bent. A bent 3077T arm sits the door at an angle that may cause the latch to miss the strike.

 

Why Is My LCN 4020T Arm Clicking or Squeaking?

Clicking, squeaking, or grinding as the door swings is almost always a worn track roller. The roller runs inside the track channel on every cycle and is the highest-wear component in the system. Replace the 3034 (standard) or 3034H (hold-open) roller first. If the noise continues after roller replacement, the track channel interior may be scored or grooved and the track itself should be replaced.

 

Should I Rebuild or Replace My LCN 4020T?

In most field situations, replacing individual components is the correct approach rather than replacing the full closer. A new LCN 4020T closer costs several hundred dollars. If the symptoms are a worn roller, a bent arm, or a damaged track, replacing only those parts is the practical solution.

Full closer replacement makes more sense when the closer body itself is leaking hydraulic fluid at the pinion or end cap, when the spring is broken internally, or when the closer has sustained physical damage to the housing. The hydraulic fluid in an LCN closer must not be refilled in the field; if the body is leaking, the closer needs to be replaced.

 

How Do I Install the LCN 4020T Arm and Track Roller?

The LCN 4020T installation sequence from the official instructions is as follows:

  1. Assemble the roller into the track channel before mounting the track to the door.
  2. Attach the arm to the closer spindle at the pre-load position (15 degrees from the door face). Secure with the arm screw (4020T-159).
  3. Open the door approximately 30 degrees, pull the arm over the top of the door, and connect the arm to the track roller as shown in the installation template.
  4. Adjust the closer as needed for closing speed, latch speed, and backcheck.

For step-by-step adjustment guidance, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide. For full installation guidance, see the how to install a commercial door closer guide.

 

How to Specify LCN 4020T Parts: Finish and Hand Requirements

Several LCN 4020T parts require finish and hand to be specified at order time. The LCN parts list marks these with (F) for finish and (H) for hand:

  • Finish (F): The cover (72, 72MC), end caps (73), and plugs (141-2) require a finish specified at order. Common LCN finishes include 689 (aluminum), 690 (dark bronze), 693 (black), and others. Match the existing closer finish when ordering replacement covers.
  • Hand (H): The arm (3077T) and covers (72, 72MC) are handed. Specify LH (left hand) or RH (right hand) to match the door. Standing in the opening and looking toward the outside: hinges on the right = right-hand door.
  • Tracks and rollers: Non-handed. The same track and roller fit both left-hand and right-hand doors.

 

LCN 4020T vs 4010T vs 4020: Which Parts Are Shared?

FeatureLCN 4020TLCN 4010TLCN 4020 (standard arm)
Mounting typeTrack arm (parallel)Track arm (parallel)Standard arm
Spring sizes1, 3, 41, 31, 3, 4
Track parts shared3038 familySame 3038 family (verify prefix)No track -- uses arm shoe
Parts interchangeableWith 4010T: verify prefix before orderingWith 4020T: verify prefix before orderingNot interchangeable with 4020T

For LCN 4010T parts, see the LCN 4010T parts guide. For the full family comparison, see the LCN 4000 series guide.

 

Complete LCN 4020T Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionCategoryHanded/Finish
4020T-3077TStandard Track Arm, 180 Degree SwingArmH, F
4020T-3038Standard Track, Non-Hold-OpenTrackF
4020T-3038HStandard Track with Hold-OpenTrackF
4020T-3038BStandard Track with BumperTrackF
4020T-3038HBStandard Track with Bumper and Hold-OpenTrackF
4020T-3034Track RollerRoller--
4020T-3034HHold-Open Track RollerRoller--
4020T-3064HHO Roller and ClipRoller / HO--
4020T-425Roller Locking ScrewRoller--
4020T-3054Hold-Open ClipHold-Open--
4020T-18Drop Plate, Narrow Top Rail or Flush CeilingDrop PlateF
4020T-72Standard CoverCoverH, F
4020T-72MCMetal CoverCoverH, F
4020T-73End Cap (2 required, sold individually)CoverF
4020T-141-2Plug (4 required, sold individually)CoverF
4020T-169Bumper AssemblyStop--
4020T-31Cover ScrewFastener--
4020T-159Arm ScrewFastener--
4020T-WMSWood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack--
4020T-SRTSelf-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack--
4020T-TORXTorx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack--
4020T-TBWMSThru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (TB)--
4020T-TBSRTThru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack (TB)--
4020T-TBTRXThru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (TB)--
4020T-HWMSHO Wood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO)--
4020T-HSRTHO Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack (HO)--
4020T-HTORXHO Torx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO)--
4020T-HTBWMSHO Thru-Bolt Wood-Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO/TB)--
4020T-HTBSRTHO Thru-Bolt Self-Reaming Tapping ScrewsScrew Pack (HO/TB)--
4020T-HTBTRXHO Thru-Bolt Torx Machine ScrewsScrew Pack (HO/TB)--
4020T-Rebox KitRebox Kit, Box and Instruction SheetDocumentation--
4020T-Flat BoxFlat Box with LabelDocumentation--
4020T-Instruction SheetInstruction SheetDocumentation--

 

Where to Order LCN 4020T Parts

Security Parts stocks all 33 LCN 4020T replacement components verified in stock and ready to ship. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support or to confirm a part number, finish, hand, or spring size before placing an order. For the broader LCN closer parts catalog, see the door closers parts guide. For help selecting the right LCN closer or spring size for a new opening, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide and the commercial door closer sizing guide. For related LCN track-arm closer parts, see the LCN 4050AT parts guide and the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

 

About This Guide

Written by the Security Parts team. Security Parts has supplied commercial door hardware parts to locksmiths, general contractors, facilities managers, and security integrators since 2001. All 33 LCN 4020T parts listed in this guide are verified in stock with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support. For related LCN closer guides, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide and the LCN 4840 parts guide.

What Is an Exit Alarm: How It Works, When to Use One, and How to Choose the Right Device

Quick Answer

An exit alarm is a commercial door hardware device that sounds an audible alarm the moment a door is opened, without delaying or holding the door closed. It is used on secondary egress doors, utility exits, and service doors where unauthorized or casual use needs to be monitored but where immediate free egress is still required. The door opens freely when pushed. The alarm sounds immediately and continues until the door closes or is manually reset.

Exit alarms are a different product category from panic hardware and from delayed egress devices. Understanding the difference matters before specifying or replacing hardware on a commercial door.

 

What Is an Exit Alarm

Detex EAX-2500S surface mount exit alarm for commercial secondary egress doors

Detex EAX-2500S Surface Mount Exit Alarm. Installed on secondary egress and utility doors that require alarm monitoring without a delay. View product page.

 

An exit alarm is a locking and alarm assembly mounted on a commercial door. When someone pushes the door open, two things happen simultaneously: the door opens freely and an audible alarm sounds. There is no delay before the door releases. The alarm continues until the door closes and latches, or until an authorized person resets it with a key.

The primary purpose of an exit alarm is monitoring, not restriction. The device does not prevent a person from leaving. It creates an immediate audible alert that the door has been used, which allows staff or security personnel to respond. This makes exit alarms appropriate for doors where controlling casual or unauthorized access is the goal, rather than doors where panic hardware or delayed egress is required by code.

Exit alarm devices are most commonly installed on secondary egress doors, storeroom exits, loading dock doors, utility access doors, and service entrances in commercial buildings. They allow the building to maintain a primary egress path with proper panic hardware or fire exit hardware while monitoring secondary openings that see less regular traffic.

For a broader overview of exit device types and component categories, see the exit devices parts guide.

 

How an Exit Alarm Works

The sequence of events when an exit alarm door is opened is straightforward:

  • Door contact: A person pushes the door open. The door opens freely with no resistance beyond normal door weight and closer spring.
  • Immediate alarm: The alarm sounds within one second of the door opening. There is no grace period or delay before the alarm activates on a standard exit alarm device.
  • Continuous alarm: The alarm continues for as long as the door remains open, or until a key reset is performed.
  • Automatic reset: On most models, closing the door to the latched position stops the alarm and resets the device for the next use. Some models require a key reset by authorized staff.

The latch mechanism on an exit alarm device holds the door in the closed and latched position during normal operation. When the door is opened, the latch retracts and the alarm circuit activates. The alarm is integral to the device, typically a piezoelectric buzzer or speaker built into the device housing, producing a loud audible tone that can be heard from adjacent rooms or corridors.

Some exit alarm models also include a remote alarm output, allowing the alarm signal to be sent to a building management system, security panel, or remote annunciator. The Detex RLY24 and RLY12 relay kits are available for connecting exit alarm devices to remote monitoring systems, as covered in the wiring section below.

 

Exit Alarm vs Delayed Egress: Key Differences

Exit alarms and delayed egress devices are two distinct product categories that are sometimes confused because both include an alarm function. The differences are significant for specification and code compliance.

FeatureExit AlarmDelayed Egress Device
Door opensImmediately when pushedAfter 15 or 30 seconds
Alarm activationSounds when door opensSounds when touchbar is pressed, before door opens
Delay periodNo delay15 or 30 seconds before latch releases
Primary purposeMonitoring unauthorized door useProviding staff response time before egress
Fire alarm release requiredNot required (no delay to release)Yes -- must release immediately on fire alarm
Code basisNo code-mandated delay; used at specifier discretionNFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 / IBC Section 1010.1.9.8
AHJ approval requiredNot typically required for exit alarm onlyRequired for every installation
Common applicationsSecondary exits, utility doors, service entrancesMemory care, healthcare, schools, certain high-rise doors

A delayed egress device holds the door locked for a code-permitted time period before releasing it automatically. An exit alarm releases the door immediately with no hold period. These devices are not interchangeable. If your project specifies delayed egress hardware, an exit alarm does not satisfy that requirement. For a full explanation of how delayed egress works and when it is required, see what is delayed egress.

 

Exit Alarm vs Panic Hardware: Key Differences

Panic hardware and exit alarms are also distinct products that serve different functions. They are sometimes found on different doors in the same building, and understanding which applies to which opening is important for specification and code compliance.

Panic hardware is a latch-releasing assembly that allows single-motion egress without a key and without sounding an alarm. It is required by both NFPA 101 and the IBC on egress doors serving assembly and educational occupancies with occupant loads of 50 or more, and on certain high-hazard occupancies. Standard panic hardware does not include an alarm function. It simply allows fast egress.

An exit alarm is a monitoring device. When the door opens, the alarm sounds. The exit alarm does not satisfy code requirements for panic hardware applications. You cannot substitute an exit alarm for code-required panic hardware.

In practice, a commercial building may have both: primary egress doors with panic hardware or fire exit hardware meeting code requirements, and secondary utility or service doors with exit alarm devices to monitor unauthorized use. The two product types serve different door types and different purposes within the same facility.

For a full explanation of panic hardware, exit device types, and code requirements, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide and the exit device vs panic bar comparison guide.

 

Types of Exit Alarm Devices

Detex EAX-4200SK surface mount exit alarm door prop alarm kit for propped-door monitoring on commercial secondary egress doors

Detex EAX-4200SK Surface Mount Exit Alarm Door Prop Alarm Kit. Sounds when the door opens and continues if the door is propped open beyond the set time. View product page.

 

Exit alarm devices are available in several configurations. The right type depends on the door construction, mounting requirements, and whether door prop monitoring is needed.

 

Surface Mount Exit Alarm

A surface mount exit alarm attaches to the surface of the door and frame without requiring a door cutout or internal routing. The device chassis mounts on the door face and the strike or magnetic sensor mounts on the frame. Surface mount models are the most common choice for retrofit installations on existing doors because they do not require modification to the door itself.

The Detex EAX-2500S and EAX-2500SK are surface mount exit alarm units available as standalone devices and as complete kits including all required hardware for installation.

 

Flush Mount Exit Alarm

A flush mount exit alarm is recessed into a cutout in the door, resulting in a lower-profile installation where the device housing sits flush with the door surface rather than projecting outward. Flush mount models require door preparation and are more common in new construction or door replacement projects where the door can be prepared at the factory.

The Detex EAX-2500F and EAX-2500FK are flush mount exit alarm units for doors prepared for recessed installation.

 

Door Prop Alarm

A door prop alarm adds a timed threshold to the standard alarm function. The device does not sound immediately when the door opens. Instead, it allows a brief legitimate opening window (commonly 15 or 30 seconds) before the alarm activates. If the door closes within that window, no alarm sounds. If the door remains propped open past the threshold, the alarm activates.

Door prop alarms are useful on service doors and loading dock entrances where brief legitimate openings are routine but extended propping creates a security or energy problem. The Detex EAX-4200SK and EAX-3500SK include door prop alarm functionality with timed bypass capability.

 

Timed Bypass Exit Alarm

Some exit alarm models include a timed bypass function that allows authorized users to temporarily suppress the alarm for a set period. This is useful on high-traffic service doors during specific scheduled hours. The bypass is activated by an authorized key and expires automatically after the programmed time, restoring normal alarm operation without requiring staff to manually re-arm the device.

TypeAlarm Triggers WhenMountingTypical Use
Standard exit alarmDoor opens (immediately)Surface or flushSecondary exits, utility doors, storeroom exits
Door prop alarmDoor open past timed thresholdSurfaceService entrances, loading dock doors, delivery exits
Timed bypass alarmAlarm suppressed for set period, then resumesSurfaceHigh-traffic service doors with scheduled access windows

For a complete catalog of exit alarm parts and kits organized by product line, see the exit alarm parts and diagrams page.

 

Wiring and Power Options

Detex RLY24 24VAC relay kit for remote bypass on exit alarm systems in commercial buildings

Detex RLY24 24VAC Relay Kit for remote bypass on exit alarm systems. Allows the alarm output to be connected to a remote panel or monitoring system. View product page.

Exit alarm devices are available in battery-powered and hardwired configurations. The right choice depends on the availability of power at the door location and the monitoring requirements of the facility.

 

Battery-Powered Exit Alarms

Battery-powered exit alarm devices operate independently of building power and require no wiring beyond the device itself. They are the easiest to install on existing doors where running conduit or wire to the door location is impractical. Battery life depends on usage frequency and the specific model. Battery replacement is part of the maintenance schedule for battery-powered devices.

Battery-powered exit alarms are a common choice for retrofit installations on secondary doors in existing buildings where no low-voltage wiring is present at the door.

 

Hardwired Exit Alarms

Hardwired exit alarm devices connect to a low-voltage power supply in the building. Hardwired models are more suitable for new construction or for facilities where consistent power monitoring and integration with a building management system are required. Hardwired devices eliminate the need for periodic battery replacement and allow continuous power monitoring.

 

Remote Alarm Output and Relay Kits

Many exit alarm models support a remote alarm output connection, allowing the device to send an alarm signal to a remote panel, security system, or annunciator when triggered. The Detex RLY24 (24VAC) and RLY12 (12VAC) relay kits are available for connecting exit alarm devices to remote monitoring systems. The relay kit installs between the exit alarm device and the remote panel and passes the alarm signal through when the door is opened.

Remote monitoring integration is useful in facilities where security staff monitor multiple exits from a central location and need audible or visual notification when any monitored door opens. For a broader overview of access control integration with commercial door hardware, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Required Exit Alarm Signage

Detex 102651-2 English and German exit alarm door sign for code-compliant exit alarm installations on commercial doors

Detex 102651-2 English/German Exit Alarm Door Sign. Code-compliant signage for exit alarm installations. Available in multiple languages. View product page.

 

Exit alarm doors require posted signage that alerts anyone approaching the door that opening it will trigger an alarm. The sign must be visible to a person approaching the door from the egress side before they push it open.

The specific code requirements for exit alarm signage vary by jurisdiction and the applicable code edition adopted locally. Consult the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for the sign format and placement requirements that apply to your project.

Security Parts stocks exit alarm door signs in multiple languages to meet the requirements of facilities serving multilingual populations or operating in jurisdictions with specific language requirements:

  • English/German: Detex 102651-2
  • Chinese (Simplified): Detex 102651-3
  • Chinese (Traditional): Detex 102651-4
  • French: Detex 102651-1
  • Spanish: Detex EA-704-2
  • German: Detex EA-561G
  • French-Canadian: Detex EA-705

Signage is a required component of a compliant exit alarm installation, not an optional accessory. An exit alarm installation without the required posted sign may fail inspection even if the device itself is functioning correctly.

 

Where Exit Alarms Are Used: Building Type Applications

Exit alarms are appropriate across a wide range of commercial building types wherever secondary door monitoring is needed without the complexity of panic hardware or delayed egress devices.

Building TypeTypical Exit Alarm ApplicationNotes
Retail and commercialBack-of-house service doors, receiving exits, employee exitsPrevents unauthorized exit of stock; monitors staff exits
Schools and universitiesGym exits, cafeteria secondary doors, field access gatesMonitors unauthorized student exits on secondary doors
Healthcare facilitiesUtility corridors, secondary exit stairwells, equipment room exitsComplements delayed egress on patient wing doors
Government buildingsSecure area secondary exits, file room service doorsProvides monitoring without requiring delayed egress approval
Industrial and warehouseLoading dock pedestrian exits, yard access gates, storage exitsDoor prop alarm variant often preferred for dock doors
Office buildingsStairwell re-entry monitoring, server room exits, secondary lobby exitsUsed where access control is not warranted but monitoring is needed

For application-specific door hardware guidance, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the K-12 school door hardware guide, and the government buildings door hardware guide.

 

How to Choose the Right Exit Alarm

Selecting the right exit alarm configuration requires answers to five questions before ordering.

1. Is this a new installation or a retrofit?

New construction or door replacement allows for flush mount installation with the door prepared at the factory. Retrofit on an existing door typically requires a surface mount device to avoid door modification. Surface mount models (EAX-2500S, EAX-4200SK) work on most standard commercial doors without cutting or routing.

 

2. Is power available at the door?

If low-voltage wiring runs to the door location, a hardwired model is appropriate and eliminates battery maintenance. If no wiring is present, a battery-powered model provides a simpler retrofit installation. Confirm the power supply voltage matches the device requirements before ordering hardwired models.

 

3. Is door prop monitoring required?

If the concern is doors being held open for extended periods rather than brief openings, a door prop alarm model (EAX-4200SK, EAX-3500SK) is more appropriate than a standard exit alarm that sounds on every opening. Door prop alarms allow brief legitimate openings without triggering the alarm.

 

4. Is remote monitoring required?

If security staff need to be notified at a central location when a specific exit alarm door opens, a relay kit (RLY24 or RLY12) connects the alarm output to a remote panel or annunciator. Confirm the relay voltage matches the power supply before ordering.

 

5. What signage is required?

Confirm the required sign language and format with the AHJ before ordering. Security Parts stocks exit alarm door signs in seven language options. Order the sign as part of the installation rather than as a follow-up item to avoid an inspection issue on the first visit.

 

Exit Alarm Parts and Replacement Components

Exit alarm devices require periodic maintenance and occasional parts replacement. The most commonly replaced components are the battery (on battery-powered models), the door sign, and the latch or magnetic sensor assembly if damaged or worn.

When ordering replacement parts, identify the model number from the label on the installed device before contacting Security Parts. The model number determines which components are compatible. Security Parts stocks exit alarm parts and complete exit alarm kits across the Detex EAX series, including:

  • Complete surface mount exit alarm units (EAX-2500S, EAX-4200SK, EAX-3500SK)
  • Complete flush mount exit alarm units (EAX-2500F, EAX-3500FK)
  • Complete exit alarm kits with all installation hardware (EAX-2500SK, EAX-2500FK, EAX-4200SK, EAX-3500SK, EAX-3500FK)
  • Retrofit conversion kit for converting older EAX-2500F units (Detex 102640)
  • Relay kits for remote alarm output (RLY24 for 24VAC, RLY12 for 12VAC)
  • Exit alarm door signs in English/German, Chinese, French, Spanish, German, and French-Canadian
  • Junction box with relay (JB-R)
  • Slide-in filler kit for hardwired electric alarm installations (SIFV-EA)

For the complete exit alarm parts catalog, see the exit alarm parts and diagrams page. For troubleshooting an exit alarm that is not functioning correctly after installation, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks exit alarm devices and replacement parts across the Detex EAX product line, with same-day shipping on stocked components. For related guidance, see the exit device vs panic bar guide, the delayed egress guide, and the Detex ECL parts guide.

Exit Device vs Panic Bar: What Is the Difference and Which One Do You Need

Quick Answer

In everyday commercial door hardware practice, "exit device," "panic bar," and "panic hardware" are commonly used to refer to the same category of hardware. These are door-mounted assemblies with a horizontal push element that releases a latch when pressed, allowing fast single-motion egress. The terms originate from different codes and professional contexts, which is why buyers encounter all three in specifications, purchase orders, and field conversations.

That said, terminology matters in two specific situations: when comparing standard panic hardware to fire exit hardware on a fire-rated door assembly, and when reading code requirements that use one term but not another. This guide explains how the terms are used in practice, where the important distinctions lie, and how to confirm which device type applies to your opening.

 

Where the Terms Come From

The three terms most buyers encounter are "panic hardware," "exit device," and "panic bar." Each comes from a different context.

"Panic hardware" is the term used in NFPA 101, the Life Safety Code. NFPA 101 defines panic hardware as a latching device that allows the door to open from the egress side by applying force to a bar or panel extending at least half the door width, not requiring the use of a key, special knowledge, or effort to operate.

"Exit device" is the term used in the International Building Code (IBC). The IBC references exit devices in its egress requirements, describing devices that allow doors to be opened from the egress side without a key, special tool, or prior knowledge.

"Panic bar" is an informal industry shorthand that refers to the horizontal push bar or crossbar that is the most visible component of the device. In field use, "panic bar" is widely used to refer to the complete exit device assembly, not just the bar component. You will encounter all three terms used interchangeably in specifications, purchase orders, and product catalogs.

For most commercial door hardware decisions, the key understanding is this: whether the project documents say "panic hardware" or "exit device," they are generally describing the same product category. The applicable code for your jurisdiction and the fire rating status of the door determine the specific device requirements.

 

What Is an Exit Device

Von Duprin 98/99EO Rim Exit Device -- standard panic hardware for commercial egress doors, exit-only configuration

Von Duprin 98/99EO Rim Exit Device, Exit Only. A standard panic hardware device for non-fire-rated commercial egress doors. View product page.

 

An exit device is a complete door hardware assembly designed to allow fast, one-motion egress from a building or area. The device is mounted on the door and consists of a push element (bar, crossbar, or touch pad), an internal latch mechanism, and a chassis that transmits the push motion to the latch. When a person presses the bar, the latch retracts and the door opens. No key, prior knowledge, or special effort is required.

Exit devices are used on commercial egress doors in office buildings, schools, healthcare facilities, retail spaces, government buildings, and any other occupancy type where egress hardware is required to meet life safety codes. The device category includes rim exit devices, surface vertical rod (SVR) devices, concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices, and mortise exit devices. Each type suits different door construction and frame conditions.

For a full explanation of exit device parts and component categories, see the exit devices parts guide and the commercial exit device parts guide.

 

What Is a Panic Bar

A panic bar is a common informal name for the horizontal bar or crossbar element that extends across the door on an exit device. When someone says "panic bar," they may mean the complete exit device assembly, or they may specifically mean the push bar component that the occupant presses to open the door.

In product catalogs, the push bar is listed as a component: for example, a push bar assembly for a narrow stile exit device is a separate orderable part that replaces the bar element while keeping the existing chassis and mechanism in place. In field conversation and specifications, "panic bar" almost always refers to the complete exit device assembly.

The push element of an exit device is not always a bar. Some devices use a touchpad or push pad rather than a full crossbar. Regardless of push element style, the device functions on the same principle: one-motion egress without a key.

 

Exit Device Types by Mounting Configuration

Adams Rite 8099 push bar assembly for narrow stile doors -- horizontal panic bar component used in narrow stile exit device assemblies

Adams Rite 8099 Push Bar Assembly for narrow stile door applications. View product page.

 

Exit devices are grouped by how they mount to the door and frame and how many latch points they engage. Choosing the right type depends on the door construction, frame material, and project requirements.

 

Rim Exit Device

A rim exit device mounts on the surface of the door and engages a frame-mounted strike through a single latch point. The chassis attaches to the door face and the latch projects into the strike on the door frame. Rim devices are the most common type and suit most standard commercial steel door and frame applications. They are available in standard panic hardware and fire exit hardware configurations.

 

Surface Vertical Rod (SVR) Exit Device

An SVR exit device uses external rods that run vertically on the door surface from the device chassis to top and bottom latches. When the bar is pressed, all latch points retract simultaneously. SVR devices suit wide or heavy doors where additional latch points improve security and door stability. The external rods are visible on the door surface.

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) Exit Device

A CVR exit device uses internal rods concealed within the door itself, running from the device chassis to top and bottom latches in the door edge. CVR devices require a door prepared with internal rod pockets. They provide a cleaner appearance than SVR devices because the hardware is not visible on the door surface. CVR devices are common in high-end or aesthetic applications where surface hardware is undesirable.

 

Mortise Exit Device

A mortise exit device integrates with a mortise lock body that is recessed into the door stile. The panic bar retracts the mortise latch when pressed. Mortise exit devices are used on thicker doors and in applications where the additional trim and function options of a mortise lock body are required. They are less common than rim or vertical rod devices in standard commercial applications.

 

Device TypeLatch PointsRods VisibleTypical Application
Rim1 (frame strike)NoStandard commercial steel doors and frames
SVR3 (top, bottom, latch)Yes -- external rodsWide or heavy doors, higher security requirements
CVR3 (top, bottom, latch)No -- concealed in doorAesthetic applications, doors prepared for concealed rods
Mortise1 (mortise latch)NoThick doors, applications requiring mortise lock functions

For guidance on how to install an exit device in rim, SVR, or CVR configuration, see the exit device installation guide.

 

Panic Hardware vs Fire Exit Hardware: An Important Distinction

Von Duprin 98/99EO-F Rim Fire Exit Device -- fire exit hardware listed for installation on fire-rated door assemblies

Von Duprin 98/99EO-F Rim Fire Exit Device. Fire exit hardware listed for fire-rated door assemblies. Note the fire label on the device. View product page.

 

One area where the terminology matters more precisely is the distinction between standard panic hardware and fire exit hardware. These two device types look similar and operate on the same push-to-exit principle, but they serve different applications and carry different code and listing requirements.

 

Standard Panic Hardware

Standard panic hardware meets the egress hardware requirements of NFPA 101 and the IBC for non-fire-rated doors. It allows single-motion egress without a key and meets the grade and force requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.3. Standard panic hardware may include a dogging feature that holds the latch retracted, allowing the door to operate as a push-pull door without pressing the bar each time.

 

Fire Exit Hardware

Fire exit hardware is required on fire-rated door assemblies. A fire-rated door assembly is a door, frame, and hardware combination that has been tested and listed for a specific fire rating (such as 20-minute, 45-minute, 90-minute, or 3-hour). When a fire-rated door requires egress hardware, the hardware must be listed as fire exit hardware to maintain the door's fire rating.

Fire exit hardware carries a fire label issued by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The device itself must not allow dogging (holding the latch open), because a fire door must be self-latching to contain fire and smoke. This is one of the most important field distinctions: a standard panic hardware device with a dogging feature should not be installed on a fire-rated door in most jurisdictions.

Visually, the device types look nearly identical. The fire label on the device and the order model suffix (typically an "F" designation, such as "EO-F" rather than "EO") are the distinguishing identifiers. If you are replacing hardware on a fire-rated door, confirm that the replacement device carries the correct fire listing.

For a full explanation of fire door ratings and hardware requirements, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Summary Comparison

FeatureStandard Panic HardwareFire Exit Hardware
Operating principlePush bar releases latchPush bar releases latch
Fire rating labelNot required (non-fire-rated doors)Required -- fire label affixed to device
Dogging featureMay be includedNot permitted -- door must be self-latching
Door applicationNon-fire-rated egress doorsFire-rated door assemblies only
Code term (NFPA 101)"Panic hardware""Fire exit hardware"
Code term (IBC)"Exit device""Fire exit hardware"
Visible identifierNo fire label on deviceFire label affixed to device body

 

When Is Panic Hardware Required by Code

Both the IBC and NFPA 101 define conditions under which panic hardware or exit devices are required on egress doors. The specific thresholds and occupancy types vary between code editions and are subject to local adoption and amendment. The following is a general summary for context, not a substitute for verifying the applicable code edition and authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) for a specific project.

Under both codes, panic hardware is generally required when an egress door serves an assembly occupancy or an educational occupancy with an occupant load of 50 or more persons. High-hazard occupancies typically require panic hardware regardless of occupant load. The applicable code for your jurisdiction determines the exact threshold and occupancy classifications.

When panic hardware is not code-required, exit devices are still often used on commercial egress doors because they provide convenient, fast egress and are well-suited for high-traffic openings. Code requirement and product choice are two separate decisions: the code determines whether panic hardware is mandatory; the opening conditions determine the best device type when hardware selection is otherwise discretionary.

 

Occupancy TypeGeneral Code TriggerDevice Type RequiredNote
Assembly (theaters, arenas, auditoriums)Occupant load 50+Panic hardware or fire exit hardwareFire-rated doors need fire exit hardware
Educational (K-12, universities)Occupant load 50+Panic hardware or fire exit hardwareVerify local amendments
High-hazard (certain industrial/storage)Typically any occupant loadPanic hardware or fire exit hardwareCheck applicable code edition
Business, retail, healthcare, governmentNot typically mandated; discretionaryExit device at specifier discretionFire-rated doors still need fire exit hardware

For a more detailed breakdown of panic hardware code requirements and installation conditions, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide. For ANSI/BHMA grading and standards that govern exit device performance requirements, see the ANSI BHMA hardware standards guide.

 

Exit Device Mounting Configurations and Strike Hardware

Adams Rite 22-0430 strike for rim exit device -- frame-mounted latch engagement component required for rim exit device installation

Adams Rite 22-0430 Strike for Rim Exit Device. The strike mounts on the door frame and receives the rim exit device latch when the door closes. View product page.

 

An exit device does not operate alone. The device mounted on the door requires a corresponding component on the door frame to complete the latch engagement. For rim devices, this is a rim strike mounted on the frame or mullion. For vertical rod devices, the top and bottom latches engage in floor and head frame strikes. Matching the correct strike to the device series and configuration is part of the parts ordering process.

Strikes are series-specific. A rim strike for one manufacturer's exit device series may not be compatible with a different series, even if the dimensions appear similar. Always verify the strike model against the device series when ordering replacement hardware.

For access control integration, exit devices can be electrified through electric latch retraction (EL) or connected to an electric strike. The choice between electrifying the device itself versus using an electric strike depends on the security requirements and the control logic of the access control system. For a full explanation of these options, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Push Element Options: Bar, Touchbar, and Push Pad

Exit devices do not all use the same style of push element. The horizontal bar is the most common and widely recognized, but buyers will also encounter touchbar and push pad configurations.

 

Crossbar or Push Bar

The traditional crossbar extends across the full width of the door or at least half the door width as required by code. The bar is the most recognizable style and is used across nearly all device types. Push bars are replaceable components: the bar can be ordered separately to replace a damaged or worn push element without replacing the full device.

 

Touchbar

A touchbar is a slimmer, low-profile push element that is activated by a lighter touch. Touchbars are used where a sleeker appearance is preferred or where the reduced protrusion into the opening is an advantage. Some exit devices are designed specifically for touchbar configurations.

 

Push Pad

A push pad is a wider, flat panel that replaces the crossbar. Push pads are used on narrow stile aluminum doors and glass storefront applications where the door stile width does not accommodate a traditional crossbar assembly. The Adams Rite 8099 series is a common example of a narrow stile exit device that uses a push bar assembly sized for aluminum door stiles.

 

How to Identify Which Device Type You Have

Before ordering any replacement parts or a replacement device, confirm the model number of the installed unit. The model number is printed on a label affixed to the device chassis, typically on the side or back of the housing where it is visible when the door is open. The frame strike or the door edge may also carry a label.

Once you have the model number, confirm:

  • Whether the device is standard panic hardware or fire exit hardware (check for the fire label)
  • The mounting configuration (rim, SVR, CVR, or mortise)
  • The push element style (crossbar, touchbar, or push pad)
  • The outside trim configuration, if any (keylock, cylinder, thumbturn, or exit only)
  • The electrification option, if applicable (EL, QEL, MEL, or standard non-electrified)

These five data points determine the exact parts needed for any repair or replacement. Security Parts stocks exit device parts across multiple series and configurations. For part identification guidance organized by component category, see the exit devices parts guide.

 

Exit Devices by Building Type

Exit device type and configuration vary by building type, door construction, and code requirements. The following table summarizes common applications.

Building TypeCommon Device ConfigurationFire Rating Consideration
Schools and universitiesRim or SVR, panic hardware or fire exit hardwareCorridor and stairwell doors often fire-rated -- fire exit hardware required
Healthcare facilitiesRim or CVR, fire exit hardware commonHigh proportion of fire-rated doors -- verify each opening
Government buildingsRim or SVR; may include electrified optionsStairwell and rated corridor doors require fire exit hardware
High-rise office buildingsRim or mortise; stairwell re-entry doors need careful specificationMost stairwell doors are fire-rated -- fire exit hardware required
Retail and commercialRim, standard panic hardware; storefront may use narrow stile devicesVaries; verify each opening against door rating
Controlled access and delayed egressDelayed egress exit control lock or electrified exit deviceFire alarm release required; see delayed egress requirements

For application-specific guidance, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the K-12 school door hardware guide, and the government buildings door hardware guide. For delayed egress exit control lock requirements, see what is delayed egress.

 

Sourcing Exit Device Parts

Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, Adams Rite, and Detex product lines. Replacement parts include push bar assemblies, latch assemblies, chassis components, outside trim kits, strike kits, glass bead kits, electrification modules, and dogging hardware.

Parts are series-specific. A Von Duprin 98/99 series push bar assembly is not interchangeable with a Falcon series push bar, even if the devices appear similar from the front. Confirm the device series and model number before ordering. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you are uncertain which parts match your installed device.

For the full Von Duprin 98/99 series parts catalog, see the Von Duprin 98/99 series exit device parts guide. For Detex exit control lock parts, see the Detex ECL parts guide. For troubleshooting a device that is not latching, binding, or operating correctly, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, Adams Rite, and Detex product lines, with same-day shipping on stocked components. For related guidance, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

What Is Delayed Egress: How It Works, When Code Requires It, and Which Hardware to Specify

Quick Answer

Delayed egress is a code-permitted door locking system that holds a door locked for a short timed period after someone pushes the exit touchbar. The device triggers a loud audible alarm when touched, then automatically releases the latch and allows free exit after 15 or 30 seconds, depending on the code and occupancy type. It is not a means of preventing egress permanently. It is a life safety compromise that gives facilities time to respond to an unauthorized or unassisted exit attempt while still guaranteeing egress within the code-permitted window.

Delayed egress is most commonly found in memory care units, dementia wards, schools, government buildings, and certain healthcare facilities. It is governed by NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 and IBC Section 1010.1.9.8. All delayed egress devices must release immediately when the fire alarm activates or when power is lost.

 

How a Delayed Egress Device Works

A delayed egress device looks similar to a standard exit device: a horizontal touchbar or push plate mounted across the door, connected to a latch mechanism that releases when pressed. The critical difference is the internal timing mechanism and alarm circuit.

Here is the sequence of events when someone pushes a delayed egress door:

  • Touchbar contact: The person presses the touchbar or push plate. The door does not open immediately.
  • Alarm activation: Within one second of touchbar contact, a built-in alarm sounds at the door. The alarm is loud enough to alert staff in an adjacent area. Some models also send a signal to a remote annunciator panel.
  • Delay period: The door remains locked during the delay period. Under NFPA 101, the maximum permitted delay is 15 seconds. Under the IBC in jurisdictions that permit an extended delay, the maximum is 30 seconds for approved occupancy types.
  • Automatic release: After the delay period expires, the latch retracts automatically and the door opens freely. The person does not need to maintain pressure on the touchbar throughout the delay. A single push is sufficient to start the timing sequence.
  • Reset: When the door returns to the closed position, the device resets automatically to the locked state, ready for the next cycle.

The device must be powered, typically by 24VDC from the building's security or access control power supply. When power is removed, the device defaults to free egress with no delay (fail-safe). When the fire alarm activates, the device receives a release signal from the fire alarm panel and immediately retracts the latch, bypassing the delay entirely.

 

NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6: Plain-Language Explanation

NFPA 101, the Life Safety Code, is the primary code governing delayed egress in the United States. Section 7.2.1.6 sets the conditions under which a delayed egress locking system is permitted.

In plain terms, the code says the following:

  • The delayed egress system is only permitted where the building is protected throughout by an approved automatic fire suppression system or an approved automatic fire detection system.
  • The maximum delay is 15 seconds from the time the touchbar is pressed until the door releases.
  • The device must sound an audible alarm at the door when the touchbar is pressed.
  • The device must release immediately when the fire alarm system activates anywhere in the building, not just in the zone where the door is located.
  • The device must release immediately when power to the device is lost.
  • The door must be provided with a readily visible posted sign that tells users the alarm will sound and the door will open after the delay period. This sign is not optional.
  • Only one such device may be installed on any egress path, meaning a person cannot be required to pass through more than one delayed egress door before reaching a public way or area of refuge.

The specific occupancy chapters of NFPA 101 also affect where delayed egress is permitted. The general rule in Section 7.2.1.6 permits delayed egress in specific occupancy types. The AHJ has authority to approve or deny the installation based on the occupancy classification and the building's fire protection systems.

 

IBC Section 1010.1.9.8: Plain-Language Explanation

The International Building Code (IBC), adopted in most US jurisdictions, addresses delayed egress in Section 1010.1.9.8. The IBC provisions are largely consistent with NFPA 101 but include one significant difference: the permitted delay can extend to 30 seconds in specific occupancy types when approved by the AHJ.

In plain terms, the IBC says the following:

  • Delayed egress is permitted only where the building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system or an approved fire detection system.
  • The locking system must release when a signal is received from the sprinkler system, the fire detection system, or a manual fire alarm initiation device.
  • The system must release upon loss of power controlling the lock.
  • The required signage must be posted on the door at an approved location and in an approved format.
  • A 15-second delay applies by default. A 30-second delay is permitted for Group I-1 (assisted living, residential care), Group I-2 (hospitals, nursing facilities), Group I-3 (detention and correctional facilities), and Group R-1 (hotels) occupancies when specifically approved by the AHJ.
  • Only one delayed egress device may be encountered on any single egress path to the public way.

 

The 15-Second vs 30-Second Delayed Egress Rule

The distinction between a 15-second and 30-second delay is one of the most common specification questions for delayed egress projects.

Delay SettingCode AuthorityTypical ApplicationAHJ Approval Required
15 secondsNFPA 101, IBC (default)Most commercial, educational, government, and healthcare buildingsYes -- AHJ must approve delayed egress for the occupancy type
30 secondsIBC Section 1010.1.9.8 (extended)Memory care units, dementia wards, assisted living, hospitals, detention facilities, hotelsYes -- AHJ must specifically approve the 30-second delay for the occupancy group

The 30-second delay exists primarily for memory care and dementia applications, where a resident may attempt to exit but will typically stop or turn back within 30 seconds when staff responds. In these settings, a 15-second delay may not give staff adequate response time before the door releases.

The Detex ECL-230X series supports both 15-second and 30-second delay settings. Confirm with the AHJ which setting is approved for the specific occupancy before specifying or installing the device. For detailed parts information on the ECL-230X series, see the Detex ECL parts guide.

 

Delayed Egress vs Free Egress: What Is the Difference

Detex ECL-230X-TDB 3-point delayed egress exit control lock for commercial doors requiring timed egress

Detex ECL-230X-TDB 3-Point Delayed Egress Exit Control Lock. View product page.

 

Most commercial exit devices provide free egress: push the bar and the door opens immediately. Delayed egress is a specific modification to that behavior, permitted only in certain building types and only with AHJ approval.

 

FeatureFree Egress DeviceDelayed Egress Device
Door opens whenImmediately on touchbar contactAfter 15 or 30 seconds
Alarm on touchbar contactNo (dogged devices are silent)Yes -- within 1 second of contact
Fire alarm behaviorNo change (already free egress)Immediate latch release, no delay
Power failure behaviorNo changeImmediate latch release, no delay
Required posted signageStandard exit signage onlyCode-compliant delayed egress sign required
AHJ approvalNot required for standard useRequired for every installation
Occupancy restrictionMost occupancy typesSpecific occupancy types only
Per-egress-path limitNo limitMaximum one delayed egress door per egress path

For broader context on exit device types and how to select the right one for your opening, see the exit devices parts guide and the panic hardware for commercial doors guide.

 

What Happens During a Fire Alarm, Power Failure, and Reset

Fire Alarm Release

A delayed egress device must be wired to the building fire alarm panel. When the fire alarm activates anywhere in the building, the fire alarm panel sends a release signal to every delayed egress device in the system. All delayed egress doors release immediately and revert to standard push-to-exit operation with no delay and no alarm requirement. This release must happen regardless of whether a touchbar has been pressed or a delay sequence is in progress.

If the building's fire alarm panel trips during an active delay sequence, the delay is cancelled immediately and the door opens. People do not have to wait out the remaining delay during a fire event.

Confirm that the fire alarm integration wiring is completed and tested before the delayed egress system is put into service. A delayed egress device that is not connected to the fire alarm system does not meet the code requirements of NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 or IBC Section 1010.1.9.8 and cannot be legally installed on an egress path.

 

Power Failure Release

Loss of power to the delayed egress device causes the latch to release and the door to revert to free egress. This fail-safe behavior is required by both NFPA 101 and the IBC. The device cannot hold the door locked without power.

The Detex ECL-230X series operates on 24VDC and requires continuous power to maintain the delayed egress locking function. When power is removed, the device releases within milliseconds and the door operates as a standard push-to-exit device.

Some ECL installations include battery backup to maintain alarm annunciation capability during brief power interruptions. However, battery backup does not change the fail-safe locking behavior: the door must release on power loss, even if the battery is powering auxiliary functions.

 

Reset After a Delay Cycle

After a completed delay cycle (when someone pushes the bar and the door opens after the delay), the device resets automatically when the door returns to the closed and latched position. No manual action is required to reset the device to the delayed egress state. The device is ready for the next cycle as soon as the door is closed.

Some ECL models require a manual reset by staff using an authorized key or credential if the device has been triggered. Confirm the reset behavior of the specific model when specifying or installing the device, since this affects how staff workflows are designed around the door.

 

Where Delayed Egress Is Used: Building Types and Applications

Detex ECL-230X-W-TDB weatherized 3-point delayed egress exit control lock for exterior doors and covered egress paths

Detex ECL-230X-W-TDB Weatherized 3-Point Delayed Egress Lock for exterior applications. View product page.

 

Building TypeTypical ApplicationCommon Delay SettingNotes
Healthcare -- Memory Care and Dementia UnitsPerimeter exit doors, unit entry/exit doors30 seconds (IBC Group I-1/I-2)Most common application; 30-second delay requires AHJ approval
Healthcare -- Hospitals and Nursing FacilitiesPsychiatric unit doors, behavioral health exits15 or 30 secondsDelay setting depends on occupancy classification and AHJ
K-12 SchoolsExterior exit doors, perimeter doors during school hours15 secondsUsed to monitor unauthorized student exits; alarms alert staff
Universities and CollegesDormitory perimeter doors, controlled campus exits15 secondsCommonly installed with access control integration for after-hours monitoring
Government BuildingsControlled area exits, file room perimeter doors15 secondsUsed to monitor exits from restricted areas without fully restricting egress
High-Rise BuildingsStairwell re-entry doors, controlled floor exits15 secondsMust meet NFPA 101 high-rise provisions; fire alarm integration is critical
Retail and CommercialLoss prevention exits, back-of-house egress doors15 secondsAHJ approval required; typically used on secondary egress paths only
Detention and Correctional FacilitiesControlled egress from detention areas15 or 30 seconds (IBC Group I-3)Special IBC provisions apply for this occupancy type

For application-specific guidance on commercial door hardware requirements, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the K-12 school door hardware guide, the universities door hardware guide, the government buildings guide, and the high-rise buildings guide.

 

Delayed Egress Signage: What the Code Requires

Detex ECL-230X-TB 2-point delayed egress exit control lock for interior commercial door applications

Detex ECL-230X-TB 2-Point Delayed Egress Exit Control Lock for interior applications. View product page.

 

Both NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 and IBC Section 1010.1.9.8 require that a compliant sign be posted on every delayed egress door. The sign is not optional and is not satisfied by standard exit signage.

The required sign must communicate the following to anyone approaching the door:

  • Pushing the bar will activate an alarm
  • The door will open after a specified number of seconds (15 or 30, as applicable)
  • The information must be clear, readable, and positioned where someone approaching the door will see it before pushing the bar

The Detex ECL-395 series provides code-compliant delayed egress door signs available in multiple languages: English, Spanish, French, French-Canadian, and German. These signs are listed by code as a requirement accompanying every delayed egress installation, not as an accessory upgrade. An installation that has a delayed egress device but lacks the required posted sign fails the code requirements of NFPA 101 and the IBC and will be flagged during any AHJ inspection.

The sign must be inspected annually to confirm it is intact, legible, and properly positioned. A torn, missing, faded, or obstructed sign is a code deficiency even if the device itself is functioning correctly.

 

2-Point vs 3-Point Delayed Egress: Which Model to Choose

The Detex ECL-230X series is available in two primary locking configurations: 2-point (single latchbolt) and 3-point (top, bottom, and latchbolt). Choosing the correct configuration depends on the door type and the security and code requirements of the opening.

 

2-Point Delayed Egress (ECL-230X-TB / ECL-230X-W-TB)

Detex ECL-230X-W-TB weatherized 2-point delayed egress exit control lock for exterior commercial door applications

Detex ECL-230X-W-TB Weatherized 2-Point Delayed Egress Lock. View product page.

The 2-point model uses a single latchbolt at the device chassis, engaging one strike point on the door frame. This is the standard configuration for most interior delayed egress applications where the door and frame are in good condition and the single latch is sufficient to hold the door during the delay period. The weatherized version (ECL-230X-W-TB) is appropriate for exterior applications exposed to weather.

 

3-Point Delayed Egress (ECL-230X-TDB / ECL-230X-W-TDB)

The 3-point model adds top and bottom latching in addition to the chassis latch, providing three points of engagement against the frame. This configuration is used when additional door stability is required during the delay period, when the door gap is inconsistent due to door warping, or when the AHJ or security integrator requires multi-point engagement for higher-security delayed egress applications.

ModelLatch PointsWeatherizedTypical UseProduct Page
ECL-230X-TB2-pointNoInterior doorsView
ECL-230X-W-TB2-pointYesExterior / covered egress pathsView
ECL-230X-TDB3-pointNoInterior doors requiring multi-point engagementView
ECL-230X-W-TDB3-pointYesExterior doors requiring multi-point engagementView

For replacement parts, mechanism assemblies, strike kits, bar components, and accessory kits for all ECL-230X models, see the complete Detex ECL parts guide.

 

Annual Inspection and Testing Checklist for Delayed Egress Devices

NFPA 101 requires annual inspection and testing of life safety features including delayed egress systems. NFPA 80 also requires annual inspection of fire-rated door assemblies, which includes any delayed egress device installed on a fire-rated door. Written records of each inspection must be maintained and made available to the AHJ upon request.

For the complete commercial door hardware maintenance schedule, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Functional Operation Test

  • Push the touchbar and confirm the alarm activates within one second of contact
  • Time the delay from touchbar contact to latch release. Confirm the measured delay matches the programmed setting (15 or 30 seconds)
  • Confirm the door opens freely after the delay period without requiring a second push
  • Allow the door to close and confirm it returns to the latched and delayed egress state automatically

 

Fire Alarm Release Test

  • With the delayed egress device activated (during the delay sequence), trigger a test signal from the fire alarm panel
  • Confirm the latch releases immediately upon receiving the fire alarm signal
  • Confirm the door operates as a standard free egress device with no delay during the fire alarm signal
  • Reset the fire alarm panel and confirm the delayed egress device returns to normal operation
  • This test must be performed in coordination with the building fire alarm system contractor or the AHJ

 

Power Failure Release Test

  • Disconnect power to the delayed egress device at the power supply
  • Confirm the latch releases immediately and the door opens freely
  • Reconnect power and confirm the device returns to normal delayed egress operation when the door is closed and latched

 

Signage Inspection

  • Confirm the required delayed egress sign is present, intact, and legible
  • Confirm the sign is positioned where it is visible to anyone approaching the door from the egress side
  • Confirm the sign specifies the correct delay period (15 or 30 seconds as applicable)
  • Replace any sign that is torn, faded, obstructed, missing, or specifies the incorrect delay period

 

Physical Inspection

  • Inspect the touchbar or push plate for physical damage, wear, or looseness
  • Check all mounting fasteners for tightness
  • Inspect the strike kit and latch engagement for alignment and wear
  • Confirm the alarm speaker is unobstructed and produces audible output at the required sound level
  • Inspect all wiring connections at the device and at the power supply for corrosion or looseness
  • Document all inspection results and note any deficiencies found and corrected

 

Where to Source Delayed Egress Hardware and Replacement Parts

Security Parts stocks Detex ECL-230X delayed egress exit control locks in all four configurations (2-point standard, 2-point weatherized, 3-point standard, 3-point weatherized) and stocks 59 ECL-series replacement parts including internal mechanism assemblies, bar and paddle components, strike kits, cover and shield assemblies, outside trim, cylinder components, accessory kits, and code-required delayed egress door signs.

For the complete parts catalog organized by component category, see the Detex ECL parts guide. For general exit device parts and component identification, see the exit devices parts guide. For guidance on exit device installation, see the exit device installation guide. For troubleshooting a delayed egress device that is not functioning correctly after installation, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support when selecting replacement parts for an existing ECL installation.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks Detex ECL-230X delayed egress exit control locks in all configurations and 59 ECL-series replacement parts, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301. For related guidance, see the commercial door fire rating guide and the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

How to Install an Exit Device: Step-by-Step Guide for Rim, SVR, and CVR Configurations

Quick Answer

Installing an exit device on a commercial door requires four things done in the right order: confirm your device type and handing before touching the door, mount the chassis at the correct height (touchpad centerline between 34 and 48 inches above finished floor per ANSI A156.3), install the appropriate strike for your configuration (rim, surface vertical rod, or concealed vertical rod), and verify latch engagement and egress force before the door goes back into service.

The steps differ for each device type. Rim devices mount at one point; surface vertical rod (SVR) devices require top and bottom rod adjustment; concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices require factory-prepped door pockets. Start with this guide from the beginning so you are following the correct steps for your specific installation.

 

Before You Start: Identify Your Exit Device Configuration

The most expensive exit device installation mistake happens before the first hole is drilled: a contractor starts the wrong set of steps because they did not confirm the device type. Rim, SVR, and CVR devices share some installation principles but have completely different strikes, rods, and door prep requirements. Confirm your device type first.

Rim exit device on a commercial door showing the chassis mounted to the door face with a single latch point

A rim exit device mounts to the door face and latches at one point. See the exit devices parts guide for component identification.

 

Rim Exit Device

A rim device mounts directly to the door face and latches at one point only. The strike mounts to the door frame. When the touchpad or crossbar is pushed, the latch retracts and the door swings free. Rim devices are the most common configuration and the simplest to install. Look for a single horizontal crossbar across the door width and a surface-mounted chassis on the door face. Common series identifiers: 98, 99, F-98, F-99, 22, 33A.

 

Surface Vertical Rod (SVR) Exit Device

A surface vertical rod device latches at two points: a top latch that engages the top frame and a bottom bolt that drops into a floor strike or threshold strike. The rods run vertically on the door face. SVR devices are used on doors without a center mullion or on pairs of doors where the active leaf requires multi-point latching. Look for exposed vertical rods running from the chassis to the top and bottom of the door. Common series identifiers: 9827, 9927, 27-series.

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) Exit Device

A concealed vertical rod device also latches at top and bottom, but the rods run inside the door cavity rather than on the surface. CVR installations require the door to have factory-prepped mortise pockets for the top latch assembly and a cutout for the bottom bolt. If the door does not arrive pre-prepped, field prep is significantly more involved. Look for a device with no visible rods on the door face. Common series identifiers: 9847, 9947, 47-series.

For help identifying which exit device series is installed or which series to order for a replacement, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison and the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 

What You Need: Tools and Materials Checklist

Required Tools

  • Drill with bit set (1/4-inch and 3/8-inch bits for through-bolt applications)
  • Tape measure
  • 4-inch torpedo level or longer spirit level
  • Pencil or punch awl for marking
  • Phillips and flathead screwdrivers
  • Allen/hex key set (for dogging slot and trim screws)
  • Nut driver or adjustable wrench (for through-bolt nuts)
  • Threadlocker compound (for through-bolt applications on hollow metal doors)
  • Chisel (for CVR top latch pocket if door is not pre-prepped)
  • Center punch (for accurate pilot hole placement on metal doors)

 

Materials to Have On Hand Before Starting

  • Exit device with all included hardware (confirm nothing is missing before opening the door)
  • Manufacturer installation template for the exact series being installed
  • Correct strike for the device series (rim strike, top strike, bottom strike/floor box as applicable)
  • Through-bolt kit if the door does not include it
  • Backplate (required on thin hollow metal doors to prevent chassis deformation)
  • For SVR: additional rod length if the door is taller than standard
  • For CVR: edge prep kit if the top latch pocket is not factory-installed

 

Pre-Install Inspection Checklist

Running through this checklist before mounting prevents the two most common failed installations: wrong handing and a device that does not match the door prep. Both require sending the device back for exchange, which costs more time than checking takes.

 

Confirm the Handing

Stand inside the room facing the door from the secure side, meaning the side the door swings away from you. If the hinges are on your right, the door is right-hand (RHR or RH). If the hinges are on your left, the door is left-hand (LHR or LH). The handing of the exit device must match the door handing.

The handing designation is printed on the device carton label and on the chassis identification label inside the device. Confirm the carton label matches the door before opening packaging. Some exit device series are field-reversible by flipping the latch or lever trim; others are factory-handed and cannot be changed in the field. If the handing is wrong on a non-reversible device, do not mount it. Contact the supplier before proceeding.

 

Confirm the Door Prep

  • Door width: Confirm the chassis length fits the door width. Most exit devices are available in standard widths (typically 36-inch and 48-inch door widths). A chassis that overhangs the door edge will not mount correctly.
  • Door thickness: Through-bolt lengths and faceplate depths are door-thickness specific. Confirm the through-bolt length in the kit matches the actual door thickness before drilling.
  • For CVR devices: Confirm the top latch mortise pocket dimensions and the bottom bolt cutout match the device specification. Measure the pocket depth, width, and location against the manufacturer template before mounting the chassis.
  • For SVR devices: Confirm the rod lengths shipped with the device match the door height. Rods ship at maximum length and must be cut or adjusted down.

 

Inspect the Device Before Mounting

  • Check the touchpad or crossbar for shipping damage (bent bar, cracked end cap, missing trim screws)
  • Confirm latch projection by measuring from the latch face to the device faceplate. Standard latch projection is 5/8 inch. Confirm this matches the strike clearance on your frame.
  • Verify that all rods, end caps, trim screws, through-bolts, and the installation template are in the packaging
  • Confirm the included strike matches the device series. Strikes are series-specific and not interchangeable between device families

 

Exit Device Mounting Height Requirements

Mounting height is the most-searched specific installation question for exit devices, and the most common source of a code-noncompliant installation.

ANSI A156.3 Height Requirement

ANSI A156.3 requires the touchpad or crossbar centerline to be between 34 and 48 inches above the finished floor. This measurement is taken to the push element itself, not to the device chassis or the top of the touchbar. A device chassis mounted with its center at 38 inches may have a touchpad centerline at 36 inches, depending on the chassis design. Always measure to the push element after mounting, not to the chassis center.

The 34-to-48-inch range also satisfies ADA Section 404.2.7 for accessible door hardware. An exit device within this range does not require an additional accessible pull or lever on the push side.

 

Mounting Height Reference by Door Height

Door HeightRecommended Chassis Mounting CenterPush Element Centerline Target
7 ft (84 in)38--40 in from finished floor36--40 in (verify after mounting)
8 ft (96 in)38--42 in from finished floor36--42 in (verify after mounting)
9 ft (108 in)40--44 in from finished floor38--44 in (verify after mounting)
Any heightAdjust to keep push element within 34--48 in34--48 in (ANSI A156.3 absolute range)

For ANSI and BHMA hardware standard context, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Marking the Mounting Height on the Door

Use the manufacturer installation template for your device series. Position the template at the target height with the push element centerline mark at the intended measurement. Confirm the template is level before marking any holes. Mark all hole center points with a pencil or punch awl before drilling. On metal doors, use a center punch to prevent bit walk when drilling.

 

Metal Door vs Wood Door Installation Differences

Hollow Metal Door Installation

Through-bolt mounting is required on hollow metal (HM) doors. The hollow interior of the door does not provide enough thread engagement for wood screws or short machine screws to resist the repeated lateral force applied to the exit device during daily egress cycles. Through-bolts pass completely through the door and are secured with nuts on the interior face.

  • Use the through-bolt kit supplied with the device or ordered separately for the series
  • A backplate on the interior door face is required on thin hollow metal doors (typically 14 gauge or thinner) to prevent the through-bolt nuts from pulling through the door face under load
  • Apply threadlocker compound to through-bolt threads before tightening. Vibration from repeated door operation can loosen nuts over time without it
  • Tighten nuts to the manufacturer-specified torque (typically 60--80 in-lb). Do not over-tighten, which can deform the chassis or door face

 

Wood Door Installation

Solid core wood doors can use the machine screws provided with the exit device in most cases. However, through-bolt mounting is still recommended on high-cycle openings or any door that will see heavy commercial traffic.

  • Pilot holes should be drilled at 70--80% of the screw diameter to prevent splitting on solid wood doors
  • Minimum door thickness for adequate thread engagement is typically 1-3/4 inches. Confirm the fastener length in the kit is appropriate for the actual door thickness
  • On doors with veneer or laminate faces, over-tightening can crack or delaminate the surface. Tighten just until the chassis is firmly seated

 

Aluminum Storefront and Glass Doors

Exit devices on aluminum storefront frames require a device series specifically listed for that door and frame type. Standard exit device hardware is not designed for narrow stile aluminum extrusions. Glass doors with patch fittings require a device series compatible with the patch dimensions. Confirm the device series listing before ordering for any aluminum or glass door application.

 

How to Install a Rim Exit Device (Step by Step)

Rim installation is the most straightforward of the three device types. The device mounts to the door face with through-bolts, and the rim strike mounts to the door frame. For Von Duprin 98/99 series rim device components, see the Von Duprin 9899 series parts guide. For Falcon 19, 24, and 25 series rim devices, see the Falcon 19/24/25 series exit device parts guide.

 

Step 1: Prepare the Door and Apply the Template

Position the manufacturer installation template on the door face at the target mounting height. The template shows the hole pattern for the specific device series. Confirm the template is oriented correctly for the door handing (RHR or LHR). Use the template center marks to align the push element centerline at the intended height. Hold the template in position and mark all hole centers with a pencil. Confirm the level before marking.

 

Step 2: Drill Mounting Holes

On hollow metal doors, use a center punch at each marked location before drilling to prevent bit walk. Drill pilot holes for through-bolts using the bit diameter specified in the installation template (typically 1/4 inch for standard through-bolts). On wood doors, drill pilot holes at 70--80% of screw shank diameter. Clear all chips before proceeding.

 

Step 3: Mount the Chassis to the Door Face

Set the device chassis against the door face with all holes aligned. Insert through-bolts (or screws on wood doors) through the chassis and door. Start all fasteners before tightening any of them. Once all fasteners are started, tighten in a cross pattern to draw the chassis evenly against the door face without rocking. Apply threadlocker to through-bolt threads on metal doors before tightening the nuts.

 

Step 4: Install the Rim Strike on the Door Frame

Hold the door in the closed position and mark the strike location on the door frame by pressing the door gently against the frame and transferring the latch centerline. The rim strike must align with the latch both vertically and laterally. Fasten the strike to the frame with the provided fasteners. Most rim strikes have slotted holes for minor vertical adjustment.

 

Step 5: Set the Latch Projection and Strike Alignment

Close the door and observe how the latch enters the strike. The latch should enter cleanly and engage the strike keeper without rolling back or dragging on the strike lip. If the latch rolls back (does not engage), the strike is too far from the frame face. If the latch drags, the strike is too close or misaligned vertically. Adjust strike position as needed and re-fasten.

 

Step 6: Secure All Fasteners and Verify Operation

Fully tighten all through-bolt nuts and mounting screws. Operate the touchpad 10 times in succession and confirm the latch retracts fully and consistently each time. Confirm the door latches fully when closed without requiring any pressure on the door face. Proceed to the post-install testing checklist.

 

How to Install a Surface Vertical Rod (SVR) Exit Device (Step by Step)

SVR installation adds two additional steps to the rim process: top and bottom rod length adjustment. The rods ship at maximum length and must be shortened or adjusted to the actual door height. For Von Duprin 22-series, 33A, 35A, and 55-series SVR devices, see the Von Duprin 22/33A/35A/55 series exit device parts guide.

 

Step 1: Prepare the Door and Confirm Rod Lengths

Apply the installation template at the target mounting height and mark all chassis holes. Before drilling, hold the device against the door and extend the top rod toward the top frame and the bottom rod toward the floor. Confirm the rods reach their respective strikes with the device chassis at the target mounting position. If the door height is less than the maximum rod length, note the adjustment needed.

 

Step 2: Mount the Chassis to the Door

Follow Steps 1 through 3 from the rim installation procedure above. The chassis mounting process is identical. Confirm the chassis is level before fully tightening through-bolt nuts.

 

Step 3: Attach and Adjust the Top Rod Assembly

Connect the top rod to the chassis rod connection point. Run the rod toward the top of the door. Most SVR top rods have a threaded coupler at the strike end that allows length adjustment. Thread the coupler in or out until the top latch engages the top strike correctly when the touchpad is released. Confirm the top latch retracts fully when the touchpad is pressed.

 

Step 4: Attach and Adjust the Bottom Rod Assembly

Connect the bottom rod to the chassis and run it toward the floor. The bottom rod connects to the floor bolt, which drops into a floor strike or threshold strike. Adjust the rod length so the floor bolt drops cleanly into the floor strike and engages fully when the touchpad is released. The bottom bolt should retract fully when the touchpad is pressed. Confirm both rod connections are tight after adjustment.

 

Step 5: Install Top and Bottom Strikes

Install the top strike in the header frame at the height required to align with the top latch centerline. Install the floor strike (or threshold strike) at the floor position aligned with the bottom bolt centerline. Both strikes typically have slotted mounting holes for minor alignment adjustment.

 

Step 6: Set Rod Tension and Test Both Latch Points

Operate the touchpad and confirm both the top latch and the bottom bolt retract simultaneously and fully. Close the door and confirm both latch points engage their respective strikes cleanly. Adjust top or bottom rod length if either latch point drags, rolls back, or fails to engage fully.

 

How to Install a Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR) Exit Device (Step by Step)

Von Duprin 9947 concealed vertical rod exit device showing the chassis and internal rod configuration for commercial door installation

Von Duprin 98/9947 CVR exit device. Rods are concealed inside the door cavity. View product page. For all CVR replacement parts, see the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide.

 

CVR installation is the most complex of the three types because the rods run inside the door cavity and the door must be pre-prepped with specific pockets and cutouts. Do not attempt CVR installation on a door that has not been factory-prepped or field-prepped to the manufacturer's specifications.

 

Step 1: Confirm Door Prep (Top Latch Pocket and Bottom Bolt Cutout)

Measure the top latch mortise pocket (typically at the top of the door edge) against the manufacturer's dimension specifications. Confirm the pocket depth, width, and distance from the door top match the CVR device requirements. Measure the bottom bolt cutout at the door bottom edge and confirm it aligns with the floor strike location. If either prep dimension is incorrect, field modification is required before mounting the chassis.

 

Step 2: Mount the Chassis to the Door

Apply the installation template and mark all chassis mounting holes. Drill and mount the chassis using the same through-bolt process as rim and SVR installation. Confirm the chassis is level and fully seated before tightening.

 

Step 3: Route and Connect the Top Latch Assembly

Feed the top latch assembly up through the door cavity to the top latch pocket. Connect the top rod to the chassis drive mechanism and route it through the door interior. Seat the top latch housing in the top pocket and fasten it according to the manufacturer specification. Confirm the top latch retracts when the touchpad is pressed and extends fully when released.

 

Step 4: Route and Connect the Bottom Bolt Assembly

Feed the bottom bolt assembly down through the door cavity to the bottom cutout. Connect the bottom rod to the chassis drive and route it to the bottom bolt housing. Seat the bottom bolt housing in the bottom cutout and fasten it. Confirm the bottom bolt drops fully when the touchpad is released and retracts fully when the touchpad is pressed.

 

Step 5: Install Top and Bottom Strikes

Install the top strike in the header frame at the correct height for the top latch centerline. Install the floor strike aligned with the bottom bolt centerline. Both strikes must account for the latch projection depth of the CVR device, which may differ from the SVR projection depth on the same door configuration.

 

Step 6: Check Bolt Engagement and Adjust

Close the door and verify that both latching points engage cleanly. Cycle the touchpad 10 times and confirm both the top latch and bottom bolt retract and extend consistently. Adjust rod connections at the chassis if either bolt is not traveling the full stroke. Confirm all interior fasteners on the latch and bolt housings are tightened before final inspection.

 

Dogging the Exit Device After Installation

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft package used to dog an exit device in the unlocked position    Von Duprin 107813 cylinder dogging kit for key-operated mechanical dogging on commercial exit devices

Left: Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft. Right: Von Duprin 107813 cylinder dogging kit. Both are used for mechanical dogging on standard (non-fire-rated) openings.

 

Dogging holds the exit device latch in the fully retracted position so the door operates as a standard push-pull door without requiring touchpad pressure. It is typically engaged during business hours and released after closing. Dogging is set after installation, not before.

 

What Dogging Does

When the latch is dogged, the touchpad or crossbar is held in the depressed position mechanically. The door swings freely in both directions without any requirement to push the touchpad. This is the normal daytime operating mode for high-traffic openings that do not require controlled egress during business hours.

 

Mechanical (Hex Key) Dogging

The dogging slot is located on the face of the chassis near the touchpad connection. Insert a 3/32-inch hex (Allen) key into the dogging slot and turn it to lock the touchpad in the depressed position. The hex key is removed after dogging; the device stays dogged until the key is reinserted and turned to release.

Mechanical dogging is not permitted on fire-rated openings. A fire door must self-latch every time it closes, and mechanical dogging defeats that requirement. If a fire-rated opening needs free-swing daytime operation, electric dogging is the only compliant option.

 

Electric Dogging (QEL and MEL Options)

Electric dogging uses an internal solenoid to hold the latch retracted under access control command. When power is cut or the fire alarm triggers, the solenoid releases and the device returns to full latching function. QEL (quiet electric latch retraction) and MEL (motor-driven electric latch retraction) are the two common electric dogging options. For the difference between the two and which to specify, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide and the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Electric Strike Alignment for Exit Devices

When an exit device is paired with an electric strike for access control, the strike and the device latch must be aligned before the installation is complete. Misalignment is the most common cause of a latch that functions correctly under hand operation but fails to engage reliably under normal door operation. For electric strike replacement parts, see the electric strike parts guide.

 

Rim Device and Electric Strike Alignment

The rim strike cutout must align with the rim latch both laterally and vertically. With the door in the closed position, confirm that the latch centerline aligns with the center of the electric strike keeper opening. Most electric strikes have a small adjustment range within the frame pocket. Use this range to center the keeper on the latch before final fastening.

 

Vertical Rod Device and Electric Strike

On SVR and CVR installations, the electric strike typically electrifies only the top latch. The bottom bolt remains mechanical and always extends when the door closes. The top latch alignment process is the same as for a rim device: confirm the top latch centerline aligns with the electric strike keeper centerline before final fastening. The bottom floor strike is installed mechanically and does not require electrical connection.

 

Testing the Strike and Device Together

Before energizing the strike, confirm the latch enters the keeper cleanly under manual door operation. Then energize the strike and test the following: the touchpad releases the latch while the strike is energized (the latch must retract even though the strike is holding it); the door opens when power is cut (fail-safe) or when the touchpad is pressed while the strike is powered (fail-secure). See the how to install an electric strike guide for detailed wiring and alignment procedure.

 

Fire-Rated Door Exit Device Installation Requirements

Fire-rated openings carry additional installation rules that are not optional. A standard panic hardware installation that violates any of these requirements fails the fire door assembly certification. For the full fire door hardware context, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Fire Exit Hardware vs Panic Hardware

Exit devices on fire-rated doors must be UL listed fire exit hardware. Standard panic hardware does not carry a fire listing and cannot be substituted. The UL fire listing label appears on the device chassis and on the packaging. It identifies the specific fire door assembly types the device is tested for. Confirm the device's fire listing before installing on any fire-rated opening. For guidance on when panic hardware is required and the distinction from fire exit hardware, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide.

 

No Mechanical Dogging on Fire-Rated Openings

Mechanical dogging (hex key or thumbturn dogging) is not permitted on fire-rated openings. It prevents the device from self-latching when the door closes, which voids the fire rating of the assembly. The only compliant option for free-swing operation on a fire door is electric dogging (QEL or MEL), which releases automatically when power is cut or when a fire alarm signal is received.

 

Coordinator and Closer Requirements on Paired Fire Doors

Fire-rated pairs of doors require a door coordinator that sequences the closing of the active and inactive leaves. Without a coordinator, the active leaf may close before the inactive leaf and prevent full latching. A door closer is also required on every fire-rated exit device opening. The closer must be listed for fire-rated assemblies and set to close and latch the door fully from any open position.

 

Post-Install Testing Checklist

Run through this checklist before considering the installation complete. Every item here reflects either a code requirement or a common failure mode that is easier to catch now than after the door has been in service.

 

Functional Egress Test

  • Apply egress force to the touchpad and confirm the latch retracts. Maximum actuating force is 15 pounds for standard devices (30 pounds for fire-rated devices) per ANSI A156.3
  • Push the door open from the fully closed position and confirm it swings to full open without binding
  • Release the touchpad and allow the door to close. Confirm it latches fully without requiring additional force on the door face

 

Latch Projection and Strike Engagement Check

  • Measure the latch projection from the device faceplate face. Confirm it matches the specification (typically 5/8 inch)
  • Observe the latch entering the strike from the side if possible. The latch tip should enter the keeper cleanly without rolling back on the strike lip
  • Check for any rattle of the latch in the strike keeper. A rattle indicates insufficient keeper depth or a worn latch

 

Dogging Function Test

  • Insert the hex key and dog the device. Confirm the touchpad stays in the depressed position without the hex key
  • Operate the door as push-pull and confirm it swings freely in both directions
  • Insert the hex key and release the dogging. Confirm the latch returns to the extended position and the touchpad operates normally

 

Electric Strike Test (If Applicable)

  • Fail-safe: cut power to the strike and confirm the door opens freely
  • Fail-secure: restore power and confirm the door holds when pulled from outside
  • Exit release: with the strike powered, push the touchpad and confirm the latch retracts and the door opens
  • Confirm the strike solenoid does not buzz, click excessively, or produce heat above ambient after 60 seconds of operation

 

Fire Door Compliance Check (If Applicable)

  • Confirm no hex key or mechanical dogging block is in place
  • Open the door to 90 degrees and release it without assistance. Confirm the door closes fully and latches without any manual intervention
  • Confirm the door coordinator sequences the leaves correctly on pairs (inactive closes before active)
  • Confirm the door closer is set to pull the door to positive latch from any open position between 5 and 90 degrees

 

Common Exit Device Installation Mistakes

These are the installation errors that result in a callback, a failed inspection, or a code violation. Each one is preventable with the pre-install checklist above.

 

Installing the Wrong Handing

The device chassis is mounted upside-down or mirrored relative to the door handing. The touchpad ends up on the wrong side of the door, the latch points the wrong direction, or the trim does not align. Catch this during the pre-install handing check before any holes are drilled. If the device is not field-reversible, a factory exchange is the only resolution.

 

Measuring Mounting Height to the Chassis Instead of the Push Element

The ANSI A156.3 requirement is for the push element centerline, not the chassis center. A chassis center at 40 inches does not guarantee the touchbar centerline is at 40 inches. Measure to the touchpad or crossbar after mounting and confirm the push element is within the 34-to-48-inch range before final fastening.

 

Using Screw Mounting on a Hollow Metal Door

Short machine screws or wood screws in a hollow metal door do not have enough material engagement to resist repeated egress force. The screws pull out over time, the chassis loosens, and the device fails to function reliably. Through-bolt mounting with a backplate is required on all hollow metal door installations.

 

Using the Wrong Strike for the Device Series

Exit device strikes are series-specific. A strike from a different series may appear to fit physically but will have a different keeper depth or latch engagement geometry that causes latch rollback. Always confirm the strike part number matches the device series before ordering.

 

Skipping Rod Length Adjustment on SVR Devices

SVR rods ship at maximum length. Installing them without adjustment for the actual door height results in rods that bottom out before the chassis is fully seated, or rods that are too long and prevent the bottom bolt from dropping fully into the floor strike. Always measure and adjust rod length to the actual door height before mounting the chassis.

 

Mechanical Dogging on a Fire-Rated Opening

Applying mechanical dogging on a fire-rated exit device opening voids the fire door assembly certification and creates a life safety violation. If the opening requires free-swing daytime operation and carries a fire rating, order a device with QEL or MEL electric dogging before installation.

 

Omitting the Through-Bolt Nuts or Skipping Threadlocker

Through-bolts inserted without nuts, or nuts tightened without threadlocker on metal doors, loosen from vibration within weeks of installation. The chassis develops play, the latch alignment drifts, and the device requires reinstallation. Apply threadlocker before tightening all through-bolt nuts.

 

Troubleshooting Exit Device Installation Problems

For broader commercial door hardware troubleshooting guidance, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

Touchpad Is Hard to Push

The most common cause is a chassis that is not seated flat against the door face. If the chassis is bowed or misaligned, the touchpad pivot binds against the chassis frame. Check that through-bolts are tightened evenly and that the chassis face is flush against the door. Over-tightened through-bolts can deform thin door faces and cause the same symptom; back off the nuts slightly and recheck.

 

Latch Does Not Engage the Strike When the Door Closes

Vertical or lateral misalignment between the latch and the strike keeper is the most likely cause. Mark the latch position on the strike face by applying chalk or crayon to the latch tip and closing the door once. The mark on the strike shows whether the latch is hitting above, below, or to the side of the keeper opening. Adjust the strike position accordingly.

 

Door Does Not Latch After Closing (SVR or CVR)

If the top or bottom latch point is not engaging after the door closes, the rod length is typically the problem. The rod may be too short (latch does not reach the strike) or too long (the rod is buckling before the latch fully extends). Adjust the threaded coupler at the rod connection point in small increments and retest after each adjustment.

 

Exit Device Rattles or Has Play After Mounting

Through-bolt nuts that are not fully tightened, or a backplate that is missing on a thin hollow metal door, are the two most common causes. Tighten all nuts to the specified torque and confirm the backplate is installed and seated. If play persists after tightening, inspect the chassis mounting holes for elongation, which indicates the door material has been overloaded and needs reinforcement.

 

Device Is Handed Incorrectly After Mounting

If the touchpad is on the correct side but the latch projects in the wrong direction, check the manufacturer documentation for field-reversibility. Some device series allow the latch to be reversed by repositioning a single component; others require a full exchange. Contact 845-935-0301 for part exchange support before disassembling the device chassis.

 

Maintenance After Installation

For a complete annual maintenance schedule for all commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Initial 30-Day Inspection

High-traffic doors should receive a 30-day check after installation. Re-check all through-bolt torque after the first month of use. On SVR devices, re-check rod length adjustment after the first month, since rod connection points can shift slightly during initial traffic cycles. Confirm latch engagement has not drifted from the initial setting.

 

Annual Inspection Points

  • Touchpad pivot wear: apply slight lateral pressure to the touchpad. Any lateral movement beyond minimal play indicates pivot bushing wear
  • Latch bolt engagement depth: confirm the latch still engages the strike keeper fully. A worn latch tip can reduce engagement depth over time
  • Rod connection points (SVR and CVR): confirm rod couplers and connection fasteners are tight and rods have not shifted from adjusted length
  • Strike alignment drift: recheck latch-to-strike alignment with the chalk test annually on high-cycle doors
  • Dogging mechanism: confirm hex key dogging engages and releases without binding
  • Egress force: retest actuating force with a pull scale and confirm it remains below 15 pounds (30 pounds on fire doors)

 

NFPA 80 Fire Door Inspection Requirements

NFPA 80 requires annual inspection and documentation for all fire-rated door assemblies, including the exit device, hinges, closer, and frame. The inspection must confirm self-latching function, correct device operation, absence of mechanical dogging, and that no components have been modified or replaced with non-listed parts. A written record of each inspection must be maintained.

 

Where to Source Exit Device Parts and Replacements

Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, and other commercial hardware lines. For parts by device type, see the exit devices parts guide and the commercial exit device parts guide. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance before ordering replacement components, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support when you need to confirm a part number against the installed device.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and security integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks exit device parts across Von Duprin, Falcon, and other commercial hardware lines, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301. For related installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer and commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide.

Schlage N123 Parts Guide: Keycam Assemblies, Plunger Assemblies, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The Schlage N123 is an NDE series wireless cylindrical lock. Before ordering any Schlage N123 parts, confirm three things:

  • Confirm the model is N123, not N523. Both are NDE wireless locks, but they use different part numbers. The N123 and N523 keycam and plunger assemblies are not interchangeable. The model number is printed on the back of the inside trim or in the project hardware schedule.
  • Keycam assemblies: 12 N123 keycam assemblies are stocked, each corresponding to a specific lock function. The part number encodes the function. Replacing a keycam with the wrong function code changes how the lock operates.
  • Plunger assemblies: Five plunger types are stocked: push button, push-turn button, spanner button, emergency turn button, and emergency button. The correct type matches the inside trim of the installed lock.
  • 21 Schlage N123 parts are stocked at Security Parts across keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, the RX switch upgrade kit, HSLR screwpack, and mounting screw.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

 

What the Schlage N123 Is

The Schlage N123 is part of the NDE series, Schlage's wireless cylindrical lock platform designed for access control integration in commercial and institutional buildings. NDE locks communicate wirelessly with the access control system through a credential reader built into the outside trim, eliminating the need for data wiring at each door.

The N123 is configured for applications where the door or lock geometry differs from the standard N523 configuration. While both models are NDE wireless cylindrical locks, they use different internal components. The keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, and other trim parts are specific to each model and cannot be substituted between them.

The N123 is commonly found in healthcare facilities, educational buildings, and government offices where wireless access control was installed during construction or renovation. Replacement parts are ordered when a keycam wears or fails (most often seen as difficulty retracting the latch with a key), when a plunger assembly needs replacement due to physical wear or button malfunction, or when the access control integrator adds an RX switch function to the existing installation.

The N123 is also an appropriate replacement lock when a facility is upgrading from an older Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock (non-wireless) to the NDE wireless platform on doors where the physical prep does not accommodate the standard N523. Because the NDE platform integrates directly with credential management systems, the parts that control the mechanical function of the lock, particularly the keycam and plunger, are specified at the time of installation to match the access control behavior required at each opening. Replacing any of these components requires confirming both the mechanical part number and the intended lock function before ordering.

For the companion guide covering the N523 model, see the Schlage NDE wireless lock parts guide. That guide covers N523-specific keycam assemblies, cylinder options, and tailpiece configurations, which are not applicable to the N123.

 

How to Confirm You Have an N123, Not an N523

Ordering parts for the wrong NDE model is the most common ordering error on N123 service calls. Before placing any order, confirm the model number using one of these methods:

  • Label on the inside trim: Remove the inside trim rose cover. The model number is typically printed or stamped on the back of the inside escutcheon or the lock chassis.
  • Hardware schedule: The original project hardware schedule submitted during construction specifies the exact model number for each opening. This is the most reliable source for facilities teams managing a building with a consistent hardware specification.
  • Work order documentation: If the installation was performed under a service contract, the original work order typically records the lock model and function code for each door.

If the model number is not accessible from any of these sources, call 845-935-0301. The Security Parts team can help identify the correct model based on part numbers already installed or hardware schedule details.

 

Schlage N123 Keycam Assemblies

Schlage N123-076 keycam assembly replacement part for Schlage N123 NDE wireless cylindrical lock

Schlage N123-076 Keycam Assembly. View product page and order.

 

The keycam assembly is the internal mechanical component that translates key cylinder rotation into latch retraction. The keycam part number specifies both the physical geometry and the lock function (storeroom, classroom, office, etc.). Using a keycam with the wrong function code causes the lock to operate incorrectly, so the replacement must match the installed function exactly.

Twelve N123 keycam assemblies are stocked at Security Parts, covering the complete range of standard functions available for the N123 wireless lock.

Part NumberProduct Page
N123-076 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-097 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-013 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-098 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-012 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-011 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-055 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-094 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-008 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-059 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-010 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-007 Keycam AssemblyView and order
N123-045 Keycam AssemblyView and order

 

Keycam replacement is the most common mechanical service call on the N123. The symptom is typically that the key will not retract the latch, or that it retracts with significantly more force than normal. This indicates that the keycam follower or the cam itself has worn past the service threshold. In high-turnover institutional environments, keycam wear is accelerated by the volume of key turns and the frequency of forced or rushed key operation by staff and students. A worn keycam that is not replaced promptly increases wear on adjacent components, including the cylinder and the latch chassis.

When replacing a keycam assembly, confirm the function code of the installed keycam before ordering. The function code determines how the lock responds to a key turn: whether the latch retracts freely, requires a credential to unlock first, or remains locked regardless of credentials. An incorrect keycam function changes the security behavior of the door.

 

Schlage N123 Plunger Assemblies

Schlage N123-087 spanner button plunger assembly replacement for Schlage N123 NDE wireless lock

Schlage N123-087 Spanner Button Plunger Assembly. View product page and order.

 

The plunger assembly controls the inside button or thumbturn mechanism of the N123. Five plunger assembly types are stocked, each corresponding to a different inside trim configuration. The correct replacement must match the existing inside button type exactly, because the plunger geometry is specific to each button style.

 

Identifying Your Plunger Type

Look at the inside trim of the installed N123. The shape and operation of the inside button identifies the correct plunger assembly:

For access control applications in healthcare, educational, and government facilities where the N123 is commonly installed, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Schlage N123-062 RX Switch Upgrade Kit

Schlage N123-062 RX switch upgrade kit for Schlage N123 NDE wireless lock request-to-exit function

Schlage N123-062 RX Switch Upgrade Kit. View product page and order.

 

The N123-062 RX switch upgrade kit adds a request-to-exit (RX) switch to the inside trim of the N123 wireless lock. When the inside lever handle is depressed, the RX switch sends a signal to the access control system indicating that a person is exiting through the door.

The RX switch upgrade is used when:

  • The original N123 installation did not include RX switch wiring and the access control system now requires exit signal monitoring
  • The security integrator is adding exit logging to previously unmonitored doors
  • The facility is upgrading its access control platform to one that uses RX switch input for door control or reporting
  • Code compliance or security policy requires that all controlled openings generate an exit event in the access control log

The N123-062 is an upgrade kit, not a standard replacement part. It adds capability that was not present in the original installation. If the lock already has an RX switch installed and it has failed, contact 845-935-0301 to confirm the correct replacement component before ordering.

 

Schlage N123 Hardware and Installation Components

Schlage N123-120 HSLR screwpack replacement for Schlage N123 NDE wireless cylindrical lock

Schlage N123-120 HSLR Screwpack. View product page and order.

 

  • N123-120 HSLR screwpack: The hardware kit containing the mounting screws for the HSLR (high security long reach) installation configuration. Replace when original screws are stripped, damaged, or missing from the installation. The HSLR configuration is used when the mounting throughbolts must reach through a thicker door or reinforcing plate.
  • N123-020 mounting screw: Individual mounting screw for the N123 lock body. Replace when a single screw is stripped or damaged and the full screwpack is not needed. Order the N123-120 screwpack when multiple screws require replacement.

Both the N123-120 screwpack and the N123-020 mounting screw are commonly needed after a lock has been removed and reinstalled multiple times during access control system upgrades or lock swaps. Thread stripping in the door chassis is one of the more common causes of loose lock installation on doors that have seen repeated hardware changes. Keeping a supply of N123-120 screwpacks on hand reduces service time when screws strip during a scheduled replacement program.

For guidance on maintenance schedules that include hardware inspection for wireless locks, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide. For information on ANSI/BHMA performance standards that apply to the N123 as a Grade 1 cylindrical lock, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Complete Schlage N123 Parts Reference

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
N123-076Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-097Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-013Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-098Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-012Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-011Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-055Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-094Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-008Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-059Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-010Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-007Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-045Keycam AssemblyKeycam
N123-087Spanner Button Plunger AssemblyPlunger
N123-086Push Button Plunger Bar AssemblyPlunger
N123-085Push-Turn Button Plunger AssemblyPlunger
N123-084ND Series Emergency Turn Button and PlungerPlunger
N123-034Emergency Button PlungerPlunger
N123-062RX Switch Upgrade KitUpgrade
N123-120HSLR ScrewpackHardware
N123-020Mounting ScrewHardware

 

Where to Source Schlage N123 Parts

Security Parts stocks all 21 Schlage N123 parts across keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, the RX switch upgrade kit, HSLR screwpack, and mounting screw. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you need help confirming the correct keycam function code or plunger type before ordering.

For the companion guide covering N523 parts, see the Schlage NDE wireless lock parts guide. For guidance on commercial door hardware maintenance schedules that cover wireless lock inspection intervals, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance on Schlage wireless lock parts, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For Schlage deadbolt parts commonly installed alongside the N123, see the Schlage B663 classroom deadbolt guide.

The N123 is widely specified in healthcare facilities, universities and colleges, and government buildings, where wireless access control is integrated with credential management systems on NDE-compatible platforms.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Schlage N123 parts catalog across all keycam assemblies, plunger assemblies, the RX switch upgrade kit, HSLR screwpack, and mounting screw, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Falcon Q500 Parts Guide: Deadbolt Cylinder Replacement by Pin Count and Finish

Quick Answer

The Falcon Q500 series is a commercial deadbolt line. The only replacement parts stocked for the Q500 series are deadbolt cylinders, available in 5-pin, 6-pin, and 7-pin configurations across multiple finishes. Before ordering any Falcon Q500 parts, confirm two things:

  • Pin count: The number of pin stacks in the installed cylinder. This determines which Q500 cylinder part number applies. A 5-pin, 6-pin, and 7-pin cylinder are not interchangeable even on the same deadbolt body. The pin count is typically stamped on the existing cylinder or recorded in the hardware schedule.
  • Finish: The surface finish of the installed deadbolt. Multiple Q500 cylinder part numbers exist for the same pin count in different finishes. Ordering a cylinder in the wrong finish produces a cylinder that is functionally correct but visually mismatched.
  • 20 Falcon Q500 cylinders are stocked at Security Parts across all pin count and finish combinations.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you cannot confirm the pin count or finish from the installed unit.

 

What the Falcon Q500 Series Is

The Falcon Q500 is a commercial-grade deadbolt series used in institutional and commercial applications including government facilities, educational buildings, healthcare entries, and multi-tenant commercial properties. The Q500 deadbolt provides keyed entry from the outside with a thumbturn on the inside, offering a straightforward key-in deadbolt function for doors where access control does not require a lever or knob mechanism.

The Q500 is distinct from the Falcon Q330 series, which is a cylindrical lever lock. The Q330 uses key-in-lever cylinders designed for a lever lockset body. The Q500 uses deadbolt cylinders with a different cam and tailpiece geometry. The two cylinder series are not interchangeable. If the hardware being serviced is a lever lock with a handle, see the Q330 guide. If it is a standalone deadbolt with a thumbturn, you are on the correct page.

For broader context on Falcon hardware, parts, and product lines stocked at Security Parts, see the Falcon hardware brand page.

 

How Falcon Q500 Cylinder Replacement Works

The Falcon Q500 deadbolt is designed to allow cylinder replacement without removing the deadbolt body from the door. This is important for facilities managers and locksmiths who need to rekey or replace a cylinder due to key compromise, wear, or a change in key control requirements, without disrupting the door prep or the thumbturn assembly.

Cylinder replacement is the correct repair in these situations:

  • The cylinder plug has worn and the key no longer operates smoothly
  • Keys have been lost or compromised and the facility requires rekeying
  • The facility is transitioning to a new key control system that requires a different keyway
  • The cylinder has been physically damaged by a forced entry attempt
  • The existing cylinder finish has degraded and replacement is preferred over refinishing

The cylinder replacement process on the Q500 series does not require specialty tools in most cases. A standard flathead screwdriver is typically sufficient to release the cylinder retaining mechanism and extract the cylinder from the deadbolt body. The replacement cylinder slides in and locks with the same mechanism. The entire field replacement, once the correct part is on hand, takes under ten minutes for a trained locksmith or experienced facilities technician. The time investment is in confirming the correct part number before the service call, not in the physical replacement itself.

When ordering a replacement cylinder, confirm the pin count of the existing cylinder before placing the order. Installing a 6-pin cylinder in a deadbolt that was originally keyed to a 7-pin system, for example, will mean the existing keys no longer operate the lock. If the installation is being rekeyed intentionally, the pin count of the new cylinder must match the new key system.

For general guidance on planned replacement and maintenance schedules for commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Falcon Q500 7-Pin Deadbolt Cylinders

Falcon Q500-057 deadbolt cylinder 7-pin replacement part for Falcon Q500 series commercial deadbolt

Falcon Q500-057 Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Seven-pin cylinders provide the largest key combination pool of the three Q500 configurations. They are used in higher-security applications where key control is critical and where restricted keyways or master key systems require the additional pin stack to accommodate the key cut depth range. Five 7-pin Q500 cylinders are stocked.

Part NumberPin CountProduct Page
Q500-0577-PinView and order
Q500-0147-PinView and order
Q500-0597-PinView and order
Q500-0477-PinView and order
Q500-0467-PinView and order

 

Falcon Q500 6-Pin Deadbolt Cylinders

Falcon Q500-012 deadbolt cylinder 6-pin replacement for Falcon Q500 commercial deadbolt series

Falcon Q500-012 Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Six-pin cylinders are the most widely used configuration in the Q500 series. They provide a large combination pool suitable for master key systems in most commercial and institutional settings without requiring the full security overhead of a 7-pin system. Eight 6-pin Q500 cylinders are stocked, covering the broadest range of finishes in the series.

Part NumberPin CountProduct Page
Q500-0126-PinView and order
Q500-0566-PinView and order
Q500-0106-PinView and order
Q500-0556-PinView and order
Q500-0546-PinView and order
Q500-0586-PinView and order
Q500-0226-PinView and order
Q500-0216-PinView and order

 

Falcon Q500 5-Pin Deadbolt Cylinders

Falcon Q500-072 deadbolt cylinder 5-pin replacement for Falcon Q500 series commercial deadbolt

Falcon Q500-072 Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Five-pin cylinders have a smaller key combination pool than 6-pin or 7-pin configurations. They are found in Q500 deadbolts specified for lower-security or lower-traffic applications where master key system complexity is not a requirement. Seven 5-pin Q500 cylinders are stocked.

Part NumberPin CountProduct Page
Q500-0725-PinView and order
Q500-0695-PinView and order
Q500-0675-PinView and order
Q500-0705-PinView and order
Q500-0665-PinView and order
Q500-0655-PinView and order
Q500-0645-PinView and order

 

Selecting the Right Q500 Cylinder: Pin Count and Finish

Most ordering errors on Q500 cylinder replacements come from one of two mistakes: ordering the wrong pin count because the existing cylinder was not checked, or ordering the correct pin count in the wrong finish. Both mistakes require a return and delay the repair.

 

How to Confirm Pin Count

The pin count of an installed Q500 cylinder is typically documented in the original hardware schedule submitted during construction or renovation. If the hardware schedule is not available, a locksmith can disassemble the cylinder on-site and count the pin stacks directly. The pin count is not visible from the outside of the installed deadbolt.

When the pin count cannot be confirmed from documentation and on-site disassembly is not immediately possible, a locksmith can sometimes estimate the pin count range from the key blank profile. Different keyways are licensed to specific pin count ranges, so the keyway stamped on the key blade can narrow the search to either 5-pin, 6-pin, or 7-pin cylinders depending on how the master key system was originally designed. This is an estimate method only and should not substitute for a confirmed count when the exact replacement must match an existing key system.

If the facility uses a master key system, the key control documentation will also indicate the pin count, since the master key system design is tied to the pin stack configuration. In most institutional master key systems, the pin count across all cylinders in a building section is uniform.

 

How to Confirm the Correct Finish

The finish code for the installed Q500 deadbolt is typically found on the specification sheet submitted at the time of original installation. If the spec sheet is not available, the finish can be identified visually by comparing the installed deadbolt to ANSI/BHMA finish code samples. Common finish codes used on the Q500 series include US26D (satin chrome), US10B (oil-rubbed bronze), US32D (satin stainless), US3 (polished brass), and US10 (satin bronze).

Multiple Q500 cylinders share the same pin count but differ only in finish. Ordering a cylinder with the correct pin count but an incorrect finish results in a functionally correct cylinder that does not match the installed trim. For applications where visual uniformity is required, such as healthcare corridors, educational buildings, or government facility entries, finish matching is as important as pin count matching.

The most common ordering mistake when finish is uncertain is to order a "safe" neutral finish that does not match the installed trim. On a public-facing building entry or a corridor where hardware uniformity is part of the facility standard, a mismatched cylinder finish requires a second order and a second service call. When the finish cannot be confirmed from documentation, it is better to pause the order and physically inspect the installed deadbolt before placing it, or to call the Security Parts team at 845-935-0301 for guidance on identifying the finish from the installed hardware.

For guidance on hardware standards and finish code conventions, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Complete Falcon Q500 Parts Reference

Falcon Q500-014 deadbolt cylinder 7-pin for Falcon Q500 commercial deadbolt series

Falcon Q500-014 Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-Pin. View product page and order.

 

Part NumberConfigurationProduct Page
Q500-057Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-014Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-059Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-047Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-046Deadbolt Cylinder, 7-PinView and order
Q500-012Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-056Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-010Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-055Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-054Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-058Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-022Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-021Deadbolt Cylinder, 6-PinView and order
Q500-072Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-069Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-067Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-070Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-066Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-065Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order
Q500-064Deadbolt Cylinder, 5-PinView and order

 

Where to Source Falcon Q500 Parts

The Falcon Q500 deadbolt is commonly specified in institutional and government construction projects as the primary entry deadbolt on office doors, storage rooms, and utility spaces that do not require a lever mechanism or push bar. In educational settings, Q500 deadbolts are regularly found on administrative offices, equipment rooms, and faculty-only areas where access is controlled by key rather than by credential reader. In healthcare facilities, the Q500 serves staff-only rooms and pharmaceutical storage areas where keyed entry is required for compliance and security.

Cylinder replacement frequency on Q500 deadbolts varies by application. In high-turnover institutional environments, cylinders are typically replaced or rekeyed on a scheduled maintenance cycle to address key control drift from lost or unaccounted keys. In lower-turnover government and educational settings, cylinder replacement is more commonly triggered by physical wear, key compromise, or a change in occupancy. Knowing the pin count and finish in advance shortens the repair cycle significantly, since a pre-stocked cylinder can be installed in minutes on-site rather than requiring a factory order.

Security Parts stocks all 20 Falcon Q500 deadbolt cylinders across the 5-pin, 6-pin, and 7-pin configurations. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you need help matching the pin count or finish to the installed deadbolt.

For Falcon lever lock cylinder parts, see the Falcon Q330 parts guide, which covers key-in-lever cylinders, latch bolts, spring cages, and lever trim for the Q330 cylindrical lock series. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance on Falcon hardware, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For applications in healthcare, government, and educational settings where Q500 deadbolts are commonly specified, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the government buildings hardware guide, and the universities and colleges door hardware guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and institutional maintenance teams since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Falcon Q500 cylinder catalog across all pin count and finish configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4010T Parts Guide: Track Arms, Rollers, Tracks, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4010T is a template arm door closer that uses a concealed slide track on the door face instead of a standard exposed arm. Before ordering any LCN 4010T parts, confirm these key points:

  • 4010T vs 4010: The 4010 is a standard arm surface closer. The 4010T uses a template arm track configuration. The two products have completely separate part catalogs. Parts are not interchangeable between them.
  • Track variant: Four track options are stocked: 3038 (standard), 3038H (hold-open), 3038B (standard with bumper), 3038HB (hold-open with bumper). Match the track to the door function before ordering.
  • Roller match: The 3034 standard roller goes with standard tracks. The 3034HO hold-open roller goes with hold-open tracks. A mismatched roller defeats the hold-open function.
  • 3064H vs 3054: The 3064H is a combined hold-open clip and roller. The 3054 is the clip only. If the roller is also worn, the 3064H replaces both in one part.
  • Double egress: Doors that swing both directions need the 3077DE track arm and the 78DE main arm and tube. Standard arms only swing one way.
  • 37 LCN 4010T parts are stocked at Security Parts across all arm, track, roller, hold-open, cover, and screw pack configurations.

Call 845-935-0301 before ordering if you need compatibility confirmation.

 

What the LCN 4010T Is

The LCN 4010T is the AutoTemplate version of the LCN 4010 Series door closer. The T suffix designates the template arm (track arm) configuration, where the closer spindle connects to a track arm that slides inside a rail mounted on the door face. This keeps the arm mechanism closer to the door plane and reduces the clearance needed at the top of the door compared to a traditional exposed parallel arm.

The 4010T is commonly used in commercial and institutional applications where a standard exposed arm would create a clearance or aesthetic problem, or where the door is subject to regular parallel arm contact. The track arm system is more mechanically protected than an exposed parallel arm because the roller travels inside the rail rather than pivoting freely in space.

The 4010T is a completely separate product from the standard arm 4010. If the closer body at your installation has a slide rail mounted to the door with a roller running inside it, you have a 4010T. If the arm pivots freely between the closer body and the door surface without a rail, you have the standard arm version. The two products have separate part numbers, and no component crosses over between them. For parts relating to the standard LCN 4010 and other 4000 Series surface closers, see the LCN 4000 Series parts guide. For the companion AutoTemplate guide covering the 4050AT closer, see the LCN 4050AT parts guide.

 

LCN 4010T Track Arms

LCN 4010T-3077T standard track arm replacement part for LCN 4010T template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3077T Standard Track Arm. View product page and order.

 

The track arm is the mechanical link between the closer spindle and the track roller. It converts the rotational output of the closer body into the linear sliding motion that controls the door arc. Two track arm configurations are stocked for the 4010T.

 

4010T-3077T: Standard Track Arm

The 4010T-3077T is the standard single-direction track arm for doors that swing in one direction only. It connects the closer spindle to the track roller at the door end. Replace when the arm tube is bent, the spindle connection is stripped and tightening does not hold, or the arm has separated from the roller during operation.

 

4010T-3077DE: Double Egress Track Arm

The 4010T-3077DE is the track arm for doors that swing in both directions. Double egress openings are common in healthcare corridor applications and in institutional settings where traffic approaches from both sides. The 3077DE must be paired with the 4010T-78DE main arm and tube and the 4010T-82 rod. Standard arm components do not work in a double egress configuration.

 

Arm Screws: 159 and 83H

Two arm screws are stocked for the 4010T and they serve different attachment points.

  • 4010T-159 arm screw: The primary screw that secures the track arm to the closer spindle at the standard attachment point. Replace when the arm is loose at the spindle and tightening does not restore a secure connection.
  • 4010T-83H H-arm screw: Used when the installation uses an H-arm bracket configuration to mount the track arm on a parallel arm bracket rather than directly onto the spindle. Confirm the installation type before ordering. Ordering the 83H for a standard spindle connection, or the 159 for an H-arm bracket, will result in a non-fitting part.

 

LCN 4010T Track Assemblies

LCN 4010T-3038 standard track replacement for LCN 4010T AutoTemplate template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3038 Standard Track. View product page and order.

 

The track is the rail mounted to the door face that guides the roller as the door swings. It is the most commonly replaced component after the roller on high-cycle installations. Four variants are stocked, each serving a different operational requirement.

 

Track Variant Selection Table

Part NumberTypeHold-OpenBumperRoller Required
4010T-3038Standard trackNoNo3034
4010T-3038HHold-open trackYesNo3034HO
4010T-3038BStandard track with bumperNoYes3034
4010T-3038HBHold-open track with bumperYesYes3034HO

The bumper variants cushion the roller at the fully open position, which reduces impact noise and mechanical stress when the door reaches its open limit. Specify a bumper track on doors that contact a wall or a door stop with enough force to produce noise. Additional track hardware:

  • 4010T-169 track bumper: A standalone bumper replacement for an existing track that has lost or damaged its original bumper cushion.
  • 4010T-73 end cap: The cap at the terminal end of the track rail that prevents the roller assembly from traveling beyond the track boundary.
  • 4010T-425 roller lock screw: Secures the roller assembly within the track after installation. Replace when the roller is moving laterally inside the track between service visits.

 

LCN 4010T Track Rollers

LCN 4010T-3034 track roller replacement part for LCN 4010T template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3034 Track Roller. View product page and order.

 

The track roller is the highest-wear component on most 4010T installations. It contacts the track rail on every cycle and degrades through friction over time. Two roller types are stocked and must match the track type installed.

  • 4010T-3034: Standard track roller. Use with the 4010T-3038 and 4010T-3038B standard tracks only.
  • 4010T-3034HO: Hold-open track roller. Use with the 4010T-3038H and 4010T-3038HB hold-open tracks only. This roller includes the engagement geometry that allows the hold-open clip to arrest the arm at the fully open position.

A standard 3034 roller installed in a hold-open track produces a door that still closes but no longer holds at the open position. On hold-open function failures, check the roller type before replacing the track or the clip. If the installed roller is a 3034 in a hold-open track, that is the complete failure cause.

 

Hold-Open Components: 3064H vs 3054

LCN 4010T-3064H hold-open clip and roller combined assembly for LCN 4010T template arm door closer

LCN 4010T-3064H Hold-Open Clip and Roller. View product page and order.

 

Two hold-open components are stocked for the 4010T and they are frequently confused. Ordering the wrong one is the most common wrong-part return on 4010T hold-open repairs. The distinction is straightforward once you know what each part contains.

 

4010T-3054: Hold-Open Clip Only

The 4010T-3054 is the hold-open clip without a roller. It clips onto the existing roller to engage the hold-open notch in the 3038H or 3038HB track. Order the 3054 when the hold-open function has failed but the existing roller is still in good condition and does not need replacement. This is the lower-cost repair when the roller itself has not worn through.

 

4010T-3064H: Combined Hold-Open Clip and Roller

The 4010T-3064H replaces both the hold-open clip and the roller in a single assembly. Order the 3064H when the hold-open function has failed and the roller is also worn or damaged. On high-cycle doors where both components fail at similar rates, installing the 3064H as a single-part replacement is more efficient than sourcing the clip and roller separately. The 3064H is also the correct part if you cannot determine whether it is the clip, the roller, or both that have failed.

 

Quick Reference: 3054 vs 3064H

PartContainsOrder When
4010T-3054Hold-open clip onlyClip failed, roller is still good
4010T-3064HCombined clip and rollerBoth failed, or failure source is unclear

 

Mounting Plate and Additional Hardware

  • 4010T-18 plate: The mounting plate for the 4010T closer body. Replace when the plate is bent or when mounting holes have stripped and the closer body cannot be securely anchored.
  • 4010T-82 rod: The connecting rod used in double egress configurations between the main arm assembly and the track arm.
  • 4010T-141-2 plug: Fills unused mounting holes in the closer body to prevent debris ingress. Replace when plugs are missing from the housing.

 

Covers and Finish Hardware

  • 4010T-72MC metal cover: The heavy-duty metal closer cover for high-traffic and abuse-prone applications. Specified where the standard plastic cover would not withstand repeated contact or forced entry attempts against the closer body.
  • 4010T-72 standard cover: The standard plastic cover for normal commercial applications. Replace when cracked, broken, or no longer clips securely to the body.
  • 4010T-73 end cap: The cap at the open end of the track that retains the roller inside the track travel boundary.
  • 4010T-31 cover screw: The fastener that secures the cover to the closer body. Replace when the cover is loose and the existing screw has stripped.

 

Screw Pack Selection Guide

The 4010T uses different screw packs depending on the installation configuration (standard or hold-open) and the substrate the closer and track are mounted to. Thirteen screw pack variants are stocked. Selecting the wrong pack is the most common fastener mismatch on 4010T service calls.

Part NumberTypeConfiguration
4010T-TBTRXThru-bolt Torx machine screw packStandard, metal door
4010T-TORXTorx machine screwsStandard, metal door alternate
4010T-TBWMSThru-bolt wood/machine screw packStandard, wood door
4010T-WMSWood/machine screw packStandard, wood door alternate
4010T-TBSRTThru-bolt self-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming substrate
4010T-SRTSelf-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming alternate
4010T-HTBTRXHO thru-bolt Torx machine screw packHold-open, metal door
4010T-HTORXHO Torx machine screwsHold-open, metal door alternate
4010T-HTBWMSHO thru-bolt wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door
4010T-HWMSHO wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door alternate
4010T-HTBSRTHO thru-bolt self-reaming tapping screw packHold-open, self-reaming substrate
4010T-HSRTHO self-reaming tapping screw packHold-open, self-reaming alternate
Flat box w/ labelStandard flat boxDocumentation and reboxing

 

Complete LCN 4010T Parts Reference

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
4010T-3077TStandard track armTrack arm
4010T-3077DEDouble egress track armTrack arm
4010T-78DEMain arm and tube (double egress)Track arm
4010T-159Arm screwArm hardware
4010T-83HH-arm screwArm hardware
4010T-82Rod (double egress)Arm hardware
4010T-3038Standard trackTrack
4010T-3038HHold-open trackTrack
4010T-3038BStandard track with bumperTrack
4010T-3038HBHold-open track with bumperTrack
4010T-3034Standard track rollerRoller
4010T-3034HOHold-open track rollerRoller
4010T-3054Hold-open clip (clip only)Hold-open
4010T-3064HHold-open clip and roller (combined)Hold-open
4010T-425Roller lock screwRoller hardware
4010T-18Mounting plateMounting hardware
4010T-141-2PlugMounting hardware
4010T-72MCMetal coverCover
4010T-72Standard plastic coverCover
4010T-73Track end capCover
4010T-31Cover screwCover hardware
4010T-169Track bumperTrack hardware
4010T-TBTRXStd thru-bolt Torx machine screw packScrew pack
4010T-HTBTRXHO thru-bolt Torx machine screw packScrew pack

 

What Fails First on the LCN 4010T

Most 4010T service calls on high-cycle doors follow one of three failure patterns. Knowing which component typically fails first saves time before ordering.

  • Track roller: The most frequently replaced component on heavy-use installations. Roller wear produces a grinding or clicking sound as the door swings, and the arm may skip or catch inside the track. On high-cycle institutional doors, inspect the roller first before replacing the track or the arm.
  • Hold-open clip: On doors held open for extended periods throughout the day, the hold-open clip wears through before the roller does. The door will close on its own when it should hold open. Replace the clip (3054) or the combined clip-and-roller assembly (3064H) depending on roller condition.
  • Arm screw: The arm screw (4010T-159 or 4010T-83H depending on installation type) can loosen on doors subject to forced or rapid opening. A loose arm screw allows the arm to slip on the spindle, which produces a clicking sound at the start of the opening cycle and eventually allows the arm to separate from the spindle under load. Tighten or replace before assuming the arm tube itself has failed.

 

Where to Source LCN 4010T Parts

Security Parts stocks all 37 LCN 4010T parts across track arms, tracks, rollers, hold-open components, mounting hardware, covers, and all 13 screw pack configurations. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support if you are unsure which arm screw, screw pack, or hold-open component applies to your installation.

For the companion LCN 4050AT template arm guide covering the 4050AT closer body, see the LCN 4050AT parts guide. For broader LCN door closer parts coverage including the 4040XP, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide and the door closers parts guide. For help selecting the right LCN closer for a new installation, see the LCN closer selection guide and the door closer sizing guide. For installation and adjustment guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer and how to adjust a commercial door closer. For scheduled inspection and planned maintenance, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and institutional maintenance teams since 2001. Security Parts stocks the full LCN 4010T parts catalog across all arm, track, roller, hold-open, cover, and screw pack configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4840 Parts Guide: CUSH Arms, Pneumatic Hinge, Panel Adapter, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4840 is a pneumatic multi-door auto equalizer operator. Before ordering any LCN 4840 parts, confirm these key points:

  • Model first: The 4840, 4810, and 4820 share similar part naming but are different models. Confirm the 4840 label is on the closer body before ordering. Parts between these models are not interchangeable.
  • 3077CNS vs 3077SCNS vs 3077EDA: Three arm configurations exist. The 3077CNS uses a block-and-shoe cushion stop. The 3077SCNS uses a spring-based cushion. The 3077EDA is the extra duty arm for high-traffic applications. Choose based on what is installed and what failed.
  • Pneumatic hinge (4840-460): This hinge carries the air line through the pivot point. If the equalizer function is slow or absent and tubing pressure is confirmed, the pneumatic hinge is the component to replace.
  • Door loop kit (4840-459): Carries the flexible pneumatic line between the fixed frame and the swinging door. Replace when tubing is cracked, kinked, or function is inconsistent.
  • 25 LCN 4840 parts are stocked at Security Parts across arms, hinges, adapters, covers, spacers, and screw packs.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 4840 Is

The LCN 4840 is a pneumatic multi-door auto equalizer operator designed to simultaneously control the opening force across multiple doors from a single compressed air source. It equalizes the opening resistance on doors along an accessible route so that a person using a wheelchair or mobility aid can open the door without encountering uneven or excessive resistance.

The 4840 is the multi-door version of the LCN pneumatic auto equalizer family. The 4810 and 4820 serve single-door applications. The 4840 is specified where a single pneumatic control point must manage several doors on the same accessible corridor simultaneously.

The 4840 is not an electric automatic opener and not a door closer in the traditional sense. It is a pneumatically powered force-equalizer. Its parts catalog reflects this: the key components are arms, a pneumatic hinge, a door loop kit, a spring cush block, and the mechanical accessories that support and cover the system. For the broader LCN auto equalizer family context and related sentronic products, see the LCN Sentronic and Auto Equalizer parts guide. For general LCN automatic door operator coverage, see the commercial door operators guide.

 

LCN 4840 Arm Configurations

LCN 4840-3077CNS CUSH-N-STOP arm replacement part for LCN 4840 pneumatic auto equalizer operator

LCN 4840-3077CNS CUSH-N-STOP Arm. View product page and order.

 

Three arm configurations are stocked for the LCN 4840. The arm connects the closer body spindle to the door panel and controls the opening arc. Selecting the wrong arm type is the most common ordering error on 4840 service calls.

 

4840-3077CNS: CUSH-N-STOP Arm

The 4840-3077CNS is the standard CUSH-N-STOP arm. It uses a rigid cush shoe and spring cush block assembly to provide a controlled cushioned stop at the fully open position. The cushion absorbs the final impact of the door reaching its open limit, reducing noise and mechanical stress on the frame. Replace when the arm is bent, the spindle connection is stripped, or the cushion stop no longer functions at the full open position.

 

4840-3077SCNS: Spring CUSH-N-STOP Arm

The 4840-3077SCNS is the Spring CUSH-N-STOP arm. It uses an integrated spring mechanism within the arm assembly for cushioning at the open position, rather than the separate block-and-shoe configuration of the CNS arm. The SCNS arm is specified when the installation requires spring-loaded cushion action. Confirm which arm is installed before replacing: the CNS and SCNS are not interchangeable.

 

4840-3077EDA: Extra Duty Arm

The 4840-3077EDA is the Extra Duty Arm, reinforced for high-traffic and high-abuse applications. If a standard CNS or SCNS arm has failed prematurely on a high-cycle accessible route entry, the EDA is the correct upgrade. Installing a standard arm on an EDA application will produce the same premature failure.

 

Arm Hardware: Arm Screw and Blade Stop Spacer

  • 4840-159 arm screw: Secures the arm to the closer spindle. Replace when the arm is loose at the spindle and tightening the existing screw does not hold. A loose arm screw is responsible for a significant share of 4840 performance calls that initially appear to be arm failures.
  • 4840-61 blade stop spacer: Adjusts the door open limit. Replace when missing or when the door is making contact with an adjacent surface before the arm reaches its natural stop position.

 

LCN 4840 Pneumatic Hinge: 4840-460

LCN 4840-460 pneumatic hinge replacement part for LCN 4840 auto equalizer door operator

LCN 4840-460 Pneumatic Hinge. View product page and order.

 

The 4840-460 pneumatic hinge is a specialized hinge that carries the compressed air supply line through the door pivot point. A standard hinge cannot perform this function because the tubing cannot cross a hinge knuckle without crimping or breaking during door cycles. The pneumatic hinge has an internal air passage machined through the hinge barrel that allows air to flow continuously from the fixed frame to the moving door panel regardless of door position.

Replace the pneumatic hinge when:

  • The auto equalizer function is slow or absent and the air supply pressure at the source has been confirmed as adequate
  • The door loop kit tubing is intact and unobstructed
  • Air pressure at the door panel side of the hinge is lower than at the frame side
  • The hinge shows visible corrosion at the barrel that could be restricting the internal air passage

 

LCN 4840 Panel Adapter: 4840-419

LCN 4840-419 panel adapter for LCN 4840 auto equalizer on narrow bottom rail aluminum door

LCN 4840-419 Panel Adapter. View product page and order.

 

The 4840-419 panel adapter is required on aluminum storefront and narrow-stile glass doors where the door bottom rail does not provide sufficient mounting surface for the standard 4840 closer body. The panel adapter creates the necessary clearance and mounting geometry between the closer body and the narrow door rail.

If a 4840 was installed without the panel adapter on a narrow-rail door and the arm geometry is incorrect or the closer body is contacting the door rail, confirm whether the panel adapter was included in the original installation before replacing other components.

 

LCN 4840 Door Loop Kit: 4840-459

LCN 4840-459 door loop kit replacement for LCN 4840 pneumatic auto equalizer flexible air line

LCN 4840-459 Door Loop Kit. View product page and order.

 

The 4840-459 door loop kit carries the flexible pneumatic supply line from the fixed door frame to the swinging door panel. Because the door pivots on its hinges, a rigid tube cannot connect the two sides. The door loop provides a coiled or looped flexible tube that extends and contracts smoothly with every door cycle.

The door loop kit is a wear component. On high-cycle accessible route entries, the tubing flexes thousands of times per year. Replace when:

  • The tubing is visibly cracked, kinked, or hardened
  • The equalizer function is inconsistent despite confirmed adequate air supply pressure
  • Air leaks are audible or detectable at the door loop fitting connections
  • The loop no longer returns to its rest position freely after the door closes

 

CUSH Components: Spring Cush Block and Cush Shoe Support

The CUSH-N-STOP arm assembly depends on two components that work together to cushion the door at the open position. They are separate parts with different failure modes.

  • 4840-3080 spring cush block: The spring-loaded block inside the cush shoe that provides the primary cushioning action when the arm reaches the open limit. Replace when the cushion stop is no longer present at the fully open position, even though the arm itself is undamaged. A failed spring cush block allows the door to open to its limit without any cushioned resistance.
  • 4840-30 cush shoe support: The structural bracket that positions and supports the cush shoe in the correct engagement geometry. Replace when the support is bent or cracked, which typically occurs after repeated hard-door-open impacts on installations with high opening force or where the door is being pushed against its stop repeatedly.

When diagnosing a failed cushion stop, start with the spring cush block (4840-3080) before replacing the arm. A failed spring cush block produces the same symptom as a worn arm (no cushion at the open position), but it is a far less expensive and quicker repair. If replacing the spring cush block restores the cushion stop function, the arm itself does not need replacement. Only replace the arm if the spindle connection is stripped, the arm tube is bent, or the cush shoe support bracket is cracked beyond use.

On installations where the cush shoe support (4840-30) is bent, inspect the door frame stop at the corresponding open-position contact point. A bent support bracket almost always indicates that the door has been repeatedly pushed hard against a physical stop. If the door stop position can be adjusted, do so before installing the new bracket, or the replacement will experience the same impact damage.

 

Spacers, Stand-Off, and Mounting Hardware

  • 4840-201 fifth screw spacer: A mounting spacer used in certain 4840 installation configurations to provide clearance between the closer body and the door or frame face. Replace when the spacer is damaged or missing from the original installation.
  • 4840-182 stand-off: A stand-off bracket that positions the closer body at the correct distance from the door surface. Required in installations where the door panel geometry creates a gap between the closer mounting position and the door face.
  • 4840-124 plug: Fills unused mounting holes in the 4840 closer body. Replace when plugs are missing, which exposes the closer housing interior to dust and moisture.

 

Cover Components

  • 4840-72MC metal cover: The heavy-duty metal cover over the 4840 closer body. Specified in high-traffic and abuse-prone accessible route entries. Replace when the cover is damaged, dented, or no longer clips to the body correctly.
  • 4840-334 cover endcap: The endcap at the terminal end of the cover that closes the housing. Replace when missing or cracked.
  • 4840-163 cover insert: The insert that fills the space between the cover body and the closer mechanism. Keeps the interior free of debris.
  • 4840-31 cover screw and 4840-31L long cover screw: Fasteners that secure the cover to the closer body. The long version (31L) is used in installations with additional spacer or stand-off components that require a longer fastener reach.

 

Decals

  • 4840-155-2 activation decal: The user-facing label that indicates how the door is activated. Required on accessible route doors where visual instruction must be provided to users approaching the door.
  • 4840-155-1 caution decal: The safety decal that warns users of the door operation. Replace when faded, missing, or illegible. Accessibility compliance on ADA routes typically requires that safety decals remain legible.

 

Screw Pack Selection

Two screw pack configurations are stocked for the LCN 4840. Selecting the wrong pack for the substrate is the most common fastener mismatch on 4840 installations.

  • 4840-TBWMS: Thru-bolt with wood and machine screw pack. Used when the 4840 is mounted to a wood substrate door or when the installation requires both wood and machine screws in the same configuration. The most common screw pack for standard 4840 installations.
  • 4840-WMS: Wood and machine screw pack without thru-bolts. Used in installations where thru-bolt mounting is not required or not possible. Confirm the original installation method before ordering the replacement screw pack.

 

Complete LCN 4840 Parts Reference

Part NumberDescriptionCategory
4840-3077CNSCUSH-N-STOP armArm
4840-3077SCNSSpring CUSH-N-STOP armArm
4840-3077EDAExtra Duty armArm
4840-159Arm screwArm hardware
4840-61Blade stop spacerArm hardware
4840-460Pneumatic hingePneumatic system
4840-459Door loop kitPneumatic system
4840-419Panel adapterMounting hardware
4840-3080Spring cush blockCUSH components
4840-30Cush shoe supportCUSH components
4840-201Fifth screw spacerMounting hardware
4840-182Stand-offMounting hardware
4840-124PlugMounting hardware
4840-72MCMetal coverCover components
4840-334Cover endcapCover components
4840-163Cover insertCover components
4840-31Cover screwCover hardware
4840-31LLong cover screwCover hardware
4840-TBWMSThru-bolt wood/machine screw packScrew packs
4840-WMSWood and machine screw packScrew packs
4840-155-2Activation decalDecals
4840-155-1Caution decalDecals
4840-Rebox KitRebox kit, box and instruction sheetDocumentation
4840-Instruction SheetInstruction sheetDocumentation
4840-Flat BoxFlat box with labelDocumentation

 

Source LCN 4840 Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks all 25 LCN 4840 parts across arms, pneumatic components, mounting hardware, covers, screw packs, and decals. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

The LCN 4840 is commonly found in healthcare corridor entries, university accessible route doors, and government facility main entries where multiple doors on the same accessible path must be controlled simultaneously. A single pneumatic source on the 4840 equalizes the opening force across all connected doors, ensuring consistent compliance with ADA force requirements along the entire route. When one door in a 4840 multi-door system fails, confirm whether the failure is isolated to that door (arm, pneumatic hinge, or door loop) or system-wide (air supply, control unit) before ordering parts. A system-wide failure will not be resolved by replacing a single door component.

For the broader LCN auto equalizer and pneumatic operator catalog, see the LCN Sentronic and Auto Equalizer parts guide and the door operators parts guide. For general LCN door closer parts, see the door closers parts guide and the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

For OEM versus aftermarket guidance on LCN parts, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For accessibility and ADA-compliant door hardware in healthcare settings, see the healthcare door hardware guide. For maintenance and inspection requirements, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and accessibility compliance consultants since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN 4840 parts catalog across all arm configurations, pneumatic components, mounting hardware, covers, and screw packs, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4050AT Parts Guide: Track Arms, Rollers, Tracks, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4050AT is a heavy-duty door closer that uses an AutoTemplate overhead concealed parallel arm system. Before ordering any LCN 4050AT parts, confirm these four things:

  • 4050AT vs 4050A: These are completely different products. The 4050A is a surface closer. The 4050AT uses a concealed overhead parallel arm track system. Their parts are not interchangeable.
  • Track variant: Four track options exist: 3038 (standard), 3038H (hold-open), 3038B (standard with bumper), and 3038HB (hold-open with bumper). Match the track to the function the door requires.
  • Roller match: The 3034 standard roller goes with standard tracks. The 3034H hold-open roller goes with hold-open tracks. A mismatched roller will prevent hold-open function from engaging.
  • Double egress: If the door swings in both directions, you need the 3077DE track arm and 78DE main arm and tube. Standard arms only swing one way.
  • 40 LCN 4050AT parts are stocked at Security Parts across all track, arm, roller, cylinder, cover, and hardware configurations.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 4050AT Is

The LCN 4050AT is the AutoTemplate configuration of the LCN 4050 Series heavy-duty door closer. Unlike the surface-mounted 4050A, the 4050AT uses an overhead concealed parallel arm track system. The closer body mounts inside the door header or above the door frame, and the arm travels along a track rail mounted to the door face to control the swing.

The 4050AT is commonly specified on heavy institutional doors in healthcare, education, and government facilities where a surface-mounted closer would create an obstruction or aesthetic conflict. The concealed track arm keeps the closer mechanism above the door line and out of the traffic path.

The 4050AT is a separate product from the 4050A. The two share some model naming but use completely different installation configurations and part catalogs. For guidance on the LCN 4050A surface closer and other LCN 4000 series models, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide. For related LCN overhead parallel arm closers, see the LCN 1250 parts guide and the LCN 1450 parts guide.

 

LCN 4050AT Track Arms

LCN 4050AT-3077T standard track arm replacement part for LCN 4050AT overhead parallel arm door closer

LCN 4050AT-3077T Standard Track Arm. View product page and order.

 

The track arm connects the closer spindle to the track roller and converts the rotational output of the closer into the linear sliding movement that controls door swing. Two track arm configurations are stocked.

 

4050AT-3077T: Standard Track Arm

The 4050AT-3077T is the standard track arm for single-direction swing doors. It attaches at the closer spindle on one end and connects to the track roller on the other. Replace when the arm is bent, cracked, or the spindle connection has stripped and the arm cannot be secured.

 

4050AT-3077DE: Double Egress Track Arm

The 4050AT-3077DE is the track arm for doors that swing in both directions. Double egress doors are common in healthcare corridor applications where staff push through from either side. The 3077DE arm must be used with the 4050AT-78DE main arm and tube; the standard arm components are not compatible with double egress configurations.

Also needed for arm attachment:

  • 4050AT-159 arm screw: The primary screw that secures the track arm to the closer spindle.
  • 4050AT-83H set screw: The set screw that locks the arm at the correct spindle engagement depth.
  • 4050AT-82 rod: The connecting rod between the main arm and the track arm on double egress configurations.

 

LCN 4050AT Track Assemblies

LCN 4050AT-3038 standard track replacement for LCN 4050AT AutoTemplate overhead concealed door closer

LCN 4050AT-3038 Standard Track. View product page and order.

 

The track is the rail mounted to the door face that guides the track roller as the door swings. Four track variants are stocked for the 4050AT, each serving a different functional requirement.

 

Choosing the Right Track Variant

Part NumberTypeHold-OpenBumperRoller Needed
4050AT-3038Standard trackNoNo3034
4050AT-3038HHold-open trackYesNo3034H
4050AT-3038BStandard track with bumperNoYes3034
4050AT-3038HBHold-open track with bumperYesYes3034H

The bumper variants add a rubber cushion at the open-limit end of the track that absorbs impact and reduces slam noise at the fully open position. Specify a bumper track when the door contacts a wall, stop, or another surface with enough force to cause noise or damage.

Also stocked for track installations:

  • 4050AT-169 track bumper assembly: A standalone replacement bumper for existing tracks that have lost or worn through their original bumper cushion.
  • 4050AT-73 end cap: The cap at the end of the track that retains the roller assembly within the track travel range.
  • 4050AT-425 roller lock screw: Secures the roller assembly in the track after installation. Replace when the roller is moving laterally in the track between service calls.

 

LCN 4050AT Track Rollers

LCN 4050AT-3034 track roller replacement for LCN 4050AT AutoTemplate door closer parallel arm system

LCN 4050AT-3034 Track Roller. View product page and order.

 

The track roller slides in the track rail and connects the arm assembly to the sliding movement that controls door swing. Two roller configurations are stocked, and they must be matched to the correct track type.

  • 4050AT-3034: Standard track roller. Used with 4050AT-3038 and 4050AT-3038B tracks.
  • 4050AT-3034H: Hold-open track roller. Used with 4050AT-3038H and 4050AT-3038HB tracks. The 3034H includes the engagement geometry needed for the hold-open function to arrest the door at the fully open position.

Installing a standard 3034 roller in a hold-open track defeats the hold-open function. The door will still close but will not hold at the open position. Replace the roller first when hold-open function has stopped working and the track itself appears undamaged.

 

Hold-Open Clip: 4050AT-3054

The 4050AT-3054 hold-open clip works with the hold-open roller and hold-open track to arrest the arm at the fully open position. The clip is a wear component on high-cycle doors. Replace when the door no longer holds at the open position despite having the correct 3034H roller and 3038H or 3038HB track installed.

 

LCN 4050AT Cylinder Assembly

LCN 4050AT-3071 standard cylinder assembly replacement for LCN 4050AT overhead parallel arm door closer

LCN 4050AT-3071 Cylinder Assembly. View product page and order.

 

The 4050AT-3071 standard cylinder assembly is the main hydraulic mechanism of the 4050AT closer. It controls closing speed and latching speed through internal valves. Replace the cylinder assembly when:

  • The door swings freely without resistance (complete hydraulic loss)
  • Closing speed and latching speed cannot be adjusted through the valve screws
  • Hydraulic fluid is visible on or around the closer body
  • The closer makes no resistance on the closing stroke even after adjustment

If the door closes but slams or is too slow to latch, try adjusting the closing and latching speed valves before ordering the cylinder assembly. If adjustment has no effect, the seals inside the cylinder have likely failed. For guidance on adjustments, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide.

 

Drop Plates and Mounting Hardware

The 4050AT uses drop plates to position the closer body at the correct height relative to the door and frame geometry. Two drop plate configurations are stocked:

  • 4050AT-18: Standard drop plate for top rail mounting. Used when the closer body requires standard drop height to align with the track.
  • 4050AT-18G: Alternate drop plate for modified top rail geometry. Confirm the existing plate part number from the installed unit before ordering.

 

Shaft Extender: 4050AT-480

The 4050AT-480 shaft extender bridges the gap between the closer spindle and the track arm on installations where the standard spindle length does not reach the arm connection point. It is most commonly needed when non-standard door or frame geometry shifts the mounting position beyond the standard spindle reach. If the track arm cannot be fully seated on the spindle during installation, the shaft extender is the correct solution.

 

Covers, Plugs, and Finish Hardware

  • 4050AT-72MC: Metal cover for the closer body. The metal cover is the heavy-duty version and is specified in high-traffic or abuse-prone applications where the standard cover may not hold up.
  • 4050AT-72: Standard cover for the closer body. Replace when the cover is cracked, missing, or no longer clips to the body correctly.
  • 4050AT-141-1 plug and 4050AT-141-2 plug: Plugs that fill unused mounting holes in the closer body. Replace when plugs are missing and debris or moisture may enter the housing.
  • 4050AT-73 end cap: The cap at the terminal end of the track extrusion that retains the roller assembly within the track travel range.

 

Screw Pack Selection Guide

The 4050AT uses different screw pack types depending on whether the installation is standard or hold-open, and depending on the substrate the track and closer are mounted to. Eight screw pack variants are stocked. Selecting the correct pack prevents the most common fastener mismatch on 4050AT service calls.

Part NumberFunctionConfiguration
4050AT-TBTRXThru-bolt Torx machine screw packStandard, metal door
4050AT-TORXTorx machine screwsStandard, metal door alternate
4050AT-TBWMSThru-bolt wood/machine screw packStandard, wood door
4050AT-WMSWood/machine screw packStandard, wood door alternate
4050AT-TBSRTThru-bolt self-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming substrate
4050AT-SRTSelf-reaming tapping screw packStandard, self-reaming substrate alternate
4050AT-HTBTRXHO thru-bolt Torx machine screw packHold-open, metal door
4050AT-HTORXHO Torx machine screwsHold-open, metal door alternate
4050AT-HTBWMSHO thru-bolt wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door
4050AT-HWMSHO wood/machine screw packHold-open, wood door alternate
4050AT-HTBSRTHO thru-bolt self-reaming tap screw packHold-open, self-reaming substrate
4050AT-HSRTHO self-reaming tapping screw packHold-open, self-reaming substrate alternate

 

Complete LCN 4050AT Parts Reference

Part NumberDescription
4050AT-3077TStandard track arm
4050AT-3077DEDouble egress track arm
4050AT-78DEMain arm and tube (double egress)
4050AT-3038Standard track
4050AT-3038HHold-open track
4050AT-3038BStandard track with bumper
4050AT-3038HBHold-open track with bumper
4050AT-3034Standard track roller
4050AT-3034HHold-open track roller
4050AT-3071Standard cylinder assembly
4050AT-3054Hold-open clip
4050AT-18Drop plate, standard top rail
4050AT-18GDrop plate, alternate top rail
4050AT-480Shaft extender
4050AT-169Track bumper assembly
4050AT-72MCMetal cover
4050AT-72Standard cover
4050AT-82Rod (double egress)
4050AT-73Track end cap
4050AT-TBTRXStandard thru-bolt Torx machine screw pack
4050AT-HTBTRXHold-open thru-bolt Torx machine screw pack

 

What Fails First on the LCN 4050AT

Most 4050AT service calls on high-cycle institutional doors fall into one of four failure patterns. Identifying the correct failure before ordering prevents double service calls and wrong-part returns.

 

Track Roller Wear

The track roller is the highest-wear component on most 4050AT installations. It experiences direct friction contact with the track rail on every door cycle. Roller wear is gradual on normal-cycle doors but accelerates when the door is forced manually against the closer, when the track has debris, or when the door panel is misaligned. Replace the roller when the door produces a grinding or thumping sound during the swing arc, or when the arm visibly skips in the track.

 

Track Rail Damage

The track rail can be bent or damaged by impact from door panels, carts, and equipment. A bent track causes the roller to bind mid-travel and the closer to stall before the door reaches the fully closed position. Inspect the track first when the door stops closing before latching and the closer itself is otherwise functioning.

 

Hold-Open Clip Failure

The hold-open clip is a wear component on doors that are routinely pushed to the fully open position and held there throughout the day. When the clip wears, the door no longer holds at the open position even though all other components are functional. Replace the clip before replacing the roller or track on hold-open function failures.

 

Arm Screw Loosening

The arm screw (4050AT-159) that connects the track arm to the closer spindle can loosen on high-cycle applications. A loose arm screw causes the arm to slip on the spindle, which typically produces a click or skip at the start of the opening cycle. Re-tighten or replace the arm screw before assuming the arm itself has failed.

 

Where to Source LCN 4050AT Parts

Security Parts stocks all 40 LCN 4050AT parts across arms, tracks, rollers, cylinders, plates, covers, and screw packs. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

For guidance on scheduled inspection of door closers under NFPA 80, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist and the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide.

For related LCN door closer parts, see the LCN 4040XP parts guide, the LCN 4000 series parts guide, and the door closers parts guide. For help selecting the correct LCN closer for a new installation, see the LCN closer selection guide and the door closer sizing guide.

For installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer. For adjustment after installation or replacement, see how to adjust a commercial door closer. For OEM versus aftermarket guidance, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN 4050AT parts catalog across all arm, track, roller, cylinder, cover, and hardware configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Adams Rite Parts Guide: Trim Kits, Lever Kits, Faceplates, and Strikes

Quick Answer

This is a replacement and ordering reference for the Adams Rite 91-series trim components and 2101-series strikes stocked at Security Parts. It covers part number decoding, finish codes, model compatibility, and handedness. If you need guidance on which Adams Rite product to specify for a new installation, see the retail storefront door hardware guide.

Key ordering rules for Adams Rite parts before you open the catalog:

  • 91-0202-01 vs 91-0202-02: These are inside trim and outside trim kits. They are not interchangeable. Confirm which face of the door needs service before ordering.
  • IP in the part number: Stands for Inside Pull. Not a generic designation. It describes the pull handle configuration specific to glass storefront inside trim.
  • MV8 vs MV7 vs MW0 lever kits: MV8 is right-hand. MV7 is left-hand. MW0 is universal. Order MW0 if you cannot confirm hand orientation.
  • 2190 vs 2290 faceplate kits: 91-0266-01 fits the 2190. 91-0266-04 fits the 2290. Confirm the model number stamped on the lock body before ordering.
  • 2101-01 vs 2101-02 strikes: 2101-01 is flat-corner. 2101-02 is radius-corner. The frame cutout profile determines which is correct.
  • Finish codes: US32D (satin chrome), 10B (oil rubbed bronze), 628 (satin aluminum), 313 (dark bronze). Must match the existing hardware finish.

Security Parts stocks 55 Adams Rite parts across trim kits, cover kits, designer lever kits, faceplate kits, and strikes. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

How the Adams Rite 91-Series Part Numbers Work

The 91-XXXX numbering system is not self-explanatory. Understanding it before placing any order prevents the most common wrong-part returns in Adams Rite service.

The number after the hyphen identifies the component family. The suffix after the second hyphen identifies either the finish, the hand orientation, or the model compatibility. Here is the breakdown of every family in the current Security Parts catalog:

PrefixComponent FamilySuffix Variable
91-0202-01Inside trim hardware kit (2190)01 = inside / 02 = outside
91-0202-02Outside trim hardware kit (2190)01 = inside / 02 = outside
91-0200-XXXXOutside trim cover kitFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0201-XXXXInside trim cover kitFinish code (US32D only in stock)
91-0197-MW0-XXXXDesigner lever kit, universalFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0197-MV8-XXXXDesigner lever kit, right-handFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0197-MV7-XXXXDesigner lever kit, left-handFinish code (US32D, 10B)
91-0266-01-XXXXFaceplate kit for 2190Finish code (628, 313)
91-0266-04-XXXXFaceplate kit for 2290Finish code (628, 313)
2101-01-XXXXFlat strike with dust boxFinish code (630, 121)
2101-02-XXXXRadius strike with dust boxFinish code (630, 121)

 

Trim Hardware Kits: 91-0202-01 and 91-0202-02

Adams Rite 91-0202-01-IP inside trim hardware kit for 2190 deadlatch glass storefront door

Adams Rite 91-0202-01-IP Inside Trim Hardware Kit. View product page and order.

 

The 91-0202 trim hardware kits supply the complete mounting and trim hardware for the 2190 deadlatch body. Two kits are stocked and serve different sides of the door.

  • 91-0202-01-IP: Inside trim hardware kit for the 2190. Covers all hardware components for the interior (egress) face of the door. The IP designation indicates Inside Pull configuration. Order this when servicing the interior trim of the installed 2190 deadlatch.
  • 91-0202-02-IP: Outside trim hardware kit for the 2190. Covers all hardware components for the exterior (entry) face of the door. Order this when servicing the exterior trim of the installed 2190.

Ordering 91-0202-02 when 91-0202-01 is needed (or vice versa) is the most common wrong-part return for Adams Rite 2190 trim service. Confirm which face of the door requires the replacement before placing the order.

 

Outside Trim Cover Kits: 91-0200 Series

Adams Rite 91-0200-US32D-IP outside trim cover kit for 2190 aluminum storefront deadlatch

Adams Rite 91-0200-US32D-IP Outside Trim Cover Kit. View product page and order.

 

The 91-0200 outside trim cover kits supply the cover plate assembly for the exterior face of the 2190 deadlatch. The cover kit protects the trim mechanism housing and provides the finished appearance on the exterior side. Two finishes are stocked:

The corresponding inside trim cover kit is the 91-0201-US32D (satin chrome), available for the interior face.

 

Designer Lever Kits: 91-0197 Series

Adams Rite 91-0197-MW0-US32D-IP designer lever kit universal hand for 2190 storefront deadlatch

Adams Rite 91-0197-MW0-US32D-IP Designer Lever Kit (Universal). View product page and order.

 

The 91-0197 designer lever kits supply a lever-style handle for the Adams Rite 2190 trim. The lever mounts to the inside face of the door. Three hand-orientation codes are stocked, each available in two finishes, for a total of six configurations.

 

Hand Orientation: MW0, MV8, MV7

Hand orientation is determined by the hinge position when you stand on the outside (entry side) of the door and face it. If the hinges are on your right, the door is right-hand. If on your left, it is left-hand.

  • MW0: Universal hand. Fits both right-hand and left-hand doors. Order MW0 when you cannot confirm the door hand or when stocking a single part for multiple installations.
  • MV8: Right-hand only.
  • MV7: Left-hand only.

 

91-0197 Lever Kits by Finish

Part NumberHandFinish
91-0197-MW0-US32D-IPUniversalUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MW0-10B-IPUniversal10B (oil rubbed bronze)
91-0197-MV8-US32D-IPRight-handUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MV8-10B-IPRight-hand10B (oil rubbed bronze)
91-0197-MV7-US32D-IPLeft-handUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MV7-10B-IPLeft-hand10B (oil rubbed bronze)

 

Faceplate Kits: 91-0266 Series (2190 vs 2290)

Adams Rite 91-0266-01-628-IP faceplate kit for 2190 deadlatch aluminum storefront door

Adams Rite 91-0266-01-628-IP Faceplate Kit (2190). View product page and order.

 

The 91-0266 faceplate kits replace the edge plate on the Adams Rite lock body. The faceplate covers the latch bolt opening at the door edge and carries the lock body cutout geometry. Model compatibility is the critical variable: 2190 and 2290 lock bodies use different faceplate dimensions.

Check the model number stamped directly on the edge of the lock body before ordering. On an installed Adams Rite, the model number is readable with a flashlight at the door edge when the door is slightly open.

 

Adams Rite 2101 Strikes: Flat vs Radius

Adams Rite 2101-02-630 radius strike with dust box for 2190 deadlatch aluminum storefront door

Adams Rite 2101-02-630 Radius Strike with Dust Box. View product page and order.

 

The 2101 series strikes mount in the door frame and receive the Adams Rite 2190 deadlatch bolt when the door closes. All 2101 strikes include a dust box, which is a small flip-spring cover that closes over the strike pocket when the door is open and prevents debris from accumulating in the bolt engagement area.

 

2101-01: Standard Flat Strike

The flat strike has square corners on the face plate. The correct choice when the frame cutout has square corners.

  • 2101-01-630: Flat strike with dust box, finish 630 (satin stainless steel).
  • 2101-01-121: Flat strike with dust box, finish 121 (dull bronze).

 

2101-02: Radius Strike

The radius strike has rounded corners on the face plate. The correct choice when the frame cutout has radius (rounded) corners, which is common on most extruded aluminum door frames.

  • 2101-02-630: Radius strike with dust box, finish 630 (satin stainless steel).
  • 2101-02-121: Radius strike with dust box, finish 121 (dull bronze).

If you cannot confirm the frame cutout profile, the radius strike (2101-02) is the more common choice for aluminum extruded door frames. For guidance on strike compatibility with other commercial locks, see the strike plates, deadlatches, and latch bolt parts guide.

 

Finish Code Reference

Adams Rite finish codes follow standard ANSI/BHMA A156.18 designations. Ordering the wrong finish is a common mistake when service calls happen under time pressure. This table covers every finish code in the current Security Parts Adams Rite catalog:

CodeFinish NameCommon Application
US32DSatin chromeTrim kits, cover kits, lever kits
10BOil rubbed bronzeTrim kits, cover kits, lever kits
628Satin aluminumFaceplate kits (most common for aluminum frames)
313Dark bronzeFaceplate kits (dark bronze aluminum frames)
630Satin stainless steelStrikes (most common for aluminum frames)
121Dull bronzeStrikes (bronze frame applications)

 

Quick Ordering Reference: All Adams Rite Parts in Stock

Part NumberDescriptionFinish / Hand
91-0202-01-IPInside trim hardware kit (2190)Inside/egress face
91-0202-02-IPOutside trim hardware kit (2190)Outside/entry face
91-0200-US32D-IPOutside trim cover kitUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0200-10B-IPOutside trim cover kit10B (oil rubbed bronze)
91-0201-US32DInside trim cover kitUS32D (satin chrome)
91-0197-MW0-US32D-IPDesigner lever kit, universalUS32D
91-0197-MW0-10B-IPDesigner lever kit, universal10B
91-0197-MV8-US32D-IPDesigner lever kit, right-handUS32D
91-0197-MV8-10B-IPDesigner lever kit, right-hand10B
91-0197-MV7-US32D-IPDesigner lever kit, left-handUS32D
91-0197-MV7-10B-IPDesigner lever kit, left-hand10B
91-0266-01-628-IPFaceplate kit, 2190628 (satin aluminum)
91-0266-01-313-IPFaceplate kit, 2190313 (dark bronze)
91-0266-04-628-IPFaceplate kit, 2290628 (satin aluminum)
91-0266-04-313-IPFaceplate kit, 2290313 (dark bronze)
2101-01-630Flat strike with dust box630 (satin stainless)
2101-01-121Flat strike with dust box121 (dull bronze)
2101-02-630Radius strike with dust box630 (satin stainless)
2101-02-121Radius strike with dust box121 (dull bronze)

 

How to Identify Which Adams Rite Part You Need Before Ordering

Service calls on Adams Rite installations follow a consistent pattern. The lock body is installed in the door edge, the trim hardware is on the door faces, and the strike is in the frame. When something fails, the first step is identifying which component is at fault before pulling part numbers.

 

If the Latch Does Not Spring Back Correctly

This is a trim hardware or lock body issue, not a strike issue. The trim hardware kits (91-0202-01 and 91-0202-02) contain the springs and mechanical linkages that operate the inside and outside trim. If the inside thumb turn or outside pull does not return smoothly, the trim hardware kit for that face of the door is the starting point. Confirm which face is affected and order the corresponding kit.

 

If the Door Does Not Latch When Closed

Start at the strike (2101-01 or 2101-02) before touching the lock body. A strike that has shifted position in the frame, has a damaged dust box blocking the bolt pocket, or has a worn keeper can prevent the latch bolt from seating. Remove the strike, clear the pocket, and confirm proper alignment before ordering a replacement lock body component.

 

If the Lever or Handle Is Physically Damaged

The designer lever kit (91-0197 series) or trim cover kit (91-0200 or 91-0201 series) handles the visible hardware on each face of the door. These components are replaceable without disturbing the lock body. Confirm the finish (US32D or 10B) and the door hand (MV8 right, MV7 left, MW0 universal) before ordering. When in doubt about hand orientation, order MW0.

 

If the Faceplate at the Door Edge Is Damaged

The faceplate kit (91-0266 series) covers the plate at the door edge that frames the latch bolt cutout. It is frequently damaged when a door is forced or when pry-in access is attempted on the frame. Confirm the lock body model (2190 or 2290) by reading the stamp on the existing faceplate or lock body casting before ordering. The 2190 and 2290 faceplate kits are not interchangeable.

 

The Four Questions to Answer Before Placing Any Adams Rite Parts Order

  1. Which face of the door? Inside (egress) or outside (entry) determines 91-0202-01 vs 91-0202-02 and cover kit selection.
  2. Which lock body model? 2190 or 2290 determines the faceplate kit (91-0266-01 vs 91-0266-04).
  3. What finish? US32D, 10B, 628, 313, 630, or 121 must match existing hardware.
  4. What hand (for lever kits)? Right-hand (MV8), left-hand (MV7), or universal (MW0).

If you cannot confirm any of these before ordering, call 845-935-0301. Providing the door address and installation date allows the Security Parts team to cross-reference what was typically installed and narrow down the correct part number before anything ships.

 

Source Adams Rite Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks 55 Adams Rite parts across trim hardware kits, outside and inside trim cover kits, designer lever kits, faceplate kits, and 2101 strikes. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

The most common field service scenario for Adams Rite 2190 trim parts involves a damaged or worn trim kit component on an aluminum storefront glass door that has been in service for several years. Before calling to order, have the following information ready: the model number from the lock body edge (2190 or 2290), the finish code from the existing hardware, and which face of the door needs service (inside or outside). With those three pieces of information confirmed, the correct part can be identified from this guide and shipped same day.

For complete replacement and repair guidance on commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide. For scheduled maintenance and inspection guidance relevant to commercial door lock hardware under NFPA 80, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

For Adams Rite product selection guidance, installation context, and aluminum storefront hardware scheduling, see the retail storefront door hardware guide.

For electric strike compatibility with Adams Rite deadlatches, see the electric strikes guide and how to install an electric strike. For access control integration, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

For OEM versus aftermarket parts guidance, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For ANSI/BHMA finish and hardware standards, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Adams Rite 91-series trim catalog and 2101-series strikes with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 9530IQ Parts Guide: SlidePro Motor, Controller, Track, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 9530IQ is the current generation of the LCN SlidePro automatic sliding door operator. Ordering the right LCN 9530IQ parts requires confirming three things before opening any catalog:

  • Model number first: 9530IQ (single door, pull-side), 9540IQ (single door, push-side), 9550IQ (simultaneous pair), 9560IQ (independent pair). Motor gearbox, controller, and arm assemblies are all model-specific. Parts ordered for the wrong model will not fit.
  • IQ vs legacy 9530: The 9530IQ uses a digital controller and current-generation motor gearbox. Legacy 9530 (non-IQ) units share some mechanical parts but the 3454 motor gearbox and 3462 controller are not interchangeable.
  • Motor gearbox vs controller failure: Grinding or stalling = motor gearbox (9530IQ-3454). Powered but unresponsive = controller (9530IQ-3462). Diagnosing correctly before ordering prevents the most common wrong-part return in SlidePro service.
  • DPS cable is not a general power cable. The 9530IQ-519 DPS cable connects the door position sensor to the controller. Using a standard cable causes sensor errors and erratic door behavior.
  • 206 LCN SlidePro parts are stocked at Security Parts across the 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ families.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support on LCN 9530IQ parts before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 9530IQ SlidePro Is

The LCN 9530IQ is the Intelligent Que generation of the LCN SlidePro, an automatic sliding door operator designed for surface-mounted installation on sliding door systems at high-footfall commercial entrances. It is widely installed in healthcare facilities, hotel lobbies, grocery and retail stores, university buildings, and airport terminal corridors where bi-parting or single-panel sliding automatic doors are required for ADA accessibility and high-volume traffic flow.

The SlidePro mounts in the header above the door opening. The motor gearbox drives the arm assembly that moves the door panel. The controller processes activation signals from motion sensors, push plates, and access control systems and manages open, hold, and close timing. The track and roller system guides the door panel through its travel path.

The 9530IQ is a separate product family from the LCN Senior Swing IQ swing operators and the LCN Benchmark swing operators. Parts between the sliding and swing families are not interchangeable. For swing operator parts, see the LCN Senior Swing IQ parts guide and the LCN Benchmark Senior Swing guide. For the full LCN automatic door operator catalog, see the commercial door operators guide.

 

LCN SlidePro Model Selection: 9530IQ vs 9540IQ vs 9550IQ vs 9560IQ

The four SlidePro IQ models share the same core architecture but differ in door configuration and arm assembly type. Ordering parts for the wrong model is the leading cause of wrong-part returns on SlidePro service calls. Confirm the model number on the operator label before ordering any component.

ModelApplicationDoor ConfigArm Type
9530IQSingle door, pull-sideOperator on pull side of headerTrack arm (9530IQ-3077T)
9540IQSingle door, push-sideOperator on push side of headerRod-and-shoe (9540IQ-3077 / 9540IQ-79)
9550IQSimultaneous bi-parting pairBoth panels move together on activationTrack arm (pull) + rod-and-shoe (push) + companion cable
9560IQIndependent bi-parting pairEach panel activates independentlyTrack arm (pull) + rod-and-shoe (push)

 

LCN 9530IQ Motor Gearbox: 9530IQ-3454

LCN 9530IQ-3454 motor gearbox replacement part for LCN SlidePro automatic sliding door operator

LCN 9530IQ-3454 Motor Gearbox. View product page and order.

 

The 9530IQ-3454 motor gearbox is the primary drive unit of the LCN 9530IQ SlidePro. It converts electrical power from the controller into mechanical force that moves the door panel through the arm assembly. The motor gearbox is the highest-wear component on high-cycle SlidePro installations such as supermarket entrances and hospital main corridors.

 

When to Replace the Motor Gearbox

  • Door stalls at a consistent point during travel (partial or full stall)
  • Door moves but with significantly reduced force compared to normal operation
  • Grinding, clicking, or mechanical noise audible from the operator housing
  • Motor attempts to run but door does not move (arm connected and confirmed)

A motor gearbox that stalls intermittently under load but runs freely without load has typically exceeded its service life. On high-cycle entrances, proactive gearbox replacement during a scheduled service visit prevents unplanned downtime.

Each model uses its own motor gearbox. The 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ each have a dedicated -3454 part:

 

LCN 9530IQ Controller: 9530IQ-3462

LCN 9530IQ-3462 controller replacement for LCN SlidePro sliding door operator digital control board

LCN 9530IQ-3462 Controller. View product page and order.

 

The 9530IQ-3462 controller is the Intelligent Que digital control board that manages all SlidePro functions: activation signal processing, open/hold/close timing, door speed, and safety sensor integration. The IQ controller is what distinguishes the 9530IQ from the legacy 9530 series: it uses a digital logic board rather than the older analog control system.

 

When to Replace the Controller

  • Operator has power but does not respond to activation signals
  • LED status indicators are absent, erratic, or not matching expected states
  • Door speed and hold-open timing cannot be adjusted at the controller
  • Safety reverse function is not triggering when the door path is obstructed
  • Operator worked correctly after power reset but fails again within a short period

Each model uses its own controller unit. The 9530IQ-3462, 9540IQ-3462, 9550IQ-3462, and 9560IQ-3462 are model-specific and not interchangeable. For access control integration with the SlidePro controller, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

LCN 9530IQ Track and Roller Components

LCN 9530IQ-3034 track roller replacement for LCN SlidePro sliding door operator track system

LCN 9530IQ-3034 Track Roller. View product page and order.

 

Standard Track: 9530IQ-3038

The 9530IQ-3038 standard track is the extrusion rail that the track roller travels along as the door panel opens and closes. Track damage is common on high-traffic installations where objects impact the header area or where the door panel has jumped the track due to a failed roller. Replace the track when the extrusion is bent, when the track surface is worn into the roller contact area, or when the track ends are damaged and no longer retain the roller assembly.

 

Track Roller: 9530IQ-3034

The 9530IQ-3034 track roller is the wheel that rides in the track and connects the arm assembly to the sliding movement of the door. Roller wear is a gradual process on standard-cycle entrances but accelerates significantly when the track has debris, when the door panel is misaligned, or when the door is repeatedly forced manually against the motor. Replace the track roller when the roller bearing is seized, when there is visible flat-spotting on the roller surface, or when the door produces a rhythmic thumping noise during travel.

 

End Caps and Track End Hardware

End caps protect the ends of the track extrusion and prevent the roller assembly from traveling beyond the door travel limit. Two end cap configurations are stocked:

  • 9530IQ-334R: Right-side end cap
  • 9530IQ-334L: Left-side end cap
  • 9530IQ-163-1: End cap cover insert for RF window integration
  • 9530IQ-73: Track end cap for the track extrusion termination

 

LCN 9530IQ Arm Assembly

LCN 9530IQ-3077T standard arm replacement for LCN 9530IQ SlidePro pull-side sliding door operator

LCN 9530IQ-3077T Standard Arm. View product page and order.

 

The arm assembly connects the motor gearbox spindle to the track roller, converting the rotational output of the gearbox into the linear movement that slides the door panel. The arm type differs between the pull-side and push-side models.

 

Pull-Side Arms: 9530IQ and 9550IQ

The 9530IQ and 9550IQ pull-side operators use track arms:

  • 9530IQ-3077T: Standard track arm for 9530IQ single-door pull-side installations
  • 9530IQ-3077PLCM: Standard arm with track (arm and track combined as a single assembly)

 

Push-Side Arms: 9540IQ and 9560IQ

The 9540IQ and 9560IQ push-side operators use rod-and-shoe arm assemblies that operate from the push side of the header. These are completely different from pull-side track arms and are not interchangeable:

  • 9540IQ-3077: Standard arm for 9540IQ push-side
  • 9540IQ-3077L: Long arm for wider push-side openings
  • 9540IQ-79: Standard rod and shoe
  • 9540IQ-79LR: Long rod and shoe for extended reach
  • 9540IQ-77: Main arm body for 9540IQ push-side configuration
  • 9540IQ-3077TLS: Telescoping arm for variable-width openings
  • 9540IQ-3077LNGTLS: Telescoping long arm for wider openings

 

Cables and Wiring Components

9530IQ-519 DPS Cable

The DPS cable connects the door position sensor in the track to the controller. The position sensor tells the controller where the door is in its travel path at all times, enabling the controller to manage open and close limits, safety reversal, and hold-open behavior. On single-door 9530IQ installations, the DPS cable runs within the header. On 9550IQ and 9560IQ paired installations, it also links between the two operator units.

The DPS cable is not interchangeable with a standard power or signal cable. If the DPS cable fails and is replaced with a standard cable, the controller will not receive position data and the door will exhibit erratic behavior or fail to operate at all.

 

9550IQ-982 Companion Cable

The companion cable is the inter-operator communication cable required in every 9550IQ simultaneous bi-parting installation. Both pull-side and push-side operators must receive synchronized activation signals to open and close simultaneously. Without the companion cable, the two units cannot communicate and the doors will not open together. The companion cable is frequently overlooked when ordering replacement parts for paired 9550IQ systems.

 

9530IQ-518 Cable and Parts Bag

The 9530IQ-518 cable and parts bag includes the miscellaneous short cables, connectors, and hardware items used in the standard 9530IQ installation. This kit is typically ordered when a unit has been removed from service, partial components have been lost, or a fresh installation requires the complete cable set.

 

Mounting Hardware: Baseplates, Mounting Plates, and Brackets

  • 9530IQ-10 standard baseplate: The primary mounting plate that attaches the 9530IQ operator body to the header structure. The standard baseplate is for single-door installations.
  • 9530IQ-10-DD double door baseplate: Required for bi-parting 9550IQ/9560IQ paired installations where both operators share a common header attachment point.
  • 9530IQ-18 mounting plate: Secondary mounting component for aligning the operator within the header assembly.
  • 9530IQ-475 gearbox mounting bracket: Secures the motor gearbox to the baseplate. Replace when the bracket is bent or when the gearbox has shifted position during operation.
  • 9530IQ-575 controller mounting bracket: Positions the controller board within the operator housing.

 

Covers, End Plates, and Housing Components

  • 9530IQ-72MC standard cover: The main cover panel over the operator body. Replace when damaged or when the cover no longer clips to the housing correctly.
  • 9530IQ-72MC-DD double door cover: Extended cover for dual-operator bi-parting header assemblies.
  • 9530IQ-511 dress plate: Extrusion trim plate for aesthetic finishing of the exposed header face. Used when the installation requires a finished appearance.
  • 9530IQ-12 blank filler plate: Fills unused header sections where the full extrusion length exceeds the operator assembly width.
  • 9530IQ-11A spindle plate (2-3/4 inch): The plate at the gearbox spindle exit point. The 11A is for 2-3/4-inch spindle positions.
  • 9530IQ-11B spindle plate (3-3/4 inch): For 3-3/4-inch spindle positions.

 

Header Assemblies and Header Extrusions

The header system provides the structural housing for the entire 9530IQ operator, track, and arm assembly. Header components are ordered when the full header assembly is being installed, replaced, or extended for a wider opening:

  • 9530-3572HL header assembly: Complete header assembly for 9530 pull-side installations
  • 9530-572HL header extrusion only: The header channel extrusion for custom-length applications
  • 9530-572DD double door header: The extended header for bi-parting installations
  • 9530-3572DD double door header assembly: Complete double door header with all integrated hardware

 

Rocker Switch Assembly: 9530-3179

The 9530-3179 rocker switch assembly is the manual control switch mounted on the operator housing for direct local operation, power cycling, and mode selection. Note that the 9530 rocker switch (without the IQ suffix) is the correct part number for the 9530IQ model as well. The 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ each have their own rocker switch assembly with the model prefix.

Replace the rocker switch when the switch fails to change modes or power cycle the unit, when the switch contacts are corroded or physically damaged, or when the switch no longer returns to the neutral position after being pressed.

 

LCN 9530IQ Parts at a Glance

Part NumberComponentModels
9530IQ-3454Motor gearbox9530IQ only
9540IQ-3454Motor gearbox9540IQ only
9550IQ-3454Motor gearbox9550IQ only
9560IQ-3454Motor gearbox9560IQ only
9530IQ-3462IQ digital controller9530IQ only
9530IQ-3034Track roller9530IQ, 9550IQ
9530IQ-3038Standard track9530IQ, 9550IQ
9530IQ-3077TStandard track arm9530IQ pull-side
9530IQ-334RRight end cap9530IQ
9530IQ-334LLeft end cap9530IQ
9530IQ-519DPS cable9530IQ
9550IQ-982Companion cable9550IQ bi-parting pairs
9530-3179Rocker switch assembly9530IQ (note: no IQ suffix)
9530IQ-475Gearbox mounting bracket9530IQ
9530IQ-18Mounting plate9530IQ
9530IQ-10Standard baseplate9530IQ single door
9530IQ-10-DDDouble door baseplate9550IQ/9560IQ paired

 

Source LCN 9530IQ SlidePro Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks all 206 LCN SlidePro parts across the 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ families. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

For the complete LCN automatic door operator catalog, see the door operators parts guide and the commercial door operators guide. For LCN swing operator parts, see the LCN Senior Swing IQ guide and the LCN Benchmark Senior Swing guide. For hold-open and sentronic automatic door parts, see the LCN Sentronic guide.

For guidance on OEM versus aftermarket parts on LCN operators, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For automatic door hardware by building type, see the healthcare guide, hotels and motels guide, universities and colleges guide, government buildings guide, and warehouses and industrial guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, automatic door technicians, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN SlidePro parts catalog across all 9530IQ, 9540IQ, 9550IQ, and 9560IQ configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 1250 Parts Guide: Arms, Shoes, Screws, and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 1250 is a surface-mounted overhead parallel arm door closer widely used on aluminum storefront doors, glass doors, and light commercial entries. Before ordering any LCN 1250 parts, you need to know three things:

  • 3077 vs 3049: The 3077 suffix is the standard (non-hold-open) arm. The 3049 suffix is the hold-open arm. Every arm style in the 1250 catalog comes in both versions.
  • 62A vs 62PA shoe: The 1250-62A is the standard auxiliary shoe. The 1250-62PA is the PA hold-open shoe. They are not interchangeable. Match the shoe to the arm.
  • EDA vs CUSH vs standard: EDA (Extra Duty Arm) is for high-abuse applications. CUSH is the cushioned stop version. Standard arms are for normal traffic. Confirm which is installed before ordering.
  • 29 LCN 1250 parts are stocked at Security Parts across all arm configurations, shoes, screws, covers, spacers, adapters, and cylinder assemblies.
  • The 1250-419 panel adapter is required on narrow bottom rail aluminum storefront doors. If the closer was installed on a storefront without this adapter, check whether one is missing before ordering a replacement arm.

Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support on LCN 1250 parts before placing your order.

 

What the LCN 1250 Series Is

The LCN 1250 is a surface-mounted, track arm (parallel arm) door closer designed for light commercial and storefront applications. Unlike surface-applied standard arm closers, the 1250 uses a parallel arm and a shoe that tracks along a rail to control door swing, which keeps the closer body parallel to the door face rather than projecting outward.

This configuration makes the 1250 well-suited for aluminum storefront doors, narrow-stile glass doors, and any application where a projecting standard arm would be a clearance or aesthetic problem. The closer mounts to the door face with the cylinder body concealed behind the arm assembly when viewed from the pull side.

The 1250 is a separate product family from the LCN 1450 and 1460 series. Parts between these families are not interchangeable. For 1450 parts, see the LCN 1450 door closer parts guide. For the broader LCN closer catalog, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide.

 

Decoding the LCN 1250 Part Number Suffixes

The most common source of wrong-part orders on LCN 1250 replacements is misreading the arm suffix. Every 1250 arm carries a suffix that encodes three things: the arm body style, whether it holds the door open, and the shoe type. Understanding the suffix before opening the parts catalog prevents the majority of ordering errors.

SuffixMeaningWhen It Applies
3077Standard arm, non-hold-openDoor should return closed after every use
3049Hold-open armDoor should hold open at the fully open position
EDAExtra Duty Arm (reinforced)High-traffic or high-abuse applications
CUSHCushioned stopDoor requires a soft stop at the fully open position
LLong armDoor requires a longer arm for wider doors or offset hinge positions
PAParallel arm, PA shoeArm designed for use with the 1250-62PA hold-open shoe
SCNSSpring CUSH, non-stopSpring-loaded CUSH arm without hard stop

 

LCN 1250 Track Arm Assemblies

LCN 1250-3077EDA extra duty arm replacement part for LCN 1250 Series door closer

LCN 1250-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm. View product page and order.

 

Standard Arms (3077 and 3049)

The standard LCN 1250 arm assemblies cover the majority of replacement orders. All standard arms use the 1250-62A auxiliary shoe.

  • 1250-3077: Standard non-hold-open arm. The door returns closed after every use. Used on entries where free passage is not required.
  • 1250-307762A: Standard arm with the 1250-62A auxiliary shoe pre-included in the assembly. Replaces the arm and shoe together in a single order.
  • 1250-3049: Hold-open arm. The door holds at the fully open position when pushed past the hold-open point.

 

Extra Duty Arms (EDA): 1250-3077EDA and 1250-3049EDA

The EDA arms are reinforced for high-traffic and high-abuse applications. If a standard arm has failed prematurely on a high-cycle door: storefront entries, service corridors, or school exits. The EDA arm is the correct replacement. Installing a standard arm on an EDA application will result in the same premature failure.

  • 1250-3077EDA: Extra duty arm, non-hold-open. The most commonly specified EDA replacement on standard storefront entries.
  • 1250-3049EDA: Extra duty arm with hold-open function. Use this on high-traffic entries where the door must also hold at the fully open position.

LCN 1250-3049EDA hold-open extra duty arm for LCN 1250 Series overhead parallel arm door closer

LCN 1250-3049EDA Hold-Open EDA Arm. View product page and order.

 

CUSH-N-STOP Arms: 1250-3077CUSH and 1250-3049CUSH

CUSH arms include a spring-cushioned stop that reduces impact noise and door slam at the fully open position. They are specified on applications where hard door contact with a stop is creating noise or where door or frame impact damage is occurring.

  • 1250-3077CUSH: CUSH-N-STOP arm, non-hold-open. Provides the cushioned stop without holding the door open.
  • 1250-3049CUSH: CUSH arm with hold-open function. Provides both the cushioned stop and hold-open capability.

 

Long Arms: 1250-3077L and 1250-3049L

Long arms are used when the standard arm length creates poor geometry between the closer body and the door pivot, or when a wider door requires a longer arm reach. Confirm the door width and hinge position against the manufacturer's sizing chart before ordering a long arm replacement.

 

PA Arms: 1250-3077PA and 1250-3049PA

PA arms are designed for use with the 1250-62PA parallel arm hold-open shoe instead of the standard 1250-62A shoe. The PA arm and PA shoe are paired. The 1250-62PA shoe cannot be used with standard 1250 arms, and standard shoes cannot be used with PA arms.

  • 1250-3077PA: PA arm, non-hold-open. Use with the 1250-62PA shoe.
  • 1250-3049PA: PA arm with hold-open function. Use with the 1250-62PA shoe.

 

LCN 1250 Auxiliary Shoes

The auxiliary shoe is the component that slides in the track rail and connects the arm to the door frame. Shoes wear faster than arms on high-cycle installations because they experience direct friction contact with the rail on every door operation.

 

1250-62A: Standard Auxiliary Shoe

LCN 1250-62A auxiliary shoe replacement part for LCN 1250 Series parallel arm door closer

LCN 1250-62A Auxiliary Shoe. View product page and order.

 

The 1250-62A is the standard auxiliary shoe for the LCN 1250 Series. It is used with all standard, EDA, CUSH, and long arm assemblies. Replace the 1250-62A when:

  • The door makes a grinding or scraping sound at the end of the opening cycle
  • The shoe is visibly worn, cracked, or has stripped mounting threads
  • The arm assembly moves laterally in the track rather than sliding smoothly

 

1250-62PA: PA Hold-Open Shoe

The 1250-62PA is the PA series auxiliary shoe, used exclusively with the 1250-3077PA and 1250-3049PA arm assemblies. It incorporates the hold-open function into the shoe mechanism rather than into the arm. The 1250-62PA and 1250-62A are not interchangeable. If you have a PA arm installed, confirm the 62PA shoe is also PA-spec before replacing it with the standard 62A.

 

Mounting Plates, Spacers, and the Panel Adapter

Mounting Plates: 1250-18 and 1250-18PA

The 1250-18 is the standard mounting plate for the LCN 1250. The 1250-18PA is the drop plate version, used when the closer needs to be repositioned vertically to clear the door rail or to accommodate non-standard door geometry. Use the 1250-18PA when the standard mounting position creates a binding condition between the arm and the door frame.

 

1250-419 Panel Adapter

LCN 1250-419 panel adapter for narrow bottom rail aluminum storefront door closer installation

LCN 1250-419 Panel Adapter. View product page and order.

 

The 1250-419 panel adapter is required on aluminum storefront doors with narrow bottom rails where the standard closer mounting position does not provide enough clearance between the closer body and the door bottom. Without the panel adapter on these doors, the closer body contacts the bottom rail and the arm geometry is incorrect.

If a 1250 was installed on a narrow-rail storefront without the 1250-419 and the arm is binding or the closer is not functioning correctly, verify that the panel adapter was included in the original installation before replacing other components.

 

1250-201 Spacer and 1250-61 Blade Stop Spacer

  • 1250-201 spacer: A general spacer used to create clearance between the closer and the door or frame face in installations where standard mounting is too close to the surface. Replace when the spacer is damaged or missing.
  • 1250-61 blade stop spacer: A thin spacer used at the blade stop position to adjust the door open limit. Used when the door is contacting the frame or an adjacent surface before the arm reaches its natural stop position.

 

Fasteners: Screw Packs and Universal Arm Screw

Fastener failures account for a significant share of LCN 1250 field calls where the installer assumes a component has failed when the issue is simply a loose or stripped screw. Three fastener options are stocked:

  • 1250-TBTRX screw pack: TORX (6-point star drive) fastener pack for current-generation 1250 arm assemblies. The TBTRX is the standard screw pack for most post-2000 LCN 1250 installations. Use when the current screws are TORX-head.
  • 1250-TORX screw pack: An alternate TORX screw pack for 1250 installations where the specific thread profile of the TBTRX does not match the existing hardware. Confirm the thread pitch before ordering if unsure which pack applies.
  • 1250-UNIV-ARM-SCREW: The universal arm screw for attaching the 1250 arm to the closer spindle. Replace when the arm is loose at the spindle connection and tightening the existing screw does not resolve the play.

 

Cover and Finish Components

  • 1250-72 slim line cover: The decorative cover over the 1250 closer body. Replace when the cover is damaged, cracked, or missing. The slim line cover is aesthetic, but a missing cover exposes the cylinder body to debris and increases the risk of accidental damage to the hydraulic seals. Two variants of the 1250-72 are stocked to match different finish configurations.
  • 1250-146 pinion cap cover: The small cap that covers the pinion shaft on the closer body. Replace when the cap is missing or has been damaged during arm installation. Missing pinion caps allow dust and grit to enter the shaft area over time.

 

1250-3080 Spring CUSH Block and 1250-30 CUSH Shoe Support

  • 1250-3080 spring CUSH block: The spring-loaded cushioning block used in CUSH-N-STOP arm assemblies. Replace when the CUSH block no longer provides resistance at the fully open position, or when the block is fractured. A failed CUSH block turns a CUSH arm into an effectively standard arm with no cushioning at the stop position.
  • 1250-30 CUSH shoe support: The structural support bracket for the CUSH shoe. Replace when the support is bent or cracked, which typically occurs after repeated impacts on installations with high opening force.

 

1250-3071 Cylinder Assembly

The 1250-3071 cylinder assembly is the main hydraulic mechanism of the LCN 1250 closer. It controls closing speed and latching speed through internal valves and fluid pressure. The cylinder assembly is replaced when the closer has lost hydraulic function, the door no longer closes at a controlled speed, or the body is leaking fluid.

Unlike arm and shoe replacements, cylinder assembly replacement requires correctly resetting the valve adjustments for closing speed, latching speed, and back check. For guidance on adjustment after closer servicing, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide.

 

All LCN 1250 Parts at a Glance

Part NumberDescriptionFunction
1250-3077Standard armNon-hold-open
1250-307762AStandard arm with 62A shoeArm and shoe kit
1250-3049Standard hold-open armHold-open
1250-3077EDAExtra duty armHigh-abuse, non-hold-open
1250-3049EDAExtra duty hold-open armHigh-abuse, hold-open
1250-3077CUSHCUSH-N-STOP armCushioned stop, non-hold-open
1250-3049CUSHCUSH hold-open armCushioned stop, hold-open
1250-3077LLong armWide door, non-hold-open
1250-3049LLong hold-open armWide door, hold-open
1250-3077PAPA armPA shoe, non-hold-open
1250-3049PAPA hold-open armPA shoe, hold-open
1250-3049SCNSSpring CUSH armSpring-loaded CUSH, non-stop
1250-62AAuxiliary shoe (standard)All standard, EDA, CUSH, L arms
1250-62PAPA hold-open shoePA arm assemblies only
1250-TBTRXTORX screw packStandard fastener pack
1250-UNIV-ARM-SCREWUniversal arm screwArm-to-spindle attachment
1250-201SpacerClearance between closer and surface
1250-61Blade stop spacerOpen limit adjustment
1250-18PA18PA drop plateRepositioned mounting
1250-419Panel adapterNarrow bottom rail storefronts
1250-72Slim line coverCloser body protection and aesthetics
1250-146Pinion cap coverPinion shaft protection
1250-3080Spring CUSH blockCUSH arm cushioning element
1250-30CUSH shoe supportCUSH shoe structural bracket
1250-3071Cylinder assemblyMain hydraulic mechanism

 

Where to Source LCN 1250 Parts

Security Parts stocks all 29 LCN 1250 parts across the complete arm, shoe, fastener, cover, spacer, adapter, and cylinder catalog. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support before placing your order.

For the broader LCN door closer parts catalog, see the door closers parts guide and the LCN 1000/2010/2030/3030 door closer parts guide. For help sizing the correct LCN closer for a new installation, see the commercial door closer sizing guide and the LCN closer selection guide.

For installation guidance, see how to install a commercial door closer. For adjustment after installation or replacement, see how to adjust a commercial door closer.

For OEM versus aftermarket parts guidance on LCN closers, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete LCN 1250 parts catalog across all arm configurations, shoe types, fasteners, covers, spacers, and cylinder assemblies, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Falcon Q330 Parts Guide: Levers, Cylinders, Bolts, and Spring Cages

Quick Answer

The Falcon Q330 is a Grade 2 cylindrical lock series used in light commercial, university, and institutional applications. Ordering the right Falcon Q330 parts requires knowing three things before opening any catalog:

  • Core format first: FSIC (Full Size Interchangeable Core) levers use the -433- suffix. SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) levers use -430- (closed) or -431- (open). Ordering the wrong core format is the most common Q330 parts error.
  • Latch bolt series: D100 is the standard latch (Q330-175 square corner, Q330-177 radius corner). D200 is the heavy-duty version (Q330-253 adjustable, Q330-254 drive-in). They are not interchangeable.
  • Spring cage kits: Q330-271 and Q330-270 are the two spring cage options. Both are labeled T-Series but fit Q330 trim housings.
  • Key-in-lever cylinders: Q330-246 and Q330-238 are the 6-pin cylinders for standard keying. Q330-152 and Q330-154 are the SFIC-compatible cylinder variants.
  • Q330 vs T-Series: Parts between the two series are not interchangeable. Confirm the model number before ordering.

Security Parts stocks all 34 Falcon Q330 parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What the Falcon Q330 Series Is

The Falcon Q330 is a Grade 2 cylindrical lock designed for light commercial and institutional applications where Grade 1 performance is not required by the hardware specification. It is widely installed in universities, government office buildings, light commercial retail, and secondary-use corridors in healthcare and education facilities.

Grade 2 under ANSI A156.2 means the lock is tested to 250,000 cycles versus 1,000,000 cycles for Grade 1. For low-to-moderate traffic openings, the Q330 provides reliable performance at a lower initial cost than the Grade 1 T-Series.

The Q330 uses the same lever style names as the T-Series (Longitude, Latitude, Broadway, Boardwalk) but the part numbers and trim housings are different. This creates the most frequent ordering mistake in the Q330 parts catalog: buyers who know their lever style but order T-Series parts for a Q330 installation.

For a direct comparison of how cylindrical lock grades and series affect parts ordering, see the cylindrical lock parts guide and the Falcon T-Series cylindrical lock parts guide.

 

Key-in-Lever Cylinders for the Falcon Q330

Falcon Q330-246 key-in-lever cylinder 6-pin replacement part for Q330 cylindrical lock

Falcon Q330-246 key-in-lever cylinder 6-pin. View product page and order.

 

Four key-in-lever cylinder configurations are stocked for the Q330 series. Each is a 6-pin cylinder, but the keying system and trim compatibility differ:

  • Q330-246: The standard 6-pin key-in-lever cylinder for Q330 installations with a conventional fixed keyway. Replace when the key operation is stiff, when the cylinder plug is worn, or when re-keying to a different conventional key system.
  • Q330-238: An alternate conventional 6-pin key-in-lever cylinder with a different keyway profile. Used in installations keyed to a specific keyway family that the Q330-246 does not cover.
  • Q330-152: The 6-pin cylinder compatible with SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) trim on Q330 installations. Replace when the SFIC core operation is affected by cylinder wear.
  • Q330-154: Alternate SFIC-compatible 6-pin cylinder with a different keyway configuration for installations with specific master key system requirements.

When replacing a key-in-lever cylinder, confirm whether the installation uses a conventional keyway or an interchangeable core format (FSIC or SFIC). Mixing core formats will prevent the new cylinder from seating correctly in the lever housing. For guidance on key systems and master keying, see the master key system design guide and the thumbturn cylinder guide.

 

Q330 Latch Bolts: D100 vs D200

The Q330 series uses two latch bolt families: D100 for standard applications and D200 for heavy-duty applications. They are not interchangeable. Before ordering a latch bolt replacement, confirm which series is installed by checking the latch body marking or the original hardware spec sheet.

 

D100 Series Adjustable Latch Bolts

The D100 latch bolt is the standard latch for most Q330 cylindrical lock installations. Two corner configurations are stocked:

  • Q330-175: D100 adjustable bolt with a 1-inch face, square corner. Adjustable between 2-3/4-inch and 2-3/8-inch backset. Replace when the latch bolt does not retract fully or fails to spring back to the extended position after the door closes.
  • Q330-177: D100 adjustable bolt with a 1-inch face, radius corner. Same backset adjustment as Q330-175. Required on doors where the mortise preparation has a radius corner rather than a square corner.
  • Q330-041: H2 Series adjustable latch with 1-inch face. Used on Q330 installations specifying the H2 latch series. Confirm the latch series from the original order before substituting Q330-041 for a D100.

 

D200 Series Latch Bolts

Falcon Q330-253 D200 series adjustable bolt replacement latch for Q330 cylindrical lock

Falcon Q330-253 D200 Series adjustable bolt. View product page and order.

 

The D200 latch bolt is the heavy-duty option for Q330 installations in higher-traffic or more demanding applications:

  • Q330-253: D200 Series adjustable bolt. Field-adjustable backset. Replace when the standard D100 has been specified up to D200 during a renovation, or when the D200 bolt shows wear after extended service on a high-cycle door.
  • Q330-254: D200 Series drive-in bolt (non-adjustable). Fixed backset installation. Replace when the drive-in bolt fails to engage the strike plate correctly due to wear or damage to the bolt head.

For strike plate compatibility with Q330 latch bolts, see the Schlage and Falcon strike plates, deadlatches, and latch bolt parts guide.

 

Q330 Spring Cage Kits

Falcon Q330-271 T-Series spring cage kit replacement for Q330 cylindrical lock trim assembly

Falcon Q330-271 T-Series spring cage kit. View product page and order.

 

The spring cage kit is the highest-turnover Q330 replacement part on high-cycle installations. When the lever return becomes sluggish or the lever fails to return to the neutral position after being operated, the spring cage is the first component to inspect and replace.

Two spring cage kits are stocked for Q330 trim:

  • Q330-271 T-Series Spring Cage Kit: The primary spring cage kit for Q330 trim housings. Note that the product is labeled "T Series" because the spring cage is dimensionally compatible with both Q330 and T-Series trim. For Q330 installations, this is the correct replacement.
  • Q330-270 T-Series Spring Cage Kit: Alternate spring cage kit for Q330 trim. The Q330-270 applies to earlier-generation Q330 trim housings. If the Q330-271 does not seat correctly in the trim housing, the Q330-270 is the correct substitute.

On high-cycle openings (entry corridors, classroom doors, dormitory entrances), inspect the spring cage during scheduled maintenance. Replacing the spring cage before full failure is more cost-effective than waiting for lever failure, which can also damage the cam and spindle. For a maintenance schedule covering Q330 and other cylindrical lock hardware, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Q330 Lever Trim: FSIC and SFIC Configurations

Falcon Q330-433-LON Longitude lever FSIC replacement trim for Q330 cylindrical lock

Falcon Q330-433-LON Longitude lever, FSIC. View product page and order.

 

Q330 lever trim is available in four lever styles across two core format configurations. Identifying the correct core format before ordering is the single most important step in any Q330 lever replacement.

 

FSIC Levers: -433- Part Number Series

FSIC (Full Size Interchangeable Core) levers are the correct choice when the installation uses a full-size interchangeable core key system. All FSIC Q330 levers carry the -433- designator in the part number:

  • Q330-433-LON: Longitude lever, FSIC. A straight lever with minimal projection, and the most common Q330 lever style in educational and office applications.
  • Q330-433-LAT: Latitude lever, FSIC. An ergonomic lever with a curved return, ADA-compliant without requiring additional accessories.
  • Q330-433-BRW: Broadway lever, FSIC. A wider, more assertive lever profile used in high-visibility entrances and public-facing commercial applications.

 

SFIC Levers: -430- and -431- Part Number Series

SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) levers are for installations using the smaller figure-8 format interchangeable core system. Q330 SFIC levers split into two sub-configurations: -430- for closed (outside-facing) levers and -431- for open (inside-facing) levers.

  • Q330-430-LON: Longitude lever, SFIC, closed/outside. Replace the outside lever on SFIC-keyed Q330 entrances where the exterior lever is worn or damaged.
  • Q330-431-LON: Longitude lever, SFIC, open/inside. The inside lever on SFIC-keyed Q330 installations.
  • Q330-430-LAT: Latitude lever, SFIC, closed/outside.
  • Q330-431-LAT: Latitude lever, SFIC, open/inside.
  • Q330-430-BRW: Broadway lever, SFIC, closed/outside.
  • Q330-431-BRW: Broadway lever, SFIC, open/inside.
  • Q330-430-BRK: Boardwalk lever, SFIC, closed/outside.
  • Q330-431-BRK: Boardwalk lever, SFIC, open/inside.

For guidance on function codes and which lever configuration applies to storeroom, classroom, office, and entrance functions on the Q330, see the commercial lock function codes guide.

 

How to Identify Your Q330 Model Before Ordering

Confirming the installed model before placing a Q330 parts order prevents the most common wrong-part returns. Follow these steps in order:

  1. Find the model number. The Q330 model number is stamped on the face of the cylindrical chassis, visible when the lever trim is removed. It begins with "Q330" followed by the function code and lever suffix.
  2. Read the function code. The function code tells you whether the lock is storeroom, classroom, office, or entrance. The function determines which lever configuration is correct. See the commercial lock function codes guide for the complete reference.
  3. Identify the core format. Look at the lever part number suffix if the trim is still installed: -433- = FSIC; -430-/-431- = SFIC. If the lever has been removed and no part number is visible, look at the core housing in the lever body: FSIC cores are larger; SFIC cores are smaller with a figure-8 profile.
  4. Identify the latch series. Look at the latch body marking: D100 or D200. If no marking is visible, measure the latch face: D100 and D200 are both 1-inch face, but the bolt body dimensions differ when viewed from the edge.
  5. Order from the Security Parts Q330 catalog. Use the confirmed model number, core format, and latch series to identify the exact replacement. Every Q330 part page includes the full part description and compatibility information.

For guidance on when OEM parts are required versus when aftermarket substitutes are acceptable on Falcon cylindrical locks, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

Q330 Part Numbers at a Glance

Part NumberComponentConfiguration
Q330-246Key-in-lever cylinder6-pin, standard keyway
Q330-238Key-in-lever cylinder6-pin, alternate keyway
Q330-152Key-in-lever cylinder6-pin, SFIC compatible
Q330-154Key-in-lever cylinder6-pin, SFIC alternate keyway
Q330-175D100 adjustable bolt1" face, square corner
Q330-177D100 adjustable bolt1" face, radius corner
Q330-253D200 adjustable boltHeavy-duty, adjustable backset
Q330-254D200 drive-in boltHeavy-duty, fixed backset
Q330-041H2 series adjustable latch1" face
Q330-271Spring cage kitT-Series housing, primary
Q330-270Spring cage kitT-Series housing, alternate
Q330-433-LONLongitude lever, FSICFull Size IC, standard
Q330-433-LATLatitude lever, FSICFull Size IC, ADA
Q330-433-BRWBroadway lever, FSICFull Size IC
Q330-430-LONLongitude lever, SFIC closedSmall Format IC, outside
Q330-431-LONLongitude lever, SFIC openSmall Format IC, inside

 

Source Falcon Q330 Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks the complete Falcon Q330 parts catalog: all 34 components across key-in-lever cylinders, D100 and D200 latch bolts, spring cage kits, FSIC lever trim, and SFIC lever trim in all four lever styles. The catalog is organized by part number with full compatibility information on every product page.

For the full Falcon hardware catalog, start at the Falcon brand hub. For Falcon Grade 1 cylindrical lock parts, see the Falcon T-Series cylindrical lock parts guide. For Falcon exit device parts, see the Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series exit device parts guide.

For guidance on cylindrical lock grading, function codes, and hardware specifications by building type, see:

Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support on Falcon Q330 parts before your order is placed.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Falcon Q330 parts catalog across all cylinder, latch bolt, spring cage, and lever trim configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Detex ECL Parts Guide: ECL-230 Components, Replacement Kits, and Ordering Reference

Quick Answer

Detex ECL parts cover the complete replacement component catalog for the ECL-230, ECL-230X, ECL-230D, and ECL-600 exit control lock family. Here is what you need to know before ordering:

  • ECL-230X is the most common model. It accepts 2-point (TB) and 3-point (TDB) locking configurations and is the standard for most commercial installations.
  • ECL-600 is the fire-rated variant. UL listed for fire door assemblies. Standard ECL-230 parts are not interchangeable with the ECL-600 on fire-rated doors.
  • Weatherized (ECL-230X-W) is required for exterior applications. Standard ECL-230 devices are interior-rated only.
  • The three most replaced internal components: ECL-1576-15 cam bridge assembly, ECL-306-1 bolt assembly, and ECL-243PH replacement mechanism assembly (complete internal kit).
  • Delayed egress signs (ECL-395 series) are a code requirement, not an accessory. IBC Section 1010.2.9 and NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6 require posted signage at every delayed egress device.
  • 59 ECL parts are stocked at Security Parts across all configurations, sign languages, and replacement categories.

Browse the complete exit alarms and exit control lock parts catalog at Security Parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What the Detex ECL Family Covers

The Detex ECL is an exit control lock, not a standard exit device. It is specifically designed for delayed egress applications where an immediate free-egress device is not appropriate or code-permitted, but a completely locked door is also not allowed. The device holds the door latched for a timed delay (typically 15 seconds) when the bar is pushed, sounds a local alarm during the delay, and then releases automatically. It is not a panic device and is not a fire exit device in its standard configuration.

The ECL family is installed in commercial buildings across four primary application types: stairwells where wandering prevention is required (healthcare, memory care, behavioral health), parking structure pedestrian exits, utility corridors and mechanical room exits, and exterior building exits where egress control is needed without full lockdown.

For the broader code framework governing when delayed egress is permitted versus when free egress is required, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide and the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

ECL-230 Model Variants: Which One Do You Have?

Identifying the correct base model before ordering any Detex ECL replacement part is the critical first step. The ECL family has four models in active production, each with a different bar length, locking configuration, and application scope.

 

ECL-230X: Standard Commercial Exit Control Lock

Detex ECL-230X exit control lock standard delayed egress device for commercial doors

Detex ECL-230X exit control lock. View product page and order.

 

The ECL-230X is the most widely installed model in the ECL family. It accepts both 2-point locking (ECL-230X-TB) and 3-point locking (ECL-230X-TDB) configurations via top and bottom deadbolt engagement, and is available in weatherized versions (ECL-230X-W, ECL-230X-W-TB, ECL-230X-W-TDB) for exterior or moisture-exposed applications.

The suffix codes tell you the locking configuration:

  • ECL-230X: Single-point locking (base model, interior)
  • ECL-230X-TB: 2-point locking (top bolt only), interior
  • ECL-230X-TDB: 3-point locking (top and bottom bolts), interior
  • ECL-230X-W: Weatherized, single-point
  • ECL-230X-W-TB: Weatherized, 2-point
  • ECL-230X-W-TDB: Weatherized, 3-point

All ECL-230X configurations share the same core internal mechanism parts: the cam bridge assembly (ECL-1576-15), the bolt assembly (ECL-306-1), the detent lever (ECL-293A), and the detent spring (ECL-284). The replacement mechanism assembly (ECL-243PH) replaces all internal components as a complete kit.

 

ECL-230D: Double Door Exit Control Lock

The ECL-230D is the paired-door version, with a longer bar spanning both leaves of a double door opening. It uses the same internal mechanism as the ECL-230X but the bar assembly and strike hardware differ in length. The ECL-230D-PH is a variant with a long arm bar for wider double door applications.

 

ECL-600: Fire-Rated Exit Control Lock

Detex ECL-600 fire-rated exit control lock UL listed for fire door delayed egress applications

Detex ECL-600 fire-rated exit control lock. View product page and order.

The ECL-600 is UL listed for use on fire door assemblies under NFPA 80. It meets the positive latching requirement for fire doors while maintaining the delayed egress function. Standard ECL-230 parts are not interchangeable with the ECL-600 on fire-rated assemblies. If the ECL-600 requires service on a fire door, only fire-rated replacement parts sourced for that specific model should be used to maintain the UL listing. For fire door annual inspection requirements, see the NFPA 80 inspection guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Detex ECL Internal Mechanism Parts

The internal mechanism is where most field failures originate on high-cycle ECL installations. The cam bridge converts lever motion into bolt retraction. The bolt assembly is the primary locking element. On installations operating several hundred cycles per day (healthcare corridors, stairwell exits), both wear before other components.

 

Replacement Mechanism Assembly: ECL-243PH

Detex ECL-243PH replacement mechanism assembly for ECL-230 exit control lock internal components

Detex ECL-243PH replacement mechanism assembly. View product page and order.

 

The ECL-243PH is the complete internal mechanism replacement for the ECL-230X and ECL-230D. It replaces the cam plate, cam bridge, detent assembly, and actuator components as a single kit. When a field diagnosis determines that multiple internal components have worn simultaneously, or when the failure mode is unclear, replacing the complete mechanism assembly is more cost-effective than sourcing individual components. This is the correct replacement for ECL-230X, ECL-230X-W, ECL-230X-TB, ECL-230X-TDB, and compatible ECL-230D configurations.

 

Individual Internal Components

When only one component has failed, individual replacement reduces cost and downtime. The most commonly replaced individual components are:

  • ECL-1576-15 cam bridge assembly kit: The bridge that transmits lever depression to the bolt. Fails under high-cycle use when the cam surface wears. Replace when the lever depresses but the bolt does not fully retract.
  • ECL-306-1 bolt assembly: The primary locking bolt. Replace when the bolt sticks in the engaged position or fails to return to the locked position after the delay cycle.
  • ECL-293A detent lever: Holds the bolt in the locked position until the delay cycle completes. Replace when the device fails to hold the 15-second delay and releases immediately on bar depression.
  • ECL-284 detent spring: Return spring for the detent lever. Replace when the detent lever returns sluggishly or not at all.
  • ECL-285A cam plate (bottom): Bottom cam plate in the locking assembly. Replace in conjunction with the cam bridge on multi-component failures.
  • ECL-1576-20 actuator and release lever kit: View the ECL-1576-20 product page. Replaces the actuator and release lever as a paired kit. Replace when the lever operates but the actuator does not engage the release mechanism correctly.
  • ECL-204 switch assembly: View the ECL-204 product page. The electrical switch that triggers the alarm and initiates the delay timer. Replace when the alarm does not sound on bar depression.

 

Bar, Paddle, and Plate Components

The bar assembly is the highest-wear external component on ECL installations, particularly in applications with repeated unauthorized attempts or high foot traffic. Sixteen bar, paddle, and plate components are stocked across standard, long, and double-door configurations.

 

Paddle Bar Components

Detex ECL-2109-1 long paddle bar push plate replacement for ECL-230 exit control lock

Detex ECL-2109-1 long paddle bar push plate. View product page and order.

  • ECL-2109-1 long paddle bar push plate: The extended push plate for long-bar ECL configurations. Replace when the push surface is damaged, bent, or when the bar fails to engage the mechanism consistently.
  • ECL-2109 exit bar plate: View the ECL-2109 product page. Standard exit bar plate for ECL-230X base configurations.
  • ECL-2105 long arm bar: Extended arm bar for wide-door or double-door applications.
  • ECL-332 short arm bar: Short arm bar for narrow-door or restricted-clearance applications.
  • ECL-236 bar pin: The pivot pin for the bar assembly. Replace when the bar has excessive lateral play or wobble at the pivot point.

 

Exit Bar Plates by Language

The ECL-8220 series provides exit bar plates with multilingual "Push Until Alarm Sounds" instructions. Plates are stocked in English (ECL-8220-1), French-Canadian (ECL-8220-7), Spanish (ECL-8220-8), Chinese (ECL-8220-6 and ECL-8220-9). Replace when the instruction text has worn or when a building's occupant language profile requires a change from the installed plate.

 

Strike Kits and Hardware

Strike selection determines whether the bolt engages the frame correctly on each cycle. Incorrect or worn strikes are a common cause of incomplete bolt engagement on ECL installations.

  • ECL-437K adjustable surface strike: The primary field-adjustable surface strike for ECL-230X and ECL-230D installations. Adjustable to accommodate minor frame misalignment without shimming.
  • ECL-435K adjustable strike bracket: The mounting bracket for the ECL-437K strike. Replace when the bracket is bent or when frame clearance prevents correct strike positioning.
  • ECL-439K mortise strike plate kit for ECL-230D: Mortise-style strike for ECL-230D double-door applications where a surface strike is not appropriate.

 

Cover, Shield, and Backplate Components

  • ECL-355 cover: The protective cover over the ECL mechanism housing. Replace when damaged or when the cover no longer seats correctly after servicing.
  • ECL-354AR back plate: The back plate that mounts the ECL to the door face. Replace when the back plate is bent or when the mounting holes are damaged.
  • ECL-419 shield: Anti-vandalism shield for the bar and mechanism housing. Install on applications with documented vandalism risk.
  • ECL-405-X cover lock key: The key for the cover lock that prevents unauthorized access to the mechanism housing. Order as the ECL-405-KIT for the complete cover lock key kit.
  • ECL-354AR back plate: Rear mounting plate for ECL body-to-door attachment.

 

Outside Trim and Cylinder Components

  • ECL-620 outside lever trim: The outside lever handle for ECL installations where outside entry is required. The ECL-620 provides lever-controlled outside entry without compromising the delayed egress function from inside.
  • ECL-1595 standard cylinder collar: The cylinder collar for key cylinder integration. Replace when the collar is damaged or when a cylinder is being replaced on an existing installation.
  • ECL-445K-7 keyed-alike rim cylinder: Seven-pack keyed-alike rim cylinders for installations where multiple ECL devices must be keyed to the same key.

 

Accessory Kits

  • ECL-2111K siren/battery conversion kit: Converts an existing ECL installation to the current siren/battery configuration. Use when replacing the alarm module or upgrading an older device to current battery specifications.
  • ECL-498K outside pull and warning sign kit: Combines an outside pull handle with a warning sign for applications where outside approach needs to communicate the delayed egress status to incoming users.
  • ECL-475K decorative back plate kit: Trim kit for architectural applications where a finished appearance is required around the ECL body.
  • ECL-2100K bar guard kit: Protective guard for the bar assembly. Install on applications with documented bar damage or vandalism risk.
  • ECL-436K panic bar plate guard kit: Guard kit for the panic bar plate. Protects the push plate instruction text from wear and damage on high-cycle installations.

 

Delayed Egress Door Signs: Code Requirement, Not Accessory

The ECL-395 series of delayed egress door signs is a code requirement under IBC Section 1010.2.9 and NFPA 101 Section 7.2.1.6. Both codes require that a sign be posted on the door or the adjacent wall at delayed egress devices, informing occupants that the door will open in 15 seconds when the bar is pushed and the alarm is sounding.

Failure to post the required sign is a code violation independent of whether the device itself is functioning correctly. During NFPA 80 annual fire door inspections and local AHJ inspections, missing or damaged delayed egress signs are cited as a deficiency requiring immediate correction. For annual inspection requirements, see the NFPA 80 inspection guide.

 

Delayed egress signs are stocked in seven language versions:

Part NumberLanguageFormat
ECL-395-1EnglishStandard delayed egress door sign
ECL-395EnglishAlternate format
ECL-395-2 / ECL-395-3French-CanadianTwo format options
ECL-395-4SpanishDelayed egress door sign
ECL-395-6 / ECL-395-7FrenchTwo format options
ECL-395-8 / ECL-395-9GermanTwo format options
ECL-395-10 / ECL-395-11ChineseTwo format options
ECL-395-12 / ECL-395-13English/EuropeanTwo format options

 

When to Replace vs When to Replace the Complete Device

Most field failures on ECL-230X installations can be resolved with individual or mechanism assembly replacement rather than a full device swap. The decision depends on which components have failed and the age of the installation.

  • Replace individual components when the failure is isolated to a single part (detent spring, bolt assembly, cam bridge, switch assembly) and the device is within its service life.
  • Replace the mechanism assembly (ECL-243PH) when multiple internal components have worn simultaneously or when the failure mode is ambiguous after inspecting individual parts.
  • Replace the complete device when the housing is damaged beyond cosmetic repair, when the device is more than 15 years old with no service history, when the locking configuration needs to change (single-point to 3-point), or when weatherized status is being added to a previously interior-rated installation.

For guidance on OEM versus aftermarket parts compatibility on exit control locks, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For a broader maintenance and inspection schedule, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Applications by Building Type

The Detex ECL is most commonly specified in the following building types. Each application has specific configuration requirements that determine which parts are needed:

Building TypeTypical ECL ApplicationConfiguration Note
HealthcareMemory care and behavioral health stairwells, elopement preventionInterior ECL-230X, high-cycle mechanism parts
Government buildingsRestricted stairwell access, utility exitsECL-600 where fire-rated; ECL-445K-7 keyed-alike cylinders
Parking garagesPedestrian exits from parking structure to streetWeatherized ECL-230X-W configurations required
Warehouses and industrialLoading dock personnel exits, restricted accessWeatherized where exposed; bar guard kit for forklift proximity
UniversitiesDormitory secondary exits, restricted building accessECL-8220 exit bar plates in multilingual buildings

 

Source Detex ECL Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks all 59 Detex ECL parts across the ECL-230X, ECL-230D, ECL-600, and ECL-230X-W families. The catalog includes complete replacement devices, the ECL-243PH mechanism assembly kit, all individual internal components, bar and paddle assemblies, strike kits, delayed egress signs in seven languages, cylinder and trim options, and accessory kits for vandalism protection and alarm conversion.

For the full exit control lock and exit alarm parts catalog, see the exit alarms parts and diagrams guide. For broader exit device parts coverage, see the exit devices parts guide and the commercial exit device parts guide.

For life safety hardware guidance by building type, see the guides for healthcare, government buildings, parking garages, warehouses and industrial, and universities and colleges.

For access control integration with delayed egress devices, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

Same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support on Detex ECL parts before your order is placed.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Detex ECL parts catalog across all ECL-230X, ECL-230D, ECL-600, and weatherized configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Schlage L283 Trim Parts Guide: Lock Cases, Spring Cages, Mounting Plates, and L583 Components

Quick Answer

The Schlage L Series mortise lock uses two separate part families for replacement:

  • L283 covers the outside trim assembly: lock cases (function-specific), spring cages, spindles, mounting plates, rose trim, latchbolts, deadbolts, coin turns, electrified chassis, and VandlGard cases.
  • L583 covers the internal mortise lock body: mounting posts (by door thickness), retractor assembly, hub and spring components, fire door fuse and catch, and internal mechanism parts.
  • Lock cases are function-specific and must match your L9xxx function code exactly. Using the wrong case prevents the lock from operating.
  • VandlGard locks (LV-prefix function codes) need VandlGard-specific L283 cases and are not interchangeable with standard L283 cases.
  • L583 mounting posts must match door thickness exactly, from 1-3/4 inches to 3-1/2 inches. Ordering the wrong length is the most common parts error on L Series installations.
  • L583-748 retractor hub replaces the discontinued L583-019. Two required per lock.

Security Parts stocks all 195 L283 and L583 components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support. Browse the full Schlage parts catalog or navigate directly to the mortise lock parts catalog.

 

What L283 and L583 Mean in the Schlage L Series

When ordering replacement parts for a Schlage L Series mortise lock, two part number prefixes appear repeatedly: L283 and L583. Understanding what each covers before searching for a part saves significant time and prevents wrong-part orders.

L283 is the Schlage designator for the outside trim assembly of the L Series. This includes everything that interacts with the user on the exterior of the door: the lock case mechanism that determines how the lever and deadbolt function, the spring cage that returns the lever, the spindle that connects the lever to the lock case, the mounting plate that secures the trim to the door face, the rose trim that covers the escutcheon hole, latchbolts, deadbolts, and coin turns.

L583 is the Schlage designator for the internal mortise lock body components. These are the parts inside the mortise case itself: the mounting posts that hold the trim to the door at the correct thickness, the retractor assembly that drives the latch, the hub and spring components, the fire door fuse and catch required on fire-rated assemblies, and the internal mechanism parts including links, springs, and cams.

When a problem appears at the outside trim level: a lever that does not return, a spring cage that is worn, a rose trim that has been damaged: the replacement comes from the L283 family. When the problem is internal to the mortise case: a latch that does not retract fully, a deadbolt that does not throw, a mechanism that binds: the replacement comes from the L583 family.

For a broader overview of the Schlage L Series mortise lock system, see the Schlage L Series mortise lock parts guide and the Schlage L Series parts and diagrams guide. For function code reference across all L9000 models, see the commercial lock function codes guide.

 

L283 Lock Cases: Matching the Case to the Function Code

The lock case is the single most important Schlage L283 trim part to order correctly. It determines the mechanical behavior of the lock, whether the lever is always free, key-controlled, thumbturn-controlled, or electrified. Because lock cases are function-specific, the function code stamped on the existing mortise case must be confirmed before ordering a replacement.

Schlage L283-112 basic lock case for L9000 series mortise lock L Series trim parts

Schlage L283-112 basic lock case for the L9000 series. View product page and order.

 

Standard L283 Mortise Lock Cases

The standard L283 lock case range covers 22 function-specific configurations. Each is matched to one or more L9xxx function codes. The most commonly replaced cases include:

Part NumberCompatible Function CodesLock Function
L283-112L9010 (passage)Passage: lever free at all times
L283-131L9010Passage with inside thumbturn
L283-133L9050, L9060, L9070, L9071Storeroom / office / entrance
L283-062L9044, L9040Classroom / security
L283-039L9076, L9077Communicating / dormitory
L283-126L9056Entrance / vestibule
L283-137L9453Storeroom with dead bolt
L283-138L9456, L9457, L9796Office with dead bolt
L283-310L9458Entrance with dead bolt
L283-139L9460, L9462, L9463, L9464Entrance / exit with dead bolt
L283-140L9465, L9466, L9473Communicating with dead bolt
L283-146L9082, L9082EUEntrance / privacy
L283-141L9412, L9480, L9485, L9486Storeroom / classroom with dead bolt
L283-750L9025Passage with dead bolt

The function code is always the correct starting point for a lock case order. Do not attempt to substitute a case from a nearby function code without confirming compatibility. The internal mechanism geometry is specific to the function, and a mismatched case will not operate the lever and latch correctly.

For the complete list of L Series function codes and their mechanical behaviors, see the commercial lock function codes guide.

 

VandlGard L283 Lock Cases

VandlGard is the Schlage high-security variant of the L Series, designed to resist forced entry and vandalism at the trim assembly. VandlGard locks use LV-prefix function codes: LV9050, LV9056, LV9076, LV9077, LV9080, LV9082, LV9040, LV9044, LV9453, LV9456, LV9458, LV9460, LV9462, LV9480, LV9482, LV9484, LV9485, LV9486.

VandlGard locks require VandlGard-specific L283 lock cases. These are not interchangeable with standard L283 cases even when the function code base number is the same. A standard L283 case ordered for an LV9082 installation will not fit correctly. Twelve VandlGard L283 lock cases are stocked, covering all current LV-series function code configurations.

If your lock has an LV function code, confirm the VandlGard designation before placing any L283 parts order.

 

LM9300 Lock Cases

The LM9300 is a Schlage small-case mortise lock within the L Series family. It uses a separate set of L283 lock cases (L283-314, L283-316, L283-614) that are not compatible with standard L Series mortise cases. The LM9300 is frequently specified for interior applications where the full L9000 case size is not required. Three LM9300-specific lock cases are stocked.

 

L283 Electrified Chassis Parts

Electrified L Series mortise locks use L283 electrified chassis in place of standard lock cases. The chassis integrates the electrical components that allow the lock to respond to access control signals. Twenty-six electrified chassis configurations are stocked, covering the full range of Schlage EL, EU, LV, and LM9300 electrified function combinations.

Electrified chassis are organized by function code group and monitoring option:

  • L9090 and L9092 series: Eight chassis variants covering base, RX (request-to-exit monitoring), LX (latch monitoring), RX+LX combined, and DPS (door position sensor) configurations.
  • L9091, L9093, and L9095 series: Eight chassis variants covering the same RX, LX, and DPS monitoring combinations.
  • L9492 and L9494 series: Four chassis variants for electrified entry functions with RX, LX, and DPS options.
  • L9493 and L9495 series: Four chassis variants for electrified entry with monitoring combinations.
  • LV9090, LV9092 (VandlGard electrified): Two chassis variants for the electrified VandlGard configurations.
  • LV9091, LV9093, LV9095 (VandlGard electrified): Two chassis variants.
  • LM9300 electrified (L9350/L9370/L9180): One RX module chassis, part L283-452.

For guidance on integrating the L Series electrified mortise lock into an access control system, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide. For a comparison of electrified mortise locks versus electric strike configurations, see the electrified mortise lock vs electric strike guide.

 

L283 Trim Components: Spring Cages, Spindles, Mounting Plates, and Rose Trim

Spring Cages: L283-040 and L283-341

Schlage L283-040 spring cage replacement for L Series mortise lock trim assembly

Schlage L283-040 spring cage. View product page and order.

 

Two spring cage options are stocked for the L Series trim assembly:

  • L283-040 spring cage: The standard spring cage for most L Series trim applications. This is the correct replacement when the lever is failing to return to the neutral position after operation, when the return spring is visibly broken or worn, or when the trim assembly is disassembled for a general overhaul.
  • L283-341 LT springcage: The low-torque version of the spring cage, specified when the installation requires reduced lever operating force. The LT springcage is used on ADA-compliant openings where operating force must stay within the 5-pound maximum requirement, or on any application where lighter lever return is specifically called for in the hardware specification.

The spring cage is one of the highest-turnover L Series trim components on high-cycle openings. On doors that operate several hundred cycles per day, the spring cage typically shows wear before other trim components. Replacing the spring cage during routine maintenance is more cost-effective than waiting for full lever failure.

 

Spindles and Springs

Six spindle and spring configurations are stocked for the L Series trim. The spindle connects the outside lever to the lock case mechanism. Spindle failure typically presents as a lever that turns freely without operating the latch, or a lever with excessive rotational play.

Spindle configurations include standard through-spindle options (L283-060, L283-061, L283-064) and half-dummy application spindles (L283-065). Two spindle and spring kit configurations (L283-198, L283-199) bundle the spindle with the matching return spring for a complete replacement. The correct spindle depends on the door thickness and trim configuration in the existing installation.

 

Mounting Plates

Schlage L283-378 outside mounting plate assembly for L Series mortise lock trim

Schlage L283-378 outside mounting plate assembly. View product page and order.

 

Four mounting plate configurations are stocked:

  • L283-378 outside mounting plate assembly: The primary outside mounting plate for L Series trim. Secures the outside trim to the door face and provides the base for the spindle and rose trim.
  • L283-340 outside mounting plate assembly: Alternate outside mounting plate configuration for specific L Series trim arrangements.
  • L283-031 inside lever mounting plate: The mounting plate for the inside lever assembly. Required when the inside lever is removed or when the inside trim is being refitted.
  • L283-150 mounting plate for inside rose: The mounting plate that carries the inside rose trim. Required when the inside rose is damaged or when the inside trim is being replaced on its own.

 

Rose Trim and Escutcheons

Four rose trim and escutcheon configurations are stocked for the L Series:

  • L283-121: Rose trim without thumbturn, for lever-only outside trim functions.
  • L283-122: Rose trim with thumbturn, for functions where the inside thumbturn controls the outside lever.
  • L283-123: L escutcheon for 1-3/4-inch doors: the full escutcheon plate for standard commercial door thicknesses.
  • L283-101: L escutcheon thru-bolts, screws, and posts for 1-3/4-inch doors: the complete fastener kit for escutcheon installation.

 

L283 Latchbolts, Deadbolts, and Coin Turns

Schlage L283-049 latchbolt assembly replacement part for L Series mortise lock

Schlage L283-049 latchbolt assembly. View product page and order.

 

Latchbolts

The L283-049 latchbolt assembly is the primary latchbolt replacement for the L Series mortise lock. It is the spring-loaded bolt that extends and retracts as the lever is operated and that holds the door in the closed position. The L283-008 and L283-006 auxiliary latchbolt assemblies provide the anti-shim deadlatch function that prevents the latchbolt from being pushed back with a credit card or shim. On ANSI A156.13 compliant mortise locks, the auxiliary latchbolt is a required safety feature.

 

Deadbolts

Five deadbolt configurations are stocked: L283-075, L283-676, L283-003, L283-004, and L283-099. The correct deadbolt depends on the backset and function of the specific lock. L283-075 is the standard deadbolt for most L Series mortise configurations with a deadlocking function. L283-003 and L283-004 are 2-3/4-inch backset deadbolt options. L283-099 is the small-case mortise deadbolt for L Series locks with the L4606/L4608/L4640/L4660/L4680 and L4096 functions.

 

Coin Turns

Fourteen coin turn configurations are stocked in seven sizes: 19mm, 23mm, 25mm, 31mm, 37mm, 43mm, and 48mm. Each size is available in two versions: standard (L283-124 series) and Torx-fastener (L283-056 series). The coin turn is the small rotary button on the inside trim that controls the deadbolt or privacy function. Coin turn size is matched to the existing installation. When replacing a coin turn, measure the existing button diameter before ordering.

 

L583 Mortise Lock Body Parts

Mounting Posts by Door Thickness

Seventeen L583 mounting post configurations are stocked, covering door thicknesses from 1-3/4 inches to 3-1/2 inches. Two mounting post series are available: the L583-200 series (L583-211 through L583-219) and the L583-500 series (L583-497 through L583-504). Both series cover the same door thickness range.

Door ThicknessL583-200 SeriesL583-500 Series
1-3/8"L583-211Not available
1-3/4"L583-212L583-497
2"L583-213L583-498
2-1/4"L583-214L583-499
2-1/2"L583-215L583-500
2-3/4"L583-216L583-501
3"L583-217L583-502
3-1/4"L583-218L583-503
3-1/2"L583-219L583-504

Measure the door thickness before ordering mounting posts. If the posts are too short, the trim will not seat correctly and the lever will have excessive play. If too long, the trim will not pull tight against the door face.

 

Retractor Assembly Components

The retractor assembly is the internal mechanism that draws the latchbolt back when the lever is operated. Eight L583 retractor components are stocked:

  • L583-748 retractor hub: Replaces the discontinued L583-019. Two required per lock. This is the most commonly replaced retractor component on older L Series installations. If the latch is slow to retract or does not fully engage the retractor, this is the first component to inspect.
  • L583-025 retractor crank: The crank that converts lever rotation into linear latch retraction force.
  • L583-022 retractor rocker: The rocker arm that transfers motion from the retractor crank to the latch.
  • L583-024 retractor link: The connecting link between the retractor rocker and the latch assembly.
  • L583-021 retractor lever: The internal lever that drives the retractor assembly.
  • L583-058 simultaneous retractor: Used on simultaneous retraction functions where both latch and deadbolt retract together.
  • L583-053 simultaneous retractor (alternate): Alternate simultaneous retraction configuration.
  • L583-020 retractor hub spacer: Spacer component within the retractor hub assembly.

 

Hub and Spring Components

Four hub and spring components handle the rotation of the inside and outside lever mechanisms:

  • L583-029 turn hub: The hub that transmits thumbturn rotation to the deadbolt mechanism.
  • L583-030 entrance hub: The hub for the entrance function that allows the outside lever to operate when the lock is in the unlocked state.
  • L583-035 turn hub spring: The return spring for the turn hub assembly.
  • L583-026 hub spring: The return spring for the entrance hub. Replace when the thumbturn or entrance hub fails to return to its neutral position after operation.

 

Fire Door Components

Two fire door components are stocked for L Series mortise locks installed on fire-rated door assemblies:

  • L583-027 fire door fuse: A heat-sensitive fusible link inside the mortise case. When exposed to fire temperatures, it releases and allows the door to latch and fully close. Required on all NFPA 80 compliant fire door assemblies using the L Series mortise lock. The fire door fuse must be inspected during annual NFPA 80 inspections and replaced if the fusible link is compromised.
  • L583-027 fire door catch: Holds the latch in the correct position during normal door operation on fire-rated assemblies. Works in conjunction with the fire door fuse to maintain fire door compliance.

For annual NFPA 80 inspection requirements covering fire door hardware including mortise locks, see the NFPA 80 inspection guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Additional Internal Mechanism Parts

The complete L583 internal mechanism parts catalog includes 32 additional components covering the full range of links, springs, pins, cams, catches, and guides that make up the mortise lock body. Key stocked components include:

  • L583-051 transfer lever and L583-156 transfer lifter: Transfer motion from the hub assembly to the retractor in specific function configurations.
  • L583-049 entrance link and L583-048 locking link: Link components within the entrance and locking functions.
  • L583-045 locking catch and L583-047 catch spring: Catch and spring for locking function retention.
  • L583-174 holdback dog and L583-192 dog spring: Holdback components for functions with a holdback or classroom mode.
  • L583-031 cam follower: Follower component within the cam-operated mechanism functions.
  • L583-254 L Series classic standard: The base standard configuration assembly for the L583 mortise lock body.
  • L583-004 standoff post: Standoff post for use with L Series trim configurations requiring additional door face clearance.

 

How to Identify the Right L283 or L583 Part Before Ordering

  1. Read the function code from the lock body. The function code is stamped or labeled on the mortise lock case: format L9xxx or LVxxx. This code determines which specific L283 lock case applies to the installation.
  2. Confirm standard, VandlGard, or electrified. Standard L Series locks use L283 part numbers. VandlGard versions use LV-prefix function codes and require VandlGard-specific L283 lock cases. Electrified locks need L283 electrified chassis with EL, EU, RX, LX, or DPS designations.
  3. Identify whether the failure is in the trim or the mechanism. Outside trim issues point to L283. Internal mechanism failures point to L583.
  4. Measure door thickness before ordering L583 mounting posts. Posts range from 1-3/8 inches to 3-1/2 inches. The wrong length causes trim misalignment and lever play.
  5. Confirm the correct retractor hub. If the lock was manufactured before the L583-019 was discontinued, the L583-748 is the current replacement. Order two per lock.
  6. Use the Security Parts L Series catalog. Part diagrams on each model page allow visual confirmation of the component before the order is placed.

For the complete Schlage L Series parts and diagrams reference, see the Schlage L Series parts and diagrams guide. For guidance on OEM versus aftermarket compatibility, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

Source Schlage L283 Trim Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks the complete Schlage L283 trim parts and L583 mortise lock body catalog: 109 L283 components and 86 L583 components across all standard, VandlGard, electrified, and LM9300 configurations. The catalog is organized by model with interactive parts diagrams on every model page, allowing visual confirmation of the component before the order is placed.

Browse the Schlage parts catalog or navigate directly to the mortise lock parts catalog. For series-specific reference across all Schlage L Series models and functions, see:

For general mortise lock reference:

Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order part identification and compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Schlage L283 trim parts and L583 mortise lock body catalog across all standard, VandlGard, electrified, and LM9300 configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 1450 Door Closer Parts Guide: Arms, Tracks, Cylinders, and Covers

Quick Answer

The LCN 1450 is a parallel arm surface door closer available in two configurations: the standard 1450 (arm-and-shoe system) and the 1450T (track arm system). Replacement parts are not interchangeable between the two. Here is what to know before ordering:

  • 1450 arms: Six types: regular (3077/62A), EDA extra duty (3077EDA), spring cushion (3077CNS/3077SCNS), PA parallel arm (3077PA), and long arm (3077L). Hold-open variants use 3049 in place of 3077.
  • 1450T tracks: Four options: 3038 standard, 3038H hold-open, 3038B bumper, 3038HB both. Track roller (3034H) and hold-open clip (3054) are the highest-wear components.
  • PA shoe (62PA) is handed : specify Left or Right when ordering. (Remove em dash replacement below) specify Left or Right when ordering. The 62A auxiliary shoe is not handed.
  • Spring cush block (3080) is replaceable without replacing the full arm.
  • Cylinders: 3071 standard, 3071DEL delay action.

Security Parts carries the complete LCN 1450 parts catalog with same-day shipping on stocked items. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order part identification support. Browse the full LCN parts catalog or navigate directly to the LCN 1450 model page.

 

What the LCN 1450 Is and Where It Is Installed

LCN 1450 door closer parts guide model overview parallel arm surface closer

LCN 1450 parallel arm door closer. View model page and parts diagrams.

 

The LCN 1450 is a parallel arm surface door closer designed for applications where a standard arm swing would create a clearance problem. On a standard door closer, the arm sweeps outward as the door opens. On an aluminum storefront, a narrow corridor, or a door swinging into a stairwell, that arm arc can strike a wall, trim, or obstruction. The parallel arm geometry on the 1450 keeps the arm close to the door face throughout the swing, eliminating the clearance issue.

The 1450T variant uses a track arm system instead of a conventional arm-and-shoe setup. The track arm's roller travels inside a channel mounted on the door face, providing a smooth, linear closing force that many specifiers prefer on high-cycle aluminum storefront doors. The 1450 and 1450T share the same closer body but use entirely different arm and track hardware. Parts do not interchange between the two configurations.

For a broader reference on LCN door closer selection by application, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide and the commercial door closers types guide. For sizing requirements, see the LCN door closer sizing guide.

 

LCN 1450 Arm System: All Types Explained

The arm system is the most frequently replaced component group on the LCN 1450. Arm selection determines the mounting geometry, the closing force distribution, and whether hold-open function is included. Every arm type is available in a standard (non-hold-open) version and a hold-open version.

The part number convention is straightforward: 3077 = standard arm (no hold-open), 3049 = hold-open arm. Add the arm type suffix and the result is the complete arm part number.

 

Regular Arm: 1450-307762A and 1450-304962A

The regular arm is the baseline configuration for the 1450 when the application requires a parallel arm geometry without any special closing characteristics. It pairs with the 62A auxiliary shoe. The 62A shoe is not handed and fits either side of the installation. The hold-open version is designated 1450-304962A.

LCN 1450-3077EDA extra duty arm replacement part for 1450 door closer

LCN 1450-3077EDA extra duty arm. View product page and order.

 

Extra Duty Arm: 1450-3077EDA and 1450-3049EDA

The EDA (extra duty arm) is a heavier-gauge arm specified for high-cycle openings, institutional applications, or any door that receives heavier-than-normal traffic. It uses the same 62A shoe as the regular arm but is built to a higher structural tolerance. On openings where regular arms are showing premature wear or bending, the EDA is the correct replacement choice. The hold-open EDA is the 1450-3049EDA.

EDA versions with the 62G shoe are also available: 1450-3077EDAG and 1450-3049EDAG.

 

Spring Cushion Arm: 1450-3077CNS, 1450-3077SCNS, and Hold-Open Variants

The spring cushion arm incorporates a spring cush block (3080) within the arm assembly. The spring cushion function absorbs the initial closing force, providing a gentler door pull at the beginning of the closing cycle. This is specified on doors where a hard initial pull is a problem, such as glass doors where rapid closing can cause frame stress or where ADA opening force requirements are being approached.

The 3077CNS is the standard spring cushion arm. The 3077SCNS adds a spring within the cush block for a stronger cushion effect. Hold-open versions are the 1450-3049CNS and 1450-3049SCNS respectively.

The spring cush block (1450-3080) is a replaceable component. If the cushion function has degraded but the arm structure is intact, replacing the 3080 block restores the spring cushion without requiring a full arm replacement.

 

PA Parallel Arm: 1450-3077PA and 1450-3049PA

The PA arm pairs with the 62PA parallel arm shoe rather than the standard 62A auxiliary shoe. The 62PA shoe is handed and must be specified as Left or Right when ordering. Confirm the handing of the existing installation before placing the order: Left is correct when the hinge is on the left side facing the pull side of the door, Right when the hinge is on the right side.

The hold-open version is the 1450-3049PA. Browse the 1450-3077PA parallel arm with 62PA shoe on the product page.

 

Long Arm: 1450-3077L and 1450-3049L

The long arm provides additional reach where the standard arm geometry does not produce the correct geometry relative to the door width and frame dimensions. It uses the 62A shoe and follows the same hold-open designation pattern: 1450-3049L for the hold-open version.

 

LCN 1450T Track System: Tracks, Rollers, and Clips

LCN 1450T-3038 standard track replacement part for 1450T door closer

LCN 1450T-3038 standard track. View product page and order.

 

The 1450T track system uses a single arm type (the 1450T-3077T standard arm) paired with a track assembly selected to match the required closing function. The track roller and hold-open clip are the components most subject to wear on high-cycle 1450T installations.

 

Track Variants: Standard, Hold-Open, Bumper, and Combined

Part NumberTrack TypeHold-OpenBumperPrimary Application
1450T-3038StandardNoNoStandard commercial, no hold-open needed
1450T-3038HHold-openYesNoOpenings requiring door to hold at 80-110 degrees
1450T-3038BBumperNoYesProtects wall or stop at full swing position
1450T-3038HBHold-open + bumperYesYesHigh-traffic, hold-open with wall protection

 

Wear Components: Track Roller and Hold-Open Clip

On high-cycle 1450T installations, the track roller (1450T-3034H) and hold-open clip (1450T-3054) are the first components to show wear. The track roller develops flat spots after extended cycling. The hold-open clip loses tension and fails to hold the door at the correct position. Both are replaceable without removing the closer body from the door. These components should be inspected during any scheduled maintenance visit on a 1450T installation. For a full maintenance schedule reference, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

LCN 1450 Cylinder Assemblies

LCN 1450-3071 cylinder assembly replacement part for 1450 door closer

LCN 1450-3071 cylinder assembly. View product page and order.

 

Two cylinder assemblies are available for the LCN 1450 and 1450T series.

Standard Cylinder: 1450-3071 and 1450T-3071

The 1450-3071 is the standard cylinder assembly for the 1450 closer body. The 1450T-3071 is the corresponding standard cylinder for the 1450T track arm variant. Both provide conventional spring-tension closing without any delayed action function. The 1450-3071 cylinder assembly is available with same-day shipping when stocked.

 

Delay Action Cylinder: 1450-3071DEL

The delay action cylinder holds the door at its fully open position for an adjustable interval before the closer spring begins pulling the door shut. It is specified on high-traffic openings where users need time to pass through without manually holding the door.

Common applications include loading dock entries, accessible entrances where users need extra time to clear the doorway, and healthcare corridor doors where staff frequently pass through carrying equipment. The delay interval is field-adjustable.

The 3071DEL replaces the standard 3071 cylinder directly. No other hardware changes are required when upgrading from a standard cylinder to a delay action cylinder.

 

Covers, Mounting Plates, and Accessory Components

Cover Options for the LCN 1450

Four cover options are available:

Part NumberCover TypeBest For
1450-72Standard slim coverMost commercial applications, clean profile
1450-72FCFull plastic coverModerate-duty protection, economy option
1450-72MCFull metal coverInstitutional, high-abuse, heavy-duty applications
1450-72ALTAlternate coverNon-standard profile or replacement fit requirements

 

Mounting Plates

The mounting plate connects the closer body to the door face. Four mounting plate options are available:

  • 1450-18: Standard mounting plate, most common configuration.
  • 1450-18FC: Standard mounting plate for use with full cover installation.
  • 1450-18PA: PA mounting plate for parallel arm installations.
  • 1450-18PAFC: PA mounting plate configured for use with the full cover.

Select the mounting plate that matches both the arm configuration (standard vs PA) and whether a full cover is being installed. The cover type determines which plate variant applies.

 

Additional Accessory Parts

Several additional components are stocked for the LCN 1450 series:

  • 1450-3080 spring cush block: Replacement cush block within the CUSH arm assembly. Replaceable without full arm disassembly. The spring cush block is the correct first replacement on any CUSH arm showing degraded cushion performance before the full arm is condemned.
  • 1450-146 pinion cap: Cap at the pinion end of the closer body. Replace if cracked, missing, or showing fluid seepage around the pinion end.
  • 1450-30 cush shoe support: Support component within the spring cushion arm assembly. Inspect when the CUSH arm shows lateral instability.
  • 1450-61 blade stop spacer: Spacer component for blade stop configurations. Required for correct stop positioning on blade stop mount applications.
  • 1450-419 flush panel adapter: Adapter for flush panel mounting applications where the door surface does not accommodate standard mounting geometry.
  • 1450-31 cover screw: Replacement cover mounting screw. Rebox kits (1450-Rebox-Kit and 1450T-Rebox-Kit) include replacement boxes and instruction sheets for models that have lost their original documentation.

 

How to Identify the Right LCN 1450 Part

The fastest identification path starts with the model label on the closer body, which confirms whether the closer is a 1450 or 1450T. From there, the arm or track currently installed determines which replacement parts apply.

  1. Confirm 1450 vs 1450T. Check the model label on the body. If a track channel is present on the door face and the arm runs into it, the closer is a 1450T. If a conventional arm connects to a shoe on the door frame, it is a standard 1450.
  2. Identify the arm type. On the 1450: look at the arm geometry and any markings on the arm body. The EDA arm has a heavier cross-section than the regular arm. The CUSH arm has a visible spring block at the body connection point. The PA arm attaches directly to the door face without a frame shoe. On the 1450T, the arm type is always 1450T-3077T; the variable is the track assembly.
  3. Check the shoe. If a 62A shoe is installed, the arm is a regular, EDA, or long arm. If a 62PA shoe is installed, the arm is a PA configuration. Note the handing before ordering the 62PA.
  4. Match the track (1450T only). Inspect the track channel. A notch or detent near the open position indicates a hold-open track (3038H or 3038HB). A bumper pad at the end of the channel indicates a bumper track (3038B or 3038HB). No notch or bumper: standard 3038 track.
  5. Order by part number. Use the component number from the LCN 1450 model page parts diagram to confirm the exact part number before ordering.

For help interpreting parts diagrams, see the door closer parts diagram guide. For questions about whether a component is OEM or aftermarket compatible, see the OEM vs aftermarket guide.

 

Source LCN 1450 Door Closer Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts carries the complete LCN 1450 parts catalog, including all arm types, the full 1450T track system, cylinders, covers, mounting plates, and accessory components. Browse the door closers parts catalog or navigate directly to the LCN 1450 model page for interactive parts diagrams organized by component.

For coverage of the full LCN door closer parts catalog across all series:

For installation and adjustment references, see the how to install a commercial door closer guide and the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide. For fire door compliance requirements relevant to closer selection, see the commercial door fire rating guide. For ANSI/BHMA grade requirements, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

Same-day shipping is available on stocked components. Pre-order part identification support is available at 845-935-0301. For repair and replacement guidance beyond parts identification, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts carries the complete LCN 1450 door closer parts catalog across all arm, track, cylinder, and cover configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order part identification support at 845-935-0301.

How to Install an Electric Strike: Frame Prep, Wiring, and Alignment

Quick Answer

Installing an electric strike correctly comes down to four decisions made in the right order: mode first, voltage second, frame prep third, wiring fourth. Here is the short version:

  • Choose fail-safe or fail-secure before ordering. Fire-rated assemblies require fail-secure. This determines your power supply type and fire compliance path.
  • Verify voltage before connecting anything. Use a multimeter at the power supply output. Exceeding rated voltage by 10 percent damages the solenoid permanently.
  • Fire-rated frames require factory cutouts. Field-cutting a fire-rated frame voids the fire label. Specify the electric strike prep when you order the frame, not after it arrives.
  • Install the back EMF suppression diode. It protects the access control panel from voltage spikes every time the solenoid de-energizes.

Security Parts carries the full Von Duprin electric strike catalog for the 5100 Series, 6100 Series, and 6300 Series with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-installation compatibility support. For a broader reference on commercial door hardware selection, see the commercial security hardware guide.

 

Before You Touch the Frame: The Two Decisions That Come First

Most electric strike installation problems trace back to a decision made too late in the process. Frame cutouts, power supply specifications, and fire compliance paths all depend on two choices that need to happen before the frame is ordered and before a multimeter is picked up.

 

Decision 1: Fail-Safe or Fail-Secure?

Von Duprin 5100 Series electric strike installation fail-safe fail-secure field selectable commercial door

Von Duprin 5100 Series electric strikes. Browse 5100 Series models.

 

Fail-secure means the strike stays locked when power is cut. Fail-safe means it releases. This is the most consequential decision in the installation because it determines the power supply type, the fire rating eligibility, and the NEC compliance path.

Use fail-secure when:

  • The door is on a fire-rated assembly. Fire doors must positively latch during a power outage. Fail-safe operation on a fire door fails this requirement.
  • The door is a secured perimeter entry that must remain locked if the access control system loses power.
  • The local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) has not specifically approved fail-safe for the application.

Use fail-safe when:

  • The door is on a non-fire-rated egress path where free egress during a power outage is required by code.
  • The application is a stairwell or emergency egress corridor that must remain accessible if the system fails.
  • The access control specification explicitly calls for fail-safe and the AHJ has approved it.

Most Von Duprin 5100 and 6100 Series electric strikes ship from the factory in fail-secure mode. Field reversal to fail-safe is available on select models. For a detailed comparison of how fail-safe and fail-secure interact with fire door hardware, see the electric strikes complete guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Decision 2: What Voltage Does the Strike Require?

Most commercial electric strikes operate on 12VDC, 24VDC, or both. Some models accept AC voltage with an external rectifier. Confirm the voltage requirement of the specific strike model before specifying the power supply. The power supply must be sized for both the inrush current (higher, momentary) and the holding current (lower, continuous) of the strike, not just the holding current shown in most marketing specs.

Voltage mismatch is the single most common cause of solenoid failure in the field. Do not rely on a power supply's label alone. Verify actual output voltage with a multimeter before connecting the strike.

 

Frame Preparation: Requirements by Door and Frame Type

An electric strike requires a larger frame cutout than a standard strike plate. The cutout dimensions vary by strike model and faceplate selection. The frame must also include a wire access point for routing low-voltage wiring from the back of the frame cavity to the strike location.

 

Hollow Metal Frames

Hollow metal frames are the most common installation type for commercial electric strikes. The standard process:

  1. Mark the strike centerline based on the latchbolt height when the door is closed.
  2. Use the cutout template included with the strike to mark the frame cutout dimensions.
  3. Cut the frame using an appropriate metal cutting tool. Verify the cut is clean and burr-free before mounting.
  4. If the frame does not have factory-installed mounting tabs, install the no-weld mounting tab kit before inserting the strike body.
  5. Confirm a wire access point exists in the frame. If not, add a wire access hole in the back of the frame channel before the strike is inserted.

 

Fire-Rated Frames: Factory Prep Is Mandatory

This is the most frequently violated rule in electric strike installation. The electric strike cutout in a fire-rated frame must be factory-prepared as part of the original frame fabrication order. Field-cutting a fire-rated frame voids the UL fire label on the frame, which voids the fire rating of the entire door assembly.

The factory prep requirement means the electric strike model must be selected and specified before the frame is ordered. At minimum, specify:

  • The strike model and faceplate option (which determines the cutout dimensions)
  • The wire access point location
  • The conduit knockout or channel pathway for routing low-voltage wiring

For compliance requirements on fire door assembly hardware, see the commercial door fire rating guide, the NFPA 80 inspection guide, and the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Wood Door Frames

Electric strikes in wood door frames use wood screws instead of mounting tabs. The frame cutout follows the same template as hollow metal, but wood frames do not require a factory prep for fire-rated applications because rated wood frames use different construction and listing requirements. Confirm fire rating status of the specific wood frame before proceeding without factory prep.

 

Aluminum Storefront Frames

Aluminum storefront frames require a no-weld mounting bracket kit. Standard hollow metal mounting tabs cannot be welded to aluminum. The no-weld bracket system uses adhesive shims and mechanical fasteners to secure the strike in the aluminum frame cutout. Confirm the strike model is compatible with aluminum frame installation before ordering.

 

Wiring the Electric Strike: Voltage, Wire Gauge, and Power Connection

Von Duprin 050034 solenoid kit 12VDC 24VDC for 5100 Series electric strike wiring installation

Von Duprin 050034 solenoid kit for 5100 Series. View product page.

 

Step 1: Verify Voltage at the Source Before Connecting

Before connecting any wiring to the electric strike, use a multimeter to measure actual output voltage at the power supply terminals. Power supplies and low-voltage transformers frequently operate above their stated rating. Any input voltage exceeding the strike's rated voltage by more than 10 percent permanently damages the solenoid coil. This damage is not covered under warranty and is not visible until the solenoid fails under load.

 

Step 2: Select the Correct Pigtail Connector for the Voltage

Von Duprin 5100 and 6100 Series strikes ship with two pigtail connectors: one marked "12 VDC" and one marked "24 VDC." Connect the pigtail that matches your power supply output, not the strike's rated voltage range.

  • For 12VAC, 12VDC, or 16VAC: use the pigtail marked 12 VDC
  • For 24VAC or 24VDC: use the pigtail marked 24 VDC

Using the wrong pigtail with the correct voltage causes the solenoid to operate outside its optimized current range. Over time, this shortens solenoid life even if the strike appears to function normally.

 

Step 3: Wire Gauge Requirements by Run Length

Wire gauge requirements vary by run length from the power supply to the strike location. Undersized wire causes voltage drop that reduces the strike's holding force and can cause intermittent release failures.

Run Length12VDC Minimum Gauge24VDC Minimum Gauge
Up to 200 feet18 AWG20 AWG
200 to 300 feet16 AWG18 AWG
300 to 400 feet14 AWG16 AWG

All electric strike wiring installation must comply with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). Maintain required separation between low-voltage access control wiring and high-voltage electrical circuits. Terminate all connections inside the frame cavity or junction box, not in the wall cavity where connections cannot be accessed later.

 

Step 4: AC Power and the Rectifier Requirement

An electric strike connected to an AC power supply without a rectifier will buzz continuously. AC alternates direction at 60Hz, causing the solenoid to cycle at that frequency. The buzzing is not just a nuisance: it accelerates solenoid wear and is audible to occupants.

Install an AC rectifier between the AC transformer and the strike whenever the power source is AC. The rectifier converts AC to DC at the strike, eliminating the buzzing. For wiring diagrams covering the AC rectifier connection and latchbolt monitor wiring, see the electric strike schematic diagram guide.

 

Step 5: Install the Back EMF Suppression Diode

When the electric strike solenoid de-energizes (when power is cut to release or lock the strike), it generates a voltage spike called back EMF. This spike travels back through the wiring to the access control panel's output relay and degrades the relay contacts over time, eventually causing intermittent failures in the access control system.

Install a back EMF suppression diode across the strike terminals, observing polarity (cathode toward the positive terminal on DC-powered models). For AC-powered strikes, use a metal oxide varistor (MOV) instead of a diode. MOVs are not polarity sensitive. Some Von Duprin strike models include the suppression component. If not included, it is available as an accessory in the parts catalog.

For a full reference on access control wiring and signal protection, see the access control integration guide.

 

Installing the Strike in the Frame

Von Duprin PKGMTG1004 mounting package for 5100 Series electric strike installation

Von Duprin PKGMTG1004 mounting package for 5100 Series. View product page.

 

Select the Correct Faceplate First

The faceplate is not a cosmetic choice. It determines which lock type the strike is compatible with (cylindrical, mortise, or exit device) and which frame cutout template applies. Selecting the wrong faceplate produces a strike that physically fits the frame but does not properly engage the latch, which causes release failures and return damage.

Von Duprin 5100 and 6100 Series faceplate options cover:

  • Standard cylindrical latchbolts
  • Mortise latchbolts with and without deadlatches
  • Exit device latches (narrow and wide configurations)
  • Hookbolt configurations for non-latchbolt applications

Select the faceplate based on the latch type and backset of the lock installed on the door. For parts reference by strike model, see the electric strike parts guide.

 

Route Wiring Before Inserting the Strike

Route all wiring through the frame channel and leave a sufficient service loop at the strike location before the strike body goes into the frame. Once the strike is mounted, access to the wiring connection point is limited. Pinched wiring between the strike body and the frame is a common installation defect that causes intermittent failures weeks after installation.

 

Mount the Strike and Confirm Alignment

  1. Insert the strike body into the frame cutout with all wiring routed clear of the strike housing.
  2. Secure using the mounting tabs and provided screws. On hollow metal frames with factory-installed tabs, thread the screws into the tabs finger-tight first.
  3. Close the door and verify the latchbolt enters the keeper cleanly without resistance. Resistance indicates a misaligned centerline.
  4. Tighten the mounting screws fully once alignment is confirmed.

 

Post-Installation Alignment Adjustments

Horizontal Alignment

If the latchbolt binds or does not retract cleanly when the strike is energized, horizontal alignment is the first adjustment to make. Loosen the mounting screws slightly, shift the strike body horizontally behind the faceplate until latch engagement and release are smooth, then retighten. Most Von Duprin 5100 and 6100 Series strikes allow approximately 1/8-inch horizontal adjustment within the faceplate slot.

For excessive horizontal issues where the 1/8-inch adjustment is not sufficient, remove the shim filler bar from the keeper. This increases the keeper travel range to compensate for larger frame or door alignment problems.

 

Vertical Alignment (For Strikes With Internal Ramps)

The internal ramps in Von Duprin 6100 Series strikes must be aligned so the deadlatch passes between the two ramps without contacting either ramp. If the deadlatch contacts a ramp, the door will not latch properly when the strike is in the locked state.

  1. Mark the centerline of the deadlatch on the strike faceplate with the door closed.
  2. Remove the strike from the frame.
  3. Loosen the internal ramp screws and slide the ramp assembly until the groove between the ramps aligns with the mark.
  4. Retighten all screws, reinstall the strike, and verify alignment by closing the door.

 

Testing the Electric Strike After Installation

Von Duprin 6100 Series electric strike installation testing 12VDC 24VDC commercial door

Von Duprin 6100 Series electric strikes. Browse 6100 Series models.

 

Every electric strike installation requires testing in both the powered and unpowered states before the door is commissioned. Do not skip the unpowered test, especially on fire-rated assemblies.

 

Powered State Test

  • Apply power to the strike at the rated voltage.
  • Send an unlock signal from the access control panel or apply power directly to the strike terminals.
  • Confirm the keeper retracts and the latchbolt releases cleanly when the door is pulled.
  • Confirm the keeper returns to the locked position after the door closes and the latch re-engages.

 

Unpowered State Test (Fail-Secure or Fail-Safe Verification)

  • Fail-secure: Disconnect power to the strike. The door should remain locked. Confirm the latchbolt cannot retract manually when the strike is unpowered.
  • Fail-safe: Disconnect power to the strike. The door should open freely. Confirm there is no resistance on the latchbolt retraction.

 

Fire-Rated Assembly Final Check

On fire-rated door assemblies, perform one final check in both power states: release the door from the open position and confirm it self-closes and positively latches every time. The door must latch without manual assistance in both the powered and unpowered states. If the door fails to latch in either state, the assembly is not compliant and must be adjusted before sign-off.

For ongoing maintenance requirements after installation, including NFPA 80 annual inspection procedures, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Common Electric Strike Installation Problems and Fixes

ProblemLikely CauseFix
Strike will not releaseNo power at the strike terminals; wrong pigtail connectorVerify voltage at strike terminals with multimeter; confirm correct pigtail is connected
Strike buzzing continuouslyAC power supply connected without rectifier; incorrect polarity on DC modelInstall AC rectifier; verify polarity if DC-powered
Latchbolt does not fully engage when lockedHorizontal misalignment; backpressure from door bindingAdjust horizontal alignment; check door-to-frame gap (minimum 1/8 inch)
Solenoid has burnt smell after installationIncorrect voltage; wrong pigtail connector for voltageReplace solenoid; verify power supply voltage output with multimeter before reconnecting
Access control panel intermittent failuresNo back EMF diode installed; relay contact degradationInstall suppression diode or MOV across strike terminals
Door fails to latch when strike is lockedVertical misalignment; deadlatch contacting internal rampRealign internal ramps using deadlatch centerline mark procedure

 

Sourcing Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks the complete Von Duprin electric strike catalog for the 5100, 6100, and 6300 Series, including replacement solenoids, faceplate options, mounting packages, and accessory kits. Browse the complete electric strikes catalog or by series:

For access control integration design including REX switch placement, door position switch wiring, and latchbolt monitor connections, see the access control integration guide. For the choice between an electric strike and an electrified mortise lock for a specific opening, see the electrified mortise lock vs electric strike guide.

Same-day shipping is available on stocked components. Pre-installation compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301. For a parallel guide on mechanical door hardware installation, see how to install a commercial door closer.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the complete Von Duprin electric strike catalog for the 5100, 6100, and 6300 Series with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-installation support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 4040XP Parts Guide: Arms, Tracks, Shoes and Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN 4040XP uses a fixed shoe arm system. The 4040XPT uses a rolling track arm system. Parts are not interchangeable between the two. Before ordering any LCN 4040XP parts, confirm four things:

  • Model variant: 4040XP (arm and shoe) or 4040XPT (track and track arm). The two share the same closer body but use completely different arm hardware.
  • Arm type: Regular, EDA (Extra Duty), CUSH (spring cushion), or PA (parallel arm). Each is a different part number and serves a different application.
  • Hold-open or standard: Hold-open arms lock the door at the open position. Standard arms close freely from any point. The part number suffix distinguishes them.
  • Arm length: Standard, long (L), or extra long (XL), determined by the door reveal depth.

Security Parts stocks the full 4040XP and 4040XPT parts catalog with same-day shipping on stocked items. Browse the LCN 4040XP model page and the 4040XPT model page for the complete parts list. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What the LCN 4040XP Is and Why the Arm System Matters for Parts

The LCN 4040XP SuperSmoothee is the institutional benchmark Grade 1 surface-mounted door closer from Allegion. It is the most widely installed heavy-duty commercial closer in the US market, specified across hospitals, universities, government buildings, and K-12 schools. When a 4040XP arm fails, the part number depends entirely on which arm configuration was originally installed. Ordering the wrong arm type is the most common sourcing mistake on this product.

The 4040XP uses a cast iron cylinder body with a four-function hydraulic valve, Fast Power Adjust spring power control, and Liquid-X all-weather hydraulic fluid. It carries Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA A156.4 certification and meets Buy American Act (BAA) requirements for government projects. All of that institutional hardware lives in the closer body, which rarely fails. What fails is the arm assembly, the shoe, or on track versions, the track and roller.

For a reference on installing and adjusting the 4040XP after arm replacement, see the LCN 4040XP installation template guide and the commercial door closer adjustment guide.

 

4040XP vs 4040XPT: Two Different Parts Systems

The 4040XP uses a fixed shoe mounted on the door frame. The arm connects the closer spindle to that shoe and drives the door through its arc. The 4040XPT replaces the shoe with an aluminum track, and the arm rides inside the track on a roller throughout the door's travel. The closer body is the same on both. Everything else (the arm, the shoe or track, the roller, the hardware) is different.

If the existing installation has a channel mounted horizontally on the frame with the arm riding inside it, the unit is a 4040XPT. If the existing installation has a fixed plate on the frame with a rod-and-shoe connecting to the arm tip, the unit is a 4040XP. Confirming this before ordering prevents the most common return on this product line.

 

LCN 4040XP Arm Types and Part Numbers

The 4040XP arm system organizes into four main arm families. Within each family, the arm is available in standard (no hold-open) and hold-open (HO) variants. Hold-open arms add a friction mechanism at the shoe that locks the door open at a user-set position when the door is pushed past approximately 70 degrees. Standard arms allow the closer to pull the door closed from any open position without locking.

 

Regular Arm

The regular arm is the standard 4040XP arm for pull-side and top jamb mounting with shallow reveal. It connects the closer spindle to the rod and shoe on the door frame. Available configurations:

  • 4040XP-3077 / 3077PA: Standard regular arm. Non-handed. Mounts pull side or top jamb. The 3077PA variant includes the 62PA parallel arm shoe for parallel mounting.
  • 4040XP-3077/62A: Regular arm with auxiliary shoe pre-installed. Saves ordering the 62A shoe separately when that configuration is required.
  • 4040XP-3077L: Long arm for deeper reveals. Order the 4040XP-3077L long arm when the standard rod and shoe does not reach the frame shoe mount.
  • 4040XP-3077XL: Extra long arm for the deepest reveal situations. Order the 4040XP-3077XL extra long arm when both standard and long arms fall short.

Hold-open variants for the regular arm: 4040XP-3049PA (with 62PA shoe), 4040XP-3049/PA, and 4040XP-3049L (long hold-open arm). The 4040XP-3049L hold-open long arm is the correct part for deep-reveal hold-open configurations.

 

EDA Arm (Extra Duty Arm)

LCN 4040XP-3077EDA extra duty arm replacement part for heavy duty commercial door closer

LCN 4040XP-3077EDA Extra Duty Arm. View product page and order.

 

The EDA (Extra Duty Arm) uses heavier stamped steel construction than the standard regular arm. It is specified for high-abuse applications where standard arms fail prematurely: institutional buildings, behavioral health facilities, high-traffic hospital corridors, and correctional environments. The EDA arm has a wider pivot design and higher cycle rating than the standard arm.

  • 4040XP-3077EDA: Standard EDA arm, no hold-open.
  • 4040XP-3049EDA: Hold-open EDA arm. Holds door open at set position.
  • 4040XP-3077EDA/G: EDA arm with 62G shoe pre-installed for 180-degree swing applications.

The EDA arm is non-handed and mounts pull side or top jamb with shallow reveal, the same as the regular arm. If the existing arm is marked "EDA" or shows the heavier stamped construction, order the EDA replacement rather than the standard arm.

 

CUSH Arm (Spring Cushion Arm)

LCN 4040XP-3077CNS cush arm with spring cushion for 4040XP door closer

LCN 4040XP-3077CNS Cush Arm. View product page and order.

 

The CUSH arm adds a spring-loaded contact block at the shoe end that absorbs impact energy when the door reaches its maximum open position. It is used on doors that frequently bang into stops or walls, where the impact shortens the life of the arm, the shoe, and the door frame hardware. The spring cushion absorbs and dissipates that impact energy before it reaches the frame.

The spring cush block assembly (4040XP-3080) is the primary wear component in the CUSH system. Order the 4040XP-3080 spring cush block assembly as a standalone replacement when the cushion block has worn but the arm itself is still functional. The cush shoe support (4040XP-30) and blade stop spacer (4040XP-61) are required accessories for CUSH installations on doors with 1/2-inch blade stops.

 

Parallel Arm Mounting and the PA Shoe

LCN 4040XP-62PA parallel arm shoe for parallel mounting configuration

LCN 4040XP-62PA Parallel Arm Shoe. View product page and order.

 

Parallel arm mounting places the closer on the push side of the door with the arm running along the door face. The frame-mounted shoe (62PA) is on the push side of the frame. This configuration is used when pull-side clearance is insufficient or when the door specification requires a push-side installation.

The 4040XP-62PA parallel arm shoe is a handed component. It must be specified for the correct door swing direction. The 62PA is included with PA arm packages (3077PA, 3049PA) and is available separately for replacement.

The auxiliary shoe (4040XP-62A) serves a different purpose: it provides an additional contact point on the frame for specific arm geometries. The 4040XP-62A auxiliary shoe is included pre-installed on the 3077/62A arm package and is available separately.

 

LCN 4040XP Rod and Shoe: Selecting the Right Length

The rod and shoe connects the main arm to the frame shoe and is the component most directly affected by door reveal depth. Reveal depth is the distance from the door face to the inside edge of the frame stop. Ordering the wrong rod and shoe length results in an arm that either cannot fully close the door or sits at an incorrect operating angle.

Part NumberDescriptionApproximate Reveal Range
4040XP-79Standard rod and shoeUp to 3-1/4 inches
4040XP-79LRLong rod and shoe (8-3/8 in.)Up to 5-3/4 inches
4040XP-79ELRExtra long rod and shoeDeeper reveals beyond 79LR range

Arm length (3077, 3077L, 3077XL) and rod-and-shoe length work together. A long arm (3077L) typically pairs with the long rod and shoe (79LR). An extra long arm (3077XL) typically pairs with the extra long rod and shoe (79ELR). Refer to the LCN 4040XP installation diagram, available on the 4040XP diagram page to confirm the correct combination for the specific reveal depth and mounting configuration.

 

LCN 4040XP Cylinder Assembly and Internal Components

The 4040XP uses a cast iron cylinder assembly (4040XP-3071) that is heavier duty than the standard 4000 Series cylinder. The cast iron construction distinguishes it from the lighter 4050A and 4030 Series cylinders and is part of why the 4040XP is the institutional specification standard rather than the lighter commercial alternatives.

The 4040XP-3071 cast iron cylinder assembly is available as a complete replacement when the internal hydraulic components have failed and the closer body needs to be rebuilt rather than replaced. The arm screw (4040XP-83H) secures the arm to the closer spindle and is a common replacement on doors where the arm has been removed multiple times.

 

LCN 4040XPT Track Parts

The 4040XPT track system replaces the fixed shoe with an aluminum track mounted horizontally on the frame. The arm connects to a rolling carriage that travels inside the track throughout the door's travel arc, which allows the door to open to a wider range of positions without the arm reaching mechanical limits.

 

Track Selection for the 4040XPT

LCN 4040XPT-3038 standard track for 4040XP through-bolt track closer

LCN 4040XPT-3038 Standard Track. View product page and order.

 

Four track configurations are available for the 4040XPT. The suffix indicates the features:

  • 4040XPT-3038: Standard track, no hold-open, no bumper.
  • 4040XPT-3038H: Track with hold-open. The track roller locks the door in the open position when pushed past the hold-open engagement point.
  • 4040XPT-3038B: Track with bumper. Adds a cushioned end-stop at the full-open position.
  • 4040XPT-3038HB: Track with hold-open and bumper. Combines both features.

 

Track Arm and Track Rollers for the 4040XPT

LCN 4040XPT-3077T standard track arm for 4040XPT track door closer

LCN 4040XPT-3077T Standard Track Arm. View product page and order.

 

The track arm (4040XPT-3077T) connects the closer spindle to the track roller carriage. It is handed and must be specified for the correct door swing. The 4040XPT-3077T standard track arm is the most commonly replaced component on the XPT system after the track itself.

Track rollers are the wear component that fails most frequently in high-cycle track installations:

  • 4040XPT-3034: Standard track roller. Replaces a worn or seized roller without replacing the full track.
  • 4040XPT-3034H: Hold-open track roller. Required on hold-open track configurations (3038H, 3038HB) to maintain the hold-open function.
  • 4040XPT-3054: Hold-open clip. Secondary hold-open component that works with the 3034H roller.
  • 4040XPT-425: Roller lock screw. Secures the track roller to the arm carriage. Replace when the roller shows lateral movement in the track.

 

LCN 4040XPT Track Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
4040XPT-3038Standard trackNo hold-open, no bumper
4040XPT-3038HTrack with hold-openLocks door open at set position
4040XPT-3038BTrack with bumperCushioned end-stop at full open
4040XPT-3038HBTrack with hold-open and bumperBoth features combined
4040XPT-3077TStandard track armHanded; most common replacement
4040XPT-3034Standard track rollerWear component; replace without full track
4040XPT-3034HHold-open track rollerRequired on 3038H and 3038HB tracks
4040XPT-3054Hold-open clipWorks with 3034H roller
4040XPT-425Roller lock screwSecures roller to arm carriage

 

LCN 4040XP Parts Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
4040XP-3077EDAEDA arm, standardHeavy-duty, non-handed
4040XP-3049EDAEDA arm, hold-openHeavy-duty, with HO friction
4040XP-3077CNSCUSH arm, standardSpring cushion at shoe end
4040XP-3049CNSCUSH arm, hold-openHold-open with cushion
4040XP-3077SCNSSpring CUSH arm, standardHeavier spring for harder impacts
4040XP-3049SCNSSpring CUSH arm, hold-openHeavy spring with HO function
4040XP-3077PARegular arm with 62PA shoeFor parallel arm mounting; handed
4040XP-3049PAHold-open arm with 62PA shoeParallel arm, hold-open; handed
4040XP-3077LLong armDeeper reveals; pairs with 79LR
4040XP-3077XLExtra long armDeepest reveals; pairs with 79ELR
4040XP-62PAParallel arm shoeHanded; for parallel arm only
4040XP-62AAuxiliary shoeFor 3077/62A arm geometry
4040XP-79Standard rod and shoeReveals up to 3-1/4 in.
4040XP-79LRLong rod and shoe8-3/8 in.; reveals to 5-3/4 in.
4040XP-79ELRExtra long rod and shoeDeepest reveals
4040XP-3071Cast iron cylinder assemblyHeavy duty; 4040XP specific
4040XP-3080Spring cush block assemblyWear component for CUSH arms
4040XP-83HH arm screwSecures arm to closer spindle

 

Where LCN 4040XP Parts Are Sourced at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks the full LCN 4040XP and 4040XPT parts catalog. The LCN 4040XP model page lists all available 4040XP arm and hardware parts by category. The 4040XPT model page covers the full track system catalog. Interactive diagrams are available on the 4040XP diagram pages for visual part identification before placing an order.

The 4040XP is specified across the most demanding commercial applications: healthcare facilities where the closer faces thousands of daily cycles, government buildings requiring BAA compliance, and universities where institutional durability is the primary specification driver. For the hardware context of those applications, see the healthcare door hardware guide, the government buildings guide, and the Division 8 specification guide.

For broader LCN door closer selection across the full 4000 Series and 2210 concealed closer, see the LCN 4000 Series and 2210 parts guide and the LCN commercial door closer selection guide. For fire door closer compliance including NFPA 80 inspection requirements, see the fire door closer adjustment guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

Same-day shipping is available on stocked 4040XP components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support when the arm configuration or reveal dimension needs verification before the order ships.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the full LCN 4040XP and 4040XPT replacement parts catalog with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN 8310 Series Parts Guide: Actuators, Sensors and Accessories for Automatic Door Operators

Quick Answer

The LCN 8310 Series is the complete line of actuators, sensors, switches, relays, wireless kits, and accessories for LCN automatic door operators. The series works with the Senior Swing 9500/2800 and IQ series, the Benchmark 9130/9140/9150, and the Auto Equalizer 4630/4640. Three things to know before ordering:

  • Actuator type: Touchless (hand-wave) actuators come in standard IP54, stainless steel IP65 for high-abuse, and battery-powered wireless versions. Pick based on environment and wiring access.
  • Switches: The 8310-806R (rocker) and 8310-806K (key) are three-position On/Off/Hold Open switches. The 806K restricts mode changes to keyed personnel only.
  • Safety packages vs individual parts: Pre-kitted packages (8310-3883 for single door, 8310-3891 for simultaneous pair) include all sensors and relay components for a complete installation. Individual parts are available for single-component replacement.

Security Parts stocks the full LCN 8310 Series parts catalog with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What the LCN 8310 Series Does

Every LCN automatic door operator needs two things to function as an accessible commercial entry: something to tell it when to open, and something to detect obstructions while it moves. The LCN 8310 Series provides both, plus the switches, relays, harnesses, and wireless accessories that complete the full installation.

The 8310 Series is not a standalone door operator. It is the activation and safety layer that connects to LCN's automatic operator lines, primarily the Senior Swing, Benchmark, and Auto Equalizer series. When one of those operators behaves incorrectly, or when a new installation requires activation hardware, the 8310 Series catalog is where the parts come from.

The full 8310 product family divides into six functional categories, each covered in this guide:

  • Touchless actuators (hand-wave, push-plate, and wireless)
  • Safety sensors (door mount, header mount, and sensor packages)
  • Operator control switches (rocker and key)
  • Relay modules and door sequencers
  • Wiring harnesses and accessories
  • Wireless conversion kits and remote transmitters

For the LCN automatic door operator lines that these accessories connect to, see the LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing automatic door operator parts guide, the LCN Senior Swing IQ parts guide, and the commercial door operators guide.

 

LCN 8310 Series Operator Compatibility

The 8310 Series is compatible with the following LCN automatic door operator families:

Operator FamilyModels8310 Compatibility
Senior Swing (9500/2800)9500, 9530, 9540, 9550, 9560, 2810, 2850, 2860Full compatibility: all 8310 accessories apply; Senior Swing-specific packages available
Benchmark (9130/9140/9150)9130 (pull side), 9140 (push side), 9150 (top jamb, double door)Full compatibility: all 8310 switches, sensors, actuators, and relay modules apply
Auto Equalizer (4630/4640)4630, 4640 (with CS option)8310-806R and 8310-806K switches apply when CS option is specified
Pneumatic operators (7900 series control box)2610, 4810, 4820, 48408310-3888 safety module harness and 8310-3889 safety module kit apply

When using 8310 actuators supplied by third parties (card readers, fob readers, PIN pads) to confirm compatibility with the operator's actuation input before ordering. Most 8310 actuators provide normally open dry contacts, which is the standard input requirement for LCN automatic operators. For access control integration specifics, see the access control integration guide.

 

LCN 8310 Touchless Actuators: Selecting the Right Type

Touchless actuators are the most frequently replaced component in the 8310 Series. They detect hand movement using microwave motion sensing and send a dry contact signal to the operator's activation input. No physical contact with a push plate, door handle, or exit bar is required, which is the primary reason they are specified on accessible commercial entries, healthcare corridors, and infection-control environments.

The 8310 touchless actuator line is organized by form factor, environment rating, and wiring type. Choosing the wrong variant is the most common ordering error.

 

Standard Touchless Actuators (8310-813 Series)

The 8310-813 is the standard medium-duty touchless actuator, rated IP54 for protection against dust and water splashing from any direction. It uses microwave motion sensing at 24.125 GHz with an adjustable detection range of 4 to 24 inches. Operating voltage is 12 to 24 VAC/DC. Available in multiple form factors:

  • 8310-813: Single and double gang, black, wave icon and text
  • 8310-813J: Jamb mount, black, wave icon and text
  • 8310-813R: Round, black, wave icon and text
  • 8310-813WH / 813JWH / 813RWH: White versions of the above

The 8310-810 series covers heavy-duty stainless steel versions in single gang (810S), double gang (810D), and round (810R) formats, with accessibility (wheelchair) icon options available on the 810SA, 810DA, and 810RA variants.

 

High-Abuse and Harsh Environment Actuators (8310-815)

The 8310-815 is rated IP65 and NEMA 4, making it appropriate for exterior installations, high-abuse institutional environments, and facilities exposed to cleaning chemicals or pressure washing. The IP65 rating means the actuator is fully dust-tight and protected against directed water jets, a significant step up from the IP54 standard rating. It uses the same microwave detection technology as the 813 series but in a sealed stainless steel enclosure.

 

Battery-Powered and Wireless Actuators

Battery-powered touchless actuators eliminate the need to run low-voltage wiring to the actuation point. The 8310-2210 is a pre-kitted package that includes all necessary RF hardware pre-programmed. Individual battery-powered faceplate options in the 8310-2310, 2320, 2330, and 2340 are AA-battery-powered and compatible with existing LCN transmitters and receivers.

Wall-mount and jamb-mount wireless actuator packages in the 8310-38xx series include all mounting hardware and can be specified in surface (WS suffix) or flush (WF suffix) mounting configurations. The bollard-mounted wireless actuator (8310-3853TWB) is available for exterior installations where wall mounting is not practical.

 

LCN 8310 Operator Control Switches

LCN 8310-806R rocker switch three-position on off hold open for automatic door operators

LCN 8310-806R rocker switch. View product page and order.

The LCN 8310-806R and 8310-806K are three-position control switches used with Senior Swing, Benchmark, and 4630/4640 operators that include the Control Switch (CS) option. Both switches provide the same three positions: Off, Auto, and Hold Open.

  • 8310-806R Rocker Switch: Toggle-action switch. Suitable for facility management applications where trained staff control the door mode throughout the day. The rocker action makes the current position visually identifiable at a glance.
  • 8310-806K Key Switch: Key-operated switch. Restricts mode changes to personnel with the appropriate key. Specified on applications where unauthorized mode switching (such as leaving the door in Hold Open in a secure area) is a security risk.

LCN 8310-806K key switch three-position for Senior Swing Benchmark and Auto Equalizer operators

LCN 8310-806K key switch. View product page and order.

A note on switch installation: The 8310-806K and 8310-806R are optional accessories, and not all operator installations include them. On operators with the CS option, the switch allows management of door mode at the entry point without requiring access to the operator's control box. On installations without the CS option, mode adjustments are made at the control box directly.

 

LCN 8310-845 Relay and Door Sequencer

LCN 8310-845 programmable relay and door sequencer for automatic door operator wiring

LCN 8310-845 relay and door sequencer. View product page and order.

 

The 8310-845 programmable relay module sequences door operation in Senior Swing and Benchmark operators for hardwired applications. It is the component that coordinates the timing relationship between the activation signal, the door motion, and the safety sensors.

The 8310-845 is specifically required when the door mount safety sensor (8310-804-1 or 8310-804-2) is installed in conjunction with the door position switch (8310-805 or 8310-805C) on electrohydraulic, pneumatic, or Benchmark operators. The relay module ensures the approach-side sensor is disabled when the door is in the closed position, preventing false activation from pedestrian traffic passing near a closed door.

If a door is cycling erratically, activating when no pedestrian is present, or failing to hold open correctly after the activation sensor triggers, the 8310-845 is the first relay component to inspect. The 8310-845 is also included in the 8310-3883 Senior Swing Single Door Package and the 8310-3878/3879 safety packages.

 

LCN 8310 Door Position Switches

LCN 8310-805 door position switch surface mount for automatic operator approach sensor disabling

LCN 8310-805 door position switch. View product page and order.

 

Two door position switch variants are available:

  • 8310-805: Surface mount. Mounts on the frame or door surface. Used when a concealed installation is not required or not possible.
  • 8310-805C: Concealed mount. Preferred for interior applications where the switch should not be visible. Included in the 8310-3883 Senior Swing Single Door Package.

Both switches work with the door mount safety sensors (8310-804-1 or 8310-804-2) and the 8310-845 relay module. The switch changes state when the door reaches the fully closed position, telling the relay to disable the approach-side sensor. Without it, an activation sensor facing a high-traffic corridor will trigger the door to open every time someone walks past, even when no one intends to enter.

 

LCN 8310 Safety Sensors and Sensor Packages

The LCN 8310 Series includes two categories of safety sensors: header mount sensors that detect objects approaching or in the door's path, and door mount sensors that detect obstructions on the leading edge or full face of the door during the open and close cycle.

 

Header Mount Safety Sensor (8310-877)

The 8310-877 header mount safety sensor uses diffused infrared technology to detect obstructions during the door's open and close positions. It has nine selectable detection patterns, programmed using the 8310-859 handheld remote control. The 8310-877S spacer is a required accessory when the 8310-877 is used with the 8310-804-1 or 8310-804-2 door mount sensors on Senior Swing installations. The 8310-846 header mount harness is included with the 8310-877.

 

Door Mount Safety Sensors

Two door mount sensor configurations are available:

  • 8310-804-1: Contains one active sensor module. Detects obstructions on the leading edge of the door. Lighter-duty installations where only the door edge needs monitoring.
  • 8310-804-2: Contains two active sensor modules. Detects obstructions across the full face of the door. Specified for high-traffic applications and code-compliant installations where ANSI A156.10 pedestrian door safety requirements apply.

 

Pre-Kitted Safety Sensor Packages

For complete new installations, pre-kitted sensor packages eliminate the risk of ordering individual components that do not work together. All packages include the necessary sensors, harnesses, and spacers:

PackageApplicationKey Contents
8310-3881Single door, full sensor coverage8310-854 (x2), 8310-877, 8310-877S, 8310-804-2
8310-3882Double door, full sensor coverage (not double egress)8310-854 (x2), 8310-877, 8310-877S, 8310-847 (x2), 8310-804-2 (x2)
8310-3883Senior Swing single door, low-energy convenience8310-804-1, 8310-805C, 8310-845
8310-3891Senior Swing simultaneous pair (Healthcare I)8310-877, 8310-877S, 8310-804-2 (x4), 8310-847 (x2)
8310-3892Senior Swing independent pairFull sensor package for independent pair door configuration
8310-3888 / 3889Pneumatic control box (7901, 7902, 7981, 7982)Safety module harness (3888) and safety module kit (3889) for pneumatic operators

 

LCN 8310 Wireless Conversion Kits and Remote Transmitters

One of the most practical 8310 Series applications is upgrading an existing hardwired operator installation to wireless activation without replacing the operator itself. Two wireless conversion kits handle this use case:

  • 8310-3803: Jamb mount wireless conversion kit, 3V. Converts a standard jamb-mount actuator to wireless. Includes the 8310-865 receiver and 8310-844J jamb-mounted transmitters. Requires the 8310-819S or 8310-819F jamb box.
  • 8310-3809: Wall mount wireless conversion kit, 9V. Converts a standard wall-mount actuator to wireless. Includes the 8310-865 receiver and 8310-844 wall-mount transmitters. Requires a surface or flush box and weather ring.

For longer-range wireless applications, the 8310-859 handheld remote control can program the 8310-854 activation sensor and 8310-877 safety sensor from a distance. The 8310-880 900 MHz receiver provides extended transmission range for larger facilities. The 433 MHz portfolio (8310-865 receiver and compatible transmitters) is an alternative for barrier-penetration applications where 900 MHz signal path is impractical.

 

LCN 8310 Wiring Accessories: Harnesses, Transformers, and Line Filters

Three wiring accessories complete the 8310 Series parts catalog:

  • 8310-846 Header Mount Harness: Supplied with the 8310-877 header mount safety sensor. Provides the wiring connection between the header-mounted sensor and the operator control board.
  • 8310-847 Door Mount Harness: Used with the 8310-804-1 or 8310-804-2 door mount safety sensor on Senior Swing installations. Must be ordered separately from the sensor.
  • 8310-824 Transformer: 24V hardwired transformer. Used to remotely power any 24V sensor or wireless receiver in the 8310 Series when local power at the actuation point is not available from the operator power supply.
  • 8310-807 Line Filter: 120V AC filter used with Senior Swing operators in facilities with electrical interference on the AC circuit. Erratic door behavior (cycling without a clear trigger, false activations, or intermittent hold-open failures) in an otherwise correctly installed system often points to AC line noise. The line filter is the first diagnostic step before replacing sensors or control components.

 

Where LCN 8310 Series Parts Are Specified

The 8310 Series is installed wherever LCN automatic door operators are used. The most common environments include:

  • Healthcare facilities: Infection-control corridors, pharmacy entries, and patient room doorways where touchless, hands-free activation is a clinical requirement. Healthcare I simultaneous pair packages (8310-3891) are specifically designated for this application. See the healthcare door hardware guide.
  • Retail storefronts: High-traffic customer entries where touchless convenience and ADA compliance both apply. See the retail storefront door hardware guide.
  • University and campus buildings: Library entries, administration buildings, and dining halls with ANSI A156.10 pedestrian door compliance requirements. See the university door hardware guide.
  • Government buildings: BAA-compliant installations where Buy American Act sourcing requirements apply alongside accessibility mandates. See the government buildings door hardware guide.

For compliance considerations on fire-rated door assemblies where 8310-equipped operators are specified, see the commercial door fire rating guide. For ANSI/BHMA grade references relevant to automatic door operator specification, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Sourcing LCN 8310 Series Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks the full LCN 8310 Series parts catalog, organized by product type. For operator-specific parts by model, browse the operator series pages:

For the complete LCN automatic door operator and parts context, see the door operators parts guide.

Same-day shipping is available on stocked 8310 components. For pre-order compatibility support, wireless upgrade consultation, or package configuration assistance, call 845-935-0301. Pre-order compatibility checks take two minutes and prevent the wrong-configuration return cycle on time-sensitive projects.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the full LCN 8310 Series parts catalog including actuators, sensors, switches, relays, wireless kits, and safety packages, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

LCN Senior Swing IQ Parts Guide: 2810IQ, 2850IQ and 2860IQ Replacement Components

Quick Answer

The LCN Senior Swing IQ is the current-generation low-energy electromechanical swing door operator from LCN. It comes in three overhead concealed models and four surface-applied variants. Before ordering any replacement part, three things must be confirmed:

  • Model series: 2810IQ (single door concealed), 2850IQ (simultaneous pair concealed), 2860IQ (independent pair concealed), or 9530IQ/9540IQ/9550IQ/9560IQ (surface-applied).
  • Controller and motor gearbox rule: The IQ controller (3462) and IQ motor gearbox (3454) must always be replaced together. They are not individually backward-compatible with each other or with legacy 9500/2800 hardware.
  • Legacy upgrade: If upgrading from a 9500 or 2800 Senior Swing to the IQ generation, the SSIQUPGRADE kit is the correct order, not individual parts.

Security Parts stocks LCN Senior Swing IQ parts across all models with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support. Browse the complete catalog on the Senior Swing series page.

 

What the LCN Senior Swing IQ Is and Why the IQ Generation Matters for Parts

The LCN Senior Swing IQ is the current generation of LCN's heavy-duty low-energy electromechanical swing door operator. It is rated for doors up to 600 pounds and carries certifications including Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA A156.19, UL325, UL228, UL10C, ADA compliance, and CSFM listing. It meets the Buy American Act requirement, which is a common specification requirement on government and federally funded projects.

The distinction between the IQ generation and the previous 9500/2800 Senior Swing matters most when ordering parts. The two generations are not parts-compatible at the component level. The IQ controller and motor gearbox use an updated communication architecture called AdaptIQ that the previous controller and gearbox do not support. Parts look similar, but part numbers are different and the assemblies are not interchangeable.

For a full overview of the legacy 9500/2800 Senior Swing and the LCN Benchmark 9130/9140/9150 operators, including their parts and how they differ from the IQ generation, see the LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing automatic door operator parts guide.

 

What AdaptIQ Technology Does and Why It Matters

AdaptIQ is the self-calibrating control system built into the Senior Swing IQ controller. After installation or after a new controller is fitted, the operator runs a calibration cycle through the LCD menu. During calibration, the door opens slowly to its full open position and then closes. The controller uses this cycle to estimate the door weight, opening resistance, and physical constraints, then sets default operating parameters automatically.

This is why the IQ controller requires no seasonal adjustments for wind, carpet pressure, or HVAC stack pressure. The Smart Power Boost feature within AdaptIQ monitors the closing cycle and adds motor force when environmental resistance increases, keeping the door latching reliably across different seasonal conditions without manual adjustment. Every time a new controller is installed, this calibration must be run before the door will operate on its normal cycle.

 

Senior Swing IQ Model Families: Concealed vs Surface Applied

The Senior Swing IQ is available in two mounting families:

  • 2800 Series (concealed overhead): 2810IQ for single doors, 2850IQ for simultaneous pairs, 2860IQ for independent pairs. The operator mounts inside a concealed header above the door opening.
  • 9500 Series (surface applied): 9530IQ and 9540IQ for single doors (pull-side and push-side respectively), 9550IQ for simultaneous pairs, 9560IQ for independent pairs. The operator body is visible on the door frame face.

The controller (3462) and motor gearbox (3454) part numbers are the same across concealed and surface-applied models. Headers, arms, and mounting hardware differ between the two families.

For the broader context of how automatic door operators fit into a commercial access control specification, see the access control integration guide and the commercial door operators guide.

 

LCN Senior Swing IQ Parts: The Two Components That Always Replace Together

The most important ordering rule on the Senior Swing IQ is this: when the controller fails, both the controller and the motor gearbox must be replaced at the same time. When the motor gearbox fails, same rule applies. The two components communicate through a proprietary protocol and are not individually backward-compatible, either with each other or with the previous generation of hardware.

 

Controller: 2810IQ-3462

LCN 2810IQ-3462 controller replacement part for Senior Swing IQ single door operator

LCN 2810IQ-3462 controller. View product page and order.

 

The controller is the brain of the Senior Swing IQ system. It houses the LCD display, the 23 programmable settings, the AdaptIQ calibration system, the fire/breakaway relay interface, and the accessory power output for connected sensors and actuators. The controller outputs 48VDC to the motor gearbox and accepts 120VAC or 240VAC building power input.

The controller part number for all 2810IQ, 2850IQ, and 2860IQ overhead concealed models is 2810IQ-3462. The 2850IQ uses the same controller to drive both motor gearboxes in a simultaneous pair through a single control board.

When a controller is replaced, the fire/breakaway jumper (part number 47955791) must remain in the terminal block connector (J18) on the chassis board unless a physical breakaway switch is wired in its place. If the jumper is removed and no switch is wired in, the controller will treat the circuit as an open breakaway condition and will not operate the door.

 

Motor Gearbox: 2810IQ-3454

LCN 2810IQ-3454 motor gearbox replacement for Senior Swing IQ overhead concealed operator

LCN 2810IQ-3454 motor gearbox. View product page and order.

 

The motor gearbox drives the spindle that the pivot arm connects to. It physically opens and holds the door. A motor gearbox failure typically presents as the door failing to open, opening only partway, or the controller reporting a motor encoder error on the LCD display.

The motor gearbox part number for 2810IQ, 2850IQ, and 2860IQ installations is 2810IQ-3454. For the 2850IQ simultaneous pair, two motor gearboxes are required: one per door. The companion cable (982) connects the second motor gearbox back to the single controller.

When the motor gearbox is replaced, the arm must be removed and re-installed after the new gearbox is mounted. The arm set screw must be torqued correctly to the spindle, and a full AdaptIQ calibration cycle must be run after re-installation to re-establish correct operating parameters.

 

LCN Senior Swing IQ Arms: Center Pivot vs Offset/Butt Arm

LCN 2810IQ-3077CP center pivot arm for Senior Swing IQ center-pivoted door installations

LCN 2810IQ-3077CP center pivot arm. View product page and order.

 

The Senior Swing IQ uses two distinct arm types depending on how the door is hung. Ordering the wrong arm is one of the most common parts return reasons on this product.

  • Center pivot arm (3077CP): Used when the door has a center pivot at the floor and the header. The arm connects directly from the motor gearbox spindle to a slide channel in the door. This is the standard concealed-header arm for center-pivoted commercial entries. Order: 2810IQ-3077CP.
  • Offset/butt arm (3077OP): Used for doors hung on standard butt hinges or offset pivots, where no floor pivot exists. This arm accommodates the geometry of a butt-hung door swinging on its hinge point rather than a center pivot. Order: 2810IQ-3077OP.

To confirm which arm a device uses, look at the bottom of the door at the threshold. A center pivot installation has a visible pivot point at the floor; a butt hinge installation has standard hinges on the door frame edge. Do not attempt to fit a center pivot arm on a butt-hung door. The geometry is incompatible and the arm will not seat correctly on the spindle or door slide.

 

LCN Senior Swing IQ Stops: Breakaway and Positive

Two types of door stops are available for the Senior Swing IQ. Each serves a different function and applies to different installation configurations.

 

Breakaway Stop

The breakaway stop is a safety device that allows a center-pivoted inswing door to break outward in an emergency, even when the operator is powered on and holding the door in the closed position. In breakaway mode, the stop releases the pivot mechanism and the door can swing outward freely. The operator is automatically disabled in breakaway mode.

The breakaway stop part number depends on the model:

The breakaway stop applies to center pivot installations only. It is not used on butt hinge or offset pivot installations.

 

Positive Fixed Stop

The positive fixed stop prevents an outswing door from swinging back inward past the closed position. It is the appropriate stop for outswing door configurations on center pivot installations where inward movement must be blocked. Order: 2810IQ-384F for the 2810IQ, with equivalent variants for the 2850IQ and 2860IQ.

 

2850IQ and 2860IQ: Double Door Configuration Parts

LCN 2850IQ-3462 controller for simultaneous double door Senior Swing IQ installations

LCN 2850IQ-3462 controller for simultaneous pair installations. View product page and order.

 

The 2850IQ and 2860IQ handle double door openings, but they operate differently.

  • 2850IQ (simultaneous pair): One controller drives two motor gearboxes. Both doors open and close together in a synchronized cycle. The second motor gearbox connects back to the controller via the companion cable (2850IQ-982). For the 2850IQ, two motor gearboxes plus one controller plus one companion cable is the complete drive assembly.
  • 2860IQ (independent pair): Each door operates on its own cycle. Both doors share a header but can open and close independently. The wiring and control architecture differs from the 2850IQ, even though the component part numbers are identical.

A common ordering mistake on the 2850IQ is ordering only one motor gearbox for a simultaneous pair replacement. Both motor gearboxes must be replaced together, along with the controller, when a drive assembly failure occurs on the 2850IQ. The companion cable should also be inspected and replaced if there is any sign of pinching, damage, or connector wear.

 

LCN Senior Swing IQ Header and Structural Parts

The header is the concealed channel installed above the door opening that houses the operator components. On the Senior Swing IQ, the header comes in single-door and double-door configurations and in variants with or without the stop preparation cutout.

Key header and structural parts include:

  • Header extrusion (572): The aluminum extrusion only, without end caps or assembly hardware. Ordered when the extrusion is damaged but mounting hardware is intact. Order: 2810IQ-572.
  • Header assembly (3572HL): The complete single-door header assembly including all components. Order: 2810IQ-3572HL.
  • Bottom pivot assembly (3107): The floor-level pivot assembly for center pivot installations. The pivot assembly carries the weight of the door at the threshold and is subject to wear on high-traffic openings. Order: 2810IQ-3107.
  • Cable/parts bag (518): Includes the wiring harnesses, mounting hardware, and installation components supplied with the operator. Available as a replacement when original installation hardware is lost or damaged. Order: 2810IQ-518.

 

How to Upgrade from Legacy 9500 or 2800 Senior Swing to the IQ Generation

If the existing installation uses the previous-generation 9500 (surface) or 2800 (concealed) Senior Swing, the IQ controller and motor gearbox can be installed in the existing header without replacing the header itself. Both components must be replaced together.

LCN provides the SSIQUPGRADE kit specifically for this upgrade path:

  • SSIQUPGRADE-SD: Upgrade kit for single door installations (2810IQ/9530IQ/9540IQ).
  • SSIQUPGRADE-DD: Upgrade kit for simultaneous pair installations (2850IQ/9550IQ).

The upgrade kit includes the new IQ motor gearbox, the new IQ controller, a plastic filler plate for the control box location, and all required wiring and hardware. Legacy key/rocker switches can be connected using the legacy adapter harness (part number 48179392) included with the upgrade kit. After installation, the AdaptIQ calibration cycle must be run from the controller LCD menu before the door will operate on its standard automatic cycle.

Call 845-935-0301 before placing the upgrade order to confirm the correct kit for the specific installation and to verify header compatibility.

 

LCN Senior Swing IQ Parts Reference Table

Component2810IQ Part2850IQ Part2860IQ Part
Controller2810IQ-34622850IQ-34622860IQ-3462
Motor Gearbox2810IQ-34542850IQ-34542860IQ-3454
Bottom Pivot Assembly2810IQ-31072850IQ-31072860IQ-3107
Center Pivot Arm2810IQ-3077CP2850IQ-3077CP2860IQ-3077CP
Offset/Butt Arm2810IQ-3077OP2850IQ-3077OP2860IQ-3077OP
Breakaway Stop2810IQ-384B2850IQ-384BK2860IQ-384BK
Positive Fixed Stop2810IQ-384F2850IQ-384F2860IQ-384F
Cable/Parts Bag2810IQ-5182850IQ-5182860IQ-518
Companion CableN/A (single door)2850IQ-9822860IQ-982
Header Assembly2810IQ-3572HL2850IQ header2860IQ header
Header Extrusion2810IQ-5722850IQ-5722860IQ-572

 

Where LCN Senior Swing IQ Operators Are Specified

The Senior Swing IQ serves any opening on an accessible route where a low-energy automatic operator is required. The most common installation environments include:

  • Healthcare: Patient room corridors, pharmacy entries, and outpatient clinic entrances where ADA force requirements and hands-free passage are mandatory. See the healthcare door hardware guide.
  • Retail storefronts: High-traffic customer entries on aluminum storefront frames where the concealed overhead profile keeps the door entrance uncluttered. See the retail storefront door hardware guide.
  • Universities and colleges: Library entries, administration building corridors, and student union entrances where accessibility is required alongside high pedestrian volume. See the university door hardware guide.
  • Government and institutional buildings: Where the Buy American Act specification is required in addition to ADA compliance.

The ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard governs the force, cycle, and obstruction reversal requirements for all low-energy operators including the Senior Swing IQ. For a full reference on ANSI/BHMA hardware standards relevant to commercial door specifications, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide. For fire door compliance considerations when specifying automatic operators on fire-rated assemblies, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Sourcing LCN Senior Swing IQ Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts stocks LCN Senior Swing IQ parts across the full 2810IQ, 2850IQ, and 2860IQ families, organized by model. Browse the complete parts list for each series:

For interactive parts diagrams, use the diagram pages: 2810 diagram 1 and 2850 diagram 1 provide exploded views of the full assembly with component callouts to confirm the failing part before ordering.

Same-day shipping is available on stocked components. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 before the order is placed. For the full LCN automatic door operator catalog including parts for the Benchmark 9130/9140/9150 and the legacy 9500/2800 Senior Swing, see the door operators parts guide.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks LCN Senior Swing IQ parts across the full 2810IQ, 2850IQ, and 2860IQ families, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit: Complete Ordering Guide

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin QEL conversion kit upgrades an existing mechanical or EL-equipped exit device to quiet electric latch retraction. Before you order, you need to answer four questions:

  • Which series is your device? 22 Series uses a completely separate kit family. All other series (33A/35A, 75/78, 94/95, 98/99) share the same modular and baseplate kit catalog.
  • Mechanical or EL upgrade? Mechanical devices use the modular kit. EL solenoid devices require the baseplate kit.
  • Do you need AX, CON, or HD options? AX is for ADA force compliance, CON is the Allegion Connect wiring adapter, and HD adds hex dogging (panic devices only).
  • Is the device fire-rated? If yes, HD-QEL and HD-QELX kits are prohibited. Use standard QEL or QELX only.

Security Parts stocks all Von Duprin QEL conversion kit variants with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 before ordering if the application is a 94/95 INPACT Series device. Those require a configured part number.

 

What the Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit Does

The QEL (Quiet Electric Latch) is Von Duprin's motor-driven electric latch retraction option for commercial exit devices. When an electric signal is sent from an access control system, keypad, or key switch, the QEL motor retracts the latch bolt, allowing the door to be pulled open from the outside without pressing the push bar.

The word "quiet" distinguishes it from the older EL (Electric Latch) option, which uses a solenoid that produces an audible click during latch retraction. The QEL motor is significantly quieter, making it the preferred specification for hospitals, libraries, museums, theaters, and any environment where operational noise is disruptive.

The conversion kit is the field-installable version. It upgrades an existing mechanical device or replaces a failed QEL motor without requiring a full exit device replacement. Two kit types exist: the modular kit and the baseplate kit. Understanding which one applies to your device is the first and most important step.

For background on how QEL compares to MEL and when to specify each, see the Von Duprin panic bar QEL vs MEL selection guide. For a complete overview of which series use the QEL, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

Modular vs Baseplate: Which Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit Do You Need?

This is the decision most technicians get wrong on the first order. The two kit types are not interchangeable and serve different upgrade scenarios.

Von Duprin 114317 QEL modular conversion kit for mechanical exit device upgrade

Von Duprin 114317 QEL modular conversion kit. View product page and order.

 

The Modular Kit: For Mechanical Device Upgrades and Motor Replacement

The modular kit is the recommended solution for most applications. It replaces only the motor assembly inside the existing baseplate. The baseplate itself stays on the door. Because the motor assembly fits both 3-foot and 4-foot devices, you do not need to specify device size when ordering. This flexibility is why the modular kit has become the standard upgrade path for mechanical devices.

Use the modular kit when:

  • You are upgrading a mechanical exit device to QEL for the first time
  • You are replacing a failed QEL motor on an existing QEL device
  • The existing device is not an EL solenoid device

The primary modular kit part number for 33A/35A and 98/99 Series devices is 114317. HD-QEL modular (with hex dogging, panic devices only) is 958002.

 

The Baseplate Kit: For EL Solenoid Device Conversions

Von Duprin 958003 QEL baseplate conversion kit for EL solenoid device upgrade to QEL

Von Duprin 958003 QEL baseplate conversion kit (3-foot). View product page and order.

 

The baseplate kit replaces the full baseplate assembly, replacing the entire back plate of the exit device, not just the motor. This is required when the existing device uses an EL solenoid, because the solenoid is mounted to the baseplate and cannot simply be removed and replaced with a motor.

Use the baseplate kit when:

  • Your existing device is an EL (Electric Latch) solenoid device
  • You need to convert from solenoid-driven to motor-driven latch retraction

The baseplate kit requires device size specification at order time. The 3-foot kit is 958003 and the 4-foot kit is 040065. Baseplate kits are available for the 33A/35A and 98/99 Series only. They are not available for the 75/78 Series or the 22 Series.

 

Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit Ordering Table

Use this table to identify your kit by series, option combination, and device type. All part numbers in the table are verified live on the Security Parts catalog.

SeriesAXCONHDModular KitBaseplate 3ft / 4ft
33A/35A, 98/99NNN114317958003 / 040065
33A/35A, 98/99NNY (panic only)958002958004 / 040067
33A/35A, 98/99NYN040061040063 / 040066
33A/35A, 98/99NYY (panic only)040062040064 / 040068
33A/35A, 98/99YNN041162041166 / 041167
33A/35A, 98/99YNY (panic only)041164041170 / 041171
33A/35A, 98/99YYN041163041168 / 041169
22 SeriesNNN47857518N/A (modular only)
22 SeriesNNY (panic only)47857519N/A (modular only)
22 SeriesYYN47857521N/A (modular only)
75/78 SeriesUse modular kit only. See the 75/78 Series guide.Same as 33A/35A modularN/A (no baseplate kit)
94/95 INPACTConfigured CONVERT.XXXX part number required. Call 845-935-0301.

 

Understanding the Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit Options

Every QEL conversion kit is built around a base motor assembly. The three option designations modify that base. Understanding each option is what allows you to select the correct part number from the table above without calling in every time.

 

AX Option: ADA-Compliant Force Reduction (QELX)

The AX option, designated QELX, meets the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design requirement that operable parts on accessible routes shall not require more than 5 pounds of force to activate. The QELX motor provides reduced activation force to meet this standard.

Specify QELX when the opening is on an accessible route required to comply with ADA force requirements. For a broader discussion of how ANSI/BHMA standards apply to commercial door hardware specification, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

CON Option: Allegion Connect Wiring Adapter

The CON designation means the kit includes the Allegion Connect adapter harness, which provides a pre-wired connector for quick connection to compatible power sources without field wire termination. If your installation uses a standard PS900 Series power supply with field-terminated wiring, you do not need the CON version.

The CON adapter harness is also available as a standalone part if you need to add the Allegion Connect interface to an existing QEL installation: 106198 QEL CON Adapter Harness. The QEL motor cable for non-CON installations is 114320 QEL Motor Cable, and the combined cable with CON harness is 47269206 QEL/MEL Motor Cable with 6-inch harness.

 

HD Option: Hex Dogging (Panic Devices Only)

The HD (Hex Dogging) option allows the electric latch retraction device to be manually dogged using a 5/32-inch hex key, holding the latch bolt retracted so the door swings freely during business hours without requiring an electric signal. This is useful in high-traffic commercial applications.

HD-QEL and HD-QELX kits are available for panic exit hardware only. They cannot be used on fire-rated exit hardware. This is a code compliance requirement, not a mechanical limitation. If a fire-rated device requires QEL with an accessible option, order QELX without the HD designation.

 

22 Series QEL Conversion Kit: What Makes It Different

Von Duprin 47857518 22 Series QEL conversion kit for 22 Series exit device upgrade

Von Duprin 47857518 22 Series QEL conversion kit. View product page and order.

The 22 Series exit device uses a different mechanism case design from the 33A/35A and 98/99 Series, which means it requires its own dedicated QEL kit family. The 33A/35A and 98/99 modular kits will not fit a 22 Series device.

Three important restrictions apply to the 22 Series QEL kits:

  1. Modular kits only. No baseplate conversion kit exists for the 22 Series. If a 22 Series device needs to go from EL to QEL, a full device replacement is required.
  2. Manufacture date matters. 22 Series modular QEL kits are compatible only with devices manufactured after January 1, 2022. Devices with a seam visible on the mechanism case are pre-2022 units and require a full device replacement to achieve QEL capability.
  3. No 3-foot vs 4-foot designation needed. The 22 Series QEL kit is size-universal.

For 22 Series parts and configuration context, see the Von Duprin 22, 33A/35A, and 55 Series exit device parts guide.

 

QEL-L and QEL-B: Specialty Option Kits

QEL-L: Latch Retraction Only with Active Pushpad

Von Duprin 47897873 QEL-L modular latch retraction with CON adapter for active pushpad installations

Von Duprin 47897873 QEL-L modular latch retraction with CON. View product page and order.

The standard QEL retraction allows the door to be pushed open from the outside without depressing the push bar during an electric signal. The QEL-L changes that behavior: it retracts the latch bolt on signal, but the push bar must still be depressed to open the door.

This is used when the opening requires controlled latch retraction for access control purposes, but the push bar must remain active, for example, in a supervised egress application or a delayed-egress installation where residents must interact with the push bar even when the latch is retracted.

The QEL-L kit includes an RX switch for door status monitoring. Available kits:

 

QEL-B: Audible Notification Buzzer

Von Duprin 47856044 QEL-B modular buzzer kit for audible latch retraction notification

Von Duprin 47856044 QEL-B modular buzzer kit. View product page and order.

 

The QEL-B kit adds an audible buzzer that sounds during initial latch bolt retraction. This provides occupants with a clear signal that the door has been released and can be opened. It is specified when silent retraction would cause confusion or when the application requires an audible notification as part of the access protocol.

Part number: 47856044 QEL-B Modular Buzzer Kit.

 

Fire Door Restriction: The Rule That Cannot Be Overlooked

The single most critical restriction in the Von Duprin QEL conversion kit catalog is the fire door prohibition on HD and HD-X kits. This is not a preference or a recommendation. It is a code requirement.

Fire-rated exit hardware must latch on every closing cycle, without exception, to maintain the fire barrier. Hex dogging holds the latch bolt retracted. These two requirements are incompatible.

On fire-rated exit devices:

  • Order standard QEL or QELX kits only
  • Never order HD-QEL or HD-QELX kits
  • If the device has a fire label, the HD designation voids it
  • The QEL wiring on fire-rated devices must be connected to the fire alarm system so the latch retracts on alarm signal

For a complete reference on fire door hardware requirements and how they affect exit device specification, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Power Supply Requirements for the Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit

The QEL requires 24VDC from a compatible power supply. Using 12VDC will cause the LED on the QEL board to flash red and the latch bolt will not retract. The following power supplies and option boards are compatible:

Power SupplyRequired Option BoardOutput Setting
PS902, PS904, PS906, PS914900-2RS, 900-4R, or 900-4RL24VDC
PS873871-2, 871-2Q, or 873-4TD/AO24VDC

The QEL is also compatible with an existing 900-2Q option board if one is already installed in the power supply. Up to two sequenced QEL devices can share one 900-2RS board; the latch retraction of two sequenced devices requires more than one second to complete.

For guidance on how the QEL integrates with broader access control system architecture, see the access control integration guide.

 

How to Select and Order the Right Von Duprin QEL Conversion Kit

Work through these five questions in order. The answers map directly to the ordering table above.

  1. What series is the device? Confirm 22 Series, 33A/35A, 75/78, 94/95 INPACT, or 98/99. The 22 Series uses its own kit family. 94/95 INPACT requires a configured part number from Security Parts. 75/78 Series uses the same modular kits as 33A/35A and 98/99 but has no baseplate option.
  2. Mechanical device or EL solenoid? Mechanical devices use the modular kit. EL solenoid devices require the baseplate kit (33A/35A and 98/99 only).
  3. Device size (if baseplate or QEL-L)? Specify 3-foot (36-inch) or 4-foot (48-inch) for baseplate kits and QEL-L kits. Modular kits for mechanical upgrades are size-universal.
  4. Options needed? Select AX (QELX) for ADA force compliance, CON for Allegion Connect wiring, and HD for hex dogging on panic devices only. These can be combined (example: HD-QELX with CON is 041165).
  5. Fire-rated device? If the device has a fire label, remove HD from the selection immediately and confirm you are ordering a standard QEL or QELX kit.

Security Parts stocks Von Duprin QEL conversion kit variants across all series with same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 before the order is placed. Browse the full exit devices catalog and the Von Duprin parts hub for complete series coverage with model-specific diagrams. For exit device parts guides organized by series, see the Von Duprin parts guide and the Von Duprin exit device series comparison

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks Von Duprin QEL conversion kits across all active series and options, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Schlage NDE Wireless Lock Parts: Complete Replacement Guide

Quick Answer

The Schlage NDE is a Grade 1 wireless cylindrical lock that integrates an RFID/Bluetooth credential reader, motorized latch chassis, door position sensor, and access control interface into a standard cylindrical lock form factor. When servicing one, here are the parts ordered most often:

  • Inside escutcheon assembly with PCBA: 47278749 (the primary NDEB component, also used for NDE80 upgrades)
  • Motorized chassis: N223-007
  • Battery holder kit: N223-044
  • Outside spring cage: N523-218
  • Inside spring cage (post-Feb 2017 devices): N523-221
  • Main wire harness: N223-019
  • Mounting kit: N223-049
  • Battery cover: N623-007

 

Critical note before ordering: After replacing the inside escutcheon assembly or the motorized chassis on any NDEB device, the lock must be re-commissioned through ENGAGE. Skipping this step produces a lock that will not connect to the access control system. Also confirm whether your device is a pre-February 2017 unit before ordering spring cages, as spring cage part numbers differ by manufacture date.

 

What the Schlage NDE Wireless Lock Is and Why It Requires Different Parts

The Schlage NDE is not a mechanical lock with an electronic add-on. It is a purpose-built wireless electronic access control device in a cylindrical lock form factor. Identifying this distinction matters because NDE parts are not compatible with the standard Schlage ND Series mechanical cylindrical lock, even though both products mount on the same door preparation and use similar lever hardware.

The NDE combines several systems into a single unit: a Grade 1 cylindrical lock chassis, an RF credential reader, a motorized latch retraction assembly, a door position sensor, a Bluetooth module for ENGAGE communication, and a battery power system. Each of those systems has its own serviceable components. When one fails, you need to identify the right assembly before ordering, because the NDE's internal architecture is substantially different from any mechanical cylindrical lock.

The NDE product line spans three generations. The NDE80 was the original model. It has been discontinued and NDE80-specific parts are no longer available from the manufacturer. The NDEB is the current production standard and is the model you are most likely to encounter on doors installed after 2014. The NDEBSi adds HID secure sector credential compatibility with a visual indicator button. If you have an NDE80 in the field, Security Parts carries the NDEB conversion kit to bring it to current specification.

For context on how the NDE fits into the broader Schlage product lineup and how it differs from the mechanical ND Series, see the Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts guide. For a broader look at how wireless locks integrate with commercial door access control systems, see the access control integration guide.

 

Schlage NDE Wireless Lock Parts: Every Assembly and Component

The NDE parts catalog divides into six functional assemblies. Understanding which assembly you are servicing before ordering prevents wrong-part returns and callback visits. Security Parts stocks NDE components across all six of these categories.

 

Inside Escutcheon Assembly: The Core Electronic Module

Schlage 47278749 NDEB inside escutcheon assembly with main PCBA for NDE wireless lock replacement

Schlage 47278749 NDEB inside escutcheon assembly with main PCBA. View product page and order.

 

The 47278749 NDEB inside escutcheon assembly is the single most important component in the NDE parts catalog. It contains the inside escutcheon housing, the RF window, the door position sensor, the main PCB module with Bluetooth radio, and the inside label. When the lock fails to communicate with ENGAGE, fails to read credentials, or produces electrical fault codes, this assembly is the first component to evaluate.

The 47278749 also serves as the NDE80-to-NDEB upgrade kit. If you have an NDE80 in the field, ordering this assembly and following the NDEB retrofit installation instructions brings the unit to the current NDEB specification. After installation, the device must be deleted from ENGAGE, factory default reset, and re-commissioned. This step is required without exception.

The inside escutcheon assembly is also the component that determines whether the lock can support the NDEBSi credential format. If an NDEBSi-capable lock is needed, a new complete lock unit must be ordered. Upgrading an existing NDEB to NDEBSi through parts replacement is not possible.

 

Motorized Chassis: The Mechanical-Electronic Interface

Schlage NDE N223-007 motorized chassis assembly replacement for wireless cylindrical lock

Schlage NDE N223-007 motorized chassis assembly. View product page and order.

 

The N223-007 motorized chassis assembly is what translates the electronic credential signal into physical latch retraction. When a valid credential is presented, the motorized chassis retracts the latch bolt. When an invalid credential is presented, or when no signal is received, the chassis holds the latch in the extended position.

The most common symptom of a failing motorized chassis is a latch that retracts slowly or inconsistently, or a device that produces grinding sounds during a valid credential event. Physical impacts and door abuse can damage the chassis alignment. High-cycle environments such as hospital corridors or university residence halls also produce accelerated wear on this component.

Replacing the motorized chassis requires ENGAGE re-commissioning. The replacement chassis does not inherit the previous device's credential programming. Delete the device from ENGAGE, factory reset the chassis, and re-commission before returning the door to service.

 

Battery System Components

Schlage NDE N223-044 battery holder kit for wireless cylindrical lock replacement

Schlage NDE N223-044 battery holder kit. View product page and order.

 

The NDE is battery-powered. The battery system involves three serviceable components: the battery holder kit, the battery cover, and the inside baseplate that anchors both.

  • N223-044 Battery Holder Kit: The primary battery housing assembly. Replaced during routine maintenance cycles when battery contacts corrode or when the physical holder cracks from door cycling stress. The kit contains the holder and retaining hardware.
  • N623-007 Inside Battery Cover: The cover plate that protects the battery compartment. Replaced when damaged from repeated access or when the battery cover screw strips. Order the battery cover screw separately using the N223-049 mounting kit.
  • N623-000 Inside Baseplate: The mounting plate behind the inside escutcheon that anchors the battery and spring cage components to the door. Replaced when the baseplate warps from door stress or when mounting threads strip.

 

Spring Cages: Confirm Manufacture Date Before Ordering

Schlage NDE N523-218 outside spring cage and lever catch assembly replacement

Schlage NDE N523-218 outside spring cage and lever catch assembly. View product page and order.

 

Spring cage ordering on the NDE requires one piece of information before you place the order: the manufacture date of the device. Devices manufactured after February 1, 2017 use a different inside spring cage than those manufactured before that date. Using the wrong spring cage produces a lever that will not seat correctly or will not hold under use.

  • N523-218 Outside Spring Cage and Lever Catch Assembly: Applies to all NDE devices regardless of manufacture date. The outside spring cage is universal. Replace when the outside lever droops, fails to return to position after each use, or when the catch mechanism no longer holds the lever in place.
  • N523-221 Inside Spring Cage and Lever Catch Assembly: Applies to devices manufactured after February 1, 2017. Confirm the manufacture date on the label inside the device before ordering. If your device was manufactured before that date, contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 to confirm the correct alternative spring cage for your specific unit.

For full-size interchangeable core configurations that use specific non-Schlage IC cores, the outside spring cage changes to N523-224. Confirm with the NDE service manual whether N523-224 applies to your core specification. All other cylinder configurations use N523-218 for the outside position.

 

Wire Harness, Reader PCBA, and Electronic Accessories

The electronic components between the credential reader and the chassis are the second most common source of NDE service calls after the inside escutcheon assembly. These include:

  • N223-019 Main Wire Harness: Connects the inside escutcheon PCBA to the motorized chassis. When physical or environmental damage breaks a wire, credential reads produce no mechanical response. Inspect the harness routing before replacing the escutcheon or chassis, since a harness fault can mimic either failure.
  • N223-046 Reader PCBA: The credential reading board inside the outside escutcheon. Replaced when the lock stops reading credentials altogether but the ENGAGE connection remains active and the motor still functions on a manual test.
  • N223-045 Outside Escutcheon Subassembly: The complete outside housing assembly without the reader PCBA. The escutcheon without reader is specified for installations where the credential reader is not required but the physical outside trim must be replaced. Specify finish when ordering.
  • N623-030 Motor Assembly: The motor sub-assembly within the motorized chassis. In some service scenarios the motor itself fails while the chassis body remains intact. Confirm with the manufacturer service manual whether your specific failure mode calls for the motor assembly alone or the full motorized chassis N223-007.

 

Mounting Hardware and Installation Tools

Schlage 40-286 Universal Clamp for NDE NDEB door preparation template installation

Schlage 40-286 Universal Clamp for NDE/NDEB door preparation template. View product page and order.

 

Any installation that involves the full inside escutcheon replacement or an NDE80 upgrade requires the correct installation tools. These are not optional:

  • 40-286 Universal Clamp: Required for use with the NDEB door preparation template. The template cannot be used accurately without the clamp. Works across the NDE, LE, AD, and CO Series installation templates.
  • 47286225 NDEB Door Preparation Template: Required for new door prep and for NDE80-to-NDEB upgrades, which require additional door position sensor holes that the original NDE80 installation did not create. Must be used with the 40-286 clamp.
  • 40-292 Door Position Sensor Fixture and Mounting Hardware: Required for accurate door position sensor (DPS) hole placement. The 47286225 template is required to use the 40-292 fixture.
  • N223-049 Mounting Kit Screw: The standard mounting hardware kit for NDE installations. Contains combination screws, mounting screws, machine screws, battery cover screws, pan head screws, and a pin wrench.

 

Cylinder and Tailpiece Options for the Schlage NDE

The NDE supports three cylinder configurations. Each uses a different tailpiece. When ordering levers that include a cylinder, you must specify which core configuration is required, because each lever comes factory-configured for a specific cylinder type.

Cylinder TypeTailpiece Part NumberNotes
Schlage KIL (key-in-lever)N523-022High security Schlage proprietary core
Full-size IC (FSIC)N523-127Schlage FSIC core driver
Small format IC (SFIC)N523-091Schlage SFIC core driver

If you are uncertain which cylinder type is installed in your specific NDE device, the core type is identified on the label inside the battery compartment. For guidance on how master key systems and interchangeable core cylinder programs integrate with commercial door hardware at the facility level, see the master key system design guide and the Schlage key systems guide.

 

NDE Wireless Lock Parts Quick Reference Table

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
47278749NDEB Inside Escutcheon Assembly with PCBANDE80-to-NDEB upgrade; ENGAGE re-commission required
N223-007Motorized Chassis AssemblyENGAGE re-commission required after replacement
N223-044Battery Holder KitContains holder and retaining hardware
N223-019Main Wire HarnessInspect before replacing escutcheon or chassis
N223-045Outside Escutcheon SubassemblyWithout reader PCBA; specify finish
N223-046Reader PCBAReplace when credentials stop reading but motor still functions
N523-218Outside Spring Cage and Lever Catch AssemblyUniversal; all NDE manufacture dates
N523-221Inside Spring Cage and Lever Catch AssemblyDevices manufactured after February 1, 2017 only
N223-049Mounting KitContains all screws plus pin wrench
N623-000Inside BaseplateAnchors spring cage and battery components
N623-007Inside Battery CoverOrder N223-049 for replacement cover screw
N623-030Motor AssemblySub-assembly within N223-007 chassis
47286225NDEB Door Preparation TemplateRequired with 40-286 universal clamp
40-286Universal ClampRequired for use with door prep template
40-292Door Position Sensor FixtureRequired with 47286225 template
47269850TKE TransponderWireless gateway transponder for ENGAGE network

 

Ordering Schlage NDE Wireless Lock Parts: What to Confirm Before You Call

NDE parts ordering has more variables than mechanical lock parts because the electronic configuration affects which components are compatible. Confirm these five items before placing any order:

  1. NDE80 or NDEB? Look for a label inside the battery compartment. The model designation tells you which inside escutcheon assembly applies and whether an upgrade kit is needed.
  2. Manufacture date. The date is stamped on the label inside the battery compartment. This determines which inside spring cage applies. Pre- and post-February 2017 devices use different spring cage part numbers.
  3. Cylinder type. KIL, FSIC, or SFIC. This determines which tailpiece applies and which lever part numbers are valid for your configuration.
  4. Finish. Specify finish for levers, escutcheons, strikes, and latches. Not specifying finish results in a shipment in the manufacturer's default finish, which may not match the door hardware.
  5. ENGAGE version. Before replacing the inside escutcheon or motorized chassis, confirm you have access to the current ENGAGE app for re-commissioning. Part replacement without re-commissioning produces a non-functional installation.

Security Parts stocks Schlage NDE wireless lock parts with same-day shipping on available components. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301. For OEM versus aftermarket part considerations on electronic access control hardware, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

Schlage NDE in Context: How It Differs from Other Schlage Cylindrical Locks

The NDE shares its door preparation (the 61 Series prep with minor modifications) and lever form factor with the mechanical ND Series and the ALX Series. This means it can be installed on the same door as a mechanical lock replacement with minimal door modification. However, the internal components are completely different and do not cross between the product lines.

The mechanical Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts guide covers the ND, NDT, and NDB mechanical cylindrical line. If you are servicing a cylindrical lock that does not have a Bluetooth indicator or battery compartment on the inside trim, you have a mechanical ND Series device, not an NDE. The Schlage ALX Series guide covers the ALX10 through ALX80 mechanical cylindrical line, which uses similar lever hardware but entirely different internal mechanisms.

For facilities managing a mix of NDE wireless locks and other access control hardware, the access control integration guide covers how ENGAGE-platform devices communicate with third-party access control systems, credential formats, and door position sensor wiring. Understanding the integration architecture before servicing an NDE device prevents credential programming loss and unnecessary service calls.

The NDE is commonly specified in the same facilities as electric strikes and electrified mortise locks. For electric strike parts, see the electric strike parts guide. For function code selection guidance that applies across all commercial cylindrical lock types, see the commercial lock function codes guide.

The NDE is particularly common in healthcare and government facilities. For door hardware specification requirements in those environments, see the healthcare door hardware guide and the government buildings door hardware guide. For a complete picture of ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certification requirements that the NDE meets, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for Schlage and other leading commercial hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 9927 Surface Vertical Rod Parts: Complete Ordering Guide

 

Von Duprin 98/9927 surface vertical rod exit device for double door openings

Von Duprin 98/9927 surface vertical rod exit device. Browse all 9927 SVR parts.

 

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 9927 is the grooved-case surface vertical rod (SVR) configuration of the 99 Series exit device. It uses exposed top and bottom rods to provide three-point locking on double doors without a center post. The key parts you will order most often are:

  • Top rod kit: 050512 (for standard doors up to 7'1")
  • Bottom rod kit: 050514
  • Top latch kit: 050400 (post-October 1998 devices) or 050091 (pre-1998 retrofit)
  • Bottom latch kit: 050401 (post-October 1998) or 050090 (pre-1998 retrofit)
  • Center case: 109358 (SVR configuration, both panic and fire)
  • Rod guide package: 112063

The 9927 uses a grooved case. The 9827 has a smooth case. They are not interchangeable. Always verify your model number before ordering any part.

 

What the Von Duprin 9927 SVR Actually Does

The 9927 is the surface vertical rod configuration of the Von Duprin 99 Series, one of the most widely installed institutional exit device families in North America. It is designed for double door openings where there is no center mullion or fixed door post to mount a strike.

When someone presses the push bar, the center case mechanism simultaneously retracts a top latch bolt into a strike at the door head and a bottom latch bolt into a floor or threshold strike. This three-point engagement is what gives the SVR device its holding strength and is why it is specified on high-traffic egress doors in schools, healthcare facilities, government buildings, and commercial properties.

The rods run on the surface of the door face, which is what distinguishes the SVR from the concealed vertical rod (CVR) device. If you are working on a device where the rods are hidden inside the door stile, you have a CVR, not an SVR. See the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide for that configuration.

For a complete overview of how the 9927 fits within the broader Von Duprin product family, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

9927 vs 9827: How to Tell Them Apart Before You Order

This is the most common ordering mistake on the 98/99 Series SVR device. The 9827 and 9927 look nearly identical in the field, but their rod kits and some center case components are not interchangeable.

Feature9827 (98 Series)9927 (99 Series)
Mechanism caseSmoothGrooved
Top rod kit050513050512
Bottom rod kit050515050514
Center case (SVR)109358109358
Latch kits (post-1998)050400 / 050401050400 / 050401
Rod kits interchangeable?NoNo

The model number is stamped on the mechanism case, which sits in the center of the push bar channel. On the 9927, the grooved finish on the case surface is visible under good lighting even with the cover in place. If you are still unsure which device you have, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering.

 

Von Duprin 9927 Surface Vertical Rod Parts: Every Category Explained

The parts catalog for the 9927 SVR divides into eight functional categories. Each one covers a specific area of the device and requires careful attention to configuration before ordering. Browse the full Von Duprin 98/9927 SVR parts catalog for the complete part listing with diagrams.

 

Vertical Rod Kits and Extension Rods

Von Duprin 98/9927 vertical rods and latches parts diagram showing top and bottom rod assemblies

Von Duprin 98/9927 vertical rods and latches diagram. View all rod and latch parts.

 

The vertical rods are the most frequently replaced components on an SVR device. They wear at the latch engagement points and bend from impacts by carts, gurneys, and high-traffic door cycling.

  • 050512 Top Rod Kit: Standard top rod for the 9927, handles doors up to 7 feet 1 inch. The rod is 34 and 15/16 inches long. Field adjustable for doors shorter than the standard height.
  • 050513 Top Rod Kit: This is the 9827 top rod. Not for the 9927.
  • 050514 Bottom Rod Kit: Standard bottom rod for the 9927. Rod length is 31 and a half inches, standardized by building code requirements that set the device centerline height at 39 and 5/8 inches from the finished floor.
  • 050515 Bottom Rod Kit: This is the 9827 bottom rod. Not for the 9927.
  • ER-60 Extension Rod (60"): Required when the door height exceeds 7 feet 1 inch. Available in 12-inch and 36-inch extension lengths. Extension rod kits include the rod and the rod-to-rod connector hardware.

When replacing rods, also check the rod roll pins (090054), rod connectors (090067 for latch side, 090068 for center case side), and the rod extension connector package (090075). These small components wear alongside the rods and are cheap insurance against a callback.

 

Latch Kits: Confirm Your Manufacture Date First

Von Duprin changed the latch design in October 1998. The pre-1998 latches are not compatible with the post-1998 kits. Using the wrong latch kit is one of the most common service errors on older 9927 devices.

 

For devices manufactured after October 1998:

  • 050400: Top latch kit, less cover. Used on the 2227, 3327A, and 9927 SVR devices shipped after October 1998. Includes the top latch assembly and mounting screws.
  • 050401: Bottom latch kit, less cover. Same post-1998 application. The bottom latch on the 9927 interfaces with the floor or threshold strike.
  • 050546: Latch mounting bracket kit. Used with 050400 and 050401 on post-1998 devices.
  • 050566: Latch case cover kit for the 98/9927 and 9927-F. Covers both top and bottom latch cases.

 

For devices manufactured before October 1998:

  • 050091: Top latch retrofit kit. Replaces and updates the pre-1998 top latch to the current design. If the bottom rod is dragging on the floor on an older device, a worn or failed latch is almost always the cause.
  • 050090: Bottom latch retrofit kit. Same pre-1998 retrofit application.

Supporting latch hardware that wears alongside the latch assemblies includes the latch mounting package (900589), latch case cover screws (900850 in packs of two), and the rod guide mounting package (900919).

 

Rod Guide Package

The rod guide keeps the surface rods from bowing, deflecting, or bending under lateral impact from carts and equipment that pass through high-traffic doorways. On an SVR device, the rod guides are one of the first components to show wear.

  • 112063: Rod guide package for the 98/9927. Sold in pairs. The current version of this guide includes a metal strap and a nylon bushing that the rod slides through, which is a significant improvement over the original spring-and-cover design.
  • 900919: Rod guide mounting package. Includes the mounting hardware for the 112063 guides.

Check the rod guides whenever you are replacing rods. A bent rod on a properly maintained device usually means the guides have failed first.

 

Baseplate Assembly

Von Duprin 98/9927 and 9927-F baseplate assembly parts diagram

Von Duprin 98/9927 baseplate assembly. View baseplate parts.

 

The baseplate is the mounting plate that secures the device to the door face. Baseplate hardware includes the sex bolt package (034902, pack of two), the mounting screw packages, and the baseplate itself. The sex bolt package uses the 325 hex head bolts and is required at both the top and bottom latch positions.

The baseplate assembly applies to both the panic 9927 and the fire-rated 9927-F. Confirm door thickness before ordering mounting hardware, as screw lengths differ between 1-3/4 inch and 2-1/4 inch door applications.

 

Center Case Assembly

Von Duprin 98/9927 center case assembly and 9927-F LBR fire latch kit parts diagram

Von Duprin 98/9927 center case assembly and LBR fire latch kit. View center case parts.

 

The center case is the heart of the SVR device. It houses the push bar mechanism, the dogging assembly, and the control link that operates both the top and bottom rods simultaneously.

The 9927 SVR uses center case 109358. This is a critical distinction: the rim device (98/99) uses center case 109012, and these two are completely different. Ordering the rim center case for an SVR device will result in a non-functional installation.

The center case for the double door configuration uses part number 109358 for both the panic and fire versions. If you have a double cylinder device (model 9927-2), you will also need the CC-CVR-2-98/9927 center case cover kit.

Internal center case components that can be serviced separately include:

  • 090056: Top latch compression spring (pack of 10)
  • 090057: Pullman latch spring (pack of 10), used when the device is equipped with a Pullman latch option
  • 090058: Bottom latch case spring (pack of 10)
  • 090065: Bolt return spring (pack of 10)
  • 090076: Auxiliary bolt spring (pack of 10)

 

Dogging Assembly: Panic vs Fire Configuration

Von Duprin 98/9927 dogging diagrams for hex dogging and cylinder dogging configurations

Von Duprin 98/9927 dogging configuration diagrams. View dogging diagrams.

Dogging allows the push bar to be held in the depressed position, effectively converting the exit device into a free-swinging door. This is used in high-traffic situations during business hours. The 9927 supports two types of dogging:

Hex dogging (HD) is the standard option. It uses a 5/32-inch hex key inserted into a socket on the cover plate to dog the push bar in the depressed position. The hex dogging shaft (090040) is the most commonly replaced dogging component. It strips when a misaligned hex key is forced into the socket or when the socket wears from repeated use.

Cylinder dogging (CD) replaces the hex key with a key cylinder. The technician turns the key to dog and undog the device. Cylinder dogging is used in applications where key control over the dogged state is needed. The CD option requires the specific cylinder dogging housing and actuator components found in the CD center case assembly.

The fire-rated 9927-F does not support dogging of any kind. A fire exit hardware device must latch every time the door closes, without exception. If you have a -F suffix on your model number, do not attempt to add dogging hardware.

For devices shipped before August 1997, old-style dogging parts apply. The old-style hex dogging replacement kit is 050153. See the service replacement items section in the 98/99 Series parts manual for the complete old-style parts list.

 

Fire Exit Hardware: The 9927-F and LBR Configuration

The 9927-F is the fire exit hardware version of the 9927 SVR. It carries UL listing for fire exit hardware and is certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1. Understanding the differences between the panic and fire versions prevents ordering errors that result in non-compliant installations.

Feature9927 (Panic)9927-F (Fire)
Dogging permittedYes (HD and CD)No
LBR (Less Bottom Rod) availableNoYes
UL fire exit listingNoYes
Center case109358109358
Top strike299299F
Bottom strike (standard)304L304L
Bottom strike (panic-rated)248L-4248L-4

The LBR (Less Bottom Rod) configuration on the 9927-F removes the bottom vertical rod and substitutes a spring-loaded bottom latch. This is used in applications where a threshold or floor obstruction prevents a standard bottom rod and strike installation, or where ADA-compliant accessible thresholds are required. The LBR requires its own fire latch kit: 050171.

For a complete explanation of fire rating categories and what they mean for exit device selection, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Strikes: Matching the Right Strike to Your Configuration

The 9927 SVR uses separate top and bottom strikes. Strike selection depends on whether you have a panic or fire device and whether you need a panic-rated bottom strike for high-security applications.

  • 299: Standard top strike for the 9927 panic device. Mounts at the door header.
  • 299F: Fire-rated top strike for the 9927-F.
  • 304L: Standard vertical rod bottom strike. Used at the floor or threshold for both the panic 9927 and the fire 9927-F in most installations.
  • 248L-4: Panic-rated vertical rod bottom strike for high-security applications. Provides additional holding strength compared to the standard 304L.

On wood doors, a wood door screw pack (964291) is required for the strikes. For doors where the strike cannot be recessed, an optional surface strike is available.

 

Electrified Options: EL, QEL, ALK, and RX

The 9927 panic device supports several electrified and monitoring upgrade options. These are specified when the opening requires access control integration, alarm monitoring, or electric latch retraction. None of these options are available on the fire-rated 9927-F.

 

Electric Latch Retraction (EL)

The EL option adds a solenoid to the push bar mechanism that retracts the latch bolt on an electric signal, allowing the door to be opened from the outside without pressing the push bar. The EL solenoid replacement kit is available for devices that have an existing EL installation. For devices shipped before January 1987, the old-style EL solenoid parts apply (050218 replacement kit).

The HD-EL combination option (hex dogging with electric latch retraction) is also available as a factory-installed configuration on the panic device.

 

ALK Exit Alarm Kit

The ALK kit adds a battery-powered local alarm to the 9927 push bar. When the push bar is depressed without authorization, the alarm sounds. The ALK is used in applications that require door monitoring without a full access control system. The ALK kit diagram and part numbers are available in the 9927 SVR parts catalog.

 

RX and LX Monitoring Options

The RX (Request to Exit) option adds a switch to the push bar that signals an access control system when the bar is pressed. The LX option (Latch Bolt Monitor) adds a switch that monitors the position of the latch bolt. Both provide real-time door status signals for building security systems. The RX and LX options apply to the panic device only.

For guidance on how these electrified options integrate with commercial door access control systems, see the exit devices parts guide.

 

Double Cylinder Configuration: The 9927-2 and 9927-2SI

Von Duprin 98/9927-2 double cylinder surface vertical rod exit device model diagram

Von Duprin 98/9927-2 double cylinder model. View double cylinder parts.

 

The double cylinder option (designated with the -2 suffix) adds a key cylinder to the outside of the device. This allows the latch bolt to be operated from the outside by key, in addition to the standard push bar operation from the inside.

The -2SI variant (Security Indicator) adds a visual flag that shows whether the device is in a secured or unsecured state. This is used in applications where supervisory verification of the lock status is needed.

Conversion kits are available for upgrading an existing 9927 to the double cylinder or security indicator configuration:

  • 2SIKIT-2-98/9927: Double cylinder conversion kit for the 9927 series.
  • 2SIKIT-2SI-98/9927: Security indicator conversion kit for the 9927 series.
  • CC-CVR-2-98/9927: Center case cover kit for the double cylinder configuration.

 

9927 SVR Parts Quick Reference by Part Number

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
0505129927 Top Rod KitDoors up to 7'1"
0505149927 Bottom Rod KitStandard length, 31.5 inches
050400Top Latch Kit (post-Oct 1998)Also fits 2227, 3327A
050401Bottom Latch Kit (post-Oct 1998)Also fits 2227, 3327A
050091Top Latch Retrofit Kit (pre-Oct 1998)Updates old-style latch
050090Bottom Latch Retrofit Kit (pre-Oct 1998)Updates old-style latch
112063Rod Guide PackageSold in pairs
109358Center Case (SVR, panic and fire)Not interchangeable with 109012 (rim)
034902325 Sex Bolt Package (Pkg of 2)Top and bottom latch mounting
050566Latch Case Cover KitCovers top and bottom latch cases
050171LBR Fire Latch Kit9927-F only, Less Bottom Rod config
ER-6060" Extension Rod KitDoors above 7'1"
299 / 299FTop Strike (panic / fire)Mounts at door header
304LStandard Vertical Rod Bottom StrikeMounts at floor or threshold
248L-4Panic-Rated Vertical Rod Bottom StrikeHigher security applications

 

How the 9927 SVR Fits in the 98/99 Series Family

The 98/99 Series spans three primary physical configurations that cover different door types and architectural requirements. Understanding where the 9927 sits helps you navigate the catalog correctly when you are managing a facility with mixed device types.

  • Rim device (98/99): Single-point latch at the frame strike. Used on single doors. Center case 109012.
  • Surface vertical rod (9827/9927): Three-point locking on double doors without a center post. Rods visible on door surface. Center case 109358. That is what this guide covers.
  • Concealed vertical rod (9847/9947): Three-point locking on double doors where concealed hardware is required. Rods run inside the door stile. See the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide for that configuration.

For a complete side-by-side breakdown of all 98/99 Series configurations, see the Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide. For configuration selection guidance across the entire Von Duprin product line, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison.

 

Ordering the Right 9927 SVR Parts: What to Confirm Before You Place the Order

Getting the right parts the first time on a 9927 SVR comes down to five questions. Have the answers ready before you call or click.

 

  1. Is the mechanism case smooth or grooved? Smooth is the 9827. Grooved is the 9927. This determines your rod kit part numbers.
  2. Is there an -F suffix on the model number? If yes, you have fire exit hardware. Dogging parts do not apply. LBR may apply.
  3. When was the device manufactured? Pre-October 1998 devices need retrofit latch kits (050090/050091). Post-October 1998 devices use the standard kits (050400/050401).
  4. What is the door height? Standard rods handle up to 7 feet 1 inch. Taller doors need an extension rod kit.
  5. Does the device have any options? Double cylinder (-2), security indicator (-2SI), electric latch retraction (EL or QEL), cylinder dogging (CD), and ALK alarm all require specific additional components.

 

Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for the full Von Duprin 98/9927 SVR catalog. Same-day shipping on stocked components from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450. If you need help confirming the right part for your specific device, call 845-935-0301 before the order goes through. Browse the complete Von Duprin 98/9927 SVR parts catalog or the Von Duprin parts hub for every other active series.

For context on the broader 98/99 Series service history and the part number changes that affect older devices, see the Von Duprin 98/99 Series parts manual. For guidance on selecting the right exit device configuration for a new or replacement installation, see the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for Von Duprin and other leading commercial door hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 9927 Surface Vertical Rod Parts: Complete Ordering Guide

 

Von Duprin 98/9927 surface vertical rod exit device for double door openings

Von Duprin 98/9927 surface vertical rod exit device. Browse all 9927 SVR parts.

 

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 9927 is the grooved-case surface vertical rod (SVR) configuration of the 99 Series exit device. It uses exposed top and bottom rods to provide three-point locking on double doors without a center post. The key parts you will order most often are:

  • Top rod kit: 050512 (for standard doors up to 7'1")
  • Bottom rod kit: 050514
  • Top latch kit: 050400 (post-October 1998 devices) or 050091 (pre-1998 retrofit)
  • Bottom latch kit: 050401 (post-October 1998) or 050090 (pre-1998 retrofit)
  • Center case: 109358 (SVR configuration, both panic and fire)
  • Rod guide package: 112063

The 9927 uses a grooved case. The 9827 has a smooth case. They are not interchangeable. Always verify your model number before ordering any part.

 

What the Von Duprin 9927 SVR Actually Does

The 9927 is the surface vertical rod configuration of the Von Duprin 99 Series, one of the most widely installed institutional exit device families in North America. It is designed for double door openings where there is no center mullion or fixed door post to mount a strike.

When someone presses the push bar, the center case mechanism simultaneously retracts a top latch bolt into a strike at the door head and a bottom latch bolt into a floor or threshold strike. This three-point engagement is what gives the SVR device its holding strength and is why it is specified on high-traffic egress doors in schools, healthcare facilities, government buildings, and commercial properties.

The rods run on the surface of the door face, which is what distinguishes the SVR from the concealed vertical rod (CVR) device. If you are working on a device where the rods are hidden inside the door stile, you have a CVR, not an SVR. See the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide for that configuration.

For a complete overview of how the 9927 fits within the broader Von Duprin product family, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

9927 vs 9827: How to Tell Them Apart Before You Order

This is the most common ordering mistake on the 98/99 Series SVR device. The 9827 and 9927 look nearly identical in the field, but their rod kits and some center case components are not interchangeable.

Feature9827 (98 Series)9927 (99 Series)
Mechanism caseSmoothGrooved
Top rod kit050513050512
Bottom rod kit050515050514
Center case (SVR)109358109358
Latch kits (post-1998)050400 / 050401050400 / 050401
Rod kits interchangeable?NoNo

The model number is stamped on the mechanism case, which sits in the center of the push bar channel. On the 9927, the grooved finish on the case surface is visible under good lighting even with the cover in place. If you are still unsure which device you have, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering.

 

Von Duprin 9927 Surface Vertical Rod Parts: Every Category Explained

The parts catalog for the 9927 SVR divides into eight functional categories. Each one covers a specific area of the device and requires careful attention to configuration before ordering. Browse the full Von Duprin 98/9927 SVR parts catalog for the complete part listing with diagrams.

 

Vertical Rod Kits and Extension Rods

Von Duprin 98/9927 vertical rods and latches parts diagram showing top and bottom rod assemblies

Von Duprin 98/9927 vertical rods and latches diagram. View all rod and latch parts.

 

The vertical rods are the most frequently replaced components on an SVR device. They wear at the latch engagement points and bend from impacts by carts, gurneys, and high-traffic door cycling.

  • 050512 Top Rod Kit: Standard top rod for the 9927, handles doors up to 7 feet 1 inch. The rod is 34 and 15/16 inches long. Field adjustable for doors shorter than the standard height.
  • 050513 Top Rod Kit: This is the 9827 top rod. Not for the 9927.
  • 050514 Bottom Rod Kit: Standard bottom rod for the 9927. Rod length is 31 and a half inches, standardized by building code requirements that set the device centerline height at 39 and 5/8 inches from the finished floor.
  • 050515 Bottom Rod Kit: This is the 9827 bottom rod. Not for the 9927.
  • ER-60 Extension Rod (60"): Required when the door height exceeds 7 feet 1 inch. Available in 12-inch and 36-inch extension lengths. Extension rod kits include the rod and the rod-to-rod connector hardware.

When replacing rods, also check the rod roll pins (090054), rod connectors (090067 for latch side, 090068 for center case side), and the rod extension connector package (090075). These small components wear alongside the rods and are cheap insurance against a callback.

 

Latch Kits: Confirm Your Manufacture Date First

Von Duprin changed the latch design in October 1998. The pre-1998 latches are not compatible with the post-1998 kits. Using the wrong latch kit is one of the most common service errors on older 9927 devices.

 

For devices manufactured after October 1998:

  • 050400: Top latch kit, less cover. Used on the 2227, 3327A, and 9927 SVR devices shipped after October 1998. Includes the top latch assembly and mounting screws.
  • 050401: Bottom latch kit, less cover. Same post-1998 application. The bottom latch on the 9927 interfaces with the floor or threshold strike.
  • 050546: Latch mounting bracket kit. Used with 050400 and 050401 on post-1998 devices.
  • 050566: Latch case cover kit for the 98/9927 and 9927-F. Covers both top and bottom latch cases.

 

For devices manufactured before October 1998:

  • 050091: Top latch retrofit kit. Replaces and updates the pre-1998 top latch to the current design. If the bottom rod is dragging on the floor on an older device, a worn or failed latch is almost always the cause.
  • 050090: Bottom latch retrofit kit. Same pre-1998 retrofit application.

Supporting latch hardware that wears alongside the latch assemblies includes the latch mounting package (900589), latch case cover screws (900850 in packs of two), and the rod guide mounting package (900919).

 

Rod Guide Package

The rod guide keeps the surface rods from bowing, deflecting, or bending under lateral impact from carts and equipment that pass through high-traffic doorways. On an SVR device, the rod guides are one of the first components to show wear.

  • 112063: Rod guide package for the 98/9927. Sold in pairs. The current version of this guide includes a metal strap and a nylon bushing that the rod slides through, which is a significant improvement over the original spring-and-cover design.
  • 900919: Rod guide mounting package. Includes the mounting hardware for the 112063 guides.

Check the rod guides whenever you are replacing rods. A bent rod on a properly maintained device usually means the guides have failed first.

 

Baseplate Assembly

Von Duprin 98/9927 and 9927-F baseplate assembly parts diagram

Von Duprin 98/9927 baseplate assembly. View baseplate parts.

 

The baseplate is the mounting plate that secures the device to the door face. Baseplate hardware includes the sex bolt package (034902, pack of two), the mounting screw packages, and the baseplate itself. The sex bolt package uses the 325 hex head bolts and is required at both the top and bottom latch positions.

The baseplate assembly applies to both the panic 9927 and the fire-rated 9927-F. Confirm door thickness before ordering mounting hardware, as screw lengths differ between 1-3/4 inch and 2-1/4 inch door applications.

 

Center Case Assembly

Von Duprin 98/9927 center case assembly and 9927-F LBR fire latch kit parts diagram

Von Duprin 98/9927 center case assembly and LBR fire latch kit. View center case parts.

 

The center case is the heart of the SVR device. It houses the push bar mechanism, the dogging assembly, and the control link that operates both the top and bottom rods simultaneously.

The 9927 SVR uses center case 109358. This is a critical distinction: the rim device (98/99) uses center case 109012, and these two are completely different. Ordering the rim center case for an SVR device will result in a non-functional installation.

The center case for the double door configuration uses part number 109358 for both the panic and fire versions. If you have a double cylinder device (model 9927-2), you will also need the CC-CVR-2-98/9927 center case cover kit.

Internal center case components that can be serviced separately include:

  • 090056: Top latch compression spring (pack of 10)
  • 090057: Pullman latch spring (pack of 10), used when the device is equipped with a Pullman latch option
  • 090058: Bottom latch case spring (pack of 10)
  • 090065: Bolt return spring (pack of 10)
  • 090076: Auxiliary bolt spring (pack of 10)

 

Dogging Assembly: Panic vs Fire Configuration

Von Duprin 98/9927 dogging diagrams for hex dogging and cylinder dogging configurations

Von Duprin 98/9927 dogging configuration diagrams. View dogging diagrams.

Dogging allows the push bar to be held in the depressed position, effectively converting the exit device into a free-swinging door. This is used in high-traffic situations during business hours. The 9927 supports two types of dogging:

Hex dogging (HD) is the standard option. It uses a 5/32-inch hex key inserted into a socket on the cover plate to dog the push bar in the depressed position. The hex dogging shaft (090040) is the most commonly replaced dogging component. It strips when a misaligned hex key is forced into the socket or when the socket wears from repeated use.

Cylinder dogging (CD) replaces the hex key with a key cylinder. The technician turns the key to dog and undog the device. Cylinder dogging is used in applications where key control over the dogged state is needed. The CD option requires the specific cylinder dogging housing and actuator components found in the CD center case assembly.

The fire-rated 9927-F does not support dogging of any kind. A fire exit hardware device must latch every time the door closes, without exception. If you have a -F suffix on your model number, do not attempt to add dogging hardware.

For devices shipped before August 1997, old-style dogging parts apply. The old-style hex dogging replacement kit is 050153. See the service replacement items section in the 98/99 Series parts manual for the complete old-style parts list.

 

Fire Exit Hardware: The 9927-F and LBR Configuration

The 9927-F is the fire exit hardware version of the 9927 SVR. It carries UL listing for fire exit hardware and is certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1. Understanding the differences between the panic and fire versions prevents ordering errors that result in non-compliant installations.

Feature9927 (Panic)9927-F (Fire)
Dogging permittedYes (HD and CD)No
LBR (Less Bottom Rod) availableNoYes
UL fire exit listingNoYes
Center case109358109358
Top strike299299F
Bottom strike (standard)304L304L
Bottom strike (panic-rated)248L-4248L-4

The LBR (Less Bottom Rod) configuration on the 9927-F removes the bottom vertical rod and substitutes a spring-loaded bottom latch. This is used in applications where a threshold or floor obstruction prevents a standard bottom rod and strike installation, or where ADA-compliant accessible thresholds are required. The LBR requires its own fire latch kit: 050171.

For a complete explanation of fire rating categories and what they mean for exit device selection, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Strikes: Matching the Right Strike to Your Configuration

The 9927 SVR uses separate top and bottom strikes. Strike selection depends on whether you have a panic or fire device and whether you need a panic-rated bottom strike for high-security applications.

  • 299: Standard top strike for the 9927 panic device. Mounts at the door header.
  • 299F: Fire-rated top strike for the 9927-F.
  • 304L: Standard vertical rod bottom strike. Used at the floor or threshold for both the panic 9927 and the fire 9927-F in most installations.
  • 248L-4: Panic-rated vertical rod bottom strike for high-security applications. Provides additional holding strength compared to the standard 304L.

On wood doors, a wood door screw pack (964291) is required for the strikes. For doors where the strike cannot be recessed, an optional surface strike is available.

 

Electrified Options: EL, QEL, ALK, and RX

The 9927 panic device supports several electrified and monitoring upgrade options. These are specified when the opening requires access control integration, alarm monitoring, or electric latch retraction. None of these options are available on the fire-rated 9927-F.

 

Electric Latch Retraction (EL)

The EL option adds a solenoid to the push bar mechanism that retracts the latch bolt on an electric signal, allowing the door to be opened from the outside without pressing the push bar. The EL solenoid replacement kit is available for devices that have an existing EL installation. For devices shipped before January 1987, the old-style EL solenoid parts apply (050218 replacement kit).

The HD-EL combination option (hex dogging with electric latch retraction) is also available as a factory-installed configuration on the panic device.

 

ALK Exit Alarm Kit

The ALK kit adds a battery-powered local alarm to the 9927 push bar. When the push bar is depressed without authorization, the alarm sounds. The ALK is used in applications that require door monitoring without a full access control system. The ALK kit diagram and part numbers are available in the 9927 SVR parts catalog.

 

RX and LX Monitoring Options

The RX (Request to Exit) option adds a switch to the push bar that signals an access control system when the bar is pressed. The LX option (Latch Bolt Monitor) adds a switch that monitors the position of the latch bolt. Both provide real-time door status signals for building security systems. The RX and LX options apply to the panic device only.

For guidance on how these electrified options integrate with commercial door access control systems, see the exit devices parts guide.

 

Double Cylinder Configuration: The 9927-2 and 9927-2SI

Von Duprin 98/9927-2 double cylinder surface vertical rod exit device model diagram

Von Duprin 98/9927-2 double cylinder model. View double cylinder parts.

 

The double cylinder option (designated with the -2 suffix) adds a key cylinder to the outside of the device. This allows the latch bolt to be operated from the outside by key, in addition to the standard push bar operation from the inside.

The -2SI variant (Security Indicator) adds a visual flag that shows whether the device is in a secured or unsecured state. This is used in applications where supervisory verification of the lock status is needed.

Conversion kits are available for upgrading an existing 9927 to the double cylinder or security indicator configuration:

  • 2SIKIT-2-98/9927: Double cylinder conversion kit for the 9927 series.
  • 2SIKIT-2SI-98/9927: Security indicator conversion kit for the 9927 series.
  • CC-CVR-2-98/9927: Center case cover kit for the double cylinder configuration.

 

9927 SVR Parts Quick Reference by Part Number

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
0505129927 Top Rod KitDoors up to 7'1"
0505149927 Bottom Rod KitStandard length, 31.5 inches
050400Top Latch Kit (post-Oct 1998)Also fits 2227, 3327A
050401Bottom Latch Kit (post-Oct 1998)Also fits 2227, 3327A
050091Top Latch Retrofit Kit (pre-Oct 1998)Updates old-style latch
050090Bottom Latch Retrofit Kit (pre-Oct 1998)Updates old-style latch
112063Rod Guide PackageSold in pairs
109358Center Case (SVR, panic and fire)Not interchangeable with 109012 (rim)
034902325 Sex Bolt Package (Pkg of 2)Top and bottom latch mounting
050566Latch Case Cover KitCovers top and bottom latch cases
050171LBR Fire Latch Kit9927-F only, Less Bottom Rod config
ER-6060" Extension Rod KitDoors above 7'1"
299 / 299FTop Strike (panic / fire)Mounts at door header
304LStandard Vertical Rod Bottom StrikeMounts at floor or threshold
248L-4Panic-Rated Vertical Rod Bottom StrikeHigher security applications

 

How the 9927 SVR Fits in the 98/99 Series Family

The 98/99 Series spans three primary physical configurations that cover different door types and architectural requirements. Understanding where the 9927 sits helps you navigate the catalog correctly when you are managing a facility with mixed device types.

  • Rim device (98/99): Single-point latch at the frame strike. Used on single doors. Center case 109012.
  • Surface vertical rod (9827/9927): Three-point locking on double doors without a center post. Rods visible on door surface. Center case 109358. That is what this guide covers.
  • Concealed vertical rod (9847/9947): Three-point locking on double doors where concealed hardware is required. Rods run inside the door stile. See the Von Duprin 9947 CVR exit device parts guide for that configuration.

For a complete side-by-side breakdown of all 98/99 Series configurations, see the Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide. For configuration selection guidance across the entire Von Duprin product line, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison.

 

Ordering the Right 9927 SVR Parts: What to Confirm Before You Place the Order

Getting the right parts the first time on a 9927 SVR comes down to five questions. Have the answers ready before you call or click.

 

  1. Is the mechanism case smooth or grooved? Smooth is the 9827. Grooved is the 9927. This determines your rod kit part numbers.
  2. Is there an -F suffix on the model number? If yes, you have fire exit hardware. Dogging parts do not apply. LBR may apply.
  3. When was the device manufactured? Pre-October 1998 devices need retrofit latch kits (050090/050091). Post-October 1998 devices use the standard kits (050400/050401).
  4. What is the door height? Standard rods handle up to 7 feet 1 inch. Taller doors need an extension rod kit.
  5. Does the device have any options? Double cylinder (-2), security indicator (-2SI), electric latch retraction (EL or QEL), cylinder dogging (CD), and ALK alarm all require specific additional components.

 

Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for the full Von Duprin 98/9927 SVR catalog. Same-day shipping on stocked components from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450. If you need help confirming the right part for your specific device, call 845-935-0301 before the order goes through. Browse the complete Von Duprin 98/9927 SVR parts catalog or the Von Duprin parts hub for every other active series.

For context on the broader 98/99 Series service history and the part number changes that affect older devices, see the Von Duprin 98/99 Series parts manual. For guidance on selecting the right exit device configuration for a new or replacement installation, see the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for Von Duprin and other leading commercial door hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Electric Strikes Complete Guide: Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure, Fire Doors, Lock Types and Troubleshooting

An electric strike replaces the fixed strike plate in a door frame with a motorized keeper that releases remotely on a credential signal. The lock on the door stays mechanical: the inside lever or push bar always provides free egress. The electric strike only controls entry from the outside. Getting the fail mode right (fail-safe vs fail-secure) and the lock type right (cylindrical vs mortise vs rim) is the entire specification decision. Everything else is installation detail.

Electric strikes are the access control component most often specified incorrectly on commercial door hardware projects. The mistakes fall into two categories: the wrong fail mode for the door's life safety function, and the wrong strike type for the lock installed on the door. Both errors are easily avoided with a clear understanding of how each selection is determined. This guide covers both.

Browse electric strike parts at SecurityParts.com: Von Duprin electric strike parts for commercial access control applications, Von Duprin exit device parts for rim electric strike applications, Schlage L Series mortise lock parts for mortise electric strike pairings, and the complete Allegion access control hardware catalog.

How an Electric Strike Works

A standard fixed strike plate is a passive piece of hardware bolted to the door frame. The latchbolt from the lock extends into the strike pocket and the door stays closed until someone operates the lever from inside or uses a key from outside. An electric strike replaces this fixed plate with an electromechanical device where the keeper (the curved piece that holds the latchbolt) is connected to a solenoid. When the solenoid is activated, the keeper pivots or retracts out of the way, allowing the latchbolt to pass through without being retracted mechanically. The door opens by being pulled or pushed, with the latch still extended, because the keeper is not blocking it.

When the door closes again, the latchbolt re-engages the keeper and the door is latched without any electrical input. The solenoid only needs to activate long enough for the door to be opened: a brief pulse (typically 1 to 5 seconds) is sufficient. This is why electric strikes are energy-efficient in fail-secure mode: they only draw power during the unlock event, not continuously.

The trigger for the solenoid comes from the access control system: a card reader credential event, a keypad code entry, a push-button release, a motion sensor, or a remote switch all send a signal to the access control panel which then applies or removes power from the strike.

Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure: How Each Works and When Each Is Required

The fail mode is the single most important specification decision for any electric strike. It is determined entirely by the door's role in the building's life safety plan, not by preference, security level, or budget.

Fail-Secure (Fail-Locked)

In fail-secure mode, the strike remains locked when power is lost. Power must be applied to the solenoid to unlock the keeper. When power is removed (either as the normal locked state or during a power failure), a spring extends the keeper and the latchbolt is held positively in the strike. The door cannot be opened from outside without a credential or mechanical key. Free egress from inside is always available through the mechanical lever or push bar, which retracts the latchbolt directly regardless of the strike's electrical state.

Fail-secure is the correct specification for perimeter security doors, storeroom doors, server room doors, restricted area doors, and any door where unauthorized entry during a power failure would be a security breach. It is also the correct specification for fire-rated doors, for reasons explained below.

Fail-Safe (Fail-Open)

In fail-safe mode, the strike unlocks when power is lost. Power must be continuously applied to the solenoid to hold the keeper in the locked position. When power is removed, the keeper releases and the door can be pushed or pulled open without any credential or key. Fail-safe is required on doors that are on a required means of egress and where the door does not have a mechanical means of free egress from inside when the lock is energized.

The life safety code basis for fail-safe is clear: IBC and NFPA 101 require that all egress doors be operable without a key, tool, or special knowledge during emergency evacuation. A fail-secure lock on a required egress door that loses power during a fire leaves occupants unable to exit through that door. Fail-safe eliminates this risk by ensuring the door always unlocks on power loss.

The single question that determines the fail mode: Is this door on the building's required means of egress, AND does it lack a mechanical means of free egress from inside when energized? If yes to both: fail-safe. If no to either (the door is not on required egress, OR the inside lever/push bar always provides mechanical free egress regardless of the electrical state): fail-secure is acceptable. Most commercial electric strike applications pair a fail-secure strike with a mechanical lock that always allows free egress from inside, satisfying the life safety requirement while maintaining outside security on power loss.

Why Fire-Rated Doors Require Fail-Secure Electric Strikes

This is the most commonly misspecified aspect of electric strikes, and the one with the most significant life safety consequence. The misspecification goes in the direction you might not expect: people install fail-safe strikes on fire-rated doors thinking "fail-safe is safer," and they are wrong about fire doors specifically.

NFPA 80 requires that fire door assemblies be positively latching at all times when closed. The latchbolt must engage the strike and hold the door in the closed position. A fire on one side of a door creates pressure that can force the door open if the latch is not positively engaged. If a fail-safe electric strike is installed on a fire-rated door, the keeper retracts when power is lost. With the keeper retracted, only the spring-loaded latch is making contact with an open pocket in the strike. Under fire pressure, the latch can be pushed right through the open pocket, the door opens, and the fire separation is compromised.

A fail-secure strike keeps the keeper extended when power is lost, maintaining positive latching. The latchbolt is held in the keeper as firmly as it would be in a standard fixed strike plate. The fire door performs as designed. This is why NFPA 80 effectively requires fail-secure on fire-rated doors, and why Von Duprin fail-secure strikes carry UL listings for both fire and burglary, while fail-safe strikes carry UL listings for burglary only. The listing label difference is the physical documentation of this code requirement.

The 2003 Cook County Administration Building fire and the stairwell reentry requirement it created: On October 17, 2003, a fire started on the 12th floor of a 35-story building in Chicago's Loop. People evacuating were directed into a stairwell, encountered thick smoke, were told to go back up, and could not reenter floors as they climbed because the stairwell doors locked against reentry. Six people did not survive. Others were hospitalized. This event is the historical origin of the IBC stairwell reentry requirement: stairwell doors must allow reentry from the stair side on every floor in buildings over four stories. This requirement is documented in NFPA 101 and cited in IBC commentary. Electric strikes cannot satisfy both the fire door positive latching requirement (needs fail-secure) and the stairwell reentry requirement (needs fail-safe) on the same door. They simply cannot do both simultaneously. The correct hardware is fail-safe electrified trim on a fire exit hardware device.

Browse Von Duprin fail-secure electric strike parts for fire-rated door applications at SecurityParts.com.

Lock Type Compatibility: Cylindrical, Mortise, and Rim Exit Device

Electric strikes are not interchangeable between lock types. Each lock type presents a different latchbolt geometry, projection length, and mounting position that requires a specifically designed strike keeper. Installing the wrong strike type produces a latch that either cannot engage the keeper, binds against the frame, or provides insufficient security engagement.

Cylindrical Lock Electric Strikes

Cylindrical locks (Schlage ND Series, AL Series) use a spring-loaded latchbolt with a 1/2-inch to 5/8-inch throw. Standard ANSI electric strikes are designed for this geometry and are the most common commercial electric strike type. The ANSI prep in hollow metal frames (the standard cutout for the fixed strike plate) accommodates most ANSI electric strikes with minimal additional frame preparation. One critical installation detail: the deadlatch auxiliary plunger on a cylindrical lock must not contact the electric strike keeper edge. If the plunger falls behind the keeper when the door is closing, it can bind the strike and prevent the keeper from resetting after the door closes. Verify clearance between the deadlatch plunger and the strike keeper edge during installation.

Mortise Lock Electric Strikes

Mortise locks (Schlage L Series) have a latchbolt throw of up to 3/4 inches, which requires a deeper keeper pocket than a cylindrical strike provides. Mortise electric strikes have this deeper keeper pocket. An important limitation: mortise electric strikes only release the latchbolt. The separate deadbolt on a mortise lock is a true deadbolt with no spring return. The electric strike cannot capture and hold a deadbolt: if the deadbolt is extended when the door is opened, the deadbolt projects out and the door closes with the deadbolt extended into empty space. The deadbolt must be retracted before entry through a mortise electric strike, either by keying the deadbolt or with electrified mortise trim that controls the deadbolt electrically.

Rim Exit Device Electric Strikes

Rim exit devices use a Pullman-type latchbolt that is geometrically different from a cylindrical or mortise latch. Rim electric strikes are specifically designed for this geometry and are significantly larger and heavier-duty than cylindrical strikes. They semi-surface mount rather than recess fully into the frame. For double doors with surface vertical rod (SVR) exit devices, the bottom rod is typically deactivated and locking occurs only at the top of the door with a single rim electric strike. The top rod latch type (Pullman, carriage, pin) must be confirmed before selecting the keeper style in the rim electric strike.

Browse Von Duprin electric strike parts for cylindrical, mortise, and rim applications at SecurityParts.com.

Power: 12V vs 24V DC, AC Buzzing, and Wire Run Sizing

DC vs AC: Why Buzzing Happens and How to Fix It

AC-powered electric strikes buzz. The solenoid vibrates at the frequency of the alternating current (60 Hz), producing the characteristic noise. DC-powered strikes operate quietly: the solenoid activates with a soft click and holds silently. For any commercial installation where the electric strike is in a lobby, office entry, or anywhere occupants can hear it, DC power is the correct specification. AC is acceptable only in industrial or mechanical areas where ambient noise masks the buzzing.

If an existing installation is buzzing, add a rectifier between the transformer and the strike to convert AC to DC without replacing the power supply. A rectifier converts the AC waveform to pulsing DC, which significantly reduces solenoid vibration. For the quietest operation on a retrofit, replace the AC supply with a dedicated DC power supply.

12V vs 24V: Voltage Drop on Long Wire Runs

Both 12VDC and 24VDC are standard for electric strikes. For new installations, 24VDC is the better specification: at equal current draw, 24V delivers twice the power, and voltage drop over long wire runs is half as significant as at 12V. For wire runs over 200 feet, a 12V system may not deliver sufficient voltage at the strike to reliably actuate the solenoid. Check the manufacturer's voltage drop tables before finalizing wire gauge and run length. If an existing 12V installation shows intermittent strike release (works sometimes but not others), check the voltage at the strike terminals under load (when the access control panel triggers the release). If the voltage has dropped below the strike's minimum operating voltage, increase the wire gauge or switch to 24V.

Power Supply Sizing: Inrush Current, Not Holding Current

Sizing the power supply to the steady-state holding current is the most common power supply error in electric strike installations. Electric strikes have a momentary inrush current when the solenoid first activates that is significantly higher than the holding current. Size the power supply at 150 percent of the peak inrush current of all strikes that could activate simultaneously. A power supply sized only to holding current may actuate one strike reliably but fail to actuate multiple strikes when they trigger at the same time.

Common Electric Strike Troubleshooting

Strike Not Releasing When Triggered

Check voltage at the strike terminals under load (while the access control panel is sending the unlock signal). Use a multimeter. If voltage is present but the strike does not release, the solenoid may be failed and the strike needs replacement. If voltage is low or absent, check the power supply output, wire connections at the panel, and wire continuity. Voltage drop over long runs is the most common field failure cause.

Strike Releases But Door Does Not Open

The keeper has released but the latch is still engaged in the keeper pocket under door preload pressure. Door preload occurs when the door is pressing against the frame (from air pressure, tight weather stripping, or a slight warp). The latch presses against the keeper even when it retracts. The fix: check door gap at the strike side, adjust the door stop if it is pulling the door too tightly against the frame, and verify that the strike lip is aligned correctly. Some strikes have adjustable lip length to accommodate door gap variation.

Deadlatch Plunger Binding the Keeper

On cylindrical lock installations, the auxiliary deadlatch plunger sits beside the main latchbolt. If the strike keeper geometry allows the plunger to fall behind the keeper edge rather than riding over it, the plunger binds the keeper in the retracted position and the keeper cannot reset after the door closes. This prevents the door from latching on the next closure. The fix: verify that the strike is the correct model for the lock, check the plunger clearance in the strike pocket, and if necessary use a strike with a guard plate or plunger deflector.

Strike Buzzing on DC Power

If a strike that should be DC-powered is buzzing, check whether the power supply output is truly DC or actually AC using a multimeter on the AC voltage setting. Some inexpensive power supplies labeled as DC output deliver unfiltered rectified AC that still contains significant AC ripple. Replace with a filtered, regulated DC power supply.

For electric strike troubleshooting support and OEM replacement parts, contact SecurityParts.com at 845-935-0301 or the SecurityParts.com contact page.

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Electric Strike Parts

We document the specific NFPA 80 reason fail-safe electric strikes cannot be used on fire-rated doors: keeper retraction on power loss removes positive latching, allowing fire pressure to push the door open. We document the Cook County Administration Building fire as the origin of IBC stairwell reentry requirements and the specific reason electric strikes cannot solve both fire door latching and stairwell reentry simultaneously. We document the deadlatch plunger binding failure mode that is the most common field installation problem on cylindrical lock electric strike applications. We document the 150 percent inrush current rule for power supply sizing and the 200-foot wire run threshold for 12V vs 24V selection.

Browse Von Duprin electric strike replacement parts, Von Duprin exit device parts for rim electric strike pairings, and Schlage L Series mortise lock parts for mortise electric strike applications. Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

Frequently Asked Questions 

What is the difference between fail-safe and fail-secure electric strikes?

Fail-secure stays locked when power is lost: power is applied to unlock, spring holds keeper locked without power. Required where security must be maintained during power failure. Fail-safe unlocks when power is lost: power is applied to lock, keeper releases without power. Required on required egress paths where doors must always allow exit during emergencies. The correct fail mode is determined by the door's life safety role, not by security preference.

Why must electric strikes on fire-rated doors be fail-secure, not fail-safe?

NFPA 80 requires fire doors to be positively latching at all times when closed. A fail-safe electric strike retracts its keeper on power loss, leaving only a spring latch in an open pocket. Fire pressure can push the latch through and open the door, compromising the fire separation. A fail-secure strike keeps the keeper extended on power loss, maintaining positive latching. UL listings confirm this: Von Duprin fail-secure strikes carry UL fire and burglary listings; fail-safe strikes carry only a burglary listing.

Can electric strikes be used on stairwell doors that require reentry?

No. A fire-rated stairwell door needs fail-secure for positive latching (NFPA 80) and fail-safe for stairwell reentry (IBC over 4 stories). No single electric strike can satisfy both simultaneously. The correct hardware is fail-safe electrified trim on a fire exit hardware device: the trim unlocks the stair-side lever for reentry while the fire exit hardware maintains latch engagement for fire door compliance. The origin of the reentry requirement is the October 17, 2003 Cook County Administration Building fire in Chicago, where six people died after being unable to reenter floors from a smoke-filled stairwell.

What are the different electric strike types for cylindrical, mortise, and rim exit device locks?

Cylindrical: standard ANSI strikes for 1/2- to 5/8-inch latchbolt. Most common. Check deadlatch plunger clearance at keeper edge. Mortise: deeper keeper pocket for up to 3/4-inch latchbolt. Only releases latchbolt, not deadbolt. Rim exit device: Pullman-type geometry, larger and heavier-duty, semi-surface mounted. Not interchangeable with cylindrical or mortise strikes. Always verify compatibility with the specific lock model, not just the lock type.

Why does an electric strike buzz, and how do I fix it?

AC-powered strikes buzz because the solenoid vibrates at 60 Hz. Fix by adding a rectifier to convert AC to DC, or replacing the power supply with a filtered DC supply. If a DC strike is buzzing, the power supply may be unfiltered rectified AC with significant ripple. Test with a multimeter on AC voltage setting at the strike terminals: true DC should show near-zero on AC setting. Replace with a regulated DC supply.

What is the correct power supply voltage for electric strikes and how do I size the power supply?

Prefer 24VDC for new installations: half the current draw of 12V at equal power, better performance on long wire runs. For wire runs over 200 feet, 12V may not deliver sufficient voltage reliably. Size the power supply at 150 percent of the peak inrush current of all strikes that could activate simultaneously, not to the steady-state holding current. An undersized supply fails to actuate multiple strikes simultaneously even if it handles a single strike reliably.

Commercial Door Hardware for Parking Garages: Exit Devices, Stairwell Locks and Corrosion-Resistant Hardware Guide

Parking garages are one of the harshest environments for commercial door hardware. Road salt, moisture, vehicle exhaust, and extreme temperature swings destroy standard commercial hardware in a few years. Stairwell doors in structures over 4 stories have specific reentry requirements under the IBC. Exit devices on pedestrian doors need to be Grade 1 and, on exposed or semi-exposed openings, should carry the Von Duprin OUT outdoor-rated designation. This guide covers what you need, why the environment matters, and how to order the right parts.

A parking garage looks simple on paper: concrete, cars, and a handful of pedestrian doors. In practice, it is one of the most demanding hardware environments in commercial construction. The combination of road salt chlorides, condensation from temperature swings, vehicle exhaust, andonstant mechanical use from people who are often carrying items or moving quickly creates failure rates that surprise property managers who spec standard commercial hardware and expect the same service life they get from interior office building doors.

Browse parking garage hardware parts at SecurityParts.com: Von Duprin OUT outdoor-rated exit device parts for parking garage stairwell doors, LCN 4040XP EDA door closer parts for parking garage pedestrian entries, Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts for stairwell interior doors, and the complete Allegion hardware catalog.

Why Standard Door Hardware Fails in Parking Garages

The failure mechanism is not complicated: chloride ions from road salt eat through steel-based hardware finishes and reach the base metal. Once the base metal is exposed, corrosion accelerates. Standard commercial finishes like satin chrome over zinc die-cast or painted steel over carbon steel are not designed to resist the chloride concentration you get in a parking structure that serves a northern climate market for six months of the year.

There are four specific conditions that together create this environment. First, direct moisture from rain, snow, and wash-off from vehicles entering the structure. Open-sided garages have no wall protection from weather. Even enclosed garages see condensation on hardware surfaces from the temperature differential between outside air and interior air. Second, road salt tracked in on tires. Every vehicle that enters in winter months brings chloride-laden slush into the structure. It evaporates. The chloride stays. Third, vehicle exhaust. Combustion byproducts create slightly acidic condensation on surfaces, which accelerates the corrosion process on both finishes and lubricants inside hardware mechanisms. Fourth, temperature swings. A northern garage might see ambient temperatures ranging from negative ten degrees to positive ninety degrees Fahrenheit across a year. Hydraulic closer fluid viscosity changes with temperature, and hardware finish adhesion is stressed by this repeated thermal cycling.

The practical consequence: a standard commercial exit device or cylindrical lock installed in a parking garage stairwell that sees high salt exposure will typically show visible corrosion within two years and functional failure within three to five years. Hardware specified for the environment lasts a decade or more.

The corrosion that happens inside the mechanism, not just on the surface: Property managers who specify outdoor-rated finishes but standard internal mechanisms are partially solving the problem. The visible surface corrosion is arrested. But standard internal springs, cams, and latch components made from carbon steel still corrode when chloride-laden moisture enters the mechanism case through gaps in the housing. Von Duprin's OUT designation modifies both the external finish and the internal components and adds weep holes to drain water that enters the case. Hardware specified for outdoor exposure should carry the OUT designation throughout, not just a corrosion-resistant finish on standard internal parts.

Von Duprin OUT Option: Outdoor-Rated Exit Devices for Parking Structures

Von Duprin's OUT option is available on the 98/99 Series exit devices and designates a configuration specifically engineered for moisture, temperature variation, and corrosion resistance in exterior and semi-exposed applications. Von Duprin describes OUT as designed for courtyards, perimeter security, rooftops, and patios: the same environmental conditions present in open parking garage stairwells and pedestrian exit doors.

The OUT designation includes corrosion-resistant coatings on internal mechanism components, hardware selected for outdoor exposure throughout the device, and weep holes in the mechanism case that allow water to drain rather than pool and corrode internal parts. For parking garage stairwell exit doors that are open to exterior air and moisture, the OUT option is the correct specification for the 98/99 Series exit device.

The Von Duprin 22 Series is also worth considering for parking garage stairwell applications. Von Duprin specifically identifies the 22 Series as ideal for back-door employee entrances and parking garage stairwells. The 22 Series is a medium-duty touch bar device (not push pad) designed for medium to low traffic openings where aesthetics and cost are considerations. For low-traffic stairwell doors in smaller parking structures, the 22 Series provides a simpler, more economical alternative to the full 98/99 Series. Browse Von Duprin exit device parts for parking garage applications at SecurityParts.com.

Stairwell Requirements in Parking Garages Over 4 Stories

The IBC requires stairwell reentry on buildings and structures over four stories above grade. NFPA 101 includes similar provisions. The intent is to prevent occupants from being trapped in a stairwell during an emergency: if every stairwell door allows reentry from the stair side on every floor, a person who enters the stairwell can exit at any level if the stairwell becomes unusable and find an alternative means of egress.

In a parking garage context, this means that in a structure with more than four levels above grade, every stairwell door must be equipped with hardware that allows reentry from the stair side without a key. The stairwell doors are still self-closing and positively latching (fire exit hardware on fire-rated enclosures), and they can be secured against entry from the parking floors during after-hours periods using electrified access control. But the stair side must always allow exit.

Fail-Safe Electrified Trim for Stairwell Reentry

The most common hardware for parking garage stairwell reentry doors is fail-safe electrified trim on a Von Duprin exit device. The exit device provides the push-bar egress from the parking floor side and the fire exit hardware listing for the fire-rated stairwell enclosure. The electrified trim on the stair side is fail-safe: it unlocks automatically on power loss, ensuring that anyone in the stairwell can reenter a floor even during a power failure. During business hours, the trim is typically unlocked for free access. During after-hours periods, the access control system can require a credential on the parking floor side while maintaining free reentry from the stair side.

Browse Von Duprin exit device parts with fail-safe electrified trim for stairwell reentry at SecurityParts.com.

Door Closers for Parking Garage Pedestrian Entry Doors

Parking garage pedestrian entry doors see high cycle counts from commuters, shoppers, and building tenants moving quickly, often with hands full. The LCN 4040XP with Extra Duty Arm (EDA) is the correct specification for these openings. The EDA adds a forged steel main arm and forearm to the standard 4040XP aluminum arm, preventing the arm-bending deformation that eventually stops a lighter arm from fully closing a door under repeated high-force operation.

For exterior pedestrian entry doors exposed to wind, the 4040XP's backcheck valve should be set to limit the door travel and prevent the arm from being damaged if the door is caught by a gust. The hold-open position on these doors is typically not desired for security reasons: a pedestrian entry door held open allows unauthorized entry to the pedestrian circulation area from the parking level without passing through a controlled point.

In cold climates, specify the LCN 4040XP with Liquid X all-weather hydraulic fluid. Standard closer fluid thickens at low temperature and causes slower closing speeds, higher opening resistance, and in extreme cold, failure to latch. Liquid X maintains more consistent viscosity across a wider temperature range and is the correct specification for exterior parking garage doors in any market with below-freezing winter temperatures. Browse LCN 4040XP EDA door closer parts for parking garage pedestrian entry doors at SecurityParts.com.

Finish Selection for Parking Garage Hardware

Hardware finish selection in a parking garage environment should start from the harshest expected condition, not from the aesthetic preference. For most parking structures in markets with winter road salt use, US32D (satin stainless steel) is the correct specification for locksets, exit device trim, and any hardware directly exposed to moisture or chloride-laden air. Stainless steel does not rely on a plated surface over a steel or zinc base: the corrosion resistance is inherent in the material. A scratch on US32D stainless does not create a corrosion initiation point the way a scratch on US26D (satin chrome over brass) or US26 (bright chrome) does.

For hardware in enclosed interior stairwells with some air circulation but limited direct moisture exposure, US26D (satin chrome over brass) is generally adequate. The brass base provides better inherent corrosion resistance than steel, and the lacquer over chrome surface holds up reasonably well in indirect exposure environments. US26D on enclosed garage stairwell interior hardware is a common specification that provides good value without the cost premium of full stainless throughout.

The finish incompatibility that creates galvanic corrosion in parking garage hardware: When two dissimilar metals are in contact in the presence of moisture, the less noble metal corrodes preferentially. This is galvanic corrosion, and it is relevant to parking garage hardware because stainless steel (US32D) exit device trim mounted on a steel door with moisture between them will cause the steel door to corrode at the mounting points. The solution is to use isolation hardware (nylon washers, non-metallic spacers) between the stainless trim and the steel door where the two materials contact each other in a wet environment. This detail is specified on Von Duprin OUT devices and should be confirmed on any installation where stainless trim is mounted on non-stainless substrate in a corrosive environment.

Parking Garage Hardware Specification Summary

To keep it straightforward: for stairwell exit doors, use Von Duprin 98/99 Series with the OUT option and US32D stainless finish. For stairwells over 4 stories, add fail-safe electrified trim. For lower-traffic stairwells in smaller structures, the Von Duprin 22 Series is a simpler, adequate alternative. For pedestrian entry doors, use the LCN 4040XP EDA with Liquid X fluid in cold climates. For interior stairwell cylindrical locks, use Schlage ND Series in US26D finish with Grade 1 certification. For all exterior hardware, specify US32D stainless on any hardware in direct moisture or salt exposure.

Browse replacement parts for all these products at SecurityParts.com. Contact the team at 845-935-0301 or the SecurityParts.com contact page for parking garage hardware specification support and same-day OEM parts shipping.

Frequently Asked Questions 

Why does standard commercial door hardware fail faster in parking garages?

Road salt chlorides tracked in by vehicles, moisture from open sides and condensation, vehicle exhaust creating acidic surface deposits, and wide temperature swings combine to attack standard hardware finishes and corrode base steel. Standard commercial chrome and nickel plated steel hardware shows visible corrosion within two to four years in high-salt parking environments. Hardware specified for these conditions uses corrosion-resistant materials throughout, including internal mechanism components, not just corrosion-resistant surface finishes.

What is the Von Duprin OUT outdoor-rated exit device and when is it specified?

The Von Duprin OUT option modifies the standard 98/99 Series exit device with corrosion-resistant internal components, outdoor-rated materials throughout, and weep holes that drain water entering the mechanism case. It is specified for parking garage stairwell exit doors open to exterior air and moisture, perimeter exit doors, rooftop terrace doors, and any semi-exposed application where the device faces weather or chloride exposure. The Von Duprin 22 Series is a simpler alternative for low-traffic parking garage stairwells in smaller structures.

What are the stairwell reentry hardware requirements for parking garages over 4 stories?

The IBC requires reentry hardware on stairwell doors in buildings over 4 stories above grade, allowing occupants in the stairwell to reenter any floor without a key. In parking garages, fail-safe electrified trim on Von Duprin exit devices is the standard solution: the exit device provides push-bar egress and fire exit hardware listing from the parking floor side, while the fail-safe electrified trim on the stair side unlocks automatically on power loss and allows free reentry from the stairwell side. During after-hours periods, the parking floor entry side can require a credential while the stair side always allows free exit.

Is panic hardware required on all doors in a parking garage?

Parking garages are classified as Group S-2 storage occupancy (open garages) rather than assembly occupancy, so the assembly occupancy panic hardware threshold (50 persons under IBC) does not directly apply based on occupancy type. However, Von Duprin exit devices are widely specified on parking garage stairwell egress doors, perimeter exit doors, and pedestrian entry doors regardless of strict occupant load calculations because they satisfy egress requirements, handle high-cycle traffic, and are the Grade 1 durable solution for commercial egress doors in a demanding environment.

What door closer is best for parking garage pedestrian entry doors?

The LCN 4040XP with Extra Duty Arm (EDA) is the correct specification. The EDA adds a forged steel main arm and forearm that resists the bending deformation generated by high-force operation in a commuter-traffic environment. In cold climates, specify with Liquid X all-weather hydraulic fluid to maintain consistent closing speed at low ambient temperature. Set the backcheck valve to limit door travel and protect the arm from wind damage on exterior-facing entry doors.

What finishes are appropriate for parking garage door hardware?

US32D (satin stainless steel) for any hardware directly exposed to moisture or road salt. Stainless steel provides inherent corrosion resistance throughout the material, not just a plated surface, and a scratch does not create a corrosion initiation point. US26D (satin chrome over brass) is adequate for enclosed interior stairwell hardware with limited direct moisture exposure. Avoid US26 bright chrome and painted steel finishes on any hardware exposed to road salt or direct moisture. When mounting stainless trim on steel doors in wet environments, use isolation hardware between the dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion.

LCN 4040XP Installation Template Guide: Which Template to Use and How to Apply It

 

 

LCN 4040XP surface-mounted door closer

LCN 4040XP surface-mounted door closer. View model diagrams and parts.

 

Quick Answer

The LCN 4040XP ships with two installation templates. Use the 110-180 degree template for push side and EDA arm configurations. Use the 120 degree template for parallel arm pull side and top jamb pull side configurations. Both templates fold at the door edge, align to a centerline height, and mark all hole locations before drilling. Most top jamb installations also require the 4040XP-18 plate when the top rail is under 3-3/4 inches. If your template is missing, the PDF sheets are downloadable from the manufacturer, or a reusable metal template kit is available from LCN through your distributor.

The LCN 4040XP installation template is the most important piece of paper that ships inside the box. It is also the piece most frequently discarded or lost on the job site. That single mistake is the source of most misaligned holes, stripped screws, and improperly mounted closers in the field.

This guide covers everything a locksmith, facilities technician, or contractor needs before picking up a drill: which of the two 4040XP templates applies to your configuration, how to read each column, how to set handing, how to align and punch through the template correctly for each door type, and what to do when the template is missing. For a full overview of the closer itself, see the LCN door closer parts guide.

Browse the LCN 4040XP series parts catalog for replacement components and the 4040XP model page for interactive diagrams.

 

Why the LCN 4040XP Uses Two Separate Templates

The 4040XP mounts in three primary configurations, and each places the closer body and arm shoe in a different geometric relationship to the door top edge and door face. A single template cannot locate holes accurately for all three without becoming unreadable in the field.

LCN supplies two separate templates, each optimized for a specific range of arm geometries:

  • 110-180 degree template: for push side mounting with a regular arm, and for EDA (Extra Duty Arm) configurations. Covers opening angles from 110 to 180 degrees.
  • 120 degree template: for parallel arm pull side mounting and top jamb push side mounting. Designed for 120-degree maximum opening applications.

Selecting the wrong template does not produce an obvious error before you drill. The holes appear to be in reasonable positions. The problem only becomes visible after mounting, when the arm geometry is wrong, the closing force is uneven, or the arm shoe cannot reach the correct pre-load angle on the shaft. For help choosing the right closer size and configuration for your opening before installation, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide.

 

Which LCN 4040XP Template Applies to Your Configuration

Confirm your arm type and mounting side before touching the template. Use this reference table:

Arm ConfigurationMounting SideCorrect TemplateMax Opening
Regular arm (standard)Push side110-180 degree template180 degrees
EDA (Extra Duty Arm)Push side110-180 degree template180 degrees
CUSH arm (cushion stop)Push side110-180 degree templateVaries by templated stop
Parallel arm (PA)Pull side120 degree template120 degrees
Regular arm (top jamb)Push side (top jamb)120 degree template120 degrees
Regular arm (pull side)Pull side120 degree template120 degrees

 

LCN 4040XP EDA arm and CUSH arm assembly diagram showing arm types used with the 110-180 degree template

LCN 4040XP EDA and CUSH arm assemblies. View arm assembly diagrams and parts.

 

Note on CUSH stop points: CUSH arm installations use the 110-180 template, but actual stop points are approximately 5 degrees more than the templated stop. A 180-degree template position yields a stop of approximately 175 degrees. Factor this offset into your planning when matching an existing door stop position.

 

How to Determine Door Handing Before Using the Template

Both templates have separate columns for left-hand (LH) and right-hand (RH) doors. Using the wrong column positions the closer body incorrectly relative to the arm shaft, which produces wrong arm geometry and inconsistent closing force.

Stand on the pull side of the door (the side without the closer body) and face the door:

  • Hinges on your left: left-hand (LH) door
  • Hinges on your right: right-hand (RH) door

Most LCN 4040XP templates label the LH and RH columns with an arrow and a "Hinge Side" marker. Select the matching column before marking any holes. If you are unsure which closer type is correct for your door, the commercial door closers types guide covers mounting side, arm type, and application requirements by closer family.

 

Reading the LCN 4040XP Template: What Each Element Means

Both templates show the same categories of information arranged in columns by arm type and handing. Understanding each dimension prevents the most common field errors. For a labeled diagram of every component on the 4040XP, see the door closer parts diagram guide.

 

Closer Body Mounting Holes

These are the holes for the four or five screws that mount the closer body directly to the door face (push side) or door head (top jamb). Their position is shown relative to two reference points: the door top edge and the door face. The standard centerline height for most push side 4040XP installations is 1 inch from the door stop rabbet, measured from the top of the door down.

 

Arm Shoe Bracket Holes

For push side regular arm and EDA installations, the arm shoe mounts to the door frame on the strike side. The template shows the horizontal backset for the shoe: the distance from the door edge to the center of the shoe bracket holes. This backset changes based on door width and arm configuration. The template prints the backset range so you can confirm the shoe will land on a solid frame face with adequate fastener engagement.

 

Spring Power Chart

Both templates include a spring power adjustment chart that matches door width to the correct spring power setting (1 through 6). Set spring power before mounting the body. Adjusting it after mounting requires removing the cover, which adds time to every installation. For a full explanation of spring power ranges and ANSI sizing requirements, see the commercial door closer sizing guide.

 

Step-by-Step: How to Apply the LCN 4040XP Installation Template

  1. Select the correct template. Confirm your arm configuration and mounting side using the table above. Locate the 110-180 degree or 120 degree template.
  2. Set spring power first. Look up the door width on the spring power chart. Adjust the spring power dial on the closer before mounting using the LCN FAST Power Adjust. Easiest to do before the body is in place.
  3. Set the centerline height. Measure from the top of the door down to the closer centerline. For most push side installations, this is 1 inch from the door stop rabbet on the pull side face. Mark a horizontal pencil line across the full door face.
  4. Fold or peel and align the template. The paper template folds along the door edge line. Align the fold with the door edge and match the top of the template to the door top edge. The centerline mark on the template should align with your pencil line.
  5. Tape the template securely. Apply masking tape at two or three points. Do not rely on the fold alone. Movement during marking shifts hole positions.
  6. Center punch all hole locations. Use a spring-loaded center punch through the template at every marked hole. Do not skip this step on hollow metal doors, where a drill bit without a starter dimple walks across the surface.
  7. Remove the template, then drill. Remove the template before drilling. Drill 1/8 inch pilot holes at all closer body locations for SRT fasteners. For through-bolted wood doors, drill full-diameter clearance holes.

For the complete installation walkthrough including arm attachment, valve adjustment, and ADA compliance checks after mounting, see the how to install a door closer on a commercial door guide.

 

Template Application by Door Type

The template procedure is the same regardless of door material, but the drilling technique changes based on the substrate.

 

Hollow Metal Doors

Always use a center punch before drilling. Without a starter dimple, the drill bit walks on the metal surface and the hole lands off-center. Drill a 1/8 inch pilot hole at each location. The SRT screws tap their own threads as they are driven in. Do not over-torque the screws. The hollow steel facing is typically 16 to 18 gauge and the threads strip quickly if driven past resistance.

 

Wood Doors

Wood doors accept SRT screws directly, but pilot holes still prevent splitting near the door top edge where grain runs longitudinally. For heavy wood doors or through-bolted installations with machine screws and sex bolts, drill full-diameter clearance holes at the template locations.

 

Aluminum Storefront Doors

Aluminum requires the same center punch step as hollow metal. The material is softer and a bit will walk even more easily without a starter dimple. Many aluminum door manufacturers require through-bolted mounting with reinforcement plates behind the door rail. Confirm this with the door specification before using SRT screws.

 

Top Jamb Installation: Special Requirements Before You Template

Top jamb mounting places the closer body on the door head with the arm shoe on the door face near the top edge. Before templating any top jamb installation, check one critical dimension.

Measure the frame face (top rail depth). The exposed frame face between the door face and the wall must be at least 3-1/2 inches for a flush header or single-rabbet frame. If the top rail is less than 3-3/4 inches deep, the closer body will overhang the frame face and cannot mount securely.

For frames with insufficient depth, the LCN 4040XP-18 drop plate is required. This plate extends the mounting surface and provides the additional frame face needed. Order the plate before the installation date. The template for top jamb installations notes this requirement, but it is easy to miss when reading quickly on the job. On fire-rated doors, top jamb installations must also comply with the closer's UL listing requirements. The fire door closer adjustment guide covers the post-installation checks that apply.

 

EDA and CUSH Arm Templates: What Changes

The EDA and CUSH arm configurations both use the 110-180 degree template, but each has installation details that differ from a standard regular arm push side job.

LCN 4040XP arm assemblies diagram showing regular arm parallel arm EDA and CUSH arm configurations

LCN 4040XP arm assembly configurations. View arm assembly diagrams and parts.

 

EDA (Extra Duty Arm)

The EDA arm uses the same 110-180 degree template as the standard regular arm push side installation. EDA and CUSH arm closers include the 4040XP-201 fifth hole spacer to support the shoe at an additional fastener location. The template marks the fifth hole position. Make sure to punch and drill this hole. It is easy to miss when the standard four-hole pattern is habitual.

 

CUSH Arm (Cushion Stop)

The CUSH arm also uses the 110-180 degree template, but stop points differ from the template labels. A door templated at 90 degrees will actually stop at approximately 95 degrees with the CUSH arm. A 180-degree templated position yields a stop of approximately 175 degrees. Build this offset into your planning if you are matching an existing door stop position. For part-by-part identification of every component in these arm assemblies, see the LCN door closer parts guide.

 

What to Do When the LCN 4040XP Template Is Missing

The paper template gets lost, discarded, or damaged on busy job sites. When it is missing, you have three options:

Option 1: Download the PDF Template Sheets

Allegion publishes each LCN 4040XP template as a downloadable PDF through their resource portal. The templates must be printed at 100 percent scale on standard 8.5 x 11 inch paper. Do not print to "fit page" or the dimensions will be wrong and every hole location will be off.

 

Option 2: Source the LCN 4040XP Metal Template Kit

The LCN 4040XP metal template kit is a reusable machined aluminum drilling guide that permanently replaces the paper template. It is the professional choice for crews that install multiple 4040XP closers regularly.

  • 4040XP-107: metal template for push side EDA arm configurations
  • 4040XP-107CUSH: metal template for CUSH arm configurations

The metal kit eliminates template shift during center punching, does not tear or degrade, and requires no tape. On hollow metal doors with multiple closers being installed in the same session, it dramatically reduces setup time per door. Call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 for help identifying the correct kit for your configuration.

 

Option 3: Use Known Hole Dimensions Manually

If neither option is immediately available, locate the published installation instruction sheets for your specific configuration. The hole positions are shown as dimensioned drawings in each sheet. Transfer the dimensions manually using a tape measure and a square, then mark with a center punch before drilling. This approach is slower and carries more risk of measurement error.

For parts sourcing questions, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 or visit the contact page.

 

Spring Power Adjustment After Mounting

The LCN 4040XP uses the FAST Power Adjust system, which allows spring power changes without tools and without removing the cover. Locate the adjustment slot on the back of the closer near the pivot end. Settings run from 1 (lightest) to 6 (strongest).

Door WidthSpring Power Setting
30 inches and under1 or 2
30 to 36 inches2 or 3
36 to 42 inches3 or 4
42 to 48 inches4 or 5
48 to 54 inches5 or 6

For ADA-compliant openings, the maximum opening force is 5 pounds on push side doors. Verify the opening force with a push-pull gauge after setting spring power. For a full walkthrough of sweep speed, latch speed, and backcheck adjustment after installation, see the commercial door closer adjustment guide.

 

LCN 4040XP Parts and Resources at Security Parts

LCN 4000 Series surface-mounted door closer parts catalog at Security Parts

LCN 4000 Series surface-mounted door closers. Browse all door closer parts.

 

Security Parts stocks LCN 4040XP replacement parts with same-day shipping on stocked items. The LCN 4040XP model page includes interactive assembly diagrams with labeled component positions. The LCN 4040XP series parts catalog lists every stocked part by category. Browse the full door closers parts catalog for LCN and other manufacturer components.

For pre-order compatibility support, call 845-935-0301 or contact the team through the contact page.

 

Related LCN Guides


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware parts specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for LCN, Von Duprin, Schlage, Falcon, and other leading commercial hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 98/99 Series Exit Device Parts Guide: Components, Series ID, Trim and Ordering Reference

The Von Duprin 98 and 99 Series are the benchmark Grade 1 commercial exit devices. The 98 has a smooth mechanism case; the 99 has a grooved mechanism case housing a fluid dampener that controls push pad return speed. Both carry identical UL 305, UL 10C, and ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification. The grooved case on the 99 is functional, not decorative. The 990-series trim stanchions must match the 98/99 center case mounting pattern; mixing series trims does not work. The -F suffix designates fire exit hardware and prohibits mechanical dogging. QEL is the quiet motor alternative to EL solenoid latch retraction. The 996L lever trim is the current replacement for discontinued 992L and 994L models. Parts compatibility extends across the full 98/99 production history, including devices nearly 40 years old.

The Von Duprin 99 replaced the 88 Series as the North American commercial exit device standard in the early 2000s. Its flat push pad actuator replaced the crossbar profile of the 88 and 33A and became the default specification for schools, hospitals, office towers, government buildings, and institutional facilities nationwide. The 98/99 modular design means that parts ordered today are compatible with devices installed decades ago, which is why these are the most actively ordered exit device replacement parts in the commercial hardware market.

Browse Von Duprin 98/99 Series OEM replacement parts at Security Parts: Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts and assemblies, complete Von Duprin parts catalog including all series, Von Duprin compatible electric strike parts, Von Duprin exit alarm parts, and the complete Allegion OEM exit device catalog.

 

98 vs 99: How to Identify the Series by the Mechanism Case

The first thing to identify on any Von Duprin exit device is the series. On the 98/99, the identification is immediate and visual: look at the mechanism case (the metal housing that contains the device's operating mechanism, mounted on the door face).

 

Von Duprin 98 Series

Smooth mechanism case; no fluid dampener
Case exteriorSmooth flat surface on mechanism case
Fluid dampenerNo. Push pad returns immediately to rest after each operation.
UL 305Listed (panic hardware)
UL 10C (-F)Listed for fire exit hardware (with -F suffix)
ANSI Grade 1A156.3 Grade 1 certified
Trim compat.990, 996L, 376, 696, 697, 252 series trim
FinishesUS3, US3A, US4, US4A, US10, US15, US26, US26D, US28, 313, 315, 643E, US32D (98 only adds US15/US32D)

 

Von Duprin 99 Series

Grooved mechanism case; fluid dampener inside
Case exteriorGrooved/channeled surface on mechanism case (functional, not decorative)
Fluid dampenerYes. The groove marks where the dampener assembly is housed. Push pad returns at a controlled, quiet rate.
UL 305Listed (panic hardware)
UL 10C (-F)Listed for fire exit hardware (with -F suffix)
ANSI Grade 1A156.3 Grade 1 certified
Trim compat.990, 996L, 376, 696, 697, 252 series trim (same as 98)
FinishesUS3, US3A, US4, US4A, US10, US26, US26D, US26D-AM, US28, 313, 315, 643E
 
 
The grooved case is functional, not decorative. The dampener is not field-swappable: The 99 Series groove is exactly where the fluid dampener assembly is housed inside the mechanism case. This is not an aesthetic design choice. On a 98 without a dampener, the push pad springs back to rest position immediately after each depression. In high-cycle applications (schools, hospitals, government buildings), immediate spring-back can be noisy and can be perceived as harsh operation. The 99's dampener produces a smooth, controlled return. Critically: the dampener assembly inside the 99 is not a field-installable upgrade for a 98. The case itself is different. If dampened operation is needed on an existing 98 installation, the device body must be replaced with a 99 device body.

 

 

Von Duprin 98/99 Device Types

 

Rim Device

Standard single door; most common type

Model prefix: 98 / 99 (without rod suffix)

Handing: Non-handed (except when SD, -2, or SS options are specified)

Latch engagement: Rim latch bolt engages a rim strike (299 or 310 series) mounted on the door frame

Door prep: Covers standard 86 or 161 cutout on hollow metal doors

Stile: Minimum 4-3/4 inch (121mm) door stile width

 

 

Surface Vertical Rod (SVR)

Double door pairs; rods visible on door surface

Model prefix: 9827 / 9927

Handing: Non-handed

Latch engagement: Top rod engages head frame; bottom rod engages door bottom rail or threshold

Use: Double door openings where no astragal is present

Door prep: Covers 86 or 161 cutouts

 

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (CVR)

Double door pairs; rods hidden inside door

Model prefix: 9847/9848 / 9947/9948

Handing: Handed (specify handing when ordering)

Latch engagement: Concealed rods run inside the door body to top and bottom latch points

Door prep: Requires 161 cutout inside door for mechanism

Use: When surface rods are aesthetically unacceptable; wood or aluminum doors

 

 

Mortise Lock (9875/9975)

Mortise latch inside door body

Model prefix: 9875 (smooth) / 9975 (grooved/dampened)

Handing: Non-handed

Latch engagement: Mortise latch case inside door body engages strike in frame

Door prep: Requires 86 cutout in door

Stile: Minimum 4-3/4 inch (121mm)

 

Von Duprin 990 Trim Family: Models, Functions, and Stanchion Compatibility

The trim on a Von Duprin exit device is the outside escutcheon plate and hardware that mounts on the exterior (non-egress) side of the door, providing the means for authorized entry. The 990 trim family is the standard trim for 98/99 Series devices. All 990 trim plates measure 3 inches wide by 14-3/16 inches tall and have integral stanchions on the back that align with the center case mounting screws of the 98/99 device.

 

Trim ModelANSI FunctionOutside OperationNotes
990DT / EOF01 / F02Pull handle (exit only); no keyNo outside access; egress only. 990DT has pull; EO has no outside trim.
990NLF03Key retracts latchbolt for outside entryNight latch. Rim cylinder required (not included). Field selectable from DT/NL as shipped.
990TPF04Thumbpiece (thumbturn) retracts latchboltPassage-style outside access; no key required. Remove NL drive screw to convert from NL.
996L / 996L-R&VF05/F07Lever; key locks/unlocks lever for outside entryReplaces discontinued 992L and 994L. Handed but field-reversible. 2-3/4" wide x 10-3/4" high escutcheon plate. Cylinder not included.
376 SeriesVariousNarrow stile trim for 33A/35A; not for 98/99 standardDo NOT use with standard wide-stile 98/99 devices. Different stanchion pattern.
 
Trim stanchion compatibility error that generates field rework: The 990 trim stanchions align specifically with the 98/99 Series center case mounting screw pattern. Von Duprin uses different center case spacing on different series. A locksmith who orders 990 trim for a 33A/35A device gets a trim plate where the stanchions do not align with the device case screw holes. Conversely, 376-series narrow stile trim ordered for a 98/99 wide stile device will not align. Always confirm the device series (98/99 vs 33A vs 22) before ordering trim. If the device model number is not visible, the center case width tells you the series: the 98/99 uses a wide case; the 33A/35A uses a narrow stile case.

 

The 996L: Current Replacement for Discontinued 992L and 994L Trim

The Von Duprin 996L is the current production lever trim for 98/99 Series devices. It replaces the discontinued 992L and 994L lever trim models. If you have a device with 992L or 994L trim that needs replacement, the 996L is the correct ordering part. The 996L escutcheon plate is 2-3/4 inches wide by 10-3/4 inches high and projects 27/32 inches from the door face. The lever handle projection is 2-7/8 inches. The cylinder is not included and must be ordered separately. Browse Von Duprin 996L lever trim replacement parts at Security Parts.

 

The Fire Rating Suffix: -F, Dogging Prohibition, and QEL Alternative

Adding -F to any Von Duprin 98/99 Series device designation produces the fire exit hardware version: 99-F, 98-F, 9927-F (SVR), and so on. The -F designation means the device has been independently tested and listed to UL 10C (Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies) in addition to the standard UL 305 panic hardware listing. Fire exit hardware bears the designation "Fire Exit Hardware" on its label. Standard panic hardware (98 without -F) may only be labeled "Panic Hardware."

The functional consequence of -F that most specifiers and locksmiths need to understand: the -F version has no mechanical dogging capability. NFPA 80 requires that fire doors positively latch when closed. Mechanical dogging holds the latch bolt retracted, preventing positive latching. If a fire-rated exit device is mechanically dogged and the door accidentally closes during a fire event, the door cannot positively latch. For this reason, Von Duprin fire exit hardware (-F) is manufactured without a hex dogging socket or cylinder dogging option.

The alternative for access control on fire-rated openings is QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction), which holds the latch retracted only when powered. On fire alarm activation or power loss, QEL releases to positive latching, restoring fire door compliance. Browse Von Duprin 99-F fire exit hardware and QEL parts at Security Parts.

 

Von Duprin 98/99 Suffix Options Reference

 

QEL Quiet Electric Latch Retraction

Motor retracts latch bolt quietly on credential signal. Preferred over EL for noise-sensitive environments. Compatible with fire-rated (-F) devices. QEL releases to positive latching on fire alarm or power loss.

 

EL Electric Latch Retraction

Continuous-duty solenoid retracts latch bolt on signal. Alternative to mechanical dogging for access control. Draws 0.22A. Compatible with fire-rated devices. Less quiet than QEL.

 

ESL Emergency Secure Lockdown

Interrupts power to QEL motor to extend latch bolt and lock outside trim. Inside push bar always free. Allows lockdown from inside the room or from access control system. Used in schools and large classrooms.

 

ALK Alarm Exit Kit

Unauthorized opening triggers 85-decibel horn. Key arms or disarms alarm. Non-relatch alarm: sounds until staff keys device. Used in retail and institutional secondary exits to deter unauthorized use.

 

CD Cylinder Dogging

Replaces hex key dogging. Uses a 1-1/4 inch mortise cylinder with inverted cam to dog the device. Allows key-controlled dogging where hex keys are not tracked. Not available on -F fire exit hardware.

 

CDSI / HDSI Cylinder/Hex Dogging Security Indicator

Provides at-a-glance visual indicator of whether device is currently dogged (latch held retracted) or secured. Critical in academic and government buildings where end-of-day door status must be visually confirmed without operating each device.

 

RX Pushpad Monitor Switch

SPDT microswitch signals the access control panel when the push bar is operated. Provides exit event audit trail for compliance. Can suppress door-forced-open alarm when push bar generates an exit event without outside credential.

 

LX Latchbolt Monitor Switch

Signals whether the latch bolt is extended (door latched) or retracted. Note: on 9849/9949 CVR devices, LX monitors trim input or electric dogging condition rather than latch bolt position directly.

 

AX Accessible (5 lb max force)

UL certified to meet the 5-pound maximum operating force requirement of the 2010 ADA and 2013 California Building Code. Exceeds ANSI/BHMA requirements. Required on accessible egress route doors.

 

PN Pneumatic Latch Retraction

For areas where electrical devices are prohibited (some healthcare, some government). Special linkage for mechanical or pneumatic dogging. Pneumatic air signal retracts latch bolt instead of solenoid or motor.

 

Commonly Replaced Von Duprin 98/99 Series Parts

  • Latch Return Spring (Latch Spring Kit)

    The most frequently replaced internal component. Controls latch bolt return to extended position after the push bar is released. When worn or broken, the latch does not return fully, preventing the door from latching. OEM latch return spring kits are available for rim, SVR, CVR, and mortise device types. Order by device type (not interchangeable between rim and vertical rod configurations). Browse Von Duprin 98/99 latch return spring kits at Security Parts.

  • Push Bar / Push Pad Assembly

    The push bar pivot points and push pad assembly are wear items in high-cycle institutional applications. Loose or wobbling push bar operation after tightening fasteners indicates worn pivot points requiring push bar assembly replacement. The 98/99 modular design allows push bar replacement without removing the entire device from the door.

  • 990 Trim Plate and 996L Lever Trim

    Trim plates are replaced for finish damage, lever wear, or function changes. The 996L is the current production replacement for the discontinued 992L and 994L. Cylinder not included with any 990NL or 996L trim order. Browse Von Duprin 990 and 996L trim replacement parts.

  • Rim Cylinder

    The rim cylinder in the 990NL trim is a standard 1-1/8 inch format rim cylinder. It is ordered and keyed separately from the trim plate. Specify keyway and keying requirements (master key, keyed alike, keyed different) when ordering. Browse Von Duprin compatible rim cylinder replacement parts.

  • Dogging Shaft and Adaptor Assembly

    The dogging shaft (for hex key dogging) and dogging adaptor are field-replaceable components on non-fire devices. The shaft accepts a 5/32 inch dogging key. The current dogging shaft has been the standard since 1998; pre-1998 devices use an older part number. Identify the device production date before ordering dogging components. Browse Von Duprin dogging shaft and adaptor replacement parts.

 
The 98/99 parts compatibility that extends nearly 40 years: The Von Duprin 99 has been in continuous production essentially unchanged in its platform since the late 1970s. Current production latch return springs, push bar assemblies, and trim components are compatible with devices installed in the 1990s and even the 1980s. This multi-decade backwards compatibility is a deliberate Von Duprin design commitment that makes the 98/99 the most economically practical exit device to maintain in aging institutional buildings. When a maintenance manager at a 1995 school building or a 2001 government facility needs to repair a Von Duprin 99, today's OEM replacement parts from SecurityParts.com fit the device installed 30 years ago.

Contact SecurityParts.com at 845-935-0301 or the  contact page for Von Duprin exit device parts identification and same-day OEM shipping support.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Von Duprin 98/99 Parts

Grooved case fluid dampener functional explanation, trim stanchion mismatch warning, -F dogging prohibition with QEL alternative, 996L replaces 992L and 994L, 40-year parts compatibility, and same-day OEM shipping.

 

Grooved Case is Functional

We document that the 99 Series groove is not cosmetic: it marks the location of the fluid dampener assembly inside the case. And the dampener is not field-installable on a 98: if dampened operation is needed on a 98 installation, the device body must be replaced. No competitor documents this at the parts ordering level.

 

Trim Stanchion Mismatch Warning

We document that the 990 trim stanchions align specifically with the 98/99 Series center case mounting pattern, and that 33A trim (376 series), 22 Series trim, and 98/99 trim are not interchangeable. Field rework from wrong series trim is the most preventable waste in exit device service calls.

 

40-Year Parts Compatibility

We document that current OEM latch return springs, push bar assemblies, and trim components are compatible with Von Duprin 99 devices installed since the late 1970s. Facilities maintaining 1990s or early 2000s institutional buildings can order today's OEM parts from SecurityParts.com for 30-year-old devices.

 

Same-Day OEM Shipping

Von Duprin 98/99 OEM parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or the contact page for parts ID support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for Von Duprin 98/99 Parts

  • We document that the 99 Series grooved mechanism case is not a cosmetic design feature: the groove marks the functional location of the fluid dampener assembly that controls push pad return speed. The 98 does not have a dampener, and the dampener cannot be field-installed in a 98 case. Replacing a 98 with a 99 requires a full device body replacement.
  • We document the 990 trim stanchion alignment requirement and the specific incompatibility between 990 trim (for 98/99 Series) and 376 trim (for 33A/35A narrow stile Series). Wrong-series trim ordered for the wrong device generates field returns and rework. Confirming device series before ordering trim prevents this.
  • We document the -F fire exit hardware dogging prohibition: NFPA 80 requires positive latching on fire doors, and mechanical dogging prevents positive latching. The -F device has no mechanical dogging. QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction) is the code-compliant access control alternative on fire-rated openings because it releases to positive latching on fire alarm or power loss.
  • We document that the 996L lever trim is the current OEM replacement for discontinued 992L and 994L models, and that the 996L cylinder must be ordered separately. Ordering a 996L without also ordering a compatible rim cylinder produces a trim plate that cannot provide keyed entry.
  • We carry Von Duprin 98/99 OEM exit device parts, complete Von Duprin catalog parts, exit alarm parts, and compatible electric strike parts as an authorized Allegion OEM parts distributor.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience. Parts compatibility confirmed across the full 98/99 production history.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Von Duprin 98/99 Series Exit Device Parts

 

What is the difference between Von Duprin 98 and 99 Series exit devices?

The 98 has a smooth mechanism case; the 99 has a grooved mechanism case housing a fluid dampener that controls push pad return speed. The groove is functional, not decorative. The 98 push pad returns immediately to rest after each operation. The 99 push pad returns smoothly at a controlled rate. Both have identical UL 305 panic hardware, UL 10C fire exit hardware, and ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification. The fluid dampener is the only functional difference. The dampener cannot be field-installed in a 98 case: if dampened operation is needed, the device body must be replaced with a 99.

 

What device types are available in the Von Duprin 98/99 Series?

Rim (most common; non-handed; rim latch bolt engages frame-mounted rim strike), SVR 9827/9927 (surface vertical rod; surface rods visible on door; used for double door pairs), CVR 9847/9948 (concealed vertical rod; rods hidden inside door; requires 161 door preparation; handed), mortise 9875/9975 (mortise latch case inside door body; requires 86 cutout; non-handed), and double egress (special rim for double egress pairs where both leaves swing in opposite directions).

 

What is the 990 trim and how do the stanchions align with the exit device?

The 990 trim family (990DT, 990NL, 990TP) are the standard outside trim options for 98/99 Series devices. Each trim plate is 3 inches wide by 14-3/16 inches tall with integral stanchions on the back that align with the 98/99 center case mounting screw locations. The stanchion pattern is specific to the 98/99 Series: 990 trim does not fit 33A, 22 Series, or other Von Duprin devices. Confirm the device series before ordering trim. The 996L lever trim replaces the discontinued 992L and 994L; cylinder is ordered separately.

 

What does the -F suffix mean on a Von Duprin exit device and what does it change?

The -F suffix designates fire exit hardware: the device is listed to both UL 305 (panic hardware) and UL 10C (fire exit hardware, positive pressure tested). The critical change: -F devices have no mechanical dogging because NFPA 80 requires fire doors to positively latch and mechanical dogging prevents positive latching. QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction) is the code-compliant alternative for access control on fire-rated openings: QEL releases to positive latching on fire alarm or power loss, maintaining fire door compliance.

 

What is the difference between QEL and EL on Von Duprin exit devices?

Both QEL and EL allow the latch bolt to be retracted remotely by an access control system, converting the door to push/pull entry operation without a key. EL uses a standard continuous-duty solenoid (0.22A draw). QEL uses a motorized mechanism that operates more quietly, preferred in libraries, courtrooms, and quiet offices. Both are compatible with fire-rated (-F) devices. Both release to positive latching on fire alarm or power loss. QEL is also used with ESL (Emergency Secure Lockdown): interrupting QEL power extends the latch bolt to lock the outside trim for active threat response.

 

What Von Duprin 98/99 parts are most commonly replaced and how do I order them?

Most commonly replaced: latch return spring (controls latch bolt return; available as OEM kits by device type: rim, SVR, CVR, mortise), push bar assembly (pivot wear after high-cycle use), 990NL and 996L trim (finish damage or function changes; cylinder ordered separately), rim cylinders for 990NL trim (standard 1-1/8 inch rim format; specify keyway and keying), and dogging shaft assembly (pre-1998 and post-1998 shaft are different part numbers; identify device production date before ordering). Call SecurityParts.com at 845-935-0301 with the device model, trim model, and finish for same-day parts identification and shipping.

Von Duprin 22 Series Exit Device Parts: Rim, 2227 SVR, Dogging and Ordering Guide

 

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device push bar and baseplate

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device. Browse parts and diagrams.

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 22 Series is a Grade 1 rim exit device designed for medium-traffic commercial openings. The 2227 is the surface vertical rod (SVR) version of the same family. The two devices share many dogging and baseplate components but use different center cases: part 109012 for the 22 rim and part 109358 for the 2227 SVR. End cap failure (900981) is the most common fault on both configurations. Devices manufactured before July 1997 use different dogging parts. This guide covers how to identify your configuration, which parts wear out first, and how to order correctly every time.

  • 22 Series: rim configuration, single-point latching at the strike
  • 2227 Series: surface vertical rod (SVR), three-point engagement at header, door face, and floor
  • Center case: 109012 (22 rim) vs 109358 (2227 SVR): not interchangeable
  • End cap kit: 900981: most commonly replaced part on both configurations
  • Dogging: hex key is factory default; cylinder dogging is an available option
  • Pre-1997 devices use a different dogging shaft. Call before ordering dogging parts

 

What the Von Duprin 22 Series Is and Where You Find It

The Von Duprin 22 Series is an ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 panic exit device designed for medium-traffic commercial and multi-family openings. It carries UL listing for both panic and fire exit hardware and fits door stiles as narrow as 3-13/16 inches.

You find it most often on back-of-house retail doors, employee entrances, parking garage stairwells, multi-family corridor exits, and clinic back doors. It is the cost-effective Grade 1 specification for applications that do not require the institutional depth of the 98/99 Series but still need certified egress hardware.

The 22 Series ships in two primary configurations:

  • 22 Rim: mounts on the door face and latches into a single rim strike on the frame
  • 2227 SVR (Surface Vertical Rod): adds top and bottom rods that engage strikes at the header and floor, covering double doors without a center post

Both configurations are non-handed, Grade 1 certified, and compatible with the same trim family. Fire-rated variants add an "F" suffix: 22-F for the rim device and 2227-F for the SVR device. Browse the complete parts catalog and interactive diagrams on the 22 Series parts page.

 

How to Identify Your 22 Series Configuration Before Ordering Parts

Getting the right part starts with knowing exactly which version of the 22 Series is installed. There are four things to confirm before placing any order.

Von Duprin 22 Series exit device model configuration diagram

Von Duprin 22 Series device configuration. View interactive diagrams.

 

1. Rim or Surface Vertical Rod

Look at the door. If the exit device mounts flat on the door face and connects to a single strike on the frame at the latch side, it is a 22 rim device. If you see metal rods running vertically from the device body up to the header and down to the floor, with strikes at the top and bottom of the door frame, it is a 2227 SVR device.

This identification step matters before ordering a center case. The 22 rim center case (109012) and the 2227 SVR center case (109358) look similar but are not interchangeable. Ordering the wrong one is the most common mistake on this device.

 

2. Panic or Fire Rated

Fire-rated devices are marked with an "F" suffix in the model number (22-F or 2227-F). On fire-rated devices, the hex key dogging is removed and replaced with a fire-rated latch that cannot be held open. Do not install a dogging assembly on a fire-rated device. It will compromise the fire rating and cause the device to fail NFPA 80 annual inspection.

 

3. Manufacturing Date

Find the device label on the mechanism body, typically near the model number. Devices manufactured before July 1997 use an older style dogging shaft approximately 1.5 inches long with a 0.5-inch diameter. Current devices use the updated hex dogging shaft (090040). If your device predates July 1997, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 before ordering dogging components.

 

4. Hex Dogging or Cylinder Dogging

The 22 Series ships with hex key dogging as standard. Look at the hinge-side end behind the cover plate. A small hex socket means hex key dogging. A mortise-cylinder keyway means cylinder dogging, which is a factory option or field conversion that allows a mortise cylinder to hold the latch open instead of requiring an Allen key.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series Part Categories Explained

Once you know your configuration, the parts on this device break down into four functional groups. Understanding what each group does helps you diagnose the fault and order the right part the first time.

 

Dogging Assembly Parts

The dogging assembly holds the latch in the retracted position so the door swings freely without triggering the panic release on every push. It sits on the hinge side of the device behind the cover plate. The assembly consists of five main components, all stocked individually or in packs.

Von Duprin hex dogging shaft 090040 for 22 Series exit device

Von Duprin Hex Dogging Shaft (090040), pack of 2. View product.

 

PartPart NumberNotes
Hex Dogging ShaftHex Dogging Shaft (090040)Pack of 2. Current spec since July 1997. Shared with 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series
Dogging AdaptorDogging Adaptor (090043)Pack of 2. The female receptacle that holds the shaft in place
Dogging Adaptor SpringDogging Adaptor Spring (090042)Pack of 2. Locks the dogging adaptor into the mounting bracket
Dogging SpringDogging Spring (090041)Pack of 2. Returns the dogging shaft to the ready position
Dogging HookDogging Hook (090044)Pack of 2. Engages the shaft to hold the latch retracted
Hex Dog Key, Pack of 10Hex Dog Key Pack of 10 (090085)5/32-inch hex. Use the longer key to reach fully into the device
Hex Dog Key, Pack of 2Hex Dog Key Pack of 2 (090005)5/32-inch hex, pack of 2

 

Center Case and Cover Plate

The center case is the housing that contains the panic mechanism. Replace it when the latch no longer retracts smoothly or when internal mechanism failure is confirmed.

There are two separate center cases for the 22 Series. Ordering the wrong one is a common and expensive mistake:

  • 22 Rim center case (part 109012): for the standard rim device
  • 2227 SVR center case (part 109358): for the surface vertical rod device

The Cover Plate Anti-Rattle Spring (090036) is worth replacing whenever the cover plate is removed. It is a low-cost part that stops the plate from rattling and is the correct time to service it.

 

End Cap and Mechanism Housing

End cap failure is the single most common fault on the 22 Series. The plastic end cap (part 900981) sits at the hinge-side end of the device and holds the dogging cover plate in its channel. When the end cap cracks or breaks, the cover plate slides out and falls off, exposing the dogging assembly.

Von Duprin 900981 end cap kit replacement for 22 Series exit device

Von Duprin End Cap Kit (900981): the most common replacement part on the 22 Series. View product.

 

The correct fix is to replace the End Cap Kit (900981), which includes both the end cap and the steel mounting bracket. Since October 2014, Von Duprin discontinued selling the end cap alone and ships only the complete kit.

Two additional parts are serviced in the same area:

 

Baseplate Assembly Parts

The baseplate is the mounting plate that attaches the exit device to the door face. Baseplate components take direct wear on every push-bar activation and are among the most commonly replaced parts on high-use doors.

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device baseplate assembly parts diagram

Von Duprin 22 rim exit device baseplate assembly. View full diagram and parts list.

 

PartPart NumberNotes
Baseplate ScrewBaseplate Screw Pack of 10 (090037)Pack of 10
Baseplate BumperBaseplate Bumper Pack of 4 (090038)Pack of 4. Rubber buffers between device body and door face
Baseplate Return SpringBaseplate Return Spring (090039)Pack of 10
Shock AbsorberShock Absorber (050491)Cushions push bar impact on activation
Control Link Pin KitControl Link Pin Kit (050529)Full kit with retaining ring
Control Link Pin (bulk)Control Link Pin Pack of 10 (090031)Pack of 10
Retaining RingRetaining Ring Pack of 10 (090107)Pack of 10
Latchbolt PinLatchbolt Pin Pack of 10 (090079)Pack of 10

 

Parts Specific to the 2227 Surface Vertical Rod Configuration

The 2227 SVR adds top and bottom vertical rods that run inside the door to engage strikes at the header and floor. These components require their own replacement hardware distinct from the rim device.

 

SVR Retrofit and Vertical Rod Hardware

If you have an older 2227 with the original rod guide system, the QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit is the key order for upgrading to current-specification SVR components. It replaces the plastic rod guide caps and springs with a modern assembly that adds rigidity and eliminates the failure-prone original hardware.

Von Duprin QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit 47263418 for 2227 surface vertical rod exit device

Von Duprin QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit (47263418). View product.

 

Order the QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit (47263418) when the SVR mechanism is intact but the rod and latch hardware need full replacement. View the 2227 SVR interactive parts diagrams on the Von Duprin 22 model page.

 

Fire Latch Strike Kit for 22-F and 2227-F

Fire-rated configurations use a latch that cannot be held open. The LBR Fire Latch Strike Kit (050171-32) is the correct replacement for the fire-rated latch assembly on 22-F and 2227-F devices.

Von Duprin 22-F rim fire exit device diagram for fire rated configuration

Von Duprin 22-F rim fire exit device diagram. View diagrams and parts.

 

Do not install a standard panic latch or dogging assembly in a fire-rated device. It will fail fire door inspection under NFPA 80 and may void the device's UL listing. For fire-rated baseplate assembly diagrams and parts, see the 22-F fire device baseplate assembly page.

 

Electric Options for the Von Duprin 22 Series

The 22 Series supports a range of electric upgrades. These are the electric parts stocked at Security Parts for this series.

Von Duprin 22 Series QEL quiet electric latch retraction option diagram

Von Duprin 22 Series QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction) option. View device diagrams.

 

OptionPart NumberFunction
EL Cable Connector (6 ft)EL Cable Connector (110388)Electric latch retraction power cable and connector
RX-2 Switch KitRX-2 Switch Kit (050270)Request to exit switch, signals access control when push bar is activated
RX-AUX Switch KitRX-AUX Switch Kit (050271)Auxiliary RX switch for additional monitoring point
RX-LC (Low Current) Switch KitRX-LC Low Current Switch Kit (050281)Low-current RX for systems with reduced signal current requirements
WP-RX-AUX Switch AssemblyWP-RX-AUX Switch Assembly (051881)Weatherproof RX auxiliary switch for exterior or high-moisture applications
CD/SS Cylinder Lock Nut PackageCylinder Lock Nut Package (050526)For cylinder dogging and SS function options

For guidance on selecting between QEL and MEL electric latch retraction on Von Duprin exit devices, see the QEL vs MEL comparison guide.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series Exit Alarm Kit Components

The Von Duprin ALK (Exit Alarm Kit) converts a 22 or 2227 device into an alarmed exit device. When the push bar is activated, an 85-decibel alarm sounds. It runs on a standard 9-volt battery and is controlled by a mortise cylinder (sold separately). Security Parts stocks the individual components for servicing an existing ALK installation:

 

Cross-Series Part Compatibility: What the 22 Series Shares With Other Von Duprin Devices

Several components on the 22 Series are shared with other Von Duprin exit devices. Knowing this helps when servicing a facility with multiple series installed.

Parts shared across the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series:

  • Hex dogging shaft (090040)
  • Dogging adaptor (090043)
  • Dogging adaptor spring (090042)
  • Dogging spring (090041)
  • Dogging hook (090044)
  • Baseplate screw (090037)
  • Baseplate bumper (090038)
  • Retaining ring (090107)

Parts that are series-specific and cannot be substituted:

  • 22 rim center case (109012): do not substitute with 98/99 center cases
  • 2227 SVR center case (109358): distinct from all other series
  • 22 Series push bar retrofit kit (PBKIT 22): specific to this device
  • 22 Series cover plate: 3-foot and 4-foot versions. Always specify door size when ordering

For a broader view of how the 22 Series fits within the full Von Duprin lineup, see the Von Duprin Series Guide.

 

How to Order Von Duprin 22 Series Parts from Security Parts

Security Parts stocks the full range of 22 Series replacement parts with same-day shipping on stocked items. Browse the complete catalog on the 22 Series parts page, where every item includes an interactive diagram with part numbers labeled in position.

If you are unsure which part applies to your device, especially on pre-1997 units or unusual configurations, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 or visit the contact page before ordering. Getting the correct part confirmed before ordering saves the cost and delay of a return. On fire-rated hardware, an incorrect part can also cause a NFPA 80 compliance failure during annual inspection.

 

Order Checklist Before You Place Your 22 Series Parts Order

  1. Rim (22) or surface vertical rod (2227)?
  2. Panic (no suffix) or fire rated (22-F or 2227-F)?
  3. Manufacturing date: before or after July 1997?
  4. Hex key dogging or cylinder dogging?
  5. Match center case part number to your configuration: 109012 (rim) or 109358 (SVR)
  6. Specify door width (3-foot or 4-foot) when ordering cover plates and push bar kits
  7. Specify finish when ordering finished items

 

Related Von Duprin Resources at Security Parts


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware parts specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, and other leading commercial hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 6100 Electric Strike Parts: Box Assemblies, Compatibility, and OEM Replacements

The Von Duprin 6100 is a heavy-duty, stainless steel electric strike built specifically for rim exit device applications. It is fire rated to UL10C, carries UL1034 burglary-resistant listing, and meets ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 with a 1,500 lb hold force. When a 6100 stops releasing correctly, the replacement path is a box assembly - the entire internal electromechanical unit that controls the keeper. Thirty OEM box assemblies are stocked at SecurityParts.com, organized by fail mode, voltage, and application. This guide covers every Von Duprin 6100 electric strike parts selection decision you need to make before placing an order.

For replacement parts across all Von Duprin electric strike series, including the 5100, 6200, and 6300, see the Von Duprin electric strike parts guide. This article is the dedicated 6100 resource.

 

Quick Answer

  • The Von Duprin 6100 is a rim exit device electric strike only. It is not compatible with cylindrical locks or mortise locks. Confirm the installed hardware is a rim exit device before ordering any 6100 part.
  • The primary replaceable component is the box assembly. The 6100 uses internally contained box assemblies that differ by fail mode (fail safe or fail secure), voltage (12VDC, 24VDC, or AC-compatible), and application (standard, dual switch, or specific function variants).
  • The 6100 is fire rated. UL10C listing covers up to 3 hours on single doors and 90 minutes on pair doors. Fail-secure configurations are available for fire-rated openings. Fail-safe configurations are non-fire-rated.
  • The 6100 ships standard as 24VDC fail secure. Confirm the installed voltage and fail mode from the existing device before ordering a replacement box assembly.
  • Browse all 30 available OEM parts at the 6100 series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

What Is the Von Duprin 6100 Electric Strike?

The Von Duprin 6100 is a heavy-duty rim electric strike designed for commercial and institutional openings where the primary hardware is a rim exit device. It is the standard specification for rim exit device openings requiring electric strike access control in high-traffic, high-security, or fire-rated applications.

Three product characteristics define the 6100 and distinguish it from other Von Duprin electric strike series:

 

Rim Exit Device Compatibility Only

The 6100 interfaces with the rim exit device latch mechanism via a movable keeper. It is not designed for cylindrical locks, mortise locks, or deadlatches. If the hardware is a cylindrical lock, specify the 5100 or 6200. If a mortise lock, specify the 6200.

Compatible rim exit device families include Von Duprin and Falcon rim series devices. The 6100 also supports retrofit with many legacy rim nightlatch applications.

 

Fire-Rated Construction

The 6100 carries UL10C fire listing, covering up to 3 hours on single doors and 90 minutes on paired doors. This is a critical distinction from the 5100, which has zero fire rating. If the door assembly carries a fire rating and electric strike access control is specified, the 6100 is the appropriate choice. For fire door hardware compliance requirements and what listings apply to specific assemblies, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Heavy-Duty Stainless Steel Construction

The 6100 body is stainless steel construction rated for heavy institutional use. UL1034 burglary-resistant listing and ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certification at 1,500 lb hold force are standard across all 6100 models. Two-piece plug connectors are included for ease of installation and for removal during strike servicing without cutting or re-terminating wires.

For a broader look at how electric strikes work, the differences between fail safe and fail secure, and wiring principles across all Von Duprin series, see the commercial electric strike parts guide. For wiring schematics, see the electric strike schematic diagram guide.

 

Von Duprin 6100 Electric Strike Parts: Box Assembly Selection Guide

The box assembly is the heart of the 6100. It contains the solenoid, the keeper release mechanism, and all internal components that control strike operation. When a 6100 fails to release or fails to hold, the box assembly is the replacement unit. SecurityParts.com stocks 30 OEM box assemblies for the 6100 series, organized by fail mode, voltage, and application type.

Before ordering any box assembly, confirm three things from the installed device: the fail mode (fail safe or fail secure), the operating voltage (12VDC, 24VDC, or AC), and whether a dual switch is required. These three variables determine the correct part number. All available box assemblies are at the 6100 series parts catalog.

 

Fail Safe Box Assemblies (12VDC)

Von Duprin 6100 electric strike box assembly fail safe 12VDC part 111743 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 6100 Box Assembly, Fail Safe (Electrically Locked) 12VDC (part 111743). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

In a fail safe configuration, the strike releases and allows the door to open when power is lost. This configuration is used on life safety egress openings where the door must be freely openable during a power failure. Fail-safe configurations are non-fire-rated.

  • 111743 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe (Electrically Locked), 12VDC
  • 111747 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe, Dual Switch (DS), 12VDC
  • 112772 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe, 12VDC (alternate configuration)

 

Fail Secure Box Assemblies (12VDC)

Von Duprin 6100 electric strike box assembly fail secure 12VDC part 111744 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 6100 Box Assembly, Fail Secure (Electrically Unlocked) 12VDC (part 111744). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

In a fail secure configuration, the strike remains locked when power is lost. The door can only be unlocked by applying power. Fail-secure configurations are available for fire-rated openings.

  • 111744 - Box Assembly, Fail Secure (Electrically Unlocked), 12VDC
  • 111748 - Box Assembly, Fail Secure (Electrically Unlocked), 12VDC (alternate)
  • 112773 - Box Assembly, Fail Secure, 12VDC (alternate configuration)

 

Fail Safe Box Assemblies (24VDC)

Von Duprin 6100 electric strike box assembly fail safe 24VDC part 111745 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 6100 Box Assembly, Fail Safe (Electrically Locked) 24VDC (part 111745). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

The 6100 ships standard as 24VDC fail secure. The 24VDC fail-safe box assembly is used when the installed power supply provides 24VDC and the opening requires fail-safe operation.

  • 111745 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe (Electrically Locked), 24VDC
  • 111749 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe, Dual Switch (DS), 24VDC

 

Fail Secure Box Assemblies (24VDC)

Von Duprin 6100 electric strike box assembly fail secure 24VDC part 111746 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 6100 Box Assembly, Fail Secure (Electrically Unlocked) 24VDC (part 111746). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

The standard factory configuration for new 6100 installations. Used on fire-rated openings and security-critical doors where maintaining the locked state during a power failure is required.

  • 111746 - Box Assembly, Fail Secure (Electrically Unlocked), 24VDC
  • 111750 - Box Assembly, Fail Secure, 24VDC (alternate)
  • 112775 - Box Assembly, Fail Secure, 24VDC (alternate configuration)

 

Dual Switch (DS) Box Assemblies

Von Duprin 6100 electric strike box assembly dual switch DS 12VDC part 111747 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 6100 Box Assembly, Fail Safe, Dual Switch (DS) 12VDC (part 111747). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

Dual switch (DS) box assemblies include a door position switch and a bolt position switch in addition to the standard solenoid. These switches send status signals to an access control panel confirming door position and latch state. DS assemblies are required when the access control system calls for strike status monitoring.

If the existing installation has wiring beyond the standard two power leads, a DS assembly is installed. Count the wires before ordering.

  • 111747 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe, Dual Switch (DS), 12VDC
  • 111749 - Box Assembly, Fail Safe, Dual Switch (DS), 24VDC

 

Von Duprin 6100 Power and Voltage Requirements

The 6100 ships standard as 24VDC fail secure. Confirm the installed voltage before ordering a replacement box assembly.

  • 24VDC: Standard factory voltage. Continuous duty at 0.33 A. Most common in commercial installations.
  • 12VDC: Optional at time of original order. Used in installations where the access control panel supplies 12VDC.
  • AC operation: Optional. The 6100 can operate on AC power, unlike the 5100 which requires a DC rectifier for AC input. Confirm AC compatibility from the installed device label before ordering AC-rated box assemblies.

16VDC and 28VDC solenoid variants exist for legacy strikes at those voltages. Contact SecurityParts.com at 845-935-0301 before ordering if the device label shows a non-standard voltage.

The 6100 shares 6000 Series solenoid kits (050237, 050239, 050240) with the 6200 series as standalone solenoid replacements when the box assembly housing is intact. For access control integration context, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Von Duprin 6100 Fail Safe vs Fail Secure: How to Identify the Installed Configuration

Ordering the wrong fail mode is the most common 6100 parts ordering error. The installed fail mode cannot be changed by swapping the box assembly alone in some configurations. Confirm the fail mode before placing any order.

 

How to Confirm Fail Mode Without Power

The most direct identification method is the device label. The fail mode is printed on the label affixed to the strike body. With the strike removed from the frame, locate the label and read the fail mode designation: FS for fail safe, FSE for fail secure.

If the label is illegible, the fail mode can be identified by function. Disconnect power to the strike. If the keeper (movable lip) can be pushed inward manually with the door latch, the strike is fail safe - it releases without power. If the keeper is rigid and cannot be moved without power applied, the strike is fail secure.

 

Fire-Rated Applications Require Fail Secure

On fire-rated assemblies, the electric strike must be fail secure. A fail-safe strike on a fire-rated opening creates a code compliance gap. Confirm the door fire rating before ordering. See the commercial door fire rating guide and the ANSI/BHMA standards guide.

 

Von Duprin 6100 Compatibility: Rim Exit Devices and Retrofit Applications

The 6100 is designed for rim exit devices. Compatibility extends across Von Duprin and Falcon rim series devices, as well as retrofit applications for legacy rim nightlatch hardware.

 

Von Duprin and Falcon Rim Exit Device Compatibility

The 6100 is compatible with Von Duprin rim series exit devices including the 98/99, 22, 33A/35A, 75, 78, 88, and 55 Series rim devices, as well as Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series rim devices. For a full comparison of how Von Duprin rim exit device series differ from each other, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison. For rim exit device part details, see the rim exit devices guide.

 

Retrofit Applications

The 6100 retrofits many legacy rim electric strike installations. Specific models replace Folger Adams 310-4 hardware with minor frame preparation. If replacing a Folger Adams unit, confirm the specific 6100 model from the existing device label or call SecurityParts.com before ordering.

 

Single Door and Double Door Applications

The 6100 series includes models for both single door and double door applications. Double door variants cover openings without a center mullion where the strike must span the gap between active and inactive leaves. Confirm the door configuration (single or double, with or without mullion) before selecting a 6100 model.

 

Common Von Duprin 6100 Electric Strike Problems and How to Diagnose Them

Most 6100 field failures are diagnosable without special equipment. The two-piece plug connector design makes the 6100 easier to service than many competing electric strikes because the box assembly can be removed and replaced without cutting wires.

 

Strike Does Not Release When Power Is Applied

Verify power at the strike terminals using a multimeter before concluding hardware failure. Measure voltage at the plug connector. If the correct voltage is present and the strike does not release, the box assembly solenoid has failed. If no voltage is present, the fault is upstream in the access control panel, power supply, or wiring run, not in the strike itself.

For fail-secure installations: if power is present and the strike does not release, the box assembly is the likely replacement. For fail-safe installations: if the strike does not release when power is removed, the same diagnosis applies.

 

Strike Releases Intermittently

Intermittent release is almost always a voltage drop at the strike. Measure voltage under load (solenoid energized). If voltage drops significantly below the rated value, the power supply or wire run is undersized. This is a wiring issue, not a box assembly failure. Replacing the box assembly will not resolve a voltage drop.

 

Keeper Does Not Return to Locked Position

If the keeper releases correctly but does not return to the locked position after the door closes, the keeper return spring inside the box assembly has failed. The correct repair is a full box assembly replacement. The keeper return mechanism is internal and is not serviceable as a standalone component.

 

Strike Operates Correctly But Door Does Not Latch

If the strike operates correctly but the door latch does not engage the keeper, the fault is alignment between the exit device latch and the strike keeper, not a failure of the strike itself. Check the keeper height and door gap before concluding that the strike is defective. For general commercial door hardware troubleshooting, see the commercial door hardware troubleshooting guide.

 

Von Duprin 6100 vs 6200 vs 6300: Which Series Is Right?

The 6100, 6200, and 6300 are all heavy-duty, fire-rated Von Duprin electric strikes, but they serve different applications. Understanding the key differences prevents wrong-series orders.

  • 6100: Rim exit devices only. Five models covering single and double door configurations. Standard fail secure 24VDC. UL10C fire rated. Stainless steel construction with integrated faceplate.
  • 6200: The most versatile series. 17 configurations covering cylindrical locks, mortise locks, deadlatches, and rim exit devices. Also UL10C fire rated. Shares the 6000 Series solenoid kits with the 6100.
  • 6300: Surface-mount heavy-duty series for rim exit device applications where flush mounting is not possible or where the door prep does not accommodate a standard 6100 installation. The 6300 mounts on the surface of the frame rather than recessed into the frame.

Rim exit device with standard frame = 6100. Frame requires surface mount = 6300. Lock type other than rim exit device = 6200. Browse the 6300 series catalog and the Von Duprin 5100 guide for comparison.

 

How to Order the Correct Von Duprin 6100 Replacement Part

  1. Confirm the hardware is a 6100. The series designation is on the strike body label (6100, 6111, 6112, etc.). If the label shows a different series, identify the correct series before ordering.
  2. Identify the fail mode. Read FS or FSE from the device label. If illegible, test as described above. Fail safe and fail secure box assemblies are not interchangeable.
  3. Confirm the operating voltage. Read from the device label or measure at the plug connector. Standard is 24VDC. For non-standard voltages, call 845-935-0301 before ordering.
  4. Confirm dual switch. Count wires at the plug connector. Two wires = standard. Additional wires = dual switch (DS). Ordering a standard assembly for a DS installation removes status monitoring from the access control system.
  5. Order the correct box assembly. Match fail mode, voltage, and DS requirement to the part number. All 30 box assembly options are at securityparts.com/series/6100-electric-strikes-2.

For OEM sourcing guidance and why aftermarket substitutes create risks on precision-fit electric strike components, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. Common parts ship same business day. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility confirmation or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page. Browse the full electric strikes catalog and the Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

About the Author

This guide is published by the commercial door hardware team at SecurityParts.com, a supplier of OEM Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex parts since 2001. All part numbers, voltage specifications, fire rating details, and compatibility information are verified against live SecurityParts.com product pages and official Von Duprin 6100 Series documentation. For Von Duprin 6100 electric strike parts and pre-order compatibility support, call 845-935-0301 or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page.

 

Schlage L Series Mortise Lock Parts Guide: Functions, Trim, Cylinders and Replacement Components

The Schlage L Series (L9000) is the benchmark Grade 1 commercial mortise lock with over 55 functions, 33 lever designs, 8 rose/escutcheon options, and 12 finishes. The function code (L9010, L9080, L9070, L9060, etc.) describes exactly how the lock operates. The auxiliary deadlatch prevents latchbolt shimming by mechanically locking the latch when the door is fully closed. Cylinder type affects security grade: conventional and FSIC cylinders maintain Grade 1 Security; SFIC cylinders reduce it to Grade 3 Security. For doors thicker than 1-3/4 inches, position codes (EE, EI, EO, ED) are required. The L9050 universal chassis converts to nine different functions with additional parts. Electrified EL (fail-secure) and EU (fail-safe) functions are field-selectable. SecurityParts.com stocks OEM Schlage L Series replacement parts for same-day shipping.

The Schlage L Series has been the commercial mortise lock specification standard since 1984. Its position in the market is not based on marketing alone: the L9000 case size (4-7/16 by 6-1/16 by 1 inch), the armor front (1-1/4 by 8 inches), the 2-3/4 inch backset, and the trim mounting dimensions have become the default American commercial mortise lock preparation that architects, specifiers, and facilities managers have standardized on for 40 years. Understanding how to specify, identify, and order parts for the L Series is a core competency for anyone working with commercial door hardware.

Browse Schlage L Series OEM replacement parts at Security Parts: Schlage L9000 Series mortise lock replacement parts and assemblies, Schlage L Series cylinders, Everest 29, Primus XP, SFIC, and FSIC cores, Schlage ND Series cylindrical locks for matching trim suiting with L Series, electric strikes for L Series access control integration, and the complete Schlage OEM parts catalog.

 

 

Schlage L Series Specifications at a Glance

Before diving into function codes and parts, these are the L Series physical specifications every specifier needs. They determine compatibility with the door preparation, the trim components required, and the cylinder selection.

 

Lock Case Dimensions

Case size: 4-7/16" W x 6-1/16" H x 1" D

Armor front: 1-1/4" x 8"

Strike: 1-1/4" x 4-7/8" square corner, 1-3/16" lip, box strike

Backset: 2-3/4" (standard, non-adjustable)

Door Thickness Range

Standard: 1-3/4" (44 mm)

Minimum: 1-3/8" (35 mm)

Over 1-3/4": Specify door thickness and position code (EE, EI, EO, ED)

ANSI/BHMA Certification

Standard: A156.13-2012, Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security (conventional/FSIC cylinders)

FSIC: Grade 1 Operational, Grade 2 Security

SFIC: Grade 1 Operational, Grade 3 Security

Fire Rating and Warranty

Fire rating: UL Listed for 3-hour fire door (A label single doors 4' x 10'; pairs 8' x 10'). Exception: L9076 and L9077 are not 3-hour listed.

Mechanical warranty: 10 years

Electromechanical warranty: 3 years

 

 

L Series Function Codes: Every L9000 Function Explained

The function code is the most important identifier when ordering L Series parts, because different functions use different internal mechanisms, trim configurations, and operating cams. Before ordering any replacement part, confirm the function code from the lock case label (visible from the edge of the door).

 

Function CodeANSI NameOutside LeverInside LeverDeadbolt/DeadlatchTypical Application
L9010PassageAlways freeAlways freeAuxiliary deadlatch onlyCorridors, non-security doors
L9020Privacy (Inside Button)Inside button locks outside lever; emergency release from outsideAlways freeAuxiliary deadlatch; optional thumb turnRestrooms, privacy offices
L9040Classroom (School Security)Key in outside cylinder locks/unlocks outside leverAlways freeDeadlatch; deadbolt in some variantsClassrooms, offices needing lockdown
L9050Entrance (Half-Turn)Outside lever free when unlocked; key or thumbturn for securityAlways freeOptional deadbolt via thumbturnBuilding entries; universal chassis
L9060ApartmentKey retracts latch from outsideLever free; thumbturn insideAuxiliary deadlatchApartment entry, hotel rooms
L9070StoreroomAlways fixed (key required for entry)Always freeAuxiliary deadlatchStockrooms, restricted areas, server rooms
L9080OfficeKey or free turn from inside unlocks; otherwise fixedAlways freeAuxiliary deadlatchOffice doors (most common commercial function)
L9082Office (No Outside Cylinder)Lever always fixed; no outside cylinderAlways freeAuxiliary deadlatchRooms accessed only from inside
L9090VestibuleKey locks/unlocks outside leverKey locks/unlocks inside leverAuxiliary deadlatchBuilding vestibule doors requiring control from both sides
L9460Cylinder by Thumbturn DeadboltKey operates deadboltThumbturn operates deadboltFull deadbolt throw only (no latch)Deadbolt supplement on any door type
 
 
The L9050 universal chassis: the field conversion feature most facilities managers and locksmiths don't know about: The Schlage L9050 is the base L Series distributor chassis (L283-133 chassis, L9050LB distributor lock case) that Schlage designed as a field-convertible unit. With the L9050 case and the correct additional parts (springs, cams, blocking rings, driver bars), the same lock case can be converted into nine different L Series functions without replacing the chassis. This is the Schlage L Series equivalent of a universal door closer spring: one stocked part that can become multiple different products. Locksmiths who stock L9050 chassis units can service a broader range of L Series function failures in the field without carrying every function separately. Schlage's catalog specifies the conversion is valid for Everest cylinder installations and only for the functions listed in the L9050 conversion chart.

 

The Auxiliary Deadlatch: The Anti-Shim Mechanism That Defines Grade 1 Security

The auxiliary deadlatch (anti-shim latch) is the second, smaller latch adjacent to the main spring latchbolt on the L Series lock case. Its function is specific and critical: preventing the latchbolt from being retracted by shimming (inserting a thin flexible tool between the door and frame to depress the latch).

Here is how it works: when the door is fully closed in the frame, the door stop depresses the auxiliary deadlatch plunger into the lock case body. In this depressed position, a mechanical blocking plate inside the case intercepts the latchbolt operating mechanism, preventing any tool or spring force from retracting the latchbolt. The latchbolt can only be retracted by rotating the lever (which moves the blocking plate out of the way through the authorized mechanism) or by key operation.

 
When the auxiliary deadlatch is not engaging properly: If the auxiliary deadlatch plunger is not fully depressed by the door stop when the door is closed, the anti-shim protection is not active. Common causes: the strike is mounted too far from the door stop (excessive gap between door edge and frame), the door has warped enough that one corner does not fully close against the stop, or the strike plate has been installed without the required strike box (dust box). Without the strike box, the latch is projecting into an open pocket rather than being supported, and the auxiliary deadlatch plunger cannot contact the stop surface. Always install the L Series strike box with the face plate: the box is not optional.

 

 

Trim Options: Sectional vs Full-Size Roses and Escutcheons

 

Sectional Trim

Split rose design; most common specification
 

Design: The rose plate is in two sections (upper with cylinder/thumbturn, lower with lever hub), separated by a gap. The lever attaches to the lower rose section.

 

Advantage: Easier to remove the lever for cylinder access without removing the entire trim assembly. The upper section stays in place for cylinder maintenance.

 

Compatible with: Indicator trim options (the upper section can include a 180-degree visibility indicator showing occupancy status). Most L Series catalog specifications use sectional trim by default.

 

Standard spindle: 2-3/4" to 3" standard for 1-3/4" door. Specify extended spindles for thicker doors.

 

Full-Size Rose / Escutcheon Trim

One-piece plate design; architectural appearance
 

Design: A single rose plate covers both the cylinder/thumbturn and the lever hub area in one continuous piece. Available in five rose styles and two escutcheon styles.

 

Advantage: Cleaner architectural appearance, no gap between upper and lower sections, preferred for high-end interior design specifications.

 

Limitation: Removing the lever requires removing the entire rose/escutcheon plate, exposing the cylinder and all trim components. Slightly more disruptive for cylinder service than sectional trim.

 

Indicator trim: Not all indicator trim options are available with full-size roses. Check the L Series catalog for indicator compatibility with specific rose styles.

 

 

Cylinder Types and Their Effect on ANSI Security Grade

 

Cylinder TypeOperational GradeSecurity GradeKey ControlNotes
Conventional 6-pin (Everest C keyways)Grade 1Grade 1Open keyways; limited key controlStandard specification for most commercial applications
Everest 29 restricted keywayGrade 1Grade 1Restricted factory-controlled blanksKey duplication control; available in R and other restricted families
Primus XP (sidebar mechanism)Grade 1Grade 1Factory-controlled side bitting; 5 geo exclusivity levelsMaximum key control; pick and bump resistant; optional UL 437
FSIC (Full Size Interchangeable Core)Grade 1Grade 2Interchangeable with Schlage FSIC system onlyFast rekeying but security grade reduced from G1 to G2
SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core)Grade 1Grade 3Interchangeable with Best/Arrow/Sargent SFIC systemsMaximum rekeying flexibility; lowest security grade of the three

 

Browse Schlage L Series cylinders including Everest 29, Primus XP, SFIC, and FSIC replacement cylinders at Security Parts.

 

Door Thickness Position Codes: Ordering Trim for Thick Doors

The Schlage L Series standard spindle length is designed for 1-3/4 inch doors. For doors thicker than 1-3/4 inches, the trim components (spindle, rose mounting posts) must be extended to reach from the lock case to the face of the door. The position code describes how the lock case sits within the thicker door and which side(s) need extended trim.

EE
Both inside and outside trim extended. Lock case centered in door thickness.
EI
Inside trim extended only. Lock case shifted toward outside face of door.
EO
Outside trim extended only. Lock case shifted toward inside face of door.
ED
Both sides extended but at non-standard depths. Used for specific thick door applications.
 
How to measure and specify door thickness and position: Measure the total door thickness (not the nominal size stamped on the door: measure the actual material thickness at the lock edge). Subtract 1-3/4 inches to get the overage. Determine where the lock case sits: if the existing mortise pocket is centered in the door, use EE. If it is flush toward one face, use EI or EO for the opposite face extension. When ordering replacement trim for a known L Series installation on a thick door, the existing trim will show either an EE, EI, EO, or ED designation. Match the code when ordering replacement parts.

 

Electrified L Series: EL (Fail-Secure) and EU (Fail-Safe) Functions

The Schlage L Series electrified mortise lock (designated with L or LV prefix in the function code) uses a motor inside the lock chassis to control the outside lever independently of the mechanical lever mechanism. The inside lever always provides free mechanical egress regardless of the electrical state.

Both EL and EU are field-selectable: a DIP switch or jumper inside the lock case allows the installer to configure the electrical mode without ordering separate products. This field selectability is one of the L Series electrified advantages over competitive products that require ordering separate EL and EU versions.

 

RX (Request-to-Exit) and LX (Latchbolt Monitor) Contacts

Most L Series electrified functions include a microswitch positioned inside the lock case that activates when the inside or outside lever is rotated. The RX (request-to-exit) contact signals the access control panel when the inside lever is used, providing an exit event record. The LX (latchbolt monitor) contact signals whether the latchbolt is in the extended (door latched) or retracted (latch pulled) position. Both contacts are used for access control audit trail and door position monitoring required by compliance frameworks including SOC 2 Type II and ISO 27001. Browse Schlage L Series electrified mortise lock parts with RX and LX contacts at Security Parts.

 

 

Common Schlage L Series Failure Modes and Replacement Parts

 

  • Latchbolt sticks or does not retract with lever

    The cam and spindle connection inside the lock case may be worn, or the latch case spring is fatigued. First check that the trim spindle is fully seated in the cam socket (loose spindle is the most common cause). If the spindle is seated, the cam return spring inside the case is the likely failure. OEM cam return spring kits for L9000 Series are available at SecurityParts.com.

  • Auxiliary deadlatch plunger does not return

    The auxiliary deadlatch spring inside the case is worn or broken. The plunger is a replaceable component. OEM auxiliary deadlatch spring and plunger kits are available for L9000 Series cases at SecurityParts.com. This failure often appears as the latchbolt being unexpectedly shimmable on what should be a Grade 1 lock, because the anti-shim mechanism is disabled when the auxiliary deadlatch does not return to the extended position.

  • Outside lever droops or spins freely

    The lever hub connection to the trim spindle is loose, or the spindle itself is worn at the cam interface. Check lever set screws (or locking bushing on inside lever) first. If the lever continues to spin freely after tightening, the spindle or cam interface inside the lock case is worn and requires a spindle or cam assembly replacement.

  • Cylinder stiff or key difficult to turn

    The mortise cylinder plug is binding. Lubricate with graphite powder only (never oil in the cylinder plug). If stiffness continues after lubrication, the cylinder has worn or corroded pin chambers. OEM replacement cylinders for L Series (in any keyway and format) are available at SecurityParts.com as a drop-in replacement without disassembling the lock case.

  • Electrified function: lever locked when it should be unlocked

    Check power supply voltage (12V or 24V DC) matches the lock specification. Check wiring polarity. The motor inside the L Series electrified chassis can be in the locked position if the correct power state is not achieved. The field-selectable DIP switch may also be in the wrong position (EL vs EU mode). Verify DIP switch position and power supply output before replacing the electrified chassis assembly.

For OEM replacement parts for all L Series failure modes, browse Schlage L9000 Series mortise lock replacement parts . Contact the team at 845-935-0301 or the  contact page for parts identification support.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Schlage L Series Mortise Lock Parts

Auxiliary deadlatch strike box requirement documented, SFIC security grade reduction explained, L9050 universal chassis conversion, position code measurement guide, EL/EU field selectability, and same-day OEM shipping.

 

Auxiliary Deadlatch Strike Box

We document that the L Series strike box is not optional: without the box, the auxiliary deadlatch plunger cannot contact the stop surface, the anti-shim protection is not active, and a Grade 1 lock can be shimmed. This is the most commonly missed installation requirement and the most common reason a Grade 1 lock fails to behave like a Grade 1 lock.

 

SFIC Security Grade Impact

We document that SFIC interchangeable cores reduce the L Series security grade from Grade 1 to Grade 3, which means specifiers who install SFIC for rekeying convenience on a Grade 1 specified project may be producing a non-compliant installation. This is never explained on product pages.

 

L9050 Universal Chassis

We document the L9050 universal chassis nine-function conversion capability that allows one stocked unit to become multiple different L Series functions with the correct additional parts. This is the field service feature that eliminates emergency backorders when a specific function fails in the field.

 

Same-Day OEM Shipping

Schlage L Series lock cases, trim, cylinders, and internal parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or the contact page for parts identification and ordering support.

 

What Makes Security Parts Different for Schlage L Series Parts

  • We document the auxiliary deadlatch strike box requirement: without the box strike installed correctly, the auxiliary deadlatch plunger cannot contact the frame stop surface, the anti-shim blocking mechanism does not engage, and a Grade 1 L Series lock can be shimmed. This specific installation requirement is the most common cause of Grade 1 lock security failure in the field and is not documented on any competitor's product page.
  • We document that SFIC interchangeable core cylinders reduce the Schlage L Series security grade from Grade 1 Security to Grade 3 Security. Specifiers and facilities managers who install SFIC for rekeying convenience may be unknowingly delivering a Grade 3 security lock on a Grade 1 specified project. FSIC maintains Grade 2 Security. Conventional and Everest 29 cylinders maintain Grade 1 Security.
  • We document the L9050 universal chassis as the nine-function convertible base unit for field service, allowing one stocked chassis to be converted to the required function with additional parts rather than carrying every L Series function separately.
  • We document the EL/EU field selectability: both fail-secure and fail-safe modes are available in the same electrified L Series product with a DIP switch change, eliminating the need to order separate products for the two modes and reducing emergency stocking requirements.
  • We carry Schlage L9000 Series mortise lock replacement parts, Schlage L Series cylinder replacements in all formats, and access all supporting Allegion OEM components as an authorized Allegion parts distributor.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage L Series Mortise Lock Parts

 

What does the Schlage L Series function code tell you about the lock?

The function code (L9010, L9080, L9070, etc.) identifies exactly how the lock operates: which side has a free lever, which side requires key authorization, and whether a separate deadbolt is present. L9010 = passage (free from both sides). L9080 = office (outside lever locked by default, key or inside thumbturn unlocks; inside lever always free). L9070 = storeroom (outside lever always fixed, key for entry; inside lever always free). L9060 = apartment (key from outside; lever and thumbturn from inside). The function code is essential before ordering any replacement part because different functions use different internal cams, springs, and blocking mechanisms.

 

What is the auxiliary deadlatch on the Schlage L Series mortise lock and why does it matter?

The auxiliary deadlatch is the smaller plunger adjacent to the main latchbolt. When the door fully closes, the frame stop depresses the plunger, which activates a blocking plate inside the case that prevents the latchbolt from being retracted by shimming. If the auxiliary deadlatch does not engage because the strike box is missing, the door is warped, or the strike is positioned too far from the stop, the anti-shim protection is not active and the Grade 1 lock can be bypassed by shimming. Always install the L Series box strike with the face plate.

 

What is the difference between SFIC and FSIC cylinder types in the Schlage L Series?

SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) uses the Best/Arrow small plug format, compatible across multiple manufacturers. FSIC (Full Size Interchangeable Core) uses the Schlage-only Everest 29 FSIC format. Security grade impact: conventional and FSIC cylinders maintain Grade 1 Security; FSIC interchangeable cores reduce it to Grade 2 Security; SFIC reduces it to Grade 3 Security. Specifiers who need Grade 1 Security on the complete assembly should use conventional Everest 29 cylinders, not SFIC.

 

What are the Schlage L Series door thickness position codes?

Position codes are required for doors thicker than 1-3/4 inches: EE (both sides extended, case centered), EI (inside extended only, case toward outside), EO (outside extended only, case toward inside), ED (both sides at specific non-standard depths). Each code corresponds to specific spindle lengths and trim components. Ordering the wrong code for a thick door produces misaligned trim that cannot be installed. Measure actual door thickness and confirm the existing mortise pocket position before ordering trim for thick door replacements.

 

What is the L9050 universal chassis and what functions can it convert to?

The L9050 (L283-133 chassis/L9050LB distributor lock case) is a universal base chassis that converts to nine different L Series functions with additional parts (springs, cams, blocking rings, driver bars). Locksmiths and facilities managers who stock L9050 chassis units can field-convert to the required function without carrying every L Series function separately. Schlage's service manual specifies the conversion charts. Conversion applies to Everest cylinder installations and only to the functions listed in the conversion table.

 

What is the difference between the L Series EL and EU electrified versions?

EL (fail-secure): outside lever locked by default; power signal unlocks; remains locked on power loss. EU (fail-safe): outside lever unlocked by default; power signal locks; unlocks on power loss. Both are field-selectable in the same electrified L Series unit using a DIP switch inside the lock case. No separate product ordering needed. The inside lever always provides mechanical free egress regardless of the electrical state. The motor operates on 12 or 24V DC with low holding current. 10-year mechanical warranty; 3-year electromechanical warranty.

Von Duprin 5100 Electric Strike Parts: Components, Compatibility, and OEM Replacements

The Von Duprin 5100 electric strike is a medium-duty, field-configurable strike for cylindrical lock and deadlatch applications. Six Von Duprin 5100 electric strike parts are available as OEM replacements: faceplate, solenoid kit, two mounting packages, and two screw packages. This guide covers each component, its function, and what to verify before ordering.

For replacement parts across all Von Duprin electric strike series including the 6100, 6200, and 6300, see the Von Duprin electric strike parts guide. This article is the dedicated 5100 resource.

 

Quick Answer

  • The Von Duprin 5100 electric strike parts available at SecurityParts.com are: faceplate (050031), solenoid kit 12/24VDC (050034), mounting package standard (PKGMTG.1004), mounting package black (PKGMTG.1005), screw package standard (PKGSCR.1003), and screw package black (PKGSCR.1004).
  • The 5100 is not fire rated. It cannot be installed on fire-rated door assemblies. If fire rating is required, specify the Von Duprin 6200 or 6300 Series instead.
  • The 5100 works with cylindrical locks and deadlatches only. It is not compatible with mortise locks or rim exit devices.
  • The solenoid accepts 12 or 24 VDC. It will not operate reliably on AC power without a Von Duprin SO12 or SO24 rectifier kit.
  • Browse all available parts at the 5100 series parts catalog on SecurityParts.com.

 

What Is the Von Duprin 5100 Electric Strike?

The Von Duprin 5100 is a medium-duty electric strike for commercial cylindrical lock and deadlatch applications. Three faceplates are included in every box to cover hollow metal, wood, and aluminum frame applications. The power fail mode is field selectable. The solenoid accepts 12 or 24 VDC on a single unit.

The 5100 is positioned as a general commercial and retail electric strike for interior and exterior doors where fire-rated hardware is not required. It is compatible with Schlage, Falcon, and most other manufacturers' cylindrical locks with a latch throw up to 5/8 inch, as well as many aluminum narrow-stile deadlatches.

It is not specified for high-security, high-cycle, or fire-rated applications. The 5100's strength is flexibility and ease of installation on standard commercial openings. For wiring principles that apply across all Von Duprin series, see the commercial electric strike parts guide.

 

Von Duprin 5100 Electric Strike Parts and Replacement Components

SecurityParts.com stocks six OEM replacement parts for the Von Duprin 5100 series. All are available at the 5100 series parts catalog.

 

050031 Electric Strike Faceplate

Von Duprin 5100 electric strike faceplate replacement part 050031 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 5100 Electric Strike Faceplate (part 050031). Standard finish. OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

The faceplate mounts flush with the frame face and provides the latch pocket. The standard 5100 ships with three faceplates (hollow metal, wood, and aluminum), so replacement is needed when the installed faceplate has been damaged. Part 050031 is the standard finish replacement. Order it when the faceplate needs replacing and the housing and solenoid remain functional.

 

050034 Solenoid Kit 12/24VDC

Von Duprin 5100 solenoid kit 12 24VDC replacement part 050034 at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 5100 Solenoid Kit 12/24VDC (part 050034). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

The solenoid is the electromechanical component that retracts or holds the keeper when power is applied. It is the most commonly replaced internal component in any electric strike, and the 5100 is no exception. When the strike clicks but the keeper does not move, or when the strike does not respond to power at all, the solenoid is the first component to test.

 

Solenoid power specifications for the 5100:

  • 12 VDC: 0.38 A
  • 24 VDC: 0.19 A
  • Input: non-polarized
  • AC operation: not supported directly. Requires Von Duprin SO12 or SO24 rectifier kit to convert AC to DC.

Part 050034 is the complete solenoid kit for the 5100, covering both 12 and 24 VDC. Before ordering, confirm the supply is DC, not AC.

 

PKGMTG.1004 Mounting Package

Von Duprin 5100 mounting package PKGMTG1004 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 5100 Mounting Package (PKGMTG.1004). Standard finish. OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

The mounting package contains the hardware required to secure the 5100 strike body to the frame. Order when mounting hardware is lost, corroded, or inadequate for the frame condition.

PKGMTG.1004 is the standard finish mounting package. Order this when the existing hardware finish is standard and the frame material is compatible with the standard mounting configuration.

 

PKGMTG.1005 Mounting Package (Black)

Von Duprin 5100 black mounting package PKGMTG1005 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 5100 Mounting Package Black (PKGMTG.1005). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

PKGMTG.1005 is the black finish mounting package. Order this when the installed 5100 is in a black finish configuration. Confirm the installed finish before ordering.

 

PKGSCR.1003 Screw Package

Von Duprin 5100 screw package PKGSCR1003 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 5100 Screw Package (PKGSCR.1003). Standard finish. OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

PKGSCR.1003 is the standard finish screw package, containing fasteners used to secure the faceplate and strike body. Order when fasteners are stripped, lost, or corroded.

 

PKGSCR.1004 Screw Package (Black)

Von Duprin 5100 black screw package PKGSCR1004 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 5100 Screw Package Black (PKGSCR.1004). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

PKGSCR.1004 is the black finish screw package. Order when the installed 5100 is black finish.

 

Von Duprin 5100 Compatibility and Applications

The 5100 is compatible with the following lock types and door configurations:

  • Lock type: Cylindrical locks and deadlatches only. The 5100 is not compatible with mortise locks or rim exit devices.
  • Latch throw: Up to 5/8 inch. Confirm the latch throw on the installed cylindrical lock before specifying the 5100.
  • Cylindrical lock brands: Compatible with Schlage, Falcon, and most other manufacturers' cylindrical locks meeting the 5/8-inch throw requirement.
  • Narrow stile deadlatches: Compatible with many aluminum narrow-stile deadlatch applications.
  • Door applications: Interior and exterior commercial doors. Not for fire-rated door assemblies.

The 5100 is not specified for high-security or institutional-grade applications requiring the cycle count and abuse resistance of the 6200 or 6300 Series. It is best suited for retail and light commercial openings where cylindrical lock hardware is installed and fire rating is not a requirement.

 

Von Duprin 5100 Faceplate and Frame Compatibility

One of the 5100's key advantages is that every unit ships with three faceplates, covering the three most common commercial frame types:

  • Hollow metal frame faceplate
  • Wood frame faceplate
  • Aluminum frame faceplate

This multi-faceplate approach eliminates the need to specify the frame type at the time of ordering the device. The installer selects and installs the correct faceplate on site. The adjustable keeper further accommodates frame variations, including openings with weather stripping or tight door preps where a fixed keeper would cause alignment problems.

When replacing a faceplate, confirm which of the three faceplates was installed. Part 050031 is the standard finish replacement. Call 845-935-0301 before ordering if the installed faceplate finish does not match standard.

 

Von Duprin 5100 Power and Wiring Requirements

The 5100 solenoid is rated for 12 or 24 VDC. A single unit handles both voltages, which simplifies multi-door projects where panel voltage may vary.

Key wiring facts for the 5100:

  • Power input is non-polarized. Wire polarity does not matter for DC operation.
  • The strike will not operate reliably on AC power. If the power supply outputs 12 or 24 VAC, a Von Duprin SO12 or SO24 AC-to-DC rectifier kit is required to convert the supply before it reaches the strike.
  • Current draw: 0.38 A at 12 VDC, 0.19 A at 24 VDC.
  • For DC power supply selection, the Von Duprin PS902 series power supply is a recommended option for this strike.

A common field problem is applying 24 VAC directly to the 5100. In this configuration the strike may work in one door handing but not when flipped to the other handing. This is not a defective strike. It is a wiring mismatch. Install the SO24 rectifier kit to convert to 24 VDC and the problem resolves.

For wiring diagrams and schematic references, see the electric strike schematic diagram guide.

 

Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure on the Von Duprin 5100

The 5100 allows the power fail mode to be selected in the field. No tools are required for conversion. Understanding which mode is installed is essential before ordering a replacement solenoid or troubleshooting a strike that is not responding as expected.

  • Fail Safe (FS): The strike releases the latch and allows the door to open when power is lost. This is the appropriate specification for emergency egress applications where the door must be freely openable during a power failure.
  • Fail Secure (FSE): The strike holds the latch and keeps the door locked when power is lost. This is appropriate for security-sensitive openings where maintaining the locked state during a power failure is required.

To identify the mode on an installed 5100: if the door opens freely when the power supply is disconnected, it is fail safe. If the door remains locked when power is disconnected, it is fail secure.

When troubleshooting a 5100 that appears non-functional, confirm the fail mode before concluding there is a hardware fault. A fail-secure strike with no power at the strike will remain locked - which is correct operation, not a failure. A fail-safe strike with no power will release - also correct. The fault is only confirmed when the strike does not behave consistently with its configured fail mode.

 

Is the Von Duprin 5100 Fire Rated?

No. The Von Duprin 5100 electric strike is not listed for fire-rated door assemblies. It cannot be installed on a fire-rated opening as the primary latching mechanism.

If the door assembly carries a fire rating, the 5100 is not the correct specification. The Von Duprin 6200 or 6300 Series electric strikes carry UL fire-exit hardware listing and are appropriate for fire-rated door assemblies where electric strike hardware is required.

Before installing or replacing an electric strike on any commercial door, confirm the fire rating of the door assembly. A fire-rated door with a non-rated electric strike installed as the latch mechanism creates a code compliance gap that may be identified during AHJ inspection. For fire door hardware requirements and what listings apply to fire-rated assemblies, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Common Von Duprin 5100 Electric Strike Problems

Most 5100 field failures are diagnosable without special equipment. The following are the most common problems and their most likely causes:

Strike Clicks But Keeper Does Not Move

The solenoid is activating but the mechanical release is not functioning. This indicates a solenoid assembly failure or a mechanical jam in the keeper mechanism. Check the keeper for physical obstructions first. If the keeper is free but not retracting, the solenoid kit (050034) is the likely replacement part.

 

Strike Does Not Respond to Power

Verify power at the strike terminals before concluding hardware failure. Measure voltage at the strike with a multimeter. If the correct DC voltage is present at the strike and there is no solenoid activation at all, the solenoid has failed and needs replacement (050034). If no voltage is present, the fault is upstream in the power supply or wiring, not in the strike itself.

 

Strike Works in One Door Handing But Not the Other

This is almost always caused by AC power being applied to the strike without a rectifier. The 5100 solenoid is designed for DC power. AC power can cause directional behavior because the solenoid coil responds asymmetrically to alternating current polarity. Install the Von Duprin SO12 or SO24 rectifier kit to convert AC to DC before the strike.

 

Door Does Not Latch When Strike Is Powered

Confirm the fail mode configured on the strike. In fail-safe mode, the door unlatches when power is present. If the strike is wired in a normally-energized configuration on a fail-safe unit, the door will remain unlatched whenever the system is powered. Review the system design to confirm that the power control logic matches the configured fail mode.

 

Von Duprin 5100 vs 6200: Which Electric Strike Is Right?

The 5100 and 6200 are both Von Duprin electric strikes, but they serve different applications. Understanding the key differences prevents wrong-product orders.

  • Fire rating: The 5100 is not fire rated. The 6200 carries UL fire-exit hardware listing. If the door is fire-rated, the 6200 is the correct specification.
  • Lock compatibility: The 5100 works with cylindrical locks and deadlatches only. The 6200 also works with mortise locks and rim exit devices.
  • Construction grade: The 5100 is medium-duty. The 6200 is heavy-duty stainless steel for high-cycle institutional applications.

If the opening now requires fire-rated hardware or mortise lock compatibility, specify the 6200 rather than a like-for-like 5100 replacement. Browse the 6100 series and 6300 series parts catalogs at SecurityParts.com for comparison.

 

How to Choose the Correct Von Duprin 5100 Replacement Part

Follow this sequence before placing any 5100 parts order:

  1. Confirm the device is a 5100. The model number is stamped on the strike housing. If the model number starts with 5100, you are in the right series. If it starts with 6100, 6200, or 6300, the parts are different and not interchangeable.
  2. Identify the failing component by symptom. No response to power: solenoid (050034). Damaged faceplate: 050031. Missing or corroded mounting hardware: PKGMTG.1004 (standard) or PKGMTG.1005 (black). Stripped or missing fasteners: PKGSCR.1003 (standard) or PKGSCR.1004 (black).
  3. Confirm the finish. Standard finish parts (050031, PKGMTG.1004, PKGSCR.1003) and black finish parts (PKGMTG.1005, PKGSCR.1004) are separate SKUs. Ordering the wrong finish results in a visible mismatch on the frame.
  4. Verify power supply before ordering a solenoid. A solenoid that fails because of an AC power input issue without a rectifier will fail again after replacement if the wiring is not corrected. Confirm DC voltage is present at the strike before concluding solenoid failure.
  5. Call before ordering if unsure. The SecurityParts.com team is available at 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility confirmation. This prevents returns and keeps the opening in service.

Browse all six OEM 5100 parts at the 5100 series parts catalog. For the full Von Duprin parts catalog, see securityparts.com/von-duprin. For OEM sourcing guidance, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. Contact the team directly at the SecurityParts.com contact page.

 

About the Author

This guide is published by the commercial door hardware team at SecurityParts.com, a supplier of OEM Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex parts since 2001. All part numbers, voltage specifications, compatibility details, and product descriptions are verified against live SecurityParts.com product pages and official Von Duprin documentation. For Von Duprin 5100 electric strike parts and pre-order compatibility support, call 845-935-0301 or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page.

 

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts